394 - RFQ Document - Thermo Vapour Re Compressor - R0 PDF

IPS-MEHTALIA PVT. LTD.
Consulting Engineers • Construction Management • Commissioning & Qualification

B101-109, 1st Floor, Kailash Vaibhav Industrial Complex, Vikhroli (W), Mumbai – 400 079
DO CU ME NT N O. IPS -M B D 18 019 - M E- 394
RFQ DOCUMENT
FOR
THERMO VAPOUR RE COMPRESSOR

( TVR )
(TAG NO. E-3021.)
(RFQ NO ---IPS-18019-ME-394)
Project Elephant
0 Sept 30,19 Issued For Enquiry PC SS MY

Rev Date Description Made by Chkd by App by
Entire Specification SPECIFICATION ISSUED FOR
Issued this Revision In-house Review and replies Purchase
Revised Pages Only Client Approval Construction
Issued this Revision Enquiry Engineering
This document has been prepared for the above project or named part thereof and should not be relied upon or used for any other project without prior written consent
from IPS- Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd.. IPS- Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. accepts no responsibility or liability for the consequence of this document being used for a purpose other than the
purposes for which it was commissioned. Any person using or relying on the document for such other purpose agrees, and will by such use or reliance be taken to
confirm his agreement to indemnify IPS- Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd for all loss or damage resulting there from. IPS- Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. accepts no responsibility or liability for
this document to any party other than the person by whom it was commissioned.
IPS-MEHTALIA PVT. LTD. Client Perstorp
B101-109, Kailash Vaibhav Ind. Complex, Vikhroli (W), Mumbai – 400 079 Project No MBD18019
RFQ for Thermo Vapour Re
Document Title Made / App PC/MY
Compressor
Document No. IPS-MBD18019-ME-394 Rev R0
Date Sept 30, 19 Page 2 of 63
Index
Instructions to Bidders .......................................................................................................................... 3
Appendix 1: Perstorp Vendor Policy ................................................................................................ 17
Appendix 2: Acknowledgement Letter ............................................................................................ 22
Appendix 3: Purchase Order Documents ........................................................................................ 24
Appendix 4: Form of pre bid queries ............................................................................................... 39
Appendix 5: Overview of the bid contents ..................................................................................... 40
Appendix 6: Form of binding bid letter ........................................................................................... 41
Appendix 7: Deviations and exceptions .......................................................................................... 43
Exhibit A: Presentation of the Bidder .............................................................................................. 44
Exhibit B: Technical offer ................................................................................................................... 53
Exhibit C: Financial Offer .................................................................................................................. 56
Exhibit D: Adm. and org. info ........................................................................................................... 59
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Instructions to Bidders
1.0 Introduction
The Perstorp group is a world leader in several sectors of the specialty chemicals market for a
wide variety of industries and applications. The Perstorp group has multiple manufacturing
units in Asia, Europe and North America. The specialty chemicals Perstorp group produces
are added to a range of products used every day at home, work or leisure. The customers of
Perstorp group constitute organizations in coatings, plastic processing and automotive
industries as also the construction and agricultural sector, and so on and so forth.
As a part of its business requirement in India, Perstorp Industries India Private Limited (the
“Owner”) intends to set up a greenfield project being a new plant for manufacturing of
speciality chemicals at Saykha Industrial Estate in Bharuch, in the state of Gujarat, India
(“Project” and “Plant”).
The Owner has appointed IPS-Mehtalia Private Limited (“IPS-Mehtalia”) as “Owner’s

Representative” for the Project with authority and power to act and take decisions on all the
matters related to the procurement documents and for taking various actions in relation to
the entire procurement process (“Request For Quotation Process” or “RFQ Process” )
including inviting binding bids (“Binding Bids or just “Bids”) from identified bidders
(“Bidders”), under these Instructions to Bidders and the documents referred to herein (“RFQ
Documents”), who have long standing reputation and high level expertise in {Supply Of
Equipment} (“Equipment”) and related services as more particularly described in the
Purchase Order Documents and are technically /commercially competent to participate in
bidding for {Supply Of Equipment} and related services as more particularly described in the
Purchase Order Documents required in the Project. The Owner’s Representative will
undertake the activities involved in the RFQ Process, including the evaluation of Bids,
however the final decision on shortlisting the Bids and selection of the successful Bid shall be
that of the Owner.
Upon receipt of the RFQ Documents, each Bidder should sign and return the
Acknowledgement Letter enclosed hereto as Appendix 2 (which will also be for the benefit of
the Owner) and confirm to the Perstorp Vendor Policy Appendix 1 enclosed hereto.
1.1 The Project Details and Location are Provided Below
1. Client / Owner : Perstorp Industries India Private Ltd

2. Project : Elephant
3. Owners representative : IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd.
Plot No T/49 to T/54 at village Sayakha,
4. Location :
Gujarat, India
5. Latitude : 21.785481º(N)
6. Longitude : 78.805924º(E)
7. Min. dry bulb temperature : 11.5 ºC
8. Max. dry bulb temperature : 41.5 ºC
9. Min. wet bulb temperature : 8.99 ºC
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
10. Max. wet bulb temperature : 28.33 ºC

11. Min. RH : 38%
12. Max. RH : 73%
13. Site elevation (Above sea level) : 8.887m.
14. Basic wind speed : 44 Mtr/Sec
15. Nearest city : Bharuch
16. Nearest railway station : Bharuch 30 KM
17. Nearest airport : Vadodara 100 KM
18. Nearest port : Dahej
1.2 Broad Scope
The Scope of Supply to be carried out under the Purchase Order Documents shall consist of
the various items as generally described in the Scope of Supply as well as in the manner
described in the Purchase Order Documents. The Scope of Supply and all parts thereof must
be fully compatible in relation to other functions and parts of the Project and be able to
interplay with such other functions and parts so that the Equipment will properly perform
the required functions and be fit for the intended purpose.
1.3 Permit Status of the Project
Currently, the following regulatory and statutory approvals in relation to the Project have
been obtained by the Owner:
(i) Plot possession from GIDC.

(ii) Environmental clearance
Further, the following regulatory and statutory approvals in relation to the Project are in the
process of being applied for by the Owner / applications have been made by the Owner to
the concerned authorities in this regard:
(i) Construction power

(ii) Consent to permanent establishment
1.4 Structure of the Purchase Order Documents
1.4.1 The Purchase Order for the Scope of Supply and other matters as set out in the Purchaser Order
(drafts of which as annexed to these Instructions to Bidders) will be binding and come into effect
only when the Owner and the successful Bidder execute the Purchase Order (as per the
procedure specified in the Purchaser Order) as finally developed through the Request For
Quotation (RFQ) Process (and not by any other form of submission of, accepting or selecting the
Bid(s) under these Instructions to Bidders). Other than the undertakings by the Bidders under
separate Non-Disclosure Undertakings executed by the Bidders and specific obligations on the
Bidders as set out in the Instructions to Bidders, no legal obligations and rights are created by
virtue of these Instructions to Bidders, invitation, submission and acceptance of Bids, RFQ
Process set out under these Instructions to Bidders including shortlisting / selection of the
successful Bidder. Accordingly, these Instructions to Bidders should not be construed as an
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
invitation to offer or an offer from the Owner / Owner’s Representative and these Instructions to
Bidders are for the purposes of collection of Binding Bids to compare and evaluate all the
Bidders participating in the RFQ Process as per clause 9 and select the successful Bidder and
shall be the basis for discussions and negotiations leading to execution of the Purchase Order (if
so decided by the Owner).
1.4.2 The Purchase Order Documents consists of (i) Purchase Order (ii) Scope of Supply with technical
requirements (“Scope of Supply”); (iii) Special Conditions; (iv) General Conditions of Purchase;
(v) Bill Of Material; (vi) Delivery Schedule with dispatch instructions (“Delivery Schedule”)(
Transport & Transit Insurance shall be in PERSTORP Scope.); (vii) Drawings and Documents;
(viii) Codes and Standards; and (ix) Safety Manual as well as any other documents listed in the
Purchase Order Documents including any amendments/modifications agreed in writing
between the Parties after execution of Purchase Order . The Purchase Order Documents (when
executed and signed between the Owner and the successful Bidder) represent the entire
integrated agreement and understanding between the parties thereto with respect to the subject
matter contained in the Purchase Order Documents and the Purchase Order Documents will
supersede all prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral including
the Instructions to Bidders and submitted Bids. The drafts of the Purchase Order Documents are
attached in Appendices 3.1 – 3.9 hereto.
The documents forming the Purchase Order Documents are complementary to one another,
to be taken mutually explanatory of one another and should be read harmoniously and what
is required by any of the documents forming the Purchase Order Documents shall be as fully
and effectually binding on the Parties as if the same is required by all other documents
forming the Purchase Order Documents; but in the event of conflict, difference,
contradiction, discrepancy between documents referred to in Clause 1.4.2 above, the t the
order of priority and precedence shall be as follows: (i) Purchase Order ; (ii) Scope of Supply;
(iii) Special Conditions; (iv) General Conditions Of Purchase;(v) Priced Bill Of Material ; (vi)
Delivery Schedule; (vii) Drawings and Documents; (viii) Codes and Standards; and (ix) Safety
Manual so that e.g.. in the event of a conflict or contradiction between the provisions of the
Purchase Order and the General Conditions of Purchase, the relevant provisions of the
Purchase Order shall prevail, and in the event of a conflict between the provisions of the
Scope of Supply and the Drawings and Documents , the relevant provisions of the Scope of
Supply shall prevail. It is further clarified, and notwithstanding anything to the contrary
contained in this Clause 1.4.2, in the event of a conflict between the provisions of the Safety
Manual, and the other safety, work/human resources environment and health related
provisions contained in the Purchase Order Documents or under Applicable Laws, the
provisions which enforce stricter and safer measures shall be implemented.
1.4.3 In these Instructions to Bidders and the Purchase Order Documents, unless the context otherwise
requires and unless specifically defined, the capitalized words and expressions used shall have
the meanings ascribed to them in Clause 2 (Definitions, Interpretations and Entire Agreement) of
General Conditions Of Purchase
2.0 Narrative Description of the Purchase Order Documents
2.1 These Instructions to Bidders including the enquiry thereunder are directed to Bidders who
have been specifically invited and who have declared their willingness to participate and
follow the applicable rules set out in these Instructions to Bidders including the requirements
on confidentiality.(as per the Non-Disclosure Undertaking executed by such Bidders).
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
2.2 Brief Description of the Purchase Order Documents
The requirements with respect to the Scope of Supply are explicitly provided under the
Purchase Order Documents and the Purchase Order Documents is the basis on which Scope
of Supply would be undertaken and completed by the Bidder, and will govern the inter se
relationship, rights and obligations between the Owner and the successful Bidder. The
Purchase Order Documents are enclosed with these Instructions to Bidders as Appendices 3.1
– 3.9 in order for the Bidders to review the same and prepare and submit their Bids having
taken into consideration the Purchase Order Documents. The Purchase Order Documents are
to be considered as an integral part to these Instructions to Bidders. It is a must for the
Bidders to have reviewed the Purchase Order Documents in detail in order to submit their
Bids. A brief and non-exhaustive description of the Purchase Order Documents are set out
below:
(a) Purchase Order
This is the main Purchase Order Document defining all the Purchase Order Documents and
addressing a number of principle aspects. The Purchase Order contains central provisions
including on: (i) Scope of Supply, (ii) lump sum Total Order Value payment of which is
broken down into milestone payments, (iii) delivery terms including dispatch instructions
including the Vendor achieving supply completion not later than 6 months from the Effective
Date (as defined in the Purchase Order), installation and commissioning schedule and
associated scheme of liquidated damages for delays, (iv) financial securities, etc.
The successful Bidder, upon execution of the Purchase Order, shall strictly and diligently
complete the Scope of Supply in accordance with its roles and responsibilities, and in
adherence with the timelines, in each case as provided for under the Delivery Schedule
including the dispatch instructions.
(b) Scope of Supply with technical requirements :
The Scope of Supply document is intended to set out the Equipment to be supplied and
installed and includes (i) vendors engineering and design responsibility including the
ultimate fitness to purpose responsibility, (ii) manufacturing, (iii) factory acceptance test
program, (iv) supply and delivery of goods, (v) transport and in transport insurance, (This
Shall be in PERSTORP Scope) (iv) supervision of erection and commissioning and services.
Technical requirements are gathered including (i) technical specification (ii) process data
sheets, (iii) material data sheets, (iv) quality control, inspection and test measures, etc.
(c) Special Conditions:
The special conditions are intended to supplement the specific terms of the Purchase Order
which includes specially agreed terms with Bidders.
(d) General Conditions of Purchase :-
The General Conditions of Purchase are intended to supplement the central provisions in the
Purchase Order particularly in a procedural, legal and formal context. The provisions in the
General Conditions of Purchase cover, inter alia, requirements related to the Scope of Supply,
manufacturing, inspections and tests, invoicing procedures, defects liability obligations,
certain compliance aspects and concepts such as risk allocation, insurances, force majeure,
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
termination provisions, dispute resolution etc.
For the purpose of facilitating parallel works, the Owner will arrange and pay for a
comprehensive Project insurance covering loss of, and damage to all material and equipment
at the Site to be incorporated into the Plant including work in progress. The insurance will
also cover liability for damage to property and injuries to third parties adjacent to the Site
(but not injuries to the employees of the insured parties). All contractors who will be engaged
by the Owner to perform work at the Site will be co-insured under the Project insurance and
each insured must comply with the terms of the Project insurance policy.
The Project insurance policy wording will be presented to the successful Bidder in connection
with the process of preparing for Purchase Order signing. At the same time procedural rules
with respect to compliance with the Project insurance policy will be introduced in the General
Conditions of Purchase.
All bidders are encouraged to carefully read the Project insurance details as well as the
requirement on supplementary insurance appearing in the General Conditions of Purchase
and form an opinion if and to what extent they need additional insurance coverage and to
avoid duplication of premium costs.
(e) Bill Of Material:
A full price break-down of the Total Order Value (“Bill Of Material”) and list of unit rates
(“Unit Rates”) comprising of components such as supervision of erection and commissioning
based on per man day charges and prices of standard pieces of equipment and material,
spares with unit prices will be set out in this Purchaser Order Document.
(f) Delivery Schedule with dispatch instructions
Delivery Schedule shall include delivery milestones including drawings/documents

submission, manufacturing lead time, inspection schedule, dispatch duration and timing,
point of delivery receipt with dispatch instructions.
(g) Drawings and Documents –
This Purchase Order Document will set out the design, plans (including the inspection and
test plans), reports, calculations, drawings (including Equipment general arrangement
drawings, cross sectional drawings), analysis, patterns, specifications, construction and
fabrication methods, lists, database certificates, test results, installation description, as built
drawings, operating and maintenance manuals, information, documents and the other
technical documentation to be supplied by the successful Bidder under the executed Purchase
Order Documents (whether recorded in writing or on electronic storage media) including the
as-built Drawing and Documents, and within the timeline prescribed in the Delivery
Schedule and Scope of Supply. The successful Bidder under the executed Purchase Order
Documents shall take the responsibility for the design of the Equipment / Goods including
the ultimate fitness to purpose responsibility as per the Scope of Supply in the manner more
particularly contained in the Purchase Order Documents.
(h) Codes and Standards:
Codes are intended to set forth engineering requirements deemed necessary for safe design
and construction of Equipment. Standards are intended to provide efficient engineering
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
practices and which contain mandatory requirements for Equipment.
(i) Safety Manual
In addition to the requirements under Applicable Laws and the Purchase Order Documents,
the environmental (work/human resources environment), health and safety guidelines of the
Owner, as contained in the Safety Manual, will need to be adhered to in the implementation
of the Scope of Supply. In the event of a conflict between the provisions of the Safety Manual,
and the other safety, work/human resources environment and health related provisions
contained in the Purchase Order Documents or under Applicable Laws, the provisions which
enforce stricter and safer measures shall be implemented.
2.3 Clarification / Amendments
2.3.1 The Bidder shall examine these Instructions to Bidders and the attached drafts of the Purchase
Order Documents thoroughly. The Bidder requiring any clarifications on these Instructions to
Bidders and attached Purchase Order Documents may notify the Owner’s Representative in
writing at least two (2) working days prior the date of Pre Bid meeting as per format of Pre bid
Queries which are attached as Appendix [4] hereto.
2.3.2 At any time prior to the date for submission of Bids, the Owner/Owner’s Representative may,
for any reason whether at its own initiative or in response to a clarification requested by
prospective Bidders, modify these Instructions to Bidders and the Purchase Order Documents by
amendments or clarifications.
1. The amendment / clarifications above shall be deemed to be part of these Instructions to

Bidders and the Purchase Order Documents (as the case may be), and shall be notified by
email to all prospective Bidders who have been issued the Instruction to Bidders, and
shall be binding on them. Each Bidder shall be required to acknowledge receipt of any
such amendment(s) / clarification(s).
2. In order to provide time to prospective Bidders to take into account such amendment(s) /
clarifications in preparing their Bids, Owner may, at its discretion, extend the date for the
submission of Bids.
3.0 The Request for Quotation Process
The enquiry contained in this Instruction to Bidders is to select the successful Bidder who, if
so decided by the Owner, shall execute the Purchase Order with Owner.
The RFQ Process for entering into the Purchase Order may involve the following stepwise
process or any of the steps as considered appropriate by the Owner:
(a) Pre-bid meetings -Not Applicable
(b) Binding Bids submission by Date - __16-10-2019________ Time - __5.00 PM__________;
(c) Possible post bid meetings shall be held and the date (if applicable) shall be
communicated via email;
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
(d) Possible request for submission of revised binding bids and time line shall (if applicable)
be communicated via email;
(e) Only fully compliant bidders to all technical requirements shall be shortlisted for the
following the evaluation set forth below ;
(f) negotiation with the shortlisted Bidders who have submitted the most competitive
binding bids for the purpose of cost efficiency and removal of ambiguities;
(g) incorporation of designated input from the successful Bid into the Purchase Order
Documents and signing of the Purchase Order with the successful Bidder; and
(h) After signing of Purchase Order with successful Bidder all the unsuccessful Bidders will
be informed via email.
4.0 Site Location
4.1 Location of Site – Plot No – T-49 to T-54 At Sayakha Village, Bharuch District Gujrat, India.
4.2 All queries and clarifications that any Bidder has in relation to the RFQ Process / the
Purchase Order Documents should only be sought out in writing from the single focal point
set out below. The Owner’s Representative’s designated person can be reached during
normal working hours at the e-mail address provided below and the Owner’s
Representative’s designated person should be provided reasonable time to respond to such
queries and providing such clarifications. All queries should be directed to:
elephant.contracts@ips-mehtalia.com ; contracts.elephant@perstorp.com
4.3 Any query / clarification which the Owner’s Representative believes will benefit all of the
Bidders will be communicated to all the Bidders.
4.4 The provisions of paragraph 2.3 (Clarification / Amendment) is deemed to be repeated under
this section as well.
4.5 Any effort by a Bidder to negatively or unfairly influence the Owner / Owner’s
Representative in the Owner’s decision in respect of RFQ Process including the Bid
evaluation will result in the rejection of the concerned Bidder’s bid.
4.6 It is observed that many Bidders indulge in trading in Purchase Order by entering into
undisclosed back-to-back arrangements for the whole or a substantial portion of a Vendors’
obligations under the Purchase Order Documents. Consequently, if a Bidder proposes to
enter into any such arrangements upon execution of the Purchase Order or has in place any
such arrangements which will become operative upon the execution of the Purchase Order,
the Bidder must make complete disclosure upfront of such arrangement or proposed
arrangement in its Bid submission under the terms of these Instructions to Bidders.
Acceptance or rejection otherwise of such arrangement will be under the discretion of the
Owner.
4.7 If the existence of such an undisclosed arrangement is reasonably apprehended by the

Owner/ Owner’s Representative in the case of a Bidder, the Owner may reject such Bidder’s
Bid as not responsive.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
4.8 If such an undisclosed arrangement is discovered after the execution of the Purchase Order,
such arrangement(s) shall be deemed to constitute an un-authorized assignment of the
Purchase Order and also a breach of the Purchase Order and a ground of termination
pursuant to the provisions of termination under the Purchase Order Documents.
4.9 In the event of collusion between two or more Bidders or any secret or illegal cooperation or
conspiracy between them in order to submit the Bids hereunder, such collusion shall be
deemed to constitute fraud and the Owner may reject such Bidders’ Bids. The Owner may
also seek indemnification for all losses suffered (including costs and expenses incurred by it
in this RFQ Process and preparation of Purchase Order Documents) from such colluding
Bidders.
5.0 Contents of the Binding Bid
The Binding Bid to be submitted pursuant to these Instructions to Bidders shall be for the
whole Scope of Supply (as provided under the RFQ Documents). Only those Bidders who are
fully compliant for the Scope of Supply and quoted for the complete Scope of Supply
including supplies/services as contained in the RFQ Documents shall be considered for
further evaluation.
All signatures in Bid shall be by the Bidder or its authorized signatory and shall be
accompanied by the date. In addition, all pages of Bids shall be initialed at lower right hand
corner by the Bidder or its authorized signatory. The Bid should be in English language, and
the figures shall be denoted numerically as well as in words.
The Binding Bid should be signed and submitted pursuant to the form of Binding Bid Letter
appearing as Appendix 6 hereto together with the exhibits containing the information
requested under parts A-D as set forth below pursuant to the forms attached hereto. It is
clarified that the Bidders should for the purposes of submission of the Binding Bid only
provide the information requested below and no additional information.
5.1 Part A – Corporate and financial status
(a) Exhibit A1: -Information about the “Similar Works / Scope of Supply” order executed for
last three years with order value;
(b) Exhibit A2 :-Audited financial statements which includes balance sheets, profit & loss
statement (for last 3 financial years) i.e. 2016-17, 2017-18, 2018-19;
(c) Exhibit A3 :-Turnover for last three financial year i.e. 2016-17,2017-18, 2018-19;
(d) Exhibit A4 :-Equity/Net worth for year 2018-19;
(e) Exhibit A5:- Solvency certificate of equal bid price issued by a Nationalized Bank issued
at a date which is within a period of one year prior to the Bid submission date;
(f) Exhibit A6:- Power of Attorney / Board Resolution or equivalent document confirming
the Bidder’s ability to submit the Bid, execute the Scope of Supply and authorizing the
Bidder’s representatives to negotiate and execute all relevant documents required in
connection with the procurement process including the Purchase Order Documents;
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
(g) Exhibit A7 :-Declaration that the Bidder, its employees, directors, officers, contractors,
representative and agents, have at all times acted in compliance with all applicable anti –
corruption and anti – monetary laundering laws, sanctions measures or embargos and
will not undertake any actions pursuant to the Bid or in the performance of the Purchase
Order Documents (if so executed by such Bidder) which will violate such laws; and
(h) Exhibit A8:- Presentation of the Bidder’s currently used management systems including
quality management system, risk management system and document/data management
systems.
5.2 Part B -Technical offer
The Bidder should describe the key-factors of the Bidder’s intended manufacturing methods
for ensuring compliance with all the design, drawing and technical requirements along with
any value engineering proposals to the RFQ Documents in the format prescribed under
Exhibit B1 (manufacturing methods) and Exhibit B2 (value engineering proposal)
respectively.
5.3 Part C –Financial Offer
The Bidder is expected to quote the Total Order Value with volume / quantity and unit rates
in the Bill Of Material and Unit Rates format (which are provided in Exhibit C1 and Exhibit
C2), after careful analysis of cost involved for the completions of Scope of Supply,
considering all specifications, constraints and conditions under the Purchase Order
Documents. This will avoid loss of profit or gain, in case of curtailment or change of
specification or volume / quantity for any item. In case it is noticed that the volume /
quantity or unit rates for any item, quoted by the Bidder are unusually high or unusually low
it will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the Bid unless the Owner /Owner’s
Representative is convinced about the reasonableness of the volume / quantity or unit rates
on scrutiny of the analysis for such volume / quantity or unit rates to be furnished by the
Bidder on demand.
Submission shall be in Exhibit C1 for Bill Of Material and Exhibit C2 for list of unit rates and
prices (“Unit Rates”) comprising of components such as supervision of erection and
commissioning based on per man day charges and, prices of standard pieces of equipment
and material, spares with unit prices.
5.4 Part D –Administrative and organisational information
(a) Exhibit D1: Details of present commitments

(b) Exhibit D2: Details of past performance
(c) Exhibit D3: Proposed safety requirements with HSE statistics
(d) Exhibit D4 Proposed production programme:
It is clarified that the Bidders should for the purposes of submission of the Binding Bid only
provide the aforementioned information pursuant to the forms attached hereto.
6.0 Submission of the Binding Bid
6.1 The duly signed Binding Bid letter together with the information as per the requirements
under Part A, B and D of paragraph 6 above and the scanned executed documents thereunder
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
shall all be submitted by email to the Owner’s Representative’s designated representative as

follows:
To: elephant.contracts@ips-mehtalia.com ; contracts.elephant@perstorp.com
Part C (Financial Offer) shall submitted in sealed envelope (hard copy) only and shall be
addressed as per below: -
Kind Attn : Mr. Naveen Virmani

IPS- Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd.
Unit-B 101-109 | 1st Floor
Kaikash Vaibhav Industrial Complex | Park Site
Vikhroli (W) | Mumbai – 400 079
Tel: 022 67209717 Ext. 175
6.2 Deadlines for submission of Bids
(a) The Binding Bids must be received on or before the date and time as specified in clause 3.
(b) The Owner / Owner’s Representative may, at its discretion, extend the date and / or time
for the submission of Bids by notifying the Bidders, in which case the date and / or time
for submission of Bids, will thereafter be subject to the date and / or time, as extended.
6.3 Late Bids:
Any Bid received by the aforementioned persons after the date and time for submission of
Bids as stated herein above (including any extension(s) hereof) may be declared “Late” and
rejected and returned unopened to the Bidder.
6.4 No Bid may be modified subsequent to the deadline for submission of Bids.
6.5 All corrections and alterations to the Bid submissions made by the Bidder prior to the latest
date for submission of Bids shall only be with the prior consent of the Owner’s
Representative and the Owner’s Representative should be provided with reasons as to why
such corrections and alterations are required. No corrections and alterations will be allowed
subsequent to the deadline for submission of the Bids.
6.6 Financial Offer in soft copies (via email) shall be submitted after financial offer opening (hard
copies) and upon confirmation from Owner’s Representative.
7.0 Status of Binding Bids
7.1 The Owner’s Representative will examine the Bids to determine firstly whether they are
complete, secondly whether any computational errors have been made, thirdly whether the
Bid submission documents have been properly signed (as applicable), and lastly whether the
Bids are generally in order.
7.2 Arithmetical errors will be rectified on the following basis:
(a) If there is a discrepancy between the unit price and the total price per item (as stated in
the Bill Of Material and Unit Rates which are provided in Exhibit C1 and Exhibit C2) that
is obtained by multiplying the unit price and quantity, the unit price shall prevail and the
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
total price per item will be corrected.
(b) If there is a discrepancy between the total price of Scope of Supply i.e., the Total Order
Value and the sum of the total price per item (arrived at by multiplying the unit rate per
item and the quantity as stated in the Bill Of Material and Unit Rates which are provided
in Exhibit C1 and Exhibit C2), the sum of the total price per item shall prevail and the
Total Order Value will be corrected.
7.3 Prior to the detailed evaluation of the Binding Bid, the Owner’s Representative will
determine the substantial responsiveness of each Bid to the RFQ Documents including
production capability and acceptable quality of the services / materials and expertise offered
by the Bidder. A substantially responsive Bid is one, which gives full compliance to all the
terms and conditions of the RFQ Documents without material deviation
7.4 A Bid determined as not substantially responsive may be rejected by the Owner’s
Representative and may not subsequently be made responsive by the Bidder by correction of
the non-conformity, unless determined otherwise by the Owner’s Representative in its sole
discretion.
8.0 Evaluation and Comparison of Bids
8.1 The Owner’s Representative will evaluate and compare only the Bids determined to be
substantially responsive in accordance with criteria set out in paragraph [8.3] herein below.
8.2 The evaluation will be based on fairness, non-discrimination and impartiality.
8.3 In evaluating the Bids, the following criteria will be used (without any particular order of
priority): (a) the Financial Offer ,(b) the technical ability, capability and experience for
attaining the technical requirements, (c) the corporate and financial status, and (d) the
administrative and organisational ability, capability and experience for attaining timeliness
and compliance. The evaluation result will be presented to the Owner who will eventually
decide on the ranking and possible short-listing of the Bidders at its own discretion.
8.4 In evaluating the Bids, the Owner’s Representative will determine for each Bid, the Financial
Offer by adjusting the Financial Offer as follows:
(a) making any correction for errors pursuant to paragraph [7.2] herein above;
(b) Making appropriate adjustments to reflect discounts or other price modifications offered
in accordance with Binding Bid submission under these Instructions to Bidders.
8.5 The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to accept or reject any alternative Bid
modifying / substituting any item as set out in the Bill Of Material and Unit Rates which are
provided in Exhibit C1 and Exhibit C2.
8.6 If any Bid is seriously unbalanced in relation to the Owner’s Representative’s estimate of the
cost of work to be performed under the Purchase Order Documents, the Owner may require
the concerned Bidder to produce detailed price analysis for any or all items of the Bill Of
Material and Unit Rates which are provided in Exhibit C1 and Exhibit C2, to demonstrate the
internal consistency of those prices with the implementation/construction methods and
schedule proposed by the Bidder.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
8.7 Requirement of submission of analysis of the inconsistencies / discrepancies as envisaged

under paragraph 8.6 (if any) from the Bidder should be compiled and submitted to the
Owner’s Representative within the stipulated time fixed by the Owner’s Representative
failing which the Bid would be treated as un-responsive and stand liable to be rejected.
8.8 The Binding Bids received will be analysed by the Owner / Owner’s Representative to select
the successful Bidder/s and basis for discussions and negotiations leading to execution of the
Purchase Order (if so decided by the Owner in its sole discretions). Selection of the successful
Bidder does not mean entering into binding commitments unless the Purchase Order is
executed.
9.0 Rules for Participation and Disclaimer
9.1 It is clarified that the Bidders will bear all costs associated with the participation in the RFQ
Process, pursuant to these Instructions to Bidders. Under no circumstances will the Owner /
Owner’s Representative accept any liability to compensate the Bidders for costs incurred or
lost business opportunities. The evaluation and selection process will be based on the
Owner’s discretion and the Owner / Owner’s Representative shall not be liable to explain the
considerations behind its decisions. Acceptance of a Bid and formation of a Purchase Order is
subject to the signing by both Parties.
9.2 Stamp duty on the Purchase Order shall be borne by the Owner. The bank guarantees /
financial securities pursuant to the Purchase Order would be obtained by the Vendor at its
own costs and expenses.
9.3 Except as provided under paragraph 9.2 above, each Party shall bear its own costs for the
negotiation, preparation of all legal documentation, the entering into the Purchase Order, and
fees and costs of their professional advisors. The Vendor shall bear all the costs and expenses
in carrying out and completion of the Scope of Supply, and providing Defect Liability
Services under the Purchase Order Documents.
10.0 Preservation of Owner’s Rights
The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any Bid, to annul / discontinue / cancel the
procurement process at any given point in time (including after completion of the RFQ
Process and /or selection of the successful Bidder) and /or to reject all Bids at any given point
in time at its sole discretion, altogether re-commence the procurement process with new
bidders and/or any of the identified Bidders, in each case without thereby incurring any
liability to the affected Bidder(s) (whether on account of lost business opportunities,
transaction expenses or otherwise) or any obligation to inform the affected Bidder(s) of the
grounds of Owner’s action.
11.0 Confidentiality
By participating in the RFQ process, each Bidder acknowledges that it shall continue to
adhere to its obligations and duties towards the Owner under the Non-Disclosure
Undertaking .Notwithstanding the above, the Non-Disclosure Undertaking will also be
incorporated in the Purchase Order Documents to be executed with the successful Bidder
which will continue to be valid until the Term of such Purchase Order / Project completion
plus certain additional period post Term of such Purchase Order / Project completion as may
be specified in the Purchase Order Documents. It is clarified that the Non-Disclosure
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Undertaking will continue and be in force for the unsuccessful Bidders in accordance with its
terms.
12.0 Intellectual Property Rights
The Bidders recognize the Owner’s absolute right to the intellectual property (including any
technical or commercial secrets or know how) to be used in the execution of Purchase Order,
Scope of Supply and to the intellectual property in the information to be provided / provided
pursuant to these Instructions to Bidders; by participation in the RFQ Process, the Bidders
confirms and acknowledges that all intellectual property whether owned or licensed to/ by
the Owner in connection with this RFQ Process or in the execution of Scope of Supply
including related to the drawings, technical requirements and other material produced by the
Owner / Owner’s Representative or in any way connected with the Project including the
manufacturing processes proposed to be used in the proposed Project will exclusively belong
to the Owner, and the Bidders shall not use or divulge such intellectual property that they
may come across.
PLEASE NOTE THAT BID SUBMISSION SHALL NOT BE LATER THAN __16-10-
2019________
Enclosures:-
Appendix 1 – Perstorp Vendor Policy

Appendix 2 – Acknowledgement letter
Appendix 3 – Purchase Order Documents
Appendix 3.1 –Purchase Order
Appendix 3.2 –Scope of Supply with technical requirements
Appendix 3.3 –Special conditions
Appendix 3.4 –General conditions Of Purchase Appendix
Appendix 3.5 Bill Of Material
Appendix 3.6 - Delivery schedule with dispatch instruction
Appendix 3.7- Drawings and Documents
Appendix3.8 – Codes and Standards
Appendix3.9 – Safety Manual
Appendix 4 – Form of pre bid queries
Appendix 5 – Overview of the bid contents
Appendix 6 – Form of binding bid letter
Appendix 7 – Deviations and exceptions
Exhibit A - Presentation of the Bidder
Exhibit A1 – Similar scope of supply experience
Exhibit A2 – Audited financial statements
Exhibit A3 – Turn over
Exhibit A4 – Equity/ net worth
Exhibit A5 – Solvency certificate
Exhibit A6 – Power of Attorney
Exhibit A7 - Bidder’s declaration
Exhibit A8 – Management System (QMS,RISK,DMS)
Exhibit B - Technical offer
Exhibit B1 – Description of manufacturing methods
Exhibit B2 – Value engineering proposals
Exhibit C – Financial offer
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit C1 – Bill Of Material

Exhibit C2 – List of Unit rates
Exhibit D – Adm. and org. info
Exhibit D1: Details of present commitments
Exhibit D2: Details of past performance
Exhibit D3: Proposed safety requirements with HSE Statistics
Exhibit D4: Proposed Production program
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Appendix 1: Perstorp Vendor Policy
Perstorp’s unique success molecule consists of the Group’s three most important strengths, its
core values: focused innovation, reliability and responsibility. These core values in various
combinations pervade Perstorp’s working methods and solutions, and always create Winning
Formulas.
Perstorp regards the application of its core principles and its values of prime importance in
decisions to enter into or continue relationships with suppliers, contractors and customers
and to participate in joint ventures. Please read Annex 1 or visit our webpage
https://www.perstorp.com/en/Responsibility/Code_of_conduct/ for more information on
Perstorp`s core principles and values.
In light of the above, we appreciate receiving your confirmation by signing this document
that in doing business with Perstorp you comply with the following conditions:
 Your products and services meet high health, safety and environmental standards
(certifiable: ISO 9001:2008, 14001, OSHAS 18001);
 Your employees recruited, hired and promoted on the sole basis of suitability for their
job;
 Harassment of any kind and exploitation of child labor is prohibited (a child is 15 years or
younger); You will comply with the provisions of the Child and Adolescent Labour
(Prohibition and Regulation) Act, 1986 and other labour laws in relation to prohibition of
engagement of child labour and ‘adolescents’ (‘adolescents’ means a person who has
completed his fifteenth year of age but has not completed his eighteenth year).
 Bribery and any other form of unethical business practice is prohibited;
 All your business transactions with Perstorp are accurately, completely recorded, and
guarantee legal and fiscal compliance;
 You adhere to the laws and fundamental rights in your country, to (supra) national
export regulations and other laws and regulations that may apply; and in addition,
 The products that you sell to Perstorp are free of conflict minerals cassiterite, columbite-
tantalite, gold, wolframite and the derivatives tantalum, tin and tungsten originating
from the Democratic Republic of Congo or adjoining countries in accordance with the US
Securities Exchange Commission Rule of Conflict Minerals issued on August 22, 2012 and
any updates thereof.
You are kindly requested to sign the Vendor Policy at the bottom of this letter and to return
this letter to Perstorp.
Please inform us if, for any reason, you are not able to sign the declaration, in which case we
would like to discuss how we can ensure that the business between us does not breach these
specifications.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
To be signed by supplier:
Herewith I confirm that in doing business with Perstorp the below Company complies with
the above mentioned conditions.
Company
Name
Function
Date
Signature
Annex 1
In the spirit of the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD)
Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, the Perstorp Principles set out the core principles
and values that should underlie the conduct of all Perstorp companies in order to fulfill
Perstorp`s ambitions. In this respect the Perstorp Principles apply equally to our business
transactions throughout the world and to the individual behavior of employees in conducting
Perstorp's business:
1. Our business principles
Business ethics
Perstorp follows the laws and agreements in the countries where the company is active and
requires that suppliers and business partners also comply. Perstorp’s relations with business
partners shall be characterized by honesty and openness.
Open & honest communication
Perstorp encourages continuous communication with the company’s various interested

parties. All communication shall follow applicable legislation, regulations and norms.
Communication shall be transparent, honest and proactive. The CEO, CFO and heads of the
respective Business Group and Corporate Functions are the company’s spokespersons and
have the right to make statements on behalf of the Group. Other managers are spokespersons
for their respective areas of responsibility.
Accounting & reporting

All business transactions are recorded in accordance with the company’s accounting
principles and local legislation, and accounting shall in no way be misleading. Perstorp’s
financial accounting shall be open, truthful, relevant and understandable.
Customer relations
Perstorp shall always handle questions and any complaints from our customers in a fast,
efficient and correct way.
Suppliers
Current and potential suppliers shall be assessed based on the contents of Perstorp`s code of
conduct
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Community commitment
Perstorp shall be a good, responsible and appreciated member of the community in the
societies where we run our operations. This can mean involvement in community activities or
support for the community in other appropriate ways.
Conflicts of interest
All employees are expected to avoid situations in which their personal, financial or other
interests can come into conflict, or can be considered to come into conflict, with the
company’s interests. Should such a conflict arise, it must be reported at once to the immediate
manager.
Competition & cartels

All functions and employees must be aware of, and observe, all laws that concern
competition and not participate in any illegal anti-competitive cooperation. For detailed
instructions, see the Perstorp Competition policy.
Confidential information
Employees are not allowed to use their knowledge of the company, its products or business
transactions in contexts other than for the good of the company. Every employee must follow
the regulations on confidentiality of information, which is owned by the company and our
business partners, and is regulated by our Security policy.
Gifts & bribes

Perstorp shall not offer customers, potential customers, authorities or other business partners
any form or remuneration or reward that contravenes laws or good business practice.
Perstorp does not allow bribes in any form. Perstorp personnel shall not accept payment, gifts
or any other type of remuneration from third parties that in any way can influence, or be
considered to influence, their objectivity in business decisions.
Political affiliations
Perstorp takes a neutral position in terms of party politics and political candidates. The
Perstorp brand is not to be used to support political parties or candidates. Consequently, we
neither contribute to political parties or organizations, or to individual politicians.
2. Products & Environment
Resource management:
Perstorp’s products and production processes are designed so that energy and raw materials
are used in a resource-efficient way and that waste and residual products are minimized.
New products & processes

Environmental, health and safety aspects must always be considered during the development
of new products and processes. Perstorp shall always provide updated information on
products’ possible effects on health and the environment.
Precautionary principle:
Perstorp applies the precautionary principle by striving to avoid materials and methods that
can constitute an environmental or health risk when good alternatives are available. It is
Perstorp’s responsibility to supply customers/business partners with relevant information on
how products may/should be used and how, and for what, they should not be used.
Perstorp’s products shall live up to the agreed and legal norms, and be labelled with health
warnings and product safety and information markings.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Environmental reporting:
Perstorp regularly examines, follows up and reports environmental impact, with special
emphasis on evaluating the potential risks of current and future products and operations.
Perstorp works constantly to reduce negative effects on the environment in accordance with
the company’s commitment to sustainable development.
3. Working Conditions
Working environment
It is Perstorp’s responsibility to offer safe and physically and psychologically healthy working
conditions for all employees, and to forbid and take action against all types of harassment.
Non-discrimination & diversity

Perstorp recruits and treats its employees in such a way that no one is discriminated against
on grounds of gender, race, religion, age, disability, sexual orientation, nationality, political
opinion or social or ethnic origin. Equality and diversity in the workplace and in new
recruitment are encouraged within Perstorp.
Working hours & overtime

Local laws and agreements relating to working hours, overtime and overtime remuneration
shall apply. Salaries shall be paid regularly and follow the local laws and market situation.
All employees have at least the minimum right to locally legislated time off.
Training & further education

Perstorp shall strive to develop and enhance employees’ expertise so that they can, in the best
way possible, support the company’s current and future business activities.
Preventive health care

Perstorp supports the health of individual employees through preventive health care and
various fitness programs.
Zero tolerance for accidents

Perstorp shall maintain and develop an optimal health and safety standard at all locations
where the company is active and thereby minimize possible risks. Within Perstorp, zero
tolerance applies regarding workplace accidents and all other types of accident.
Use of alcohol or drugs

Perstorp expects that all employees carry out their work without being under the influence of
alcohol or drugs. Any use of alcohol or drugs that can affect employees’ work is forbidden.
4. Human Rights
Perstorp respects the individual and stands for justice, honesty, openness and trust, as well as
encouraging networking, participation and the use of personal initiative.
Child labour
Perstorp does not tolerate any form of child labor. The minimum age of employment within
Perstorp is regulated by the legislation of the respective country.
Forced or slave labour

Perstorp does not tolerate any form of forced labor or slave labor, or work carried out by
political prisoners or illegal workers.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Union activities
The freedom of association and the right to belong to a union, like the right to collective
bargaining and agreements, are respected within all parts of Perstorp.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Appendix 2: Acknowledgement Letter
Ref No. :
RFQ No. :
Date:
Address: M/s. IPS –Mehtalia Pvt Ltd

B101-109, KailashVaibhav Ind. Estate, Vikhroli (W), Mumbai – 400 079
Attention: Mr. Pramod J. Choudhari
Tel.: +91 22 67209717
Email: elephant.contracts@ips-mehtalia.com
Sub. :
Project:: Project “ELEPHANT”
Dear Sirs,
We hereby acknowledge receipt of a complete set of Instructions to Bidders and drafts of the
Purchase Order Documents (collectively referred to as “RFQ Documents”) along with
enclosures for subject works for our use in preparing the Bid. We undertake to comply with
the terms of, and our obligations as set out in the Instructions to Bidders and we undertake to
comply with the Perstorp Vendor Policy.
We undertake that the contents of the above RFQ Documents shall be kept confidential and
further that the drawings, specifications and documents shall not be transferred and that the
said documents are to be used only for the purpose for which they are intended.
We intend to Bid as requested for the subject Scope of Supply and furnish following details
with respect to our quoting office:
A) Contact Person at Head Office, If Any.
i) POSTAL ADDRESS : _______________________________________
ii) TELEPHONE NUMBER : _______________________________________
iii) MOBILE NUMBER : _______________________________________
iv) E-MAIL ADDRESS : _______________________________________
v) CONTACT PERSON : _______________________________________
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
B) Contact Person at Mumbai, If Any.
i) POSTAL ADDRESS : _______________________________________
_______________________________________
ii) TELEPHONE NUMBER : _______________________________________
iii) MOBILE NUMBER : _______________________________________
iv) E-MAIL ADDRESS : _______________________________________
v) CONTACT PERSON : _______________________________________
C) We are unable to bid for the reasons given below and we are returning the entire set
of RFQ Documents.
Reasons for non-submission of Bid:
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
COMPANY’S NAME : ____________________________________________
SIGNATURE : ____________________________________________
NAME : ____________________________________________
DESIGNATION : ____________________________________________
DATE : ____________________________________________
NOTE: Bidder is requested to furnish the details mentioned at (A) and (B) or (C) immediately
after receipt of RFQ Documents.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Appendix 3: Purchase Order Documents
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Appendix 3.1: Purchase Order
[To be stamped for appropriate amount]

MODEL FORM OF PURCHASE ORDER
Date__________ (“Effective Date”) PO No.___________________
Vendor name: _______________________________________ (“Vendor”)

Address: ______________________________________
Attn.: _________________
Project: The setting up and construction of a greenfield project being the Owner’s new plant
for manufacturing of speciality chemicals (“Plant”) at Saykha Industrial Estate in Bharuch, in
the state of Gujarat, India.
Subject: _______________
Dear Sirs,
With reference to our enquiry dated __________. Perstorp Industries India Private Limited
(“Owner”), is pleased to issue this Purchase Order with you the Vendor regarding
____________________.
(1) Purchase Order Documents
1.1. The following documents constitute, and shall be construed as an integral part of this
Purchase Order, and together with this Purchase Order will be referred to as the “Purchase
Order Documents”:
1.1.1. Scope of Supply with technical requirements (“Scope of Supply”);

1.1.2. Special Conditions;
1.1.3. General Conditions of Purchase;
1.1.4. Priced Bill Of Material;
1.1.5. Delivery Schedule with dispatch instructions (“Delivery Schedule”);
1.1.6. Drawings and Documents;
1.1.7. Codes and Standards;
1.1.8. Safety Manual,
as well as any other documents listed in the Purchase Order Documents including any
amendments/modifications agreed in writing between the Parties after execution of Purchase
Order.
1.2. The documents forming the Purchase Order Documents are complementary to one another,
to be taken mutually explanatory of one another and should be read harmoniously and what
is required by any of the Purchase Order Documents shall be as fully and effectually binding
on the Parties as if the same is required by all other Purchase Order Documents; but in the
event of any difference, contradiction, discrepancy in the documents listed above, the
documents will be given precedence in the numerical order specified above and shall
accordingly prevail so that e.g., in the event of a contradiction between the provisions of this
Purchase Order and the General Conditions of Purchase, the relevant provisions of the
Purchase Order shall prevail, and in the event of a conflict between the provisions of the
‘Scope of Supply with technical requirements’ and the General Conditions of Purchase, the
relevant provisions of the ‘Scope of Supply with technical requirements’ shall prevail. It is
further clarified, and notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Clause 1.2, in
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
the event of a conflict between the provisions of the Safety Manual, and the other safety,
work/human resources environment and health related provisions contained in the Purchase
Order Documents or under Applicable Law, the provisions which enforce stricter and safer
measures shall be implemented.
1.3. Unless the context otherwise requires, all capitalized terms used but not defined in this
Purchase Order shall have the meaning ascribed to such terms in the General Conditions of
Purchase, or in the other documents forming part of the Purchase Order Documents.
(2) Scope of Supply
2.1. The following main elements are included in the Scope of Supply:
2.1.1. Technical requirements are gathered in the technical part including (i) technical specification
including engineering and design, performance parameters (ii) process data sheets, (iii)
material data sheets, (iv) quality control, inspection and test plans, v) drawings etc.
2.1.2. Bill Of Material
2.1.3. Factory acceptance test program;
2.1.4. Supply and delivery of Goods;
2.1.5. Transport and transport insurance;( This shall be in the Scope of PERSTORP )
2.1.6. Supervision of installation and commissioning;
2.1.7 Site Acceptance test program;
2.1.8 Performance Testing
2.2. The delivery of Drawings and Documents and the Goods as specified in the Scope of Supply
shall be made in accordance with the Delivery Schedule.
2.3. Inspection and test plan shall be submitted by the Vendor to the Owner / Owner’s
Representative for their prior written approval within 30 days following the Effective Date.
2.4. The installation and commissioning services specified in the Scope of Supply above shall be
performed by the Vendor when called for by Owner / Owner’s Representative tentatively
within the time range set forth in the Delivery Schedule.
2.5. Site acceptance test program shall be submitted to Owner/ Owner’s Representative within 10
days following receipt of notice with respect to Owner’s/ Owner’s Representative’s selected
date for starting the installation work.
2.6. Participation in the performance test (as more particularly specified in the General Conditions
of Purchase) shall be performed by the Vendor when called for by Owner / Owner’s
Representative tentatively within the time range set forth in the Delivery Schedule.
The Vendor’s duties and obligations in relation to each main element set out in Clause 2.1
above (Main Elements- Scope of Supply) are described in the Scope of Supply. Everything
required for completing the deliveries and supplying the Goods, installation, commissioning
and performance tests, and making the Goods fit for their intended purpose are included in
the Vendor’s scope of supplies and obligations with the exception of such aspects which are
expressly excluded pursuant to the explicit terms of this Purchase Order.
(3) Price
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
3.1. The Total Order Value is INR ____________________________ (In words

___________________). Goods and Service Tax (GST) shall be applicable extra and payable by
the Owner. Rest all other taxes, levies and duties are inclusive in the Total Order Value.
3.2. A full price break-down of the Total Order Value (“Priced Bill Of Material”) and list of unit
rates (“Unit Rates”) comprising of components such as supervision of erection and
commissioning based on per man day charges and prices of standard pieces of equipment
and material, spares with unit prices is found in the Purchase Order Document titled ‘Price
Break-Down’ as provided under Clause 1.1.4 (Priced Bill Of Material) above.
3.3. The Total Order Value is fixed and firm and not subject to escalation or price adjustment and
shall include all resources, charges, cost, expenses, taxes, excise, duties, octroi and levies in
connection with the supply and the packing of the Goods, provision of Drawing and
Documents their carriage to the place of delivery as specified in the Delivery Schedule in
accordance with the Delivery Terms and the provision of all other elements provided in the
Scope of Supply and in carrying out the Scope of Supply and provision of the Defect Liability
Services, unless specifically excluded. Owner will not bear any taxes, excise, duties, octroi,
levies, etc. except GST for the payment of the Total Order Value to the Vendor. Vendor shall
not be eligible for any compensation on variation of the above i.e., increase in resources,
charges, cost, expenses, taxes, excise, duties, octroi, levies etc. (except GST) and the same shall
not be reimbursed by the Owner and shall be absorbed by the Vendor. GST shall be
reimbursed by Owner to Vendor at actuals paid to the relevant Governmental Authority
against production of documentary evidence (s) and furnishing all necessary documents
towards GST paid (e.g. proper tax invoices, bill or challans etc.). If it is noticed that GST
returns are not filled / properly by the Vendor and tax credits are not available to the Owner,
the same will be deducted from payment of an invoice to the Vendor or future payments to
the Vendor till the time return from the Vendor is revised /properly filed and credits will be
available to the Owner.
(4) Delivery
The Goods as per the Scope of Supply shall be delivered on FCA basis at Vendors premises as
per INCOTERM 2010 at Sayakha site per the Delivery Schedule not later than 6 months from
the Effective Date. The delivery of Goods shall strictly follow the Delivery Schedule and the
dispatch instructions set forth thereunder. In good time, before each shipment, the consignee
(Owner) should be notified and given the opportunity (either by itself or through its
representatives) to conduct pre-shipment survey of the consignment and its packing
including proper securing and lashing.
(5) Terms of Payment
5.1. The payment of the Total Order Value shall be made by the Owner to the Purchaser in the
manner provided below (each a “Milestone”):
5.1.1. 10% of the Total Order Value as advance payment against submission by the Vendor of an
advance bank guarantee (“Advance Bank Guarantee” or “ABG”) from a reputed Indian
scheduled commercial banks (as per schedule of RBI Act 1934) in favour of the Owner, of an
equivalent amount which guarantee shall be valid until the Acceptance of Goods.
5.1.2. 10% of the Total Order Value upon submission of all approved Drawings and Documents by
the Vendor in accordance with the procedure set out in the General Conditions of Purchase.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
5.1.3. 30% of the Total Order Value upon completion of factory acceptance tests and completed
delivery as per the Delivery Schedule of all Goods in proper condition as certified by the
Owner / Owner’s Representative.
5.1.4. 10% of the Total Order Value upon completion of mobilization at the Site as certified by the
Owner / Owner’s Representative.
5..1.5 30% of the Total Order Value upon completed delivery as per the Delivery Schedule of all
Goods in proper condition as certified by the Owner / Owner’s Representative.
5.1.6 10% of the Total Order Value Acceptance of the Goods by the Owner as certified by the
Owner.
5.1.7 For supervision, 100% payment shall be made separately after successful erection and
commissioning duly certificated by Owner’s representative.
5.2. The payments as above will be made within 90 days following receipt of invoice from the
Vendor together with the documentation evidencing that the relevant Milestone have been
accomplished in each case subject to verification by the Owner’s Representative of
accomplishment of such subject Milestone.
5.3. The Advance Bank Guarantee shall be in accordance with the proforma set out in Schedule 1,
Part B of the General Conditions of Purchase, and shall be furnished and maintained by the
Vendor at its cost and expense.
(6) Performance Security
6.1. The Vendor shall provide a performance security (“Performance Security”) (in the form of
performance bank guarantee (“Performance Bank Guarantee”) from a reputed Indian
scheduled commercial bank (as per schedule of RBI Act 1934) in favour of the Owner) which
shall be valid until the expiry of the Defect Liability Period plus for a period of three months
following the expiry of the Defects Liability Period or until the Vendor has repaired, replaced
or otherwise made good all the Defects notified during the Defects Liability Period or within
three months following the expiry of the Defects Liability Period, whichever is later. In case of
extension of the delivery date(s) or increase in the Total Order Value, the validity and value
of the Performance Security shall be accordingly extended or increased by Vendor. Vendor
shall bear all costs associated with the Performance Security. The detailed provisions on the
Performance Security are contained in the General Conditions of Purchase.
6.2. The Performance Security shall be submitted by the Purchaser to the Owner within 10
Working Days from Effective Date.
6.3. The Performance Security shall be in accordance with the proforma set out in Schedule 1, Part
A of the General Conditions of Purchase.
(7) Defect Liability Period
The defects liability period shall be a period of 24 months from the date of Acceptance of
Goods but no longer than 36 months from the completed delivery of the Goods as per the
Delivery Schedule (“Defects Liability Period”), and Defects may be notified to the Vendor
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
during the Defect Liability Period or within three months following the expiry of the Defects
Liability Period. The provisions relating to the Defect Liability Services are contained in the
General Conditions of Purchase.
(8) Liquidated Damages for Delay
8.1. The time provided under the Delivery Schedule for supplying the Goods shall be strictly
observed by the Vendor.
8.2. In the event, the Vendor fails to supply the Goods or any portion thereof in accordance with
the timelines set out under the Delivery Schedule including failure to be present at Site as per
the installation and commissioning schedule provided by the Owner’s Representative, the
Vendor shall pay to the Owner as compensation in the form of liquidated damages, for such
default, a sum equal to one percent (1%) of the Total Order Value for every week or part
thereof of such delay / failure. The aggregate amount of liquidated damages payable under
the Purchase Order shall not exceed 10% of the Total Order Value.
8.3. The Owner may without prejudice to any other mode of recovery, deduct the amount of such
damages from any invoice due to the Vendor, or any money which may become due to the
Vendor including under any other contract executed between the Owner and the Vendor.
8.4. The payment of liquidated damages from the Vendor to the Owner / the right of the Owner
to claim liquidated damages from the Vendor, as provided above, shall not relieve the
Vendor from its obligations and responsibility to supply the Goods under the Purchaser
Order Documents or from any other obligations, responsibilities and liabilities under the
Purchaser Order Documents.
8.5. The Parties acknowledge that all sums payable by way of liquidated damages under this
Purchase Order are compensation by way of liquidated damages and not a penalty, and the
Parties recognize that these liquidated damages represent a genuine and reasonable pre-
estimate of the damages and losses likely to be suffered or incurred by the Owner arising out
of the delays / failure specified in this Clause 8 and shall be considered as reasonable
compensation without reference to the actual loss of damage which shall have been sustained
by the Owner.
(9) Acceptance of Purchase Order
The Vendor shall sign and return to the Owner within 3 (three) Working Days of the Effective
Date a signed copy of the Purchase Order. In the event that a signed copy of the Purchase
Order has not been received by the Owner within 3 (three) Working Days of the Effective
Date and/or the Performance Security has not been received by Owner within 10 (ten)
Working Days of the Effective Date, the Purchase Order will automatically become void, and
the Owner will have no obligations (including payment obligations) towards the Vendor
under the terms thereof. It is also clarified that no payments will be due to the Vendor under
the Purchase Order until such time the signed Purchase Order have been received by Owner.
This Purchase Order duly signed by Owner has been issued in two identical copies. Both
copies are sent to the Vendor for execution and one copy should be returned to Owner within
3 (three) Working Days.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
For and on behalf of

Perstorp Industries India Private Limited
By____________________
Name:
Date:
Designation:
(Authorised Representative)
Agreed, Accepted and Confirmed
For and on behalf of [Full name of Vendor]
BY____________________
Name:
Date:
Designation:
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Appendix 3.2: Scope of Supply with technical requirements
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
B101-109, 1st Floor, Kailash Vaibhav Industrial Estate, Vikhroli (W), Mumbai – 400 079
DO CU ME NT N O. IPS -M B D 18 019 - M E- 394 - 40K T PA - DE
SPECIFICATION
FOR
THERMO VAPOUR
RE COMPRESSOR
(E-3021)
Project Elephant
R4 Sept 03, 19 Approved For Enquiry PDP KKK HCD

B101-109, Kailash Vaibhav Ind. Estate, Vikhroli (W), Mumbai – 400 079 Project No MBD18019
Document Title Specification for TVR Made / App PDP/HCD
Document No. IPS-MBD18019-ME-394-40KTPA-DE Rev R4
Index
1.0 Scope............................................................................................................................................ 3
2.0 Note.............................................................................................................................................. 3
3.0 Inspection & Testing ................................................................................................................ 3
4.0 Documentation .......................................................................................................................... 4
5.0 List of Annexures ...................................................................................................................... 5
6.0 Abbreviations ............................................................................................................................ 5
IPS-ME-DOC-21-V1.0 IPS-MBD18019-ME-394-40KTPA-DE- Specification for Thermo Vapour Re Compressor (E-3021)-R4.doc

1.0 Scope
1.1.1 This specification covers design, engineering, manufacturing, testing, inspection including
suitable packing for Thermo Vapour Compressor.
Sr.
Description Qty Unit Ref. Documents
No.
1 A) Thermo Vapour Compressor 1 Set Refer section 5.0 of this
comprising of – Specification
1. Control Valve at inlet.

2. Control Valve at common
bypass,
3. Pressure Transmitter
4. Base Frame.
5. Foundation Bolt.
 E - 3021
2 Commissioning & mandatory 1 Set
spares
3 Spare parts for (2 year) normal 1 Set
operation, list with part numbers
4 Special tools, if any
5 Project Management
5.1 Submission of vendor drawings 1 Set No of prints in hard and soft
including inspection test plan and shall be decided during the
obtaining approval from Owner’s KOM
representative / Owner
5.2 Manufacturing schedule 1 Set Shall be submitted in the KOM
5.3 Progress reporting 1 Set Weekly reports, vendor shall
align on the format during
KOM
5.4 Attend KOM and Project Review 1 Set
Meetings
1.2 Major items required for this package are specified in the specification; however vendor to
consider all necessary equipment’s, accessories, etc. to ensure safe, efficient operation and
monitoring of the package. All consumables for erection, commissioning is in the vendor’s
scope.
2.0 Note
Lubricants / contact part should not contain or have traces of silicon.
3.0 Inspection & Testing
1. Testing shall be carried out at Bidder’s works.
2. All material shall be identified with respect to its material code.
3. All pressure parts including piping shall be tested hydraulically and pneumatically at the
pressure as per applicable codes at works.

4. Dimensional check-up and pressure testing shall be carried out at works for all
equipment.
5. All raw materials shall be subjected to material identification.
6. Client / authorized representative shall at all times have an access to supplier’s/suppliers
sub contractor’s workshop to witness fabrication stages
7. Bidder will prepare Quality Assurance Plan and submit to client for approval.
8. Bidder will carry out all inspection and testing as per QAP and maintain the records.
Bidder to give inspection calls (at least 2 weeks before the date of inspection) in advance
for all witness points to client. If it is found that any of the inspection stage is skipped
than client reserves the right to reject part or whole of the equipment.
9. All fittings (elbow, tee, reducer), shall be inspected with material test certificate,
traceability of transfer of heat number.
4.0 Documentation
4.1 The following shall be submitted along with quotations.

1. Quality assurance plan.
2. Schedule.
3. Organisation Chart.
4. Escalation Chart
5. General Arrangement Drawing in Autocad .
6. Deviation to the specification if any. Absence of list of deviation shall be construed as
compliance of specifications in all respect.
7. 3D model drawing in Autocad plant 3D.
8. Process PID using standard legends provided by perstorp in Autodesk PID.
9. Electrical load list if any.
4.2 The following documents shall be submitted within 2 weeks of of LOI / PO for Comments /
Approval.
1. Quality Assurance Chart.

2. General Arrangement Drawing.
3. Detailed Bar chart.
4. Document Control Index.
4.3 Vendor to submit 3D model in Auto Plant within 2 weeks after approval of details.
4.4 The following documents shall be submitted before start of commissioning
activities.
4.4.1 Final documentation/data book 2 set & 1 set (Soft) In addition to what´s stated to be legal
documentation. The final documentation shall be submitted along with despatch of the
equipment with transmittal giving details of each and every document.
4.4.2 One set of final documentation shall be submitted along with the invoice.
4.4.3 The following documents shall be part of the final documentation:
1. Drawing / Document List.
2. Approved Contract Specific Inspection & Test Plan.
3. Approved General Arrangement Drawing for each Tag No. with CAD file and in Auto
plant 3D model.
4. Detail fabrication drawings in CAD.
5. Detail drawings in editable form
6. P & ID with battery limit in Auto Cad Plant 3D
7. Instrument Data Sheets.
8. Instrumentation Wiring Schematic Diagrams.
9. Instrumentation Panel/Cabinet Layout.

10. Logic Diagrams / Description.

11. Hook Up Diagrams.
12. Loop Diagrams.
13. Utility requirement list.
14. Power consumption load list.
15. Parts List/Bill of Material.
16. Atex certification documentation.
17. Installation, operation and maintenance manual
18. Spare Part List.
19. Guarantee Certificate of bought out Items.
20. Method of Lifting.
21. Inspection Release Note.
5.0 List of Annexures
Revision
Sr. No. Description Document No.
No.
1. Process Datasheet of TVR IPS-MBD18019-PR-413-40KTPA-DE R6
2. Project Information IPS-MBD18019-GN-082 A
Specification for instrumentation

3. IPS-MBD18019-IN-501A-40KTPA-DE R3
scope of package equipment
4. Standard for static equipment IPS-MBD18019-ME-379-40KTPA-DE R2
Technical specifications for

5. IPS-MBD18019-ME-378-40KTPA-DE R4
painting work
6. Piping Specification IPS-MBD18019-PP-451-40KTPA-DE R9
7. Valve Specification IPS-MBD18019-ME-354-40KTPA-DE R5
6.0 Abbreviations
Abbreviations Description
Bidder Organisation submitting their offer as against this enquiry specification.
Client Perstorp Industries India Private limited.
Consultant IPS Mehtalia Private limited.
QAP Quality Assurance Plan.
*End of Document*

Consulting Engineers. Construction Management. Commissioning & Qualification Project No. MBD18019
B101-109, 1st Floor, Kailash Vaibhav Industrial Estate, Park Site, Vikhroli (W), Mumbai - 400 079 Made/Appd. PDP/ HCD
Document Title Process Datasheet of TVR Rev R6
Document No. IPS-MBD18019-PR-413-40KTPA-DE Date 19-Sep-19
Specification of TVR system
Sr. No. Description Requirements Remarks
Design , Manufacturing , Supply & installation of

A Scope Thermo Vapour Cmpressor System with necessary
Instrument & inter connected piping.
B General Data
Type Thermo Vapour Compressor
E - 3021 Vendor to confirm the no. of ejectors
Tag Nos.
required.
Duty Continuous
Make Bidder To Provide
Model No. Bidder To Provide
C Suction Condition
Suction Fluid Process gas (Consider steam Property)
Suction Gas Pressure bar (a) 0.95
Suction Gas Temp. ° C 98
Maximum Process gas available is 500
Suction Gas Flow rate ( Kg/hr) Bidder To Provide
Kg/hr
Suction Gas Connection NB Bidder To Provide
D Motive Condition
Motive Fluid MP Steam (SMM)
Motive Steam Opersting Pressure bar (a) 10
Motive Steam corresponding Sat. Temp. °C 180
Motive Steam Flow rate required (Kg/hr) Bidder To Provide
Motive Steam Connection NB Bidder To Provide
E Discharge Condition
Discharge Fluid Mixture of steam + Process gas
Discharge fluid Pressure bar (a) 2
Discharge fluid temp. ° C 120.2
Discharge fluid Total Flow rate (Kg/hr) 500/ 1000
Discharge fluid Connection NB Bidder To Provide
F Design Codes followed.

HEI for thermal sizing ASME Sec. VIII div I for Mech.
Design Codes followed [latest Editions]
Designing , ASME B 31.3
Welding standards followed ASME Sec. VIII div I & Sec. IX
Corrosion allowance 3 mm on CS and nil on SS
G Mechanical Design Condition

Steam Jet Thermo Compressor Body side
Design Pressure bar (a) 11 /FV
Design Temperature ° C 195
Hydro test pressure bar (a) 15
H Material of Construction
All Wetted part : ASTM A 240 Gr.SS 316 L , Non
Steam Jet Thermo Compressor
Wetted Part CS.
Motive steam: ASTM A 240 Gr 304
Flanges [As per ASME, B 16.5, SORF, 150#]
Process side: CS with SS 316 stub ends
Gaskets PTFE for process and graphite for steam
Nuts & bolts (non contact) CS with Hot dip galvanized
I Scope Of Supply
Skid based system with ejectors with necessary
Required
instrument.
Modulating Control Valve pneumatic operated
Required
IPS-ME-DOC-21-V1.0 at inlet of each ejector 1 OF 2 IPS-MBD18019-PR-413-40KTPA-DE-TVR (E-3021)-R6.xls
Consulting Engineers. Construction Management. Commissioning & Qualification Project No. MBD18019
B101-109, 1st Floor, Kailash Vaibhav Industrial Estate, Park Site, Vikhroli (W), Mumbai - 400 079 Made/Appd. PDP/ HCD
Document Title Process Datasheet of TVR Rev R6
Document No. IPS-MBD18019-PR-413-40KTPA-DE Date 19-Sep-19
Specification of TVR system
Sr. No. Description Requirements Remarks
Pressure Transmitter Required

Flow meter Required
Bypass with control valve required for steam flow.
Bypass control valve to be sized for 1000 Kg/hr to Maximum steam plus PG flow not to
By pass arrangement for motive steam
3500 Kg/hr with inlet and outlet conditions as exceed 4800 Kg/hr
described in Section D & E.
J Approximate Weight and Dimension

Skid weight Bidder To Provide
Empty Weight (Kg) Bidder To Provide
Hydraulic Weight (Kg) Bidder To Provide
Length, Width and Height Bidder To Provide
K Inspection & Testing

Factory Acceptance Test Bidder To Provide
Running & performance Bidder To Provide
L Documentation
Quality Assurance Plan Bidder To Provide
GA drawing Bidder To Provide
P & ID with Battery limit Bidder To Provide
Material Test Certificate Bidder To Provide
Hydro test certificate Bidder To Provide
M Notes
Vendor must reassure that reverse flow of SMM to PG system is prevented by either a check valve or suitable device.
IPS-ME-DOC-21-V1.0 2 OF 2 IPS-MBD18019-PR-413-40KTPA-DE-TVR (E-3021)-R6.xls

DO CU ME NT N O. IPS -M B D 1 8 019 - G N- 08 2- 40K T PA - DE
Project Information
Project Elephant
A Aug 27, 19 For review and Approval SNS NKG KVV

Revised Pages Only Owner Approval Construction
This document has been prepared for the above project or named part thereof and should not be relied upon or used for any other project without prior written consent from
IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. accepts no responsibility or liability for the consequence of this document being used for a purpose other than the purposes for
which it was commissioned. Any person using or relying on the document for such other purpose agrees, and will by such use or reliance be taken to confirm his agreement
to indemnify IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd for all loss or damage resulting there from IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. accepts no responsibility or liability for this document to any party other
than the person by whom it was commissioned.
IPS-MEHTALIA PVT. LTD. Owner Perstorp
B 101-109, Kailash Vaibhav Ind. Complex, Vikhroli (W), Mumbai – 400 079 Project No MBD18019
Document Title Project Information Made / App SNS/KVV
Document No. IPS-MBD18019-GN-073-40KTPA-DE Rev A
Date Aug 27, 2019 Page 2 of 4
Index
1.0 Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 3

2.0 Project Details ............................................................................................................................ 3
3.0 Utility battery limit conditions ............................................................................................... 4
IPS-ME-DOC-14-V1.0 IPS-MBD18019-GN-082- Project Information-A.doc

1.0 Introduction
Perstorp AB Sweden is a world leader in several sectors of the specialty chemicals market for
a wide variety of industries and applications. Perstorp is having multiple manufacturing
units in Asia, Europe & North America. The speciality chemicals Perstorp produces are
added to a range of products used every day at home, work or leisure. Customers are in
coatings, plastic processing and automotive industries as well as construction and
engineering, the agricultural sector and many more.
As a part of business requirement in India, Perstorp intends to set up a new production unit.
The current project is for setting up a Green field manufacturing facility at village Sayakha
near Bharuch district, Gujarat.
2.0 Project Details
1. Owner : Perstorp Industries India Pvt. Ltd

3. Owner’s representative : IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd.
4. Location :
Gujarat, India
5. Latitude : 21.785481º (N)
6. Longitude : 72.805924º (E)
11. Min. RH : 38%
12. Max. RH : 73%
Site elevation from mean sea
13. : 16 M
level
14. Basic wind speed : 44 M/ Sec
To be considered as per IS 1893.02 Seismic
15. Seismic zone :
zone –III

3.0 Utility battery limit conditions
Battery Limit condition at generation point.

Service / Code Pressure (Bar(g)) Temperature Deg.C
Operating Design Operating Design
Steam (3.5 bar g)/ SML 2.5 To 3.5 4.5 148 156
Steam (12 bar g)/
10.9 To 12 13.2 192 196
SMM
Compressed air/AC 7 To 8 9 42 75
Natural Gas /NG 3 To 18 By GSPL 35 65
Nitrogen (g) / N2 3 To 4 11.5 35 65
Cooling water /CW 1.5 To 4 6 34 65
Soft water/SW 3.5 To 5 6 35 65
Process
1.5 To 5 6 40 65
Condensate/PC-40
Process
2.5 To 5 6 60 90
Condensate/PC-60
Process
2 To 5 6 95 120
Condensate/PC
Hot Water/HW 2.5 To 4 6 60 90
*End of Document*

DO CU ME NT N O. IPS -M B D 18 019 - I N -5 01A -4 0K T PA -D E
SPECIFICATION
FOR
INSTRUMENTATION SCOPE
FOR
PACKAGE EQUIPMENT
Project Elephant
R3 July 18 , 19 For Engineering VMK SNS SPK

R2 July 10 , 19 Revised As Per OWNER Comments VMK SNS SPK
R1 June 18 , 19 For Aprroval VMK SNS SPK
Rev Date Description Made by Chkd. by App by
Issued This RevISion In-house Review & comments Purchase
RevISed Pages Only Client Approval Construction
Issued This RevISion Enquiry Engineering
from IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd.. IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. accepts no responsibility or liability for the consequence of This document being used for a purpose other than the
confirm his agreement to indemnify IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. for all loss or damage resulting there from. IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. accepts no responsibility or liability for
This document to any party other than the person by whom it was commissioned.
Instrumentation Scope for Package
Document Title Made / App VMK/SPK
Equipments
Document No. IPS-MBD18019-IN-501A-40KTPA-DE Rev R3
Date July 18, 2019 Page 2 of 55
Index
1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 3

2.0 Scope of Instrumentation ........................................................................................................ 5
3.0 Instrument Component Identification Philosophy .......................................................... 13
4.0 Inspection and testing ............................................................................................................ 14
5.0 Engineering and selection of field instruments ................................................................ 15
6.0 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC).............................................................................. 32
7.0 Field instrument parameterization and configuration .................................................... 34
8.0 Erection Hardware .................................................................................................................. 34
9.0 Interface Points ........................................................................................................................ 41
10.0 Instrument numbering Guidelines ..................................................................................... 42
11.0 Documentation ........................................................................................................................ 43
12.0 Spares ........................................................................................................................................ 44
13.0 Instrument Connection Details ............................................................................................ 44
14.0 Approved Make List ............................................................................................................... 48
15.0 Abbreviations .......................................................................................................................... 51
IPS-DOC-IN-03-V1. IPS-MBD18019-IN-501A-40KTPA-DE Specification For Instrument Scope of Package Equipt-R3

Equipments
1.0 Introduction
Perstorp AB Sweden is a world leader in several sectors of the specialty chemicals market for a
wide variety of industries and applications. Perstorp is having multiple manufacturing units in
Asia, Europe & North America. The specialty chemicals Perstorp produces are added to a range
of products used every day at home, work or leisure. Customers are in coatings, plastic
processing and automotive industries as well as construction and engineering, the agricultural
sector and many more.
As a part of business requirement in India, Perstorp intends to set up a new production unit. The
current project is for setting up a Green field manufacturing facility at village Sayakha near
Bharuch district, Gujarat.
1.1 Document Scope
This specification defines the minimum requirements of vendor packages(system) design

including engineering, manufacture, configuration, programming, hardware & software,
inspection and testing, documentation, commissioning, operation and shipping of field
instruments & control system of packages for project elephant of the Perstorp Industries Pvt. Ltd.
at Sayakha, Gujarat.
1.2 Safety Considerations
1. All instruments in the hazardous area shall be preferably intrinsically safe. Explosion proof
instruments shall be considered where ever intrinsically safe instruments not available.
2. For safe area and flameproof area minimum ingress protection shall be IP-66 (as per IEC
60529) minimum.
3. Interlock logic shall be configured in PLC for tripping during abnormal process condition.
4. Alarms shall be provided before reaching abnormal condition.
5. Hazop study & SIL study shall be conducted in order identify any hazardous condition.
Equipment and related circuits must fulfill area classification and SIL requirements.
6. Safety related functions such as safety critical interlocks and emergency stops shall be
designed using certified programmable safety system or safety relays independently of the
control systems. Design, installation, commissioning and operation to follow applicable
lifecycle safety standards (IEC 61508/61511/62061) and other approvals required from local
or regional authorities.
7. Redundancy shall be applied where ever process requires redundant process measurement
and control.
8. Redundancy shall be considered for controllers, communication modules & power supply.
9. Instruments supplied shall be with LoToTo functionality. For e,g. shall be equipped with
lock out module to conform to LOTOTO requirements.
LOTOTO functionality is required for isolation requirements before working on any plant
and/or equipment that could be energized by mechanical or electrical sources(electrical,
pneumatic, hydraulic, gravity, electrical, springs) during any installation, repair, inspection,
cleaning, commissioning, adjustment or dismantling process.
Note : Kindly refer the document “ Safety Manual- IPS-MBD18019-GN-009-40KTPA-DE” for

more information on LOTOTO.

Equipments
1.3 General Definitions
OWNER's ENGINEER: This is the party that carries out all or part of the design, engineering,
procurement assistance, installation management and commissioning of the
project. The OWNER may undertake all or part of the duties (design,
engineering, procurement assistance, installation management and
commissioning) of the OWNER's ENGINEER.
VENDOR: This is the party that manufactures and/or supplies equipment and services
according to scope and requirements as specified by the OWNER and/or
OWNER's ENGINEER. Vendor herein is referred as package vendor or seller.
OWNER: This is the party that initiates the project and ultimately receives and pays for it's
design and construction.
1.4 Site Conditions
1 Project Information
OWNER : M/s Perstorp Industries India Pvt. Ltd
Project : Elephant
OWNER's ENGINEER : M/s IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd.
Location :
Gujarat, India
Latitude : 21.785481º (N)
Longitude : 72.805924º (E)
Nearest railway station : Bharuch 12 KM
Nearest airport : Vadodara 100 KM
a. Nearest city : Bharuch
b. Nearest port : Dahej
2 Site Conditions and Climatological Data
Design Ambient Temperature : 40º C for Indoor Electrical Equipments
Design Ambient Temperature : 50º C for outdoor Electrical Equipments
Min. Design Ambient Temperature : 9º C for outdoor Electrical Equipments
Site elevation (Above sea level ) : 16 m
Seismic Zone : Zone III
Environmental Condition : Humid
a. Soil Resistivity : 2.27 Ohm-m
b. Maximum Rainfall (Avg. Annual) : 577 mm
c. Min. dry bulb temperature : 11.5 ºC
d. Max. dry bulb temperature : 41.5 ºC
e. Min. wet bulb temperature : 8.99 ºC
f. Max. wet bulb temperature : 28.33 ºC
g. Min. RH : 38%
h. Max. RH : 73%
i. Basic wind speed : 44 m/sec

Equipments
2.0 Scope of Instrumentation
2.1 General
All instrument sub-sellers (sub vendor) shall be preferably from the list as mentioned in This
specification. Vendor to highlight if he selects any vendor not appearing in the list & shall obtain
approval fron OWNER's ENGINEER prior to deciding.
All instruments shall be accessible for operation and maintenance, and where necessary
platforms and stairs shall be supplied with package skid.
Package instruments shall be skid mounted by package Vendor/Supplier as

much as possible.
The package vendor shall be responsible for selecting instruments with the proper instrument
range, pressure rating, and materials of construction based on application, fluid properties,
operating conditions and mechanical design constraints.
Any improvement/advancement that package vendor believes to promote ease of operation or

reduce maintenance may be considered in addition to these requirements.
Any omission/exclusions from these specifications does not relieve package vendor of the
responsibility.
In case of any conflict between This specification and any other specification and/or codes, the
package vendor shall clarify with OWNER's ENGINEER
2.2 General requirements for instrumentations
1. If possible, all instrument supplied shall be of standard manufacturer type. The instruments
shall be purchased only from long-standing experience. It is imperative that the items to be
proven and state-of-the-art design. The vendor shall stand guarantee and rOWNER's
ENGINEERonsibility of the package functionality in totality. It is the rOWNER's
ENGINEERonsibility of vendor to ensure that all the specifications and requirements are
taken care by sub-vendor & sub-contractor.
2. The Performance of the instruments shall corrOWNER's ENGINEERond to the specified
criteria under the section “1.4 : Site Conditions” describing the local conditions.
3. The admissive temperature for transport and storage shall conform to conditions indicated in
project specific requirements.
4. The material components which come in to contact with the process media to be measured
shall be resistant to corrosion and erosion. Material for wetted parts shall be selected based
on the process media requirements. Package vendor to refer "Piping Material Specification
IPS-MBD18019-PP-451-40KTPA-DE" and "Specification of Valves IPS-MBD18019-ME-354-
40KTPA-DE " for relevant material selection.
5. All instruments and associated items shall be of heavy duty industrial type and be suitable
for use in the stated environment. Tried and tested equipment shall be used.
6. Instrumentation specified shall generally not be approaching obsolescence and shall have
maintenance spares available for a period not shorter than 25 years (15 years in active
phase+10 years for spares & technical support).
7. Aluminium and aluminium alloys shall be avoided. Where use of such alloys cannot be
avoided, instruments shall be epoxy coated and meet the requirements of the stated

Equipments
environment and hazardous area classification.

8. The ranges of all pressure and temperature gauges shall be standardized.
9. Use of process switches shall be minimized. Pressure switches not to be used instead
pressure transmitter to be used.
10. All fields’ instruments shall be damp-proof and dust-proof, protection class as per IEC 60529
minimum IP-66. For internally mounted equipment the minimum acceptable standard shall
be IP-54 prior to the fitting of louvers or fans.
11. Instruments shall be tropicalized for humidity and fungus, and shall be termite resistant.
Electronic boards shall be varnished/potted and electrostatically protected.
12. Electro-magnetic compatibility shall be in accordance with IEC 61000 Part 1-6. All electronic
cards shall be Class G3 protection as per ISA S71.04.
13. For safety reasons, 24VDC is preferred for power supply to field mounted instrument
equipment. A detailed calculation for trip and voltage drop shall be performed. If the
required cable area is excessive, 230VAC may be used.
14. If any field equipment is powered by 230VAC, the equipment shall be clearly marked.
15. For Hazardous area, instruments shall be intrinsically safe type ( if intrinsically safe
instrument not available the enclosure shall be flame proof). & for safe area (Non-hazardous
area) all instruments shall be minimum IP-66 protection.
16. Process connection & types for all instruments shall be in accordance with the mechanical &
piping connection.
17. Surface, housing & body of instruments, valves & components shall be chemically treated to
suit the climatic conditions.
18. Package supplier shall supply UPS for package instrument system based on requirements.
19. Package supplier shall consider requirement of cyber security & suitable measures shall be
incorporated in design.
20. Intrinsically safe/ Flame proof instruments shall have "ATEX" label marking conforming to
EU Directive ATEX 2014/34/EU Directive
2.3 Instrumentation in Hazardous Area
1. The area classification will give the extent of hazardous area within the plant. Possible
hazardous areas may be the tank farm area (Acetaldehyde, Tech Methanol, and Mother
Liquor), FO tank area and reactor area. Plant hazardous area shall be classified in accordance
with IEC.
Generally most of the plant area is classified as safe area. The supplier must refer the datasheet of
package for hazardous area classification.The supplier must ensure that any changes made to the
classification plan due to suppliers equipment shall be reported back to the OWNER's
ENGINEER
Design the installation with equipment located outside of hazardous area as much as possible.
The following are examples of possible hazardous areas due to presence of hazardous gas,
hazardous solvent etc.
Sr.
Area Ex / IS Safe
No.
1. Acetaldehyde unloading & Storage √ X
2. Reactor top area √ X
3. Recovered MeOH area (Main Storage Tank) √ X

Equipments
Sr.
Area Ex / IS Safe
No.
4. MeOH Column √ X
5. Penta bagging area combustible dust √ X
6. Methanol tank (Receiver) √ X
7. Natural gas station in boiler room √ X
8. LDO storage and transfer area √ X
2. In hazardous area the priority of choice for installation is:

a. Design the installation with the electrical devices located outside of hazardous area if
possible.
b. Utilize intrinsically safe installation.
c. Other means of installation by flameproof / increased safety housing.
3. In hazardous area, instruments input/output signals to/from control room/field shall be as

follows
a. Transmitter (2 wire) – Intrinsically safe.
b. Transmitter (4 wire) – Flameproof-explosion proof / Intrinsically safe.
c. Field switches – Intrinsically safe.
d. RTD and Thermocouple – Flameproof-explosion proof / Intrinsically safe.
e. Solenoid valves – Flameproof-explosion proof / Intrinsically safe.
f. Safety barriers with galvanic Isolation (active barriers) shall be used to achieve
intrinsically safe signal. Safety barrier may be part of the I/O module.
g. Increased safety method, pressurization method concept shall be applied for protection if
intrinsically safe or flameproof concept cannot be applied.
4. Certification, testing procedures and approval for Intrinsic safe/Explosion proof equipment
shall be by authorised body.
5. EX intrinsically safety calculations shall be performed.
6. EX equipment list shall be compiled.
7. Additionally, approval from Chief Controller of Explosive (CCOE), Petroleum and
Explosives Safety Organizations (PESO), Central Mining & Fuel Research Institute (CIMFR)
shall be obtained for all electrical equipment to be installed in hazardous area.
2.4 Units of measurements
All instruments shall be calibrated and their scales graduated with the units as mentioned in
below table at clause 2.3.6
2.4.1 Flow
1. Scales shall be graduated in engineering units. Numbers of decimals places shall correspond
to the selected span but restricted to maximum two.
2. The scale graduated for rotameters shall correspond to the manufacturer’s standard.

Equipments
2.4.2 Level
1. 0-100% of the respective measuring range, Distance in “mm” for precision tank level
measurement. No decimal places.
2. For vessels & tanks level measurement the low level shall be measured at 20% (of height of
tank ) above the bottom of the tank & high level at 20% (height of the tank) below the top of
the tank. ( Note: Depending on process requirement low level and high level set points may
change.)
2.4.3 Pressure
1. Measuring range according to IS: 3624-1987 recommended.
2.4.4 Temperature
1. Measuring range preferably according to manufacturer’s standards.

2. Scales in °C, no of decimal places restricted to maximum two.
2.4.5 Analysis
1. Ranges as per process requirements
2.4.6 Unit of Parameters as follows:
Quantity Unit Abbreviation

Area Square Meter m2
Concentration Parts per million ppm
Micro Siemens per
Conductivity µS/cm
centimeter
Density Kilograms per cubic meter kg/m3
Electrical current Ampere A
Energy - electrical Kilowatt Hour kWh
Flow liquid Cubic meter per hour m3/h
Flow liquid Liter per hour l/h
Flow liquid (mass flow) Kilograms per hour m3/h
Normal cubic meters per
Flow gas and vap. Nm3/h
hour
Flow - steam Kilogram per hour kg/h
Length Millimeter mm
Length Meter m
Length Kilometer km
Mass Kilogram kg
Mass Tonne ton
Molecular weight Kilogram per kilogram mole MWT or MW
pH PH pH
Bar gauge / Bar(g) /
Pressure – (gauge)
milli bar (gauge) mbar (g)
bar Absolute /
Pressure – (Absolute) bar (a) /mbar (a)
milli bar (Absolute)
Equipments
Quantity Unit Abbreviation

Production capacity Metric tons per year tpa
Speed (linear) Meters per second m/s
Speed (rotating) Revolutions per minute RPM
Temperature Degree centigrade °C
Time Hour h
Viscosity (dynamic) CentipoISe cP
Vibration Micro meters µm
Volume Cubic meter m3
Turbidity Nephelometric
NTU /
Turbidity Units /
FTU
Formazin Turbidity Unit
2.4.7 Codes and Standards
The below codes and standards shall be followed.
In case of any conflict between This specification, codes and standards and any other
specifications noted herein, the most stringent of the requirements shall be followed. The vendor
shall inform such conflict and any other matter, which requires further action and attention of
OWNER's ENGINEER, the interpretation of OWNER's ENGINEER representative, shall be final.
2.4.7.1 Engineering and design
IS-5831 : PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.

IS-13947 : Degree of Protection provided by Enclosures for low
voltage switchgears and control gear part I General Rules.
ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 : Screw Threads-Pipe Threads General Purpose (inch)
ANSI/ASMEB16.20 : Ring Joint Gaskets and Groove for Steel Pipe Flanges
ANSI/ISA-TR99.00.01 : Security Technologies for manufacturing and Control system
ANSI/ISA-TR99.00.02 : Integrating Electronics Security into the remanufacturing
& Control systems environment
API 552 : Transmission Systems
API 752 : Management of Hazards Associated with Location of
Process Plant and Building
API RP 554 : Process Instrumentation and Control Systems
API RP 556 : Instrumentation and Control Systems for Fired Heaters
& Steam Generators
ASME PTC 19.3 TW : Consideration involved in Thermowell installation
2010
ASTM A 193, grade : Bolts and nuts
B7, ASTM A 194,
grade 2H
BS 1646 : Control Functions and Instrumentation
BS 2871 (Pt. 2) : PVC Coated Copper Tubes
BS 5863, IEC 381-1 : Instrument Signal Range
BS 6739 : Instrumentation in Process Control Systems Installation
Design and Practice
IEC 337 : Control switches (low voltage switching devices for

Equipments
Control and auxiliary circuits, including contactor relays).

IEC 60068-1 to : Basic Environment Testing Procedures
IEC 60068-4
IEC 60073 : Specification for the Color of Indicator Lights, Push
Buttons, Annunciators and Digital Readouts
IEC 60092 - 352 : Choice and Laying Cables for Low Voltage Power Supply
IEC 60617 : Graphic Symbols for Electronic Diagrams.
IEC 61000 Part 1-6 : Electromagnetic Compatibility
IEEE 8802 : Information Processing System
IS 1079, 2629, 2639 : Hot dip galvanization of cable trays/racks
IS 3043 : Code of Practice for Earthing
ISA 20 : Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control
Instruments
ISA 51.1 : Process Instrumentation Terminology
ISA S5.1 : Instrumentation, Symbols and Identification
ISA S5.2 : Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations
ISA S5.3 : Graphic Symbols for DIStributed Control / Shared Display
Instrumentation, Logic and Computer Symbols
ISA S5.4 : Instrument Loop Diagrams
ISA S5.5 : Graphic Symbols for Process Displays
ISA S18.1 : Alarm Annunciation Sequence and Specification
ISA S50.1 : Compatibility of Analog Signals for Electronic Process
Instruments
ISA S71.04 : Protection of Electrical Equipment
ISA S72.01 : LAN Industrial data highway
ISO 1000 : International System of Units
ISO 1179, BS 4368 : Steel Compression Couplings for Tubes
ISO 3461, ISO 3511 : Symbolic Representation for Process Measurement
NFPA 329 : Recommended Practice for Handling Release of
Flammable and Combustible Liquids and Gases
Namur NE43 : Standardization of the signal level for failure information
2.4.7.2 Electrical Installation / Environmental Protection
IEC 60079 : Code of Practice for the selection, installation and

Maintenance of electrical apparatus for use in
potentially explosive atmospheres
IEC 60348 : Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring Apparatus
IEC 60409 : Guides for the Inclusion of Reliability Clauses into
Specification of Components (or Parts) for Electronic Equipment
IEC 60478 : Stabilized power supply DC output
IEC 60529 : Degrees of Protection of Enclosures.
IS 5572 : Classification of Hazardous Areas for Electrical Installations
ISA 12.04.01 : Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmospheres –
Part 2 Pressurized Enclosures "p"-IEC 60079-2 MOD
ISA RP 12.06.01 : Recommended Practice for Wiring Methods for
Hazardous (Classified) Locations Instrumentation Part 1:
Intrinsic Safety
ISA S71.01 : Environmental Conditions for Process Management and
Control System, Temperature and Humidity

Equipments
ISA S71.04 : Environmental Equipment Conditions for Process

Management and Control System, Air-borne
Contaminants
ISA TR12.2 : Intrinsically Safe System Assessment Using the Entity
Concept
2.4.7.3 Emergency Shutdown System
IEC-61010 : Safety Standard for Electrical and Electronic Test,

Measuring, Controlling, and Related Equipment
IEC 61508 : Electrical, Electronic and Programmable Electronic Safety
Related Systems.
IEC 61511 : Functional Safety: Safety Instrumented Systems for the
Process Industry
IEC 62061 : Safety Standard for Electrical and Electronic Test,
Measuring, Controlling, and Related Equipment
ANSI/ISA 84.00.01 : Safety Instrumented System for process industries
ISA TR 84.00.02 : Safety Instrumented Functions (SIF) - Safety Integrity Level (SIL)
Evaluation Techniques
2.4.7.4 Flow Measurement
API RP 550 : Installation of flow instruments

ASME B16.36 : Orifice Flanges
ISA RP 3.2 : Nozzles and Venturi Tubes Inserted in Filled Piping Circular
Profile
ISO 5167, BS 1042 : Measurement of Fluid Flow by Means of Orifice Plates,
ISO 5168 : Flow Measurement: Calculation of Errors
ISO TR 15377 : Measurement of fluid flow by means of pressure differential
devices - Guidelines for the specification of orifice plates,
nozzles and Venturi tubes beyond the scope of ISO 5167
R.W. Miller Measurement of fluid flow by means of averaging
pitot tube
2.4.7.5 Pressure Measurement
ANSI B40.1 & : Gauges - Pressure and Vacuum Gauges

IS 3624 - 1987
BS 1780 : Bourdon Tube Pressure and Vacuum Gauges
BS EN 837 –1 : Pressure Gauges Part 1: Bourdon Tube Pressure Gauges -
Dimensions, Metrology, Requirements and Testing
BS EN 837 –3 : Pressure Gauges Part 3: Diaphragm and Capsule Pressure
Gauges - Dimensions, Metrology, Requirements and
Testing
2.4.7.6 Level Measurement
BS 3463 : Observation and Gauge Glasses for Pressure Vessels

Refer section 8 for Nucleonic level instruments
Statutory
Requirement

Equipments
2.4.7.7 Temperature Measurement
ANSI MC 96.1 : Temperature Measurement Thermocouples

ASME PTC 19.3TW : Performance Measurement Test Code for Temperature
Measurement
BS 4937 : Thermocouple Reference Tables
BS 5235 : Dial Type Expansion Thermometers
BS EN 13190 : Dial type expansion thermometers
IEC 60584 (All : International Thermocouple Standard Sections), BS 4937
ISO 8310, ASTM 14.03 : Temperature Measurement Systems
IEC 60751 : Industrial platinum resistance thermometers and platinum
temperature sensors.
2.4.7.8 Valves
ANSI B 46.1 : Surface texture (gasket seating area)

API 521 : Pressure Relieving and Depressurizing Systems
API 525 : Test procedure for pressure relieving devices, against
various back pressure
API 526 : Flanged Steel Pressure Relief Valves
API 527 : Seat Tightness of Safety Relief Valves
API 570 : Inspection of Pressure Relieving Device
API 598 : Valve Inspection and Testing
API 603 : Class 150, cast, corrosion-resistant Flanged end Gate
valves
API 607 : Fire test for soft seated quarter turn valves (butterfly, ball)
API 608 : Metal ball valves-flanged, Threaded and butt welding
ends
API 609 : Butterfly Valves: Double flanged, Lug and Wafer
Type. Face to Face Dimensions
API 6D : Specifications for Pipeline Valves
API 6FA : Specification for fire test for valves
ASME B 16.10 : Face to Face and End to End Dimensions of Valves
ASME B 16.34 : Valves—Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End
ASME B16.5 : Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
API RP520 Pt 1 and 2 : Sizing, Selection and Installation of Pressure Relieving
Systems in Refineries
ANSI B16.37, API 598 : Hydrostatic Testing of Control Valves
ANSI B16.104 and : Control Valve Seat Leakage
FCI 70-2
BS 2757-3 : Solenoid valve coil insulation
BS 2915 : Specification for bursting, dISc and bursting dISc devices
BS 5155 : Butterfly Valves
BS 6364 : Valves for Cryogenic Service
BS 6755 part 1and 2 : Testing of Valves
BS EN 12266-1 and 2
BS EN ISO 10497 : Testing of valves — Fire type-testing requirements
BS EN ISO 17292 : Metal ball valves for petroleum, petrochemical and allied
industries - Supersedes BS 5351
IEC 60534 : Industrial-Process Control Valves
ISA 93 : Standard Method for the Evaluation of External Leakage
of Manual and Automated On-Off Valves

Equipments
ISA S75 (All Section) : Control Valve Standards

ISO 4126 : Safety devices for protection against excessive pressure
ISO 5752 : Metal valves used in flanged pipe system face to face and
center to face dimensions
ISO 6718 : Bursting Discs and Bursting Discs Devices
2.5 Signal Transmission
The standard signals for transmitting measuring and control signals shall be as follows.
1. 4 to 20 mA HART– According to Namur NE43. Transmitter shall be of the 2-wire type with
auxiliary power supply via the signal line (loop powered). Wherever 2 wire transmitters are
not available (e.g. magnetic flow meters) 4 wire transmitter shall be used.
2. Digital field bus signal (e.g. Profibus DP)
3. The standard range of pneumatic control equipment shall be 0.2 - 1.0 bar g.
2.6 Limitations on Selection of Instruments
All instruments and associated items shall be of heavy duty industrial type and shall be suitable
for use in the stated environment. Tried and tested equipment shall be used. Instrumentation
specified shall generally not be approaching obsolescence and shall have maintenance spares
available for a period not shorter than 25 years (15 years in active phase+10 years for spares &
technical support). Aluminum and aluminum alloys shall be avoided. Where use of such alloys
cannot be avoided the equipment shall be epoxy coated and meet the requirements of the stated
environment and hazardous area classification. The ranges of all pressure and temperature
gauges shall be standardized. Use of process switches shall be minimized.
3.0 Instrument Component Identification Philosophy
3.1 Instrument Identification Labels
All instrument items shall be permanently and clearly marked with a stainless steel, or corrosion
resistant labels as follows :-
Nameplate : Shall include proprietary manufacturer’s details.
Certification Plate : As applicable
Tag No : Each instrument shall be provided with a stainless steel tag number
plate/label with the full alpha/numeric tag number hard stamped, or
deep engraved, permanently attached.
The tag number plate/label may be integral with the “Nameplate” provided the tag number is
large, clear and easily read in the final installed position.
Exceptions to the above shall be pressure gauges and dial type temperature indicators which
shall have the tag number plate/label attached via stainless steel wire of 1.0 mm minimum
diameter or as per manufacturing standard.
Each instrument cable shall carry a tag sign in accordance with hook up drawing.
For the special function of Ex & SIL instruments, a separate tag plate shall be mounted with the
following information:
1. Sign with the text “Ex” in white on a blue color tag.

Equipments
2. Sign with the text “SIL” in black on a yellow color tag.
3.2 Identification Labels Miscellaneous
Equipment such as cabinets, panels, junction boxes, analyzer cabinets etc. shall be identified with
Tags, Names etc.
4.0 Inspection and testing
4.1 Basis of tests
All instruments shall be inspected & routine tested as per relevant Indian standards at the
manufacturer’s works & type tested as per purchase order prior to dispatch to site. After receipt
on site, the equipment/instruments will be inspected once more for any damage in transit. After
installation & before commissioning, pre–commissioning tests will be carried out. Acceptance of
the equipment shall be based on a series of tests designed to provide a formal basis for verifying
that the operation of equipment provided meets the overall requirements of the specification.
All testing shall be fully documented and both test format documentation shall be subject to
approval by the OWNER's ENGINEER prior to commencement of tests.
A functional test is required to check the configuration of the programmable electronics system
(PLC, dedicated controllers, etc.). Loop test shall, also be performed by package supplier.
Shutdown and interlock response shall be checked against the shutdown/interlock logic
diagrams and cause/effect drawings.
The complete interlock system shall then be checked for correct sequence of operation. Each
interlock input and output shall be tested for functionality.
Serial communication shall be tested for correct functionality of the channels. They can be tested
locally with a laptop computer, by checking the program protocol, baud rate, to assure that
communication is successfully achieved
An integration test to corroborate the flawless communication of package PLC's to the DCS.
A functional test is required to check that the equipment is immune to spurious outputs,
spurious process indications, or damage due to RFI (Radio Frequency Interference), EMI
(Electromagnetic Interference), or induced switching surge as per IEC 61000
4.2 Test programme
All inspection and test activities shall be included in the supplier Quality plan.
Data Links – The vendor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the OWNER's ENGINEER the
successful implementation of all data links to/from equipment specified in This specification by
real integrated tests on site.
4.3 Test certificates and reports
Copies of handwritten (or typed) test reports shall be provided to the OWNER's ENGINEER at
the time of testing. Copies of typewritten official certificates complete with all necessary details
shall be supplied to OWNER's ENGINEER for his approval as soon as possible and in any case
within five (5) days of the completion of the test. Number of copies shall be in accordance with
Equipments
contract requirements.
Sufficient information, including the OWNER's order number, OWNER's order reference and
heading serial numbers, catalogue numbers and other identifying marks, shall be given on each
test certificate to enable the equipment to which the certificate refers to be positively identified.
The results of all tests and checks are to be recorded in the form of inspection certificate copies of
which shall be supplied to the OWNER's ENGINEER.
5.0 Engineering and selection of field instruments
1. Material of construction for process instrumentation equipment shall conform to applicable

process, mechanical & ambient requirements as well as vessels & piping specifications.
2. Any use of non – conforming materials or if not conforming to process, mechanical or
ambience conditions shall not be used.
3. All instrumentation equipment shall conform to applicable codes & standards.
4. Material identification certificates shall be provided when required.
5. Name plate marking is mandatory for all instrumentation equipment & shall bear all relevant
applicable data such as model, serial number, calibration, classification, certification etc..
6. All instrumentation equipment shall conform to applicable area classification requirements.
7. Silicone filling fluids for diaphragm seals or capillary installations is strictly prohibited.
8. Any use of silicone shall require special permit.
9. Instruments shall have integral (local) display & show the main process parameter including
engineering units during normal operation. The display shall be orientated for maximum
readability.
10. Temperature instruments do not require integral (local) display.
11. Instrumentation equipment shall generally be designed for –
24 VDC Power supply.

a.
4 – 20 mA, SMART analogue shall conform to applicable NAMUR standard.
b.
Digital on / off signal shall conform to applicable NAMUR standard.
c.
HART compatibility for remote configuration & data input & output.
d.
12. See also refer section : "2.1 general requirements for instrumentation".
13. The specification mentioned in below subsequent sections are minimum. If vendor
encounters any instrument for which the specification are not mentioned, the vendor can
submit the specification/data sheet of instrument for approval to OWNER's ENGINEER.
5.1 Pressure Measurement
5.1.1 Local pressure gauge
1. Measuring range selected shall be such that normal indication is between 60% and 80% of
range. However, maximum operating value shall not be more than 90% of range.
2. All local pressure gauges shall be bourdon/diaphragm type of materials SS316. Material of
movement shall be SS 304. Casing material shall be stainless steel. Superior materials will be
considered only if process condition demands. Pulsation damper per glycerine filled case
shall be used wherever pulsation pressure occurs in process.
3. For temperature greater than 80 °C, necessary precautions will be considered like used of
siphon in steam services.

Equipments
4. Diaphragm seals type will be considered for viscous slurry services.
5. Dial size for local gauges will be 100 mm.
6. Pressure instruments used on vacuum service shall have under-range protection of full
vacuum.
7. Gauges exposed to vibration or process pulsations shall be glycerine filled and shall be fitted
with pulsation dampers of the same material as the element. This clause is also applicable to
gauges in pump discharge service.
8. Gauge connection shall be at the bottom. It shall be possible to mount the gauge facing the
desired reading angle/position.
9. Gauges will be supplied with engraved labels stating tag no. These labels will be
manufactured from W/B/W traffolyte or equal and suitable for fixing to body of gauge after
installation.
10. Ranges shall be selected from the standard list in BS EN 837-1.
11. Bellows or diaphragm seal type pressure gauges shall be used in low pressure applications.
12. Black or red text on white background.Black text for gauge pressure & red text for negative
pressure
13. Valve manifold assembly of block & bleed type shall be mandatory giving that the process
conditions allows it.
14. Mandatory Considerations

a. Process temperature (siphon or extend impulse piping)
b. Ambient temperature (freezing, sun cover)
c. Media properties (crystallization, clogging, viscous)
d. Under & over range protection
e. Physical parameters (vibrations, pulsation, barometric pressure)
f. Explosive atmospheric
g. Accuracy
5.1.2 Pressure transmitter
1. Pressure Transmitters shall be of electrical/ digital type based on capacitance, piezo

resistance or strain gauge principle.
2. Range in normal conditions 40 – 60 %. Maximum 80%.
3. Low pressure ranges (-1 bar g to 2 bar g) use differential pressure technique.
4. Valve manifold assembly of block & bleed type shall be mandatory if process conditions
allows it. Not suitable for media codes CaFx, ML, PE, PEx.
5. Diaphragm seals with larger filling fluid volumes shall be used with caution.
6. Mandatory considerations :
a. Process temperature (syphon or extended impulse piping)
b. Ambient temperature (freezing, sun cover)
c. Media properties (crystallization, clogging, viscous).
d. Under & over range protection.

Equipments
e. Physical parameters (vibrations, pulsation, barometric pressure)

f. Explosive atmosphere
g. Accuracy, stability & reliability
7. Top entry shall be avoided as water ingress through top entry may lead to
corrosion/malfunction etc.
5.2 Temperature measurement
5.2.1 General
1. Temperature sensors shall be thermocouple or RTD type. RTD's shall be preffered.
2. Installation in thermowell is mandatory unless specifically requested otherwise stress

calculations are mandatory for all temperature installations.
3. Transmitters shall be head mount type as standard.
4. Temperature elements shall be mineral insulated spring loaded against the bottom of the
thermowell, sheathed to 6mm diameter “ungrounded” type except where averaging or
differential thermocouples are required.
5. Sheathing material shall be constructed from a seamless tube with a wall thickness of at least
2 mm.
6. Response time must be considered & relevant to its use when designing the temperature
instrument.
7. For installation of thermowell in horizontal/vertical line, minimum line size IS 3". For line
size smaller than 3", pipe expander of 3" shall be provided.
8. For process connection kindly refersection 10. "Installation detail". MOC & pressure rating
shall be same as pipe MOC & rating
9. RTD/TC's head shall have spring loaded terminals to reduce vibration effect.
10. All applications shall use duplex element RTD's. The element head shall have 2 cable entries,
one of which shall be fitted with a certified plug.
5.2.2 Temperature Gauges
1. Local indication of temperature shall be by bi-metallic every angle type dial thermometers
calibrated in °C.
2. Dial shall be 100 mm in diameter and shall have black numerals on a white background as
standard.
3. Capillary lengths shall be manufacturer/supplier’s standard up to a maximum of 3 meters

and shall include temperature compensation where required.
4. Range in normal conditions 40 – 60 %. Maximum 80%.

Equipments
5. Connection between the gauge & thermowell shall be by adjustable unions.
a. Under & over range protection
b. Physical parameters (vibrations)
c. Explosive atmosphere
d. Accuracy
5.2.3 Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD's)
1. RTD elements shall be Platinum type PT-100 type class A comply with IEC – 60751.
2. RTDs shall be used up to 350 °C.
3. Four wire elements shall be used with head mounted temperature transmitters.
4. All applications shall use duplex element RTD's. The element head shall have 2 cable entries,
one of which shall be fitted with a certified plug.
5.2.4 Thermocouples
1. Thermocouples (TC's) shall comply with ANSI MC-96.1.

2. TC's shall be mineral insulated spring loaded against the bottom of the thermowell, sheathed
to 6mm diameter “ungrounded” type except where averaging or differential thermocouples
are required.
3. Larger diameter sheaths may be used for special applications.
4. TC sheathing material shall be SS316 stainless steel as a minimum, and shall be constructed
from a seamless tube with a wall thickness of at least 1mm.
5. TC's shall be supplied with head mount transmitters. Output shall be 4-20mA HART.
6. All thermocouples shall have duplex elements complete with 2 cable entries (1 plugged).
7. Type “J” and type “K” thermocouples shall be used as standard.
a. Type J : Iron/Copper - Nickel : 0 to +750 °C
b. Type K : Nickel – Chromium/Nickel–Aluminum : -200 to +1250 °C
5.2.5 Thermowell
1. Thermowell shall be tapered style drilled, machined & of solid material (bar stock).
2. The inner sizing of the thermowell must be relevant to the temperature element.
3. Use of support collars shall be avoided to the extent where no other reasonable parameters
can be changed for the thermowell to withstand the process conditions.
4. Flanges & weld filler must be of the same material as specified for the thermowell, & shall
have full penetration welds.
5. Test or spare thermowells that is not being used must be securely plugge
6. If thermowell is installed in elbow; minimum size IS DN80 the elbow can be sized up to
DN80 locally.
7. In lines greater than DN300 the thermowell immersion shall be 150mm minimum.
8. For temperature measurements in vessels and tanks, special consideration shall be taken for
immersion length regarding stress and product build-up. Take care with swirls in agitated
vessels creating a force on the thermowell.
9. Stress calculations & wake frequency calculation shall be done on every thermo well. Vendor
to submit the wake frequency calculation.

Equipments
5.3 Level measurement
5.3.1 General
Level instruments connected to vessels in clean, non-viscous services shall be mounted directly
on end connection and if required standpipes shall be considered for supporting purpose.
Radar is the preferred method for level measurement. Guided wave radar if no agitator, and non-
contact radar if the tank has agitator.
1. In extreme application, radioactive level measurement may be required but shall be subject
for project engineering approval.
2. Maximum length of each gauge instruments shall be limited to about 1500 mm. If greater
distance is to be covered, several instruments shall be considered with minimum overlapping
of about 50 mm. visible length of level gauge shall be nearly equal to centre to centre distance
between nozzles.
3. Level gauge instruments shall generally be flange with minimum 150# or as per rating of end
connections. Necessary vents and drains have to be provided.
4. The flanges of all level instruments shall meet pressure and temperature rating as per ANSI
B16.5.
5. Material of construction for level instrument cage or bodies and trim shall be suitable for the
process fluid, the temperature and pressure conditions, and shall conform to the vessel or
piping specifications.
6. All level instruments on the IBR equipment shall be in accordance with the requirement of
the ASME Boiler Code with IBR FORM IIIC certificate.
7. Gauge glasses shall be used for local level indication and shall be sized to cover operating
and shutdown level range.
8. Magnetic level gauge units using local indication shall be considered where applicable.
5.3.2 Level Gauges
1. Level gauges shall be metal tube magnetic follower type as standard. The gauge shall
provide visible coverage of complete level transmitter/controller range and the alarm/trip
level switches. In the case of differential pressure level transmitters where large spans are
involved a gauge located at the top, centre, and bottom of the installation shall be acceptable.
The maximum span of magnetic follower gauge shall be limited by the
manufacturer/supplier’s recommendations. Magnetic level gauges with a visible length
above 4.5 meters shall be subject to approval by the OWNER's ENGINEER.
2. Magnetic Level Gauges shall have bar type Indicator. The indicator colour shall be RED /
WHITE. The window of indicator and indicator colour shall not fade due to UV / IR
atmosphere.
3. Level gauges shall have top and bottom Isolation valves. Vent and Drain valves shall be

Equipments
fitted.
4. Gauges on vaporising service shall have oversize chambers.
5. Where magnetic follower type gauges cannot be used, transparent or reflex gauges shall be
specified.
6. Reflex gauges shall be used for clean service and have forged steel columns and toughened
Borosilicate glass.
7. Mandatory considerations for selection of level gauges:

a. Float type (density)
b. Ambient temperature (freezing, heat tracing)
c. Metal expansion/contraction (length)
d. Media properties (crystallization, clogging, viscous, heat tracing)
8. The level gauge chamber material shall be SS316 stainless steel as minimum. For acidic and
corrosive service PVC or PVDF or as specified by vendor/manufacturer material shall be
used for all wetted parts.
5.3.3 Displacer Level Transmitters
Displacer type transmitters shall be used only where other type of level instruments like GWR or
DP type level transmitters are not suitable. Displacer type transmitters shall be used for level
range measurements of up to 1.2 meters, except for continuous level measurement of solids or
where Displacer ‘stick up’ problems are encountered.
5.3.4 Mandatory considerations for selection of level transmitter
1. Ambient temperature (freezing, heat tracing)

2. Metal expansion/contraction (length)
3. Media properties (crystallization, clogging, viscous, heat tracing)
4. Accuracy, Reliability
5. Maintenance and calibration requirements
5.3.5 Guided Wave RADAR (GWR) Level Transmitters
1. Guided Wave Radar level devices shall be used in vessels where thers is no agitation
(agitator) of process & if non-contact type radar transmitters are not suitable.
2. GWR type transmitters shall be used for service with dielectric constant is greater than 1.4.
For lighter fluids like LPG/Propane/Propylene GWR should not be used though
theoretically viscosity may fall in range.
3. GWR level transmitters shall not be considered for following applications:

a. Dirty, sticky and viscous application (e.g. Sump level of OWS).
b. Heavy foaming services
c. Interfacing level with emulsion more than 5cm
d. Heavy boiling and flashing application.
4. Mandatory considerations for selection of GWR :

Equipments
a. Mounting position, restrictions and limitations (disturbing objects, inlet or outlets,

agitation, range, anchoring, grounding) see manufacturer’s manual for guidance.
b. Metal expansion/contraction (tensile load)
c. Nozzle requirements (height, size, formation)
d. Process conditions (coating, foaming, vapour, viscosity, dielectric constant, turbulence)
e. Accuracy
5. Electronic transmitters shall be 24V DC two wire 4-20 mA with HART output.
5.3.6 Non-contact Type RADAR Level Transmitters
1. Preference is for maximum use of Radar instruments for level measurement in vessels &
tanks. The suitabilityis determined by the dielectric constant of the process medium. Consult
the manufacturer / supplier for process application limits.
2. Radar level instruments are available with different type of antennas to suite process
application. Proper selection of antenna for process application as per manufactures standard
shall be done.
3. Electronic transmitters shall be 24V DC two wire 4-20 mA with HART output.
4. Mandatory considerations for selection of radar level transmitter:

agitation, range, beam angle) see manufacturer’s manual for guidance.
b. Nozzle requirements (height, size, formation)
c. Process conditions (coating, foaming, vapour, viscosity, dielectric constant, turbulence,
solids)
d. Antenna (process and mechanical conditions)
e. Accuracy
5.3.7 Ultrasonic Level Transmitters
1. Ultrasonic devices are used for measuring solids level in larger open vessels, bins or silos.
However, the measurement can be severely affected by interference from the dusty
atmosphere and background noise that can be experienced during filling operations.
Ultrasonic level devices are also affected by presence of vapour.
2. Ultrasonic level measuring devices are best suited for application in measuring slurry levels
in tanks, sumps, distribution boxes and in slop oil pits.
3. Electronic transmitters shall be 24V DC two wire ,4-20 mA with HART output.
4. Mandatory considerations for selection of ultrasonic level transmitter :

agitation, range, beam angle) see manufacturer’s manual for guidance.
b. Nozzle requirements (height, size, formation)
c. Process conditions (coating, foaming, vapour, viscosity, dielectric constant, turbulence,
solids)
d. Antenna (process and mechanical conditions)
e. Accuracy

Equipments
5.3.8 Differential Pressure Level Transmitters
1. Differential pressure transmitters shall be used for longer range spans and where the liquid is
viscous, flashing or subjected to agitation..
2. Transmitters for closed vessels shall have correction for suppression or elevation.
3. Transmitters used on viscous or corrosive fluids shall be supplied with diaphragm chemical
seals and armoured capillaries.
4. Capillaries shall be stainless steel.The capillary shall be suitably protected..
5. Mandatory considerations:
6. Process conditions (temperature, density, viscosity, crystallization, clogging, flashing,
purging).
7. Ambient temperature (freezing, sun cover, heat tracing).
8. Under -and over-range protection.
9. Physical parameters (vibrations, pulsation, barometric pressure).
10. Filing fluids in capillaries.
11. Accuracy, stability and reliability.
5.3.9 Level switches
1. Level switches shall only be used as part of extra safety in case of level transmitter
malfunctions. Vibrating fork type level switch is recommended.
2. Direct acting level switches shall be external cage float type with magnetically operated
(glandless) transmission of float movement to the switching element.
3. The coupling shall be shielded against accumulation of magnetic particles and provide high
integrity partitioning between process and electronics.
4. The float shall be of SS316 stainless steel as a minimum. Cages shall be carbon steel as
standard unless service conditions demand a higher specification.
5. Switches shall be hermetically sealed. Switches used in an intrinsically safe circuit shall be
rated at 24V DC, 500 mA, with noble metal or gold plated contacts.
6. Switches used in 230V AC circuits shall have contacts rated to 3 amps.
7. Switches output shall NAMUR as standard, DPDT contacts as alternative.
8. Capacitance type level switches shall be used if float type level switches are not suitable.
9. Mandatory specific considerations for level switches :

a. Process conditions (fibers, build-up, bridging, crystallization, clogging, dielectric
constant, splashing)
b. Physical parameters (vibrations, supports, distance, flow alignment)
5.4 Control Valve
5.4.1 General
1. Control valves shall be designed for throttling service.

Equipments
2. Valves of three inches or greater shall be fitted with lifting lugs to allow vertical lifting.
3. Valve shall be operated by pneumatic actuator. Actuators shall be operated with an electro-
pneumatic positioner.
4. Globe valve is recommended upto 4" sizes. Package vendor to select the suitable valve as per
process requirement. . The MOC and rating of the valve shall be as minimum as per pipe
MOC ( or superior) & rating.
5. Block valves shall be provided for all control emergency shutdown and depressurISing
valves.
6. Emergency shutdown and depressurising valves shall have lockable type Isolation valves but
shall not have hand wheels or bypass valves.
7. Smart positioners (HART capable) shall be used. For maintenance reasons, it is preferred to
use the same type of positioner on all control valves.
8. Limit switches can be assembled as accessory if required but shall not be standard. Limit
switch output type NAMUR as standard, DPDT contacts as alternative.
9. The control valve shall not be required to work outside the limit of 10% to 90% of their stroke
(The valve must be deigned to operate between 10% and 90% of the valve stroke to cover the
flow range).
10. The Cv of the valve shall be calculated on basis of 1.3 times the operating flow or of 1.1 times
the maximum flow (the highest value is chosen).
11. Flanged end connections are preferred for all valves. Flange rating, facing and finish will be
specified on the datasheets.
12. All valve tubing shall be SS.
13. Valve leakage class shall be as per ANSI FCI 70.2.
14. The valve characteristics shall be linear/equal percentage as per process demands.
15. Control valve shall be designed such that cavitation and flashing phenomenon are avoided. If
cavitation or flashing cannot be avoided flow straighter, stellite plug shall be considered.
5.4.2 Valves
1. The type of valve used is process, media and size specific. In general the following type of
valves are recommended;
a. Globe valve
b. Segmented ball valve
c. Butterfly valve
2. Globe type valve bodies shall be selected as standard.

3. Valve shall be equipped with hand wheel only if required by the application..

Equipments
5.4.3 Actuators
1. Control valves shall be pneumatically actuated by instrument air.
2. The actuator shall be of the spring-opposed diaphragm type. Piston type actuators shall only
be used where the required thrust of the stroke is greater than that available from a
diaphragm type actuator.
3. Actuator/diaphragm cases made from steel as a minimum. Yoke material shall be high-
tensile strength cast, or ductile iron as a minimum.
4. Diaphragms material shall be nylon reinforced neoprene or Buna N rubber or vendor to

select suitable diapragm material to achive desired performance & functionality.The
diaphragm shall be durable, reinforced & suitable for application..
5. Valve stem position indicators shall be fitted as standard showing open, closed and
incremental stroke positions.
6. For failure action and valve closure time reference shall be made to the control valve data
sheet.
7. Actuator tube fittings shall be stainless steel compression type. Fittings shall be double
ferrule type. Instrument tubing shall be 1/4", 3/8" and 1/2" PVC covered stainless steel tube
as required by application.
8. Mandatory considerations for selection of actuators :

a. Stroke time.
b. Process conditions (torque requirements, differential pressure force).
5.4.4 Valve Positioner
1. All valve positioners shall be digital / intelligent with self-diagnostic features. Valve
positioners shall be 4-20mA HART electro-pneumatic type as specified on the data sheet and
shall be fitted with supply, input signal and output pressure gauges and bypass switch
arrangement. Output to actuator shall be 0.2 to bar, direct acting as standard.
2. All positioners shall be certified Ex ’ia’ (intrinsically safe).
3. All positioners shall be with minimum IP65 weather protection.
4. Valve positioner shall be mounted on the valve and be fully assembled complete with all
necessary tubing. Air supply, output and signal gauges shall be provided as standard. For
maintenance reasons, it is preferred to use the same type of positioner on all control valves.
1) Stroke time

Equipments
5.4.5 Noise
Acceptable noise levels for rotating equipment’s shall be 75 dB(A) Leq during day time and 70
dB(A) Leq during night time as per the noise pollution (regulation and control ) rules, 2000 of
central pollution control board.
5.5 On - Off Valves (Automatic Shut - off Valves)
5.5.1 General
1. Unless otherwise specified, an automatic valve shall be designed for on/off service. Valve
sizes & requirements as per piping specification.
2. Valves of three inches or greater shall be fitted with lifting lugs to allow vertical lifting.
3. Valve shall be operated by pneumatic actuator.
4. The valve shall be delivered complete with actuator and accessories preassembled.
5. All valve accessories shall be streamlined with rOWNER's ENGINEERect to maintenance
and spare-part holding. Valve shall be equipped with lock out module to conform to LoToTo
requirements.
5.5.2 Actuator
1. Generally single acting spring returned actuators are used unless otherwise specified.
2. The actuator shall be sized to operate at an air supply of minimum 4.0 bar (g).
3. The selected actuator shall have a "break" torque of at least 25% higher than the torque
requirements of the valve. In the case of spring return actuators, the "end" torque shall be
25% greater than the torque requirements of the valve.
4. The operation speed must be chosen to comply with the time indicated in the data sheet, and
with the construction characteristics of the valve. A maximum time of 10 seconds shall be
achieved.
5. Failure action to be as per the defined safety requirements of the specific valve.
6. Mechanical failure position (open/close) indication shall be part of the assembly.
7. Actuator sizing calculation is mandatory for all On/Off valves. It shall be performed by the
vendor & subject for project engineering approval.
8. Actuators shall be operated by a local attached solenoid valve
9. Mandatory considerations for selection of instruments:

a. Torque requirements (spare torque)
b. Operation speed (according to specification)
c. Spare air tank (in case of air failure)
d. Actuator orientation (in-line, cross-line)
e. Fail safe position (Open/Close)

Equipments
5.5.3 Limit switch / Position Indicator
1. When required, limit switches (preferably inductive type) shall be provided and assembled
with the actuator and be able to detect both open and closed position as standard.
2. Limit switch output type NAMUR as standard, DPDT contacts as alternative.
3. For hazardous area the limit switches shall be intrinsically safe.
5.5.4 Solenoid Valve
1. Solenoid coil shall be suitable for 24V DC operation.

2. NAMUR mount style, assembled on the actuator.
3. Solenoid valve suitable for the application with manual override
4. Tube fittings shall be stainless steel compression type.
5.5.5 Valve marking
1. Each valve shall have a stainless-steel nameplate permanently fastened to the superstructure,
which shall be visible when the valve is in service and fully insulated.
2. This nameplate shall include the following information:

a. Manufacturer/Supplier’s name trademark
b. Valve serial number and model number
c. Valve tag number
d. Valve type
e. Maximum valve body pressure rating
f. Valve body material and nominal pipe size
g. Trim material, size and characteristics
h. Stem travel in mm
i. Valve action on air failure
j. Operating signal range
k. Bench set
l. Maximum Design Cv
3. In addition, each valve shall have an arrow on the body indicating the direction of Flow.
5.6 Flow measurement
5.6.1 General
1. Flow meters selection shall be based upon the type of fluid being measured, accuracy
requirements, rang ability and turndown requirements, on-line maintenance capability and
diagnostics as well as process condition.
2. In-line flow instruments shall have a direction of flow indication clearly marked and easily
visible in the final installed position. Where in-line instrument are not justifiable, pressure
differential type flow meters shall be considered.
3. Process connection shall be flanged as standard.
4. For orifice flanges ANSI B16.36 shall follow.

Equipments
5. Rotameter shall be used for local flow indication in clean fluid and pipe size 2 inches and
smaller Vortex meters shall be used for flow measurement in clean fluid, steam application
on pipe size up to DN80. For superheated steam application an additional temperature
sensor may be required to ensure proper mass calculation. Vortex can also be considered
when the conductivity is too low as replacement of magnetic.
6. Orifice Plates, Average Pitot Tubes, Flow Nozzle or Venturi tubes shall be used for flow
measurement in clean fluids depending on application. Average pilot tubes are generally
used for Ducts, Refractory lined pipes in large size for clean service application.
7. Coroiolis Flow meters can be considered where process condition prohibits use of other type
of flow meters and high accuracy is required. (e.g. variation in density).
8. Ultrasonic flow meters shall be used for flow measurement where significant quantities of
suspended solids or entrained gas are present. The use of ultrasonic flow meters shall be
considered for use on line size above 8 inch and for large turn down and where pressure
drop is not permitted.
5.6.2 Turbine Meter
1. Turbine meters shall have flanged connections and the body material shall be carbon steel
with stainless steel internals, unless the application requires other materials as specified on.
2. The design, construction, installation and calibration of turbine meter are in accordance with
API MPMS Ch 5.3.
3. Turbine meters shall be used in single phase flow, two phase condition shall be avoided.
4. Turbine meters shall be sized such that they operate in the band 20 to 80 percent of linear
range.
5. Turbine meter rotors shall be hydraulically balanced, and be of journal bearing construction.
Rotor shaft and journal bearing shall be made from tungsten carbide.
6. Pick-up coils shall be hermetically sealed or potted. Head mounted pre-amplifiers shall be
used. In case of high temperature services, remote mounted pre amplifier assembly can be
used.
7. In-line turbine flow meters shall have rotors module removable from top of meter through a
special flange or through bore of meter for meters larger than 3 inch size.
8. For custody transfer and allocation applications, turbine metes shall be specified with dual
pick-up connection 90° apart, one of measurement and the other for calibration / testing
purpose.
9. The use of turbine meters is normally limited to products with relatively low viscosities,
typically maximum 10 mm2/s (10 cSt). Viscosity fluctuations affect the accuracy of meter.
10. Turbine meters shall not be used in pulsating or fluctuating service as This will introduce
measurement error.

Equipments
11. The meters shall be protected against damage due to over-speeding or hydraulic shock, e.g.
caused by the quick opening and closing of valves. In liquid service, adequate filtering and
degassing shall be provided upstream of the meter.
12. Straight length and strainer requirement shall follow manufacture / supplier
recommendation. Flow straightner shall be used with Turbine meters if specified by
manufacturer / supplier to meet the required flow meter performance.
13. Turbine meters shall be preferably installed in horizontal position.
14. Turbine meter shall operate on 24 VDC power supply unless otherwise stated.
15. Direction of flow shall be clearly marked on the Turbine meters.
5.6.3 Positive Displacement (PD) Meters
1. Positive displacement meters shall not be selected for use with non-lubricating liquids.
2. Positive displacement (PD) meter shall be flanged connection. The body material shall be
suitable as per application or stainless steel as minimum.
3. The design, construction, installation and calibration of Positive Displacement meter are in
accordance with API MPMS Ch 5.2.
4. Positive displacement meters shall be preferably installed in horizontal position. Inlet and
outlet port shall be clearly marked to indicate proper flow direction.
5. PD meters shall not be selected for use with non-lubricating liquids such as LPG or gasoline.
6. Positive Displacement meters shall operate on 24V DC +10%, power supply unless otherwise
stated.
7. Consideration should be given to limiting the maximum pressure drop, especially when the
meter is used with liquids having a high viscosity when starting from cold.
5.6.4 Vortex flow meter
1. Vortex shedding flow meter shall be the preferred technique for analogue volumetric flow
measurement in clean and homogenous and low electrically conductive liquids, steam,
vapours and gases.
2. The Reynolds number shall be at least 20,000 and the minimum flow velocity shall be as
specified by the manufacturer/ supplier, in order to achieve reliable measurement.
3. Vortex metes shall be sized for minimum conditions. If two sizes of vortex flow metes are
both able to cover the minimum and maximum flow rate, the smaller meter shall be selected.
4. Vortex flow meters should not be used in wet gas, wet steam, and very viscous, waxy or
erosive service.
5. Pressure drop with vortex flow meter can be high and needs to be incorporated into the

Equipments
system pressure drop to avoid cavitations in the meter.
6. The selection of lowest possible cut-off point is particularly critical for meter used in closed
loop application, as vortex shedding introduces instability (hunting) at the cut-off point. If
the meter is expected to be operated within 10% of the cut-off, another type of meter shall be
selected.
7. Vortex flow meters shall not be used in oscillating flows or mechanical vibration or
compressor discharge.
8. Vortex flow meters shall be provided with process flanges. The use of wafer type vortex flow
meters requires approval of the OWNER's ENGINEER.
9. Straight length requirements shall be as specified by the manufacturer/supplier. If the meter

size is smaller than the line size, concentric pipe reducers shall be used. Eccentric reducers
shall not be used, as they severely disturb the flow profile. Meter shall be installed only after
flushing or air blowing activities have been completed.
10. Flow direction shall be permanently marked on the meter body.
11. All transmitters shall be high performance type microprocessor based ‘SMART’ type with
HART protocol unless stated otherwise.
12. Mandatory Considerations :

a. Process conditions (flow profile, temperature, pressure/vacuum, turbulence, velocity,
solids, abrasion, range, buildup, corrosiveness, cleaning requirements, flashing, pressure
drop, cavitation)
b. Mechanical conditions (vibrations, orientation, straight lengths, size, weight, accessibility,
pipe reducer type)
c. Accuracy
5.6.5 Electromagnetic Flow Meters
1. Electromagnetic flow meters shall be used for clean, dirty and greasy fluids, untreated
sewage and fluids containing solids.
2. Electromagnetic flow meters are insensitive to low amounts (0-5 vol %) of entrained gases.
The meter will read “high” with larger quantities of gases in the liquid. Furthermore, gas
bubbles can cause problems when they accumulate around the electrodes. If gases are
entrained in the liquid, the meter shall be installed in a vertical process line.
3. Flow meter liner material and electrode material selection shall be suitable with process
application.
4. A minimum conductivity of 5 μS/cm and a minimum fluid velocity of 0.5 m/sec shall be
required to use electromagnetic flow meters. In case the process parameters do not satisfy
these prerequisite; electromagnetic flow meter should be considered in consultation with the
meter manufacturer/supplier.
5. Transmitter shall operate on 24 VDC power supply unless otherwise stated.

Equipments
6. Mandatory Considerations:
a. Process conditions (Temperature, pressure/vacuum, conductivity, turbulence, velocity,
solids, abrasion, range, gases, buildup, corrosiveness, cleaning requirements, liquid fill,
flashing, pressure drop, density)
b. Mechanical conditions (vibrations, orientation, straight lengths, size, weight, lining
material, cathodic protection, accessibility)
c. Electrical conditions (grounding, cable lengths, magnetic fields and interference).
d. Accuracy
5.6.6 Ultrasonic Flow Meters
1. Only ultrasonic flow meters based on the “time-of-flight” method shall be used. Meters based
on the “Doppler” principle are less accurate and shall not be used.
2. Ultrasonic flow meters shall be considered for use on large lines (≥ 18”) and for large turn
downs and where pressure drop is not permitted.
3. Ultrasonic flow meters shall not be used in fluids with particles, bubbles or water droplets in
oil.
4. Mandatory Considerations:
a. Process conditions (Temperature, pressure/vacuum, conductivity, turbulence, velocity,
solids, abrasion, range, gases, buildup, corrosiveness, cleaning requirements, liquid fill,
flashing, pressure drop, density)
b. Mechanical conditions (vibrations, orientation, straight lengths, size, weight, lining
material, cathodic protection, accessibility)
c. Electrical conditions (grounding, cable lengths, magnetic fields and interference).
d. Accuracy
5.6.7 Coroiolis Flow Meters
1. Coroiolis flow meter shall be used when other techniques fails due to fluid properties such as
flow profile, density changes or when high accuracy is required for example at custody
transfer applications.
2. The normal flow rate of coroiolis flow meter shall be max. 70% of range.
3. Coroiolis meters shall be sized so the maximum full scale flow rate is in the upper one –third
of the meter range.
4. Stainless steel metering tubes shall not be used for fluids containing halogens, even if present
only in minute concentrations, as the vibration of the tube will induce stress corrosion.
Hastelloy tubes shall be specified for all applications containing halogens.
5. Manufacturer / Supplier installation, upstream downstream requirement and mounting

recommendation shall be followed. Meter shall be properly supported as specified by the
Manufacturer / Supplier.
6. The tubes shall be straight or U type depending on process condition.
7. Mandatory Considerations :

Equipments
8. Process conditions (temperature, pressure/vacuum, abrasion, range, velocity, corrosiveness,

cleaning requirements, liquid fill, flashing, pressure drop, cavitation, clogging /
crystallization, heat tracing).
9. Mechanical conditions (vibrations, orientation, size, weight, cathodic protection,
accessibility).
10. Electrical conditions (grounding, cable lengths).
11. Accuracy.
5.6.8 Variable area flow meter (Rotameter)
1. Rotameter shall be normally selected for line size less than 3”, same shall be with local
indicator.
2. Rotameter shall be selected for clean liquids or gases, which do not solidify or contain
particles.
3. Variable area flow meters used in process applications can be installed as local indicators,
equipped with transmitters or a combination of the two, with or without alarms.
4. Metal Tube
a. Rotameter shall be normally metal tube type for process fluids. Material of construction
shall be selected according to process requirements and fluids.
b. Metal type rotameter preferred for process application or in hazardous service.
c. Linkage between float and indicator/transmitter unit shall be of glandless (e.g. magnetic)
type.
d. Indicator scales shall be direct reading in engineering units as shown on the individual
instrument data sheets. Range shall be selected so that normal flow is within 50% to 60%
of the maximum range.
5.6.8.1 Glass Tube
1. Glass measuring tubes shall only be used for non-critical services like purge application and
analyzer sampling flows.
2. The scales for water service shall be calibrated for water flow at 20°C.
3. The scales for air or nitrogen service shall be calibrated for air at 0°C and 101,33KPa.
4. Process connection shall generally be self-sealing ½” thread or flanged. Preference shall be
given for flange connection.
5.6.8.2 The following accessories shall be supplied with the meter:
1. Integral needle valve on inlet

2. Integral check ball on outlet
3. Integrally mounted differential flow regulator
4. A flush mounting panel kit.
5.7 Gas detection (process area)
1. Gas detection transmitter shall have built in diagnostics feature.

Equipments
2. The gas detection transmitters may be connected directly to the DCS system using 4-20mA
HART signal, or to a central dedicated control unit.
3. The gas sensor shall be selected based on process media and supplier knowledge.
4. The exact physical location for the gas detection instruments indicated on the P&ID shall be
verified with supplier.
5. Gas detection principal shall be to measure a specified gas concentration as detected; the
sensor response serves as the reference point or scale. When the sensors response surpasses a
certain pre-set level, an alarm will activate to warn the user. There are various types of
detectors available and the majority serves the same function: to monitor and warn of a
dangerous gas level. However, when considering what type of detector to install, it is helpful
to consider the different sensor technologies.
5.8 Process analyser
5.8.1 In-line process analysers
1. In-line process analysers may be for example pH/Conductivity/Turbidity/Density.

2. The analysers shall be connected using 4-20 mA SMART/HART.
3. Special process connections/bypass pipes/retraction valves shall be defined during
detailengineering.
5.8.2 On-line process analyser systems
1. Analyser system may be for TOC/VOC/CO2/NOx.

2. Complex process analyser systems shall be mounted in enclosure as a complete package,
including sample system from supplier.
6.0 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC)
1. Wherever required, package units shall be controlled by PLC's. PLC make shall be as as per
approved list as mentioned in this specification.
2. PLC shall be configured to provide the control and safety functions for the package
operation.
The following minimum requirements/configuration shall be applied to PLCs:
a CPU's (Central Processing Unit) mounted in rack
b Input/ Output Modules (mounted in local and remote rack)
c Separate redundant power supply to individual I/ O rack and processor. In case, barriers
are powered from power rail/mother board, then power redundancy shall be maintained
up to power rail/mother board.
d Communication Subsystem (I/O system and DCS Interface)
e Local Operator Interface (Panel mounted HMI or separate PC based HMI)
f PLC Shall be time synchronized with the DCS.
g System software required to provide a complete operable solution e.g. for logic
development/modification, HMI/oprator station and I/O scheduling etc.
3. CPU's shall be redundant with simplex I/O modules used for Control applications.
4. PLC system shall be of modular in design. Vendor shall specify the expansion capabilities of

Equipments
their PLC systems. PLC systems shall allow on line modifications and card replacement.
5. The package PLC shall be able to carry out monitoring, control and shutdown functions
independent of DCS.
6. Galvanic Isolators shall be provided as necessary for Intrinsically Safe circuits.

Instrumentation if required for hazardous areas, shall be intrinsically safe and IEC approved.
Inputs from transmitter shall generally be of the SMART type. Hand held configurators shall
be provided for these devices to assist in factory testing and site installation.
7. For each package control system, self diagnostic alarms shall be made available in Control
room/Equipment room for hardware failure and maintenance/troubleshooting.
8. There shall be a provision within the PLC to be connected to a plant wide network with
similar PLC's. This network connection shall be separate from that used for DCS connectivity.
The PLC network shall be non-redundant.
9. Each PLC shall be provided with a programming device such as a laptop, with necessary
licensed software and HMI display. Manufacture shall provide password access to PLC
program. The local HMI shall be with touch screens.
10. All relevant alarm/event logging and historical trending for all process and machine
parameters to be provided.
11. Additional ‘Confirm’ key to be configured in HMI graphic for all actions (STOP) from HMI.
12. In case of common PLC controlling multiple streams, each stream shall have independent
I/O rack and partition in PLC programs for each stream.
13. Package vendor shall provide profibus DP signal address list.
14. Packager vendor shall provide trip & alarm list, loop diagrams & functional logic diagram for
PLC's.
15. Full documentation of all applications software for the system packages is required. Copies
of the program including the source codes for the software shall include tag names and all
comments.
16. Programming language in PLC shall follow IEC 61131-3 standards using Functional Block
Diagram (FBD), Sequential Function Charts (SFC) and Structured Text (ST). Ladder (LD)
logic may be used as exception in some cases.
17. Standard objects such as controllers, indication, totalizers, motor and valve controls shall be
based on library standards developed for the chemical process industry.
18. A selected number of hardwired signals shall be wired from package PLC to DCS ( if
required) and shall be specified in the respective package specification
19. Vendor to perform the HAZOP and SIL study in order to define the SIL level of the
Instrument.

Equipments
7.0 Field instrument parameterization and configuration
1. Instrument shall be pre-configured with scaling, tagging and basic setting by the supplier
upon delivery.
2. Instrument parameter setting shall be documented in a parameter list according to the

requirements defined by the project.
3. Local display that allows for configuration of the instrument shall be password protected to
prevent unauthorized access.
4. Only special functionality shall require the connection of a PC with special configuration
application.
8.0 Erection Hardware
8.1 Local Control Panels (Instrument Panel)
1. Local field mounted panels shall be made from 316 stainless steel, or mild steel painted in
accordance with the Standard Specification of Painting.
2. Panels for mounting instrumentation on package units shall preferably be installed on the
package within Manufacturer/Supplier’s scope limits. Where space and access is limited,
relocation adjacent to the package may be considered.
3. Panels are shall be shipped with all instruments and components installed and fully piped
and wired.
4. Panels are shall be built by specialized panel manufacturers. All panels are subject to
inspection and functional test by OWNER's ENGINEER.
5. Panel shall normally be of totally enclosed cubicle type, weather proofed to IP-66 minimum if
installed outdoors or in freely ventilated areas and IP -54, if installed in enclosed areas. They
shall comply with the area classification requirements and be fitted with side or rear doors to
suit location and access.
6. Instruments on process services (oil, water, steam, etc.) shall not be installed in cabinets
containing electrical equipment or components. If unavoidable, sealed compartments shall be
provided.
7. Press-formed methods shall be used for construction with internal reinforcement to prevent
deformation and flexing. 3 mm minimum thickness mild steel zinccoated sheet shall be used
for plates.
8. Access shall be provided within the panel to all instruments and components requiring
operation and maintenance.
9. Panel finish shall be of a high and durable quality suitable for the environment. This will
normally be an air-dried epoxy type paint of semigloss texture to the color given in the
equipment specification. Manufacturer/Supplier shall submit a painting specification for
approval prior to proceeding with manufacturer.Blemishes, scratches or chips in the finished
surface shall not be accepted.
10. Name plate of the laminated plastic type shall be provided under each instrument at both
front and rear of panel. On the front, they shall be engraved with tag number and duty and at
the rear with tag number only. Nameplates shall be secured with self-tapping screws. A
nameplate schedule shall be provided by Manufacturer/Supplier for approval prior to
manufacturer.. .
11. All wires will be terminated to Klippon/Phoenix/Wago (or equal) terminals mounted on
DIN rail. Terminals shall be SAK 2.5 type or equivalent, knife edge disconnect type shall be

Equipments
provided for field signals, hinge on the field side. Terminals shall be spring loaded type.
Fused terminals shall be used for powered outputs.
12. Instruments requiring electrical power shall be fed from a fused mains isolator, with MCB for
each consumer. Fused terminals shall be provided in outputs to solenoid valves
13. Panel shall be supplied with the panel mounted HMI or separate PC based HMI. HMI shall
be installed with antivirus software, provision should be there to disable mass storage
devices with separate administrative environment to enhance IT security.
14. Panel door with lock and key shall be provided
15. Panel lighting-internal and external (wherever required) shall be provided. Panel door switch
shall be provided and shall have an interlock with the internal tube light on/off operation.
16. All push button shall be supplied with protective shroud and cover.
17. Maintenance socket shall be provided, it shall be of universal type.
18. Any control panels supplied by Manufacturer/Supplier shall be identified in the proposal.
19. Panels housing electronic instruments / programmable logic controllers etc. are required
shall be located in air-conditioned environment.
20. Vendor to provide approximate dimensions and weight.
21. Only electrical control signals shall be connected from the field to these panel(s).
22. Any “control system” shall be fully checked and tested at the Manufacturer/Supplier’s shop
in the presence of Owner’s representative.
23. Manufacturer/Supplier shall provide the necessary utility reduction / regulation as required
for the supplied equipment.
24. The base plate shall not extend beyond the outline base dimensions of the panel. Vibration
damping mounts shall be provided where required.
25. Opening doors shall have robust stainless steel hinges as standard, and shall have a tee-key
door fastening system.
26. Where removable lifting lugs are provided, blanking bolts and washers shall be provided for
fitting after installation.
27. Panels shall be provided with sun screens using side enclosures and overhead deflectors such
that all front of panel indications/lamps can be easily seen under direct sunlight conditions
28. Anti-condensation heaters shall be provided wherever required.
29. Cable entries shall be from the bottom connecting directly into junction boxes. Cables shall
enter the panel via a stuffing gland, where base plates are fitted, to eliminate the need to strip
back the outer sheath.
30. Ventilation louvers shall be high level and mesh covered.
31. Panels shall have a fully wired earthing system connecting all metal components back to one
panel earthing point. Earthing cable shall be minimum 6mm 2stranded copper and shall have
a yellow/green sheath. Earth stud shall be brass, 10mm OD, with a minimum 30mm
projection. Two brass nuts and washers shall be provided. Conventional instrument
grounding systems shall be designed such that each instrument control loop system is
grounded at a single point only, through the cable screens / shields at the marshalling panel.
32. Internal panel wiring shall be run in trunking sized to accept 20 percent additional cables.
33. Panels having indication lamps or annunciators shall have a lamp test pushbutton, which
shall test all unlit lamps/annunciator windows when pressed.
34. Instruments shall be flush mounted with ready access to block, Isolation and drain valves.
35. Internal cabling shall be cross ferruled to identify the source and destination of the panel
wiring.
36. Manufacturer/Supplier shall indicate any signals which interface with the plant control
system. These signals will be in the following categories:

Equipments
a. Process Variables (Soft Tags) : Profibus DP / Modbus (TCP/IP)
b. Process Variables ( Hard wired)

i. Analogue signals from package (I.S./non I.S.) : Signals which will be connected to
DCS shall be 4- 20 mA ISolated, HART, Namur NE43 compatible.
ii. Analogue signals to package (I.S.,non I.S.) : Signals which will be connected to DCS
shall be 4- 20 mA ISolated, HART, Namur NE43 compatible.
iii. Status / Alarm (DI) signals from package : DI shall be compatible with NAMUR
sensor specified LFD levels for detecting open or short circuit in field wiring. If dry-
contact (potentially free) used as DI from field devices, external LFD resistors need
to be installed.
LFD shall be possible to enable/disable channel by channel. Support for pulse count input
channel frequency range up to 10 kHz (pulse input functionality shall be integrated/integral
part of DI of NAMUR I/O type).
iv. Digital Status (DO) to package: DO (Digital Output) Isolated (Non I.S.):
Output load rating shall be up to 1A continuous. Channels shall be individually fused.

Off-state leakage current shall be 1mA maximum. Channels shall be galvanically ISolated
to 1000 VDC. Fail safe action on communication failure between controller and I/O shall
be configurable channel by channel (zero or hold). Snubbers shall be provided for
inductive loads such as contactors and solenoid coils.
v. DO (Digital Output) Energy Limited (I.S.)
Shall be suitable for driving loads such as I.S. solenoids. Shall be Short circuit protected.
Support for LFD monitoring for sensing field wiring faults such as open and short circuits
shall be provided. LFD shall be possible to enable/disable channel by channel. Channels
shall be galvanically isolated according to IEC 60079-11. Failsafe action on communication
failure between controller and I/O shall be configurable channel by channel (zero or
hold).
37. 24VDC power supplies,

i. Supplied and mounted in cabinets by the Manufacturer/Supplier.
ii. Equipment connected to UPS systems shall be designed for dual power supply feeds.
iii. Sufficient Isolation facilities on the DC subsystem shall be provided. The MCBs
,Isolation switches shall have auxiliary contact . The auxiliary contact shall be wired
in such a manner that in case of fault same shall be displayed on the panel as
indication. These fault shall also be wired to respective control system.
iv. Transfer switch shall be the part of the bulk power supply module.
v. In case, Isolators are powered from power rail/mother board, then power
redundancy shall be maintained up to power rail/mother board. Power supply
failure alarms shall be provided and hardwired to the Host system.
38. For proper cooling,

i. Each bay of the panel/cabinet shall have exhaust fan/louvers with dust filters. The
components arrangement, including barriers shall be such that all components are
properly cooled and there is no local heating.
ii. Capacity & number of fans, size of the louvers shall be adequate for the heat

Equipments
dissipation of the panel/cabinet.

iii. Exhaust fan failure alarm shall be hardwired to Host system.
39. Thermostat shall be provided, failure alarm shall be hardwired to Host system.
8.2 Air Supply Requirements
To supply air to field instruments (On/off valve, control valve etc.) air header (manifolds) shall
be provided. The air from air header/manifold shall be transmitted through tubing to field
instruments.
8.3 Instrument impulse and signal tubing
8.3.1 Instrument Impulse Tubing/Piping
1. Instrument impulse tubing materials shall be 316 stainless steel as minimum.
2. Impulse tubing shall be "OD x 0.049" wall thickness as a minimum. Coiled Stainless Steel
Tubing shall be used to the maximum extent to avoid joints in the impulse lines. Impulse
tube shall have minimum 80 HRB hardness.
3. Fittings used shall be 316 stainless steel as a minimum and double ferrule type (Swagelok or
equal).
8.3.2 Instrument Air Headers / Instrument Air Manifolds
1. Instrument dry air at pressure of 6 bar(g), temperature 20 to 40 ° C and dew point at -40 ° C at
atmospheric pressure shall be the source of air for all pneumatic instruments.
2. Use of Christmas tree type distribution manifolds shall be maximised for air distribution.
Standard types to be used are 6/12/18 way. These shall only be used on “new” process and
utility areas.
8.3.3 Each branch from the main air supply header shall be possible to shut off using a valve.
1. Instrument air shall be distributed by means of Instrument Air Manifolds (IAM), located
strategically to supply the valves.
2. Instrument air headers shall be a minimum of two inch pipe size.
3. Instrument Air Users Instrument tubing between the valves take-off and filter regulator,
between filter regulator and solenoid valve, and between filter regulator and valve positioner
shall be 1/4" OD of SS tube as minimum. Use of higher size shall be considered for achieving
required speed of operation, if necessary.
8.4 Instrument Cables and Junction boxes
8.4.1 Instrument Cables
1. Field Analogue signal cables shall be: 1PR/2PR/3PR 0.5/1.0/1.5 mm2,

5PR/10PR/20PR/24PR 0.5/1.5 mm2, stranded annealed copper conductors as standard.

Equipments
Larger conductors may be selected when required to reduce voltage drop.Field Digital SV’s,
alarm and Control switches, 24V DC cables shall be:
2. Thermocouple extension cables (Type J, K, T, R and S) shall be 1PR/2PR 1.0 mm2,

10PR/20PR 0.8 mm2 solid circular conductors.
3. Grouping for instrument cables shall be as follows:

a. Electronic signals (4-20 mA), resistance thermometers, thermocouples.
b. Control signals (24V DC)
c. Digital signals (24V DC)
d. IS signals (24 VDC)
e. ESD Signals
4. Instrument cables shall be separated from power cables by the following distances:
a Power Cable Minimum Spacing
b 415V 600 mm
c 240V 300 mm
The above figures apply to parallel runs of cable. For crossover a minimum of 300 mm
separation distance will be permitted on all applications.
5. All instrument cables and wiring shall be provided with core identification ferrules. All
cables shall have plasticized PVC cable marker securely fitted.
6. Conductor insulation for all instrumentation cables shall be XLPE (cross linked polyethylene)
only, suitable up to 90 °C.
7. Cables shall be clearly numbered at each end, on both sides of a transit point, and when
entering a panel, junction box or gland plate.
8. All connections and terminations shall be made on terminals. Splicing of cables is not
permitted.
9. Multi-core cables shall be provided with 10 percent spare cores.
10. I.S. circuits and non I.S. circuits shall be run in different cables.
11. Wiring insulation materials shall be resistant to termites and fungus growth.
12. All instrumentation cables shall be flame retardant to IEC-60332, low smoke and zero
halogen.
13. Instrument Cables are segregated in following ways:-

a Control Cables
b Instrument Signal Cables (4-20mA)
c Bus Cables (Profibus), Data Cables & Optical Cables
d Conduits for Instrument Air
e I.S. signal cables
f ESD Signals
14. The outer sheath of cable shall be coloured as follows:-

a IS= Blue
b Power =Black

Equipments
c Non-IS= Grey
d Thermocouples IN accordance with ANSI MC-96.1
e Fiber Optic = Orange
15. For multicore/multi pair cable overall shield shall only be considered.
8.4.2 Instrument Junction Boxes
1. Junction boxes shall be made from die cast aluminum alloy LM-6 material and shall be
weatherproof according to IEC-60529 (IP-66).
2. All Junction boxes for use in Hazardous Area & non-hazardous area must be certified for that
area, with a degree of protection of IP-66.
3. The junction box shall be supplied with bottom entry gland.

4. If a junction box containing intrinsically safe signals then a label shall be placed on the front of
the JB clearly stating that the junction box contains I.S. circuits.
5. I..S signals shall be adequately segregated, according to applicable standard.
6. All junction box gland shall be pre-drilled and plugged by the vendor using appropriately
certified plugs
7. Vendor to wire the all the signals upto junction boxes for transmission/wiring to DCS within
the package limit.
8.4.3 Cable Tray
Galvanized Iron (G.I.) perforated cable tray shall be used by vendor.
8.4.4 Terminals
1. Terminals shall be Klippon type Z-series/Phoenix/Wago, or equivalent as standard,

identified by a permanent terminal marker, in junction boxes. The terminals shall be spring
loaded type.
2. Blue coloured terminals shall be used inside the cabinets and junction boxes for I.S. circuits.
3. Terminal rails to be provided with group marker at top of each rail in junction boxes.
4. Where circuit isolation I.S. required terminals shall be Klippon Z-Series/ Phoenix/Wago, or
equivalent, including a built in circuit isolator.
5. Pinch screw type terminal blocks shall not be used.
6. One terminal shall be provided for each incoming and connecting wire. Only one wire may
terminate on each side of a terminal.
7. Where more than one wire I.S. to be connected on one side of a terminal for looping
purposes, a pre-formed link between adjacent terminals shall be used.

Equipments
8. Instrument Panel Internal Wiring

a. Power Distribution
230V AC (Live) Grey
230V AC (Neutral) Grey
24V DC (Positive) Red
24V DC (Negative) Black
b. Signal
24V DC (Analogue and Digital) Light Grey
Wiring between terminal block and IS barrier Blue
c. Earthing
Intrinsically Safe Earth Yellow
Instrument Earth Green
8.5 Instrument installation (Process)
8.5.1 Instrumentation shall be installed in such a way that LoToTo procedure is supported.
8.5.2 Tubing from orifice flanges to flow transmitter or from process Isolation valve to pressure
instrument shall be 1/2" OD stainless steel tubing fully annealed. Tube wall thickness shall be in
accordance with pressure and temperature requirement.
8.5.3 Piping and fittings up to and including the first block valve shall always conform to the line, vessel
or equipment governing specification. Piping section IS rOWNER's ENGINEERonsible for the
supply of piping and fittings up to and including the first block valve. Where thers is a flanged
valve, piping section shall supply all nuts, bolts and gaskets.
8.5.4 The types and sizes of instrument connections on pipes and vessels shall be in accordance with
P&IDs.
8.5.5 In general, the material of the process piping and fittings will follow the applicable piping
specification. Possible additional licensor requirements shall be taken into account.
8.5.6 Each instrument shall have its unique tapping from the process fluid it is measuring and shall be
provided with adequate Isolation to enable it to be removed from the plant on line.
8.5.7 All impulse piping as far as possible shall be standardISed on "OD 316 SS tubing up to 40/50
Kg/cm2(g) rating.
8.5.8 All fittings shall be 316SS double compression type similar to “SWAGELOK” design.
8.5.9 All connections shall be NPT standard.
8.5.10 On specific applications where smaller size tubing is required 1/4” or 1/2” OD 316SS tubing shall be
specified.
8.5.11 Instrument impulse line shall be sloped 1 in 10 minimum in horizontal runs.
8.5.12 Impulse lines shall be supported using properly designed supports.

Equipments
8.5.13 Valves for drain/vent connections on level measurement shall be flanged.
8.5.14 Use of piping valves in impulse lines shall be considered as an alternative to integral valve manifolds
for transmitter installation.
8.5.15 The piping Isolation valve shall not be used for instrument Isolation purposes. An instrument block
and bleed valve shall be installed in the instrument piping if the process media allows it.
8.5.16 Instrument impulse lines, pneumatic signal line etc., shall not be supported on supports subject to
vibrations.
8.5.17 Installation and connections of all instruments must be carried out in accordance with the process
piping details. Actual location of the instrument and type of mounting shall be determined in the
field during construction. Also the use of 3D modelling of the plant shall consider for finding the
best location. The instruments shall be located, accessible for maintenance, etc., by means of platform
ladder.
8.5.18 Accessibility by means of a portable ladder shall be restricted to a minimum.
8.5.19 Instruments with capillaries supplied by manufacturer / supplier must be protected throughout
their length, using angle with clips. Sharp bends in the capillary must be avoided.
8.5.20 In general, process piping/tubing runs shall be arranged to avoid vapour or liquid locking.
8.5.21 Instruments, which have vent/drain connections piped to closed or safety piping as shown on the
P&ID’s, must have “valve” vent/drain connections. (Safety with toxic or dangerous process
materials must be considered).
8.5.22 Process piping/tubing shall be kept as short as possible.
8.5.23 All instruments to be positioned such that they do not obstruct walkways or plant access. Sufficient
space around the instruments must be left to allow the removal of covers, etc.
8.5.24 Equipment located on or adjacent to process equipment should be enclosed to a minimum of IP 66.
It should be possible to close doors and covers so that they are dust- and waterproof. For equipment
which is to be placed in the control room etc. the enclosure class should be compatible with the
immediate environment.
8.6 Instrument mounting
8.6.1 Transmitters and local controllers shall be mounted on 2" pipe stands where practical.
8.6.2 Flow and pressure transmitters may be line mounted supported from process lines, to keep impulse
line short.
9.0 Interface Points
Package system shall be hooked/interfaced to plant control system. The Interfacing shall be as
follows:

Equipments
9.1 Package vendor shall mark all the interface points on P&ID.
9.2 For crtical hardwired signals, the interface point shall be the junction box or local control panel of
PLC.
9.3 For soft signals through profibus/Fiber Optic cable, the interface point shall be the
communication port of communication card of PLC.
10.0 Instrument numbering Guidelines
Instruments and automated/control valves are to be tagged the following:
FF - #### y - z
FF Two or more letters identify the main function. Basically the ISA 5.1
Standard is followed, added at the end.
#### 4 digit number, usually the same as the main equipment nearby, or, if all “y”
numbers are used up, the next free 4 digit number.
Y Last digit is arbitrary, but the ambition is to follow This logic, particularly the
“8” and “9” for level switches:
0 level
1 flow
2 pressure
3 temperature
4 vacant
5 vacant
6 vacant
7 vacant
8 low level
9 high level
Z If required, an index letter (A-Z) for making the full string unique.
Typically used for on/off valves where one is open, the other closed.
Examples:
LI-33000 Level indication
WI-38400 Weight indication
LI-33000 Level indication
WI-38400 Weight indication
FIC-30051 Flow indication and control
FV-30051 The corresponding control valve. Control valves get the designation FV-, PV-,
LV- depending on the function of the controlling instrument.
FICQ-30051 the Q means the totalizer is shown/used in DCS Faceplate in a sequence.
.
PI-33002 Pressure, absolute or gauge
PDI-33002 Differential pressure
TI-33003 Temperature measurement
AI-36064 Turbidity or other analytical instrument
CI-36304 Conductivity
HS-34205 Field push-buttons or switches connected to Control system
SIC-34105 Variable frequency drives.
II-33906 Electrical Amperage.
A modern MCC might offer amperage reading to the DCS for all drives, in which
case they will be spelled out on P&ID only when they serve a specific purpose.
JI-31025 Electrical Power (kW)

Equipments
pHIC-33005 pH control
LS-34308 Low level switch
LS-34309 High level switch
XV-36307A On/off valve
XSV-12345 Solenoid valve
XZO-36307 limits witch open, "ZO"
XZC-36307 limit switch closed, "ZC"
XZA-36406 For 3-way valves, position “ZA”.
XZB-36406 For 3-way valves, position “ZB”.
XZT-36406 For “T” configured 3-way valves, position “ZT” as in split flow.
11.0 Documentation
The instrument package vendor shall supply the following necessary documentation and
drawings within sufficient time for the progression of the project as a minimum but not limited
to;
The following information shall be provided by the vendor along with the quotation:
1. Instrumentation diagrams for the control and operation of the equipment, showing all
instrumentation together with the demarcation points for the scope of supply.
2. Functional logic diagrams and function description for start-up, sequence control,
safeguarding and shutdown procedures.
3. Detailed information for all instruments provided by the vendor, including make and type.
4. List of all sub-vendors.
5. Area classification inside the equipment package.
6. Inspection and testing procedures, including the preliminary issue of an inspection plan.
7. Cyber security plan.
Any requirement specified, which cannot be adhered to by the vendor shall be listed in the
quotation under “Exceptions to Specification” giving reasons for the deviation and a proposal
for alternative solutions.
The following documentation should be provided in the engineering and design phase:
1. Package Unit P&ID Drawings.

2. Updated versions of the information for the instrument symbols.
3. A list of all instruments (Instrument Index and I/O list), giving the make and type, ranges,
detailed operating data (OWNER's ENGINEERecially for flow meters and control valves),
length of thermo wells, etc. Format of Instrument Index and I/O list shall be provided to
package vendor post order.
4. Instrument data sheets. Format of data sheet shall be provided to package vendor post
order.
5. Equipment layout, showing the location of the instruments, junction boxes, local
instrument panels, cable routing between instruments and local panels, etc.
6. Terminal arrangement, signal wire location of all instrument local panels and junction
boxes (Cable schedule and Junction box schedule).
7. Graphics.
8. Hookup drawings. Format of data sheet shall be provided to package vendor post order.
9. Loop Drawings. Format of data sheet shall be provided to package vendor post order.
10. Calculation sheets for control valves, Pressure safety relief valves and flow measuring
devices, etc.
11. Inspection/testing procedures and protocols.
Equipments
12. A list of the trip/alarm settings.

13. SIL verification reports.
14. Cyber security report.
15. Load list.
16. Logic Diagram
17. System layout
18. Certificates
19. Instructions for proof testing. All relevant SIL documentation like SRS for SIF and for
software.
20. PLC communication list
21. EX calculation sheets
22. Maintenance schedules
Apart from above any other documents which is required shall also be submitted by the vendor.
The package vendor shall provide along with As -Built document an editable soft copy of
drawings and documents for future editing purpose for plant documentation perspective.
The package vendor shall also provide installation and maintenance instructions, spare part lists,
etc.
12.0 Spares
The field instruments shall be designed for only actual quantity. Spare instruments shall not be
considered. However the field junction boxes terminals, multi pair/triad/core cables,
marshalling cabinet terminals, tray, etc. shall be designed to have all identified “Future”
requirements plus 20% installed spares.
For all instrument & system vendor shall include the start up and commissioning spare parts as
base scope and also furnish the list of spare parts for 3 years trouble free operation
13.0 Instrument Connection Details
Process Tappings for Instruments
Connection To Equipments Instrument

Vent & Drain
Connections
Vessels Pipes Tanks
Size Rating Size Rating Size Rating Size Size
1.5" Piping 1.5" Piping 1.5" Piping 1/2" NPT Piping

Thermowells - -
Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class (F) Class
Pressure 1" Piping Piping Piping 1/2" NPT Piping 1/4" Piping
1" Flanged 1" Flanged
Gauges Flanged Class Class Class (M) Class NPT (F) Class
Differential
1" Piping Piping Piping 1/2" Piping 1/4" Piping
Pressure 1" Flanged 1" Flanged
Flanged Class Class Class NPT (M) Class NPT (F) Class
Gauge

Equipments

Vent & Drain
Connections
Vessels Pipes Tanks
Diaphragm
Seal
3" Piping Piping Piping Piping 1/4" Piping
Differential 3" Flanged 3" Flanged 3" Flanged
Flanged Class Class Class Class NPT (F) Class
Pressure
Gauges
Diaphragm
Seal Pressure 3" Flanged 3" Flanged 3" Flanged
Gauges
Level Gauges
2" Piping Piping Piping
(Float & - - 2" Flanged 2" Flanged - -
Flanged Class Class Class
Board)
Level Gauges 2" Piping Piping Piping 1/2" Piping

- - 2" Flanged 2" Flanged
(Magnetic) Flanged Class Class Class NPT (F) Class
Level Gauges 2" Piping Piping Piping 1/2" Piping

(Other Types) Flanged Class Class Class NPT (F) Class
Temperature 1.5" Piping 1.5'' Piping 1.5” Piping 1/2" NPT Piping
- -
Gauges Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class (M) Class
Pressure 1" Piping 1" Piping 1" Piping 1/2" NPT Piping 1/4" Piping
Transmitter Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class (M) Class NPT (F) Class
Diaphragm
Seal Pressure 3" Flanged 3" Flanged 3" Flanged
Transmitter
D/P
1" Piping Piping Piping 1/2" NPT Piping 1/4" Piping
Transmitter 1" Flanged 1" Flanged
Flanged Class Class Class (M) Class NPT (F) Class
(Pressure)
D/P
1" Piping Piping Piping 1/2" NPT Piping 1/4" Piping
Transmitter 1" Flanged 1" Flanged
Flanged Class Class Class (M) Class NPT (F) Class
(Level)
Diaphragm
Seal 3" Piping Piping Piping 1/4" Piping
Transmitter Flanged Class Class Class NPT (F) Class
(Level)
Temperature
1.5" Piping 1.5" Piping 1.5" Piping 1/2" NPT Pipe
Element with - -
Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class (M) Class
Thermowell
Orifice Piping 1/2" NPT Piping 1/2" Pipe

- - Pipe Size - -
Class (F) Class NPT (F) Class
D/P - - - - - - 1/2" NPT Pipe 1/2" Pipe

Equipments

Vent & Drain
Connections
Vessels Pipes Tanks
Transmitter (F) Class NPT (F) Class
(Flow)
Integral
Pipe Size Piping Pipe 1/2" Pipe
orifice with - - - - Flanged
Flanged Class Class NPT (F) Class
Transmitter
2" 2"
Flow
Flanged Piping Flanged Pipe
Switches - - - - - -
Class Class
(Flanged)
2'' 2''
Flow
NPT (F) Piping NPT (F) Pipe
Switches - - - - - -
Class Class
(NPT)
Level
2'' 2''
Switches Piping - Piping 1" NPT (M) Piping
- - -
(Side Flanged Class Flanged Class Class
Mounted)
Level
3" 3''
Switches Piping - Piping 1" NPT (M) Piping
Flanged - - -
(Top Class Flanged Class Class
Mounted)
1.5''
1.5'' 1.5'' 1.5'' Flanged or
Temperature Piping Piping Piping Piping
- -
Switches Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class 1/2" Class
NPT(M)
1''
1'' 1'' 1''
Pressure Piping Piping Piping Flanged or Piping
- -
Switches Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class Class
1/2"
NPT(M)
Pressure 3'' 3'' 3'' 3''
Piping Piping Piping Piping 1/4" Piping
Switches-
Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class NPT (F) Class
Diaphragm
Breather 3” Piping 3” Piping 3” Piping

- - - -
Valve Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class
Flame Piping Pipe Size Piping Piping Piping
Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged - -
Arrester Class Class Class Class
As per Size is
Pressure As per As per
Process depend
Safety /Relief Process Piping Piping Process Piping Piping
Requireme upon - -
Valve Require Class Class Requirem Class Class
nt VENDOR
(Flanged) ment ent
Sizing
Pressure As per Piping As per Piping As per Piping Size is Piping
- -
Relief Valve Process Class Process Class Process Class depend Class

Equipments

Vent & Drain
Connections
Vessels Pipes Tanks
(Flanged) Require Requireme Requirem upon
ment nt ent VENDOR
Sizing
As per Size is
Process depend
Regulating Process Piping Piping Process Piping Piping
Requireme upon - -
Valve Require Class Class Requirem Class Class
nt VENDOR
(Flanged) ment ent
Sizing
As per Size is
Process depend
Vacuum Process Piping Piping Process Piping Piping
Requireme upon - -
Relief Valve Require Class Class Requirem Class Class
nt VENDOR
(Flanged) ment ent
Sizing
As per Size is
As per As per
Thermal Process depend
Process Piping Piping Process Piping Piping
Relief Valve Requireme upon - -
Require Class Class Requirem Class Class
(Flanged) nt VENDOR
ment ent
Sizing
1" -1.5"
3'' 3'' 3'' 1/4''
pH Piping Piping Piping NPT (M) or Piping Pipe
Transmitter Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class Class NPT(F) Class
Flanged
3'' 3'' 3'' NPT (M) or 1/4''

Density Piping Piping Piping Piping Pipe
Transmitter Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class NPT(F) Class
Vendor 1/4''
Conductivity 3'' Piping Piping 3'' Piping NPT (M) or Piping Pipe
Sizing
Transmitter Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class NPT(F) Class
Level
3'' 3'' 3''
Transmitter Piping - Piping Piping
- - -
(Radar – Non Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class
Contact type)
Level
Transmitter 3'' 3'' 3''
Piping - Piping Piping
(Guided - - -
Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class
Wave Radar –
Contact type)
Level 3'' 3'' 3''
Piping - Piping Piping
Transmitter - - -
Flanged Class Flanged Class Flanged Class
(Ultrasonic)
Pipe Size Pipe Size
Piping Piping
Rotameter - - - - - -
Flanged Class Flanged Class
Less than
Pipe Size or equal to
Magnetic Piping Piping
- - - - Pipe Size - -
Flowmeter Flanged Class Class
Flanged
Pipe Size Not Less
Mass Piping Piping
- - - - than half of - -
Flowmeter Flanged Class Class
the Pipe

Equipments

Vent & Drain
Connections
Vessels Pipes Tanks
size or
equal to
Pipe Size
Flanged
Not Less
than half of
the Pipe
Pipe Size
Vortex Piping size or Piping
- - - - - -
Flowmeter Flanged Class equal to Class
Pipe Size
Flanged
Pipe Size 1" -1.5"

Ultrasonic Piping Piping
- - - - - -
Flowmeter Flanged Class Flanged Class
1" -1.5"
Flanged or
Thermal Pipe Size
Piping Piping
Mass - - - - ½” NPT - -
Flanged Class Class
Flowmeter (M) - ¾”
NPT (M)
As per As per Pipe
Control Pipe / Piping / Line Size Piping
- - Line Size - - - -
Valves Class Class
Flanged
Flanged
As per As per Pipe
On / Off Pipe / Piping / Line Size Piping
- - Line Size - - - -
Valve Class Class
Flanged
Flanged
Refractomete 3” Piping 3” Piping 3” Piping 3” Piping

Flanged Flanged - -
r Flanged Class Class Flanged Class Class
Special Special
Turbidity Vendor Vendor 1/4''
3” Piping Piping 3” Piping Piping Pipe
meter Sizing and Sizing and
Flanged Class Class Flanged Class Class NPT(F) Class
connection connection
Note : Vendor to follow the above the process connections for instruments. However if vendor
encounters the different size against the size specified above, vendor shall avail approval from OWNER'S
ENGINEER for the size of process connection prior to designing/implementing.
14.0 Approved Make List
Sr
Instrument Manufacturer's Name
No.
1 Control system (PLC / HMI) 1. Siemens

Equipments
Sr
No.
2. Rockwell
3. ABB
1. Emerson Process Management

2. Yokogawa Automation India
2 Control system (DCS) with Barrier
3. Supcon
4. ABB
1. Forbes Marshall Pvt. Ltd.
Pressure Gauge, Temperature
2. Wika Instruments India Pvt Ltd
3 Gauge, Temperature Element with
3. Baumer Instruments India Pvt Ltd.
themowell
4. Gauges Bourdon
Pressure Transmitter / Flow
Transmitter/ Level Transmitter / 1. Emerson Process Management
Head Mounted Temperature 2. Endress & Hauser
Transmitter / Differentital Pressure - 3. Yokogawa India Ltd.
4
Flow Transmitter / Differentital 4. Vega Pressure & Level Instruments India Pvt
Pressure -Level Transmitter / Ltd.
Differentital Pressure Transmitter /
Integral orifice with Transmitter
1. Micro Pneumatics
2. M/s Virgo (Emerson)
On - Off Valve with Solenoid Valve
5 3. Delval Valves
& Actuator
4. M/s Festo
5.Forbes Marshall
1. Rotex
2. Asco
6 Solenoid Valves
3. Parker
4. Festo
1. Dembla Valves
2. Forbes Marshall
7 Control Valve
4. Samson Controls
1. Fainger Leser Valves
2. Nirmal Industries
Pressure Safety Valve / Thermal
8 3. UNI Klinger
Relief Valve
4. Tyco Sanmar
5. Forbes Marshall
1. Fike
9 Rupture DISc
2. BS & B
1. Forbes Marshall
10 Pressure Regulating Valve 3. Samson Controls
5. Tyco Sanmar
Pressure Switch / Flow Switch /
2. Switzer Process Instruments
11 Temperature Switch
3. General Instruments
4. IFM

Equipments
Sr
No.
1. Eureka Instruments
2. Chemtrols Instruments
12 Rotameter
3. Yokogawa India Ltd
4. Forbes Marshall (Krohne Marshall)
2. Endress & Hauser
3. Siemens Ltd.
Level Switch ( Vibrating type,
13 4. Vega Pressure & Level Instruments India Pvt
conductivity type)
Ltd.
5. Forbes Marshall
6. IFM.
2. Endress & Hauser
3. Siemens Ltd.
14 Level Switch (Other type) 4. Vega Pressure & Level Instruments India Pvt
Ltd.
5. Forbes Marshall
6. IFM.
1. General Instruments
15 Level Gauge 3. Forbes Marshall (Krohne Marshall)
4.. Wika Instruments India Pvt Ltd
1. Protego Equipments
16 Breather Valve / Flame Arrester
4. Fainger Enginnering
1. Nova Weigh ( Precia)
17 Weight Transmitter (Load Cell) 2. Sartorius
3. Mettler Toledo
1. Rotork
2. Elomatic
18 Actuator
3. Samson
4. Flow Serve
2. Honeywell
19 Conductivity Transmitter 3. Yokogawa India Ltd.
4. Endress Hauser
5. Forbes Marshall (Krohne)
2. Honeywell
20 pH Transmitter 3. Yokogawa India Ltd.
4. Endress Hauser
5. Forbes Marshall (Krohne)
21 Density Transmitter 2. Yokogawa India Ltd.
1. MTL/ Eaton
22 Barriers
2. Pepperl & Fuchs
Equipments
Sr
No.
3. STAHL
1. MTL/ Eaton
2. Radix
3. Forbes Marshall
23 Local Indicators
4. Pepperl & Fuchs
5. Yokogawa
6. Endress Hauser
1. Ambetronics Engineers Pvt. Ltd.
2. Honeywell
24 Gas Detector
3. Drager
4. Sierra Instrumentation
25 Analyzers 2. Servomax India Pvt. Ltd.
3. Forbes Marshall
1. Peppler & Fuchs
2.Turck
26 Limit Switches
3.MTL
4.IFM
1. Goa Instruments
27 Restriction Orifice 2.General Instruments
3.Pyro Electric (Hydropneumatics)
1. Goa Instruments
28 Orifice Plates & Flanges 2.General Instruments
3.Pyro Electric (Hydropneumatics)
Mutivariable Transmitter with 2. Endress & Hauser
29
Averaging Pitot Tube 3. Yokogawa India Ltd.
15.0 Abbreviations
Abbreviations Codes Description
AI Analog Input
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AO Analog Output
API American Petroleum Institute
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AT Analyzer Transmitter
ATEX Atmosphères explosibles / Atmosphere Explosive
BS British Standard

Equipments
BV Breather Valve
CaFx Cafo Slurry
CE Conformité Européene
CGA Compressed Gas Association
CPU Central Processing Unit
dB(A) Decibel
DB Distribution Board
DCS Distributed Control System
DI Digital Input
DIN Deutsches Institut
DO Digital Output
DP Differential Pressure
DPDT Double Pole Double throw
DPFT Differential Pressure Flow Transmitter
DPT Differential Pressure Transmitter
DPLT Differential Pressure Level Transmitter
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
ESD Emergency Shutdown System
OWNER'S ENGINEER Engineering Service Provider
ETP Effluent Treatment Plant
ET Electrical Thread
EU European Union
FAT Factory Acceptance Test
FCI Fluid Control Institute
FM Factory Mutual
FMCW Frequency Modulated Continuous Wave
FSD Full Scale Deflection
FT Flow Transmitter
G.I. Galvanized Iron
GWR Guided Wave Radar
HART Highway Addressable Remote Transducer
HAZOP Hazard & Operability Study
HCL Hydrogen Chloride

Equipments
HMI Human Machine Interface

HRB Hardness Rockwell B
IAM Instrument Air Manifold
IBR Indian Boiler Regulation
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
I/O Input & Output
IP Ingress Protection
IS Indian Standard
I.S. Intrinsically Safe
ISA International Society of Automation
ISO International Organizational for Standardization
I/O Input Output
JB Junction Box
JBA Junction Box for Analog Signals
JBDI Junction Box for Digital Input Signals
JBDO Junction Box for Digital Output Signals
JBP Junction Box for Power
LAN Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LFD Line Fault Detection
LoToTo Lock Out, Tag Out, Try Out
LPG Liquified Petroleum Gas
LT Level Transmitter
MAST Maximum Allowable Stem Torque
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker
MCCB Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
MCC Motor Control Centre
ML Mother Liquor
MOC Material of Construction
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
NB Nominal Bore

Equipments
NEC National Electric Code

NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NPT Nominal Pipe Thread
OD Outer Diameter
OEM Original Equipment Manufacture
OISD Oil Industry Safety Directorate
OWS Operator Workstation
PC Personal Computer
PDB Power Distribution Board
PE Penta
PEx Penta Slurry
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
PR Pair Cable
PRV Pressure Relief Valve
Profibus DP Profibus Decentralized Peripherals
PSV Pressure Safety valve
PTFE Polytetrafluoroethylene
PVC Poly Vinyl Chloride
PT Pressure Transmitter
P&ID Piping and Instrumentation Diagram
QAP Quality Assurance Plan
RD Rupture Disk
RFI Radio-Frequency Interference
RP Recommended Practice
RTD Resistance Temperature Detector
SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association
SAT Site Acceptance Test
SCADA Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition
SIF Safety Instrumented Functions
SIL Safety Integrity Level
SMART Single Module Auto ranging Transducer
SMPS Switched-Mode Power Supply
SOV Solenoid Valve

Equipments
SPDT Single Pole Double Throw

SRV Safety Relief Valves
SS Stainless Steel
STP Sewage Treatment Plant
TC's Thermocouple
TE Temperature Element
TOC Total Organic Compound
TR Triad Cable
TT Temperature Transmitter
Technischer Überwachungsverein / Technical Inspection
TUV
Association Certified
TW Thermowell
UL Underwriters Laboratories
UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply
VAC Voltage Alternating Current
V DC Direct Current Voltage
VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure
VOC Volatile Organic Compound
XLPE Cross Linked Poly Ethylene
WCB Wrought Carbon Grade "B"
WTP Water Treatment Plant
°C Degree Celsius
---End of Document---

D O CU M E NT N O . IP S - M B D 1 8 0 19 - M E - 35 4 - 40 K T P A - D E
SPECIFICATION
OF
VALVES
Project Elephant
R5 Aug 22, 2019 For approval PKT SM AC

R4 July 28, 2019 For approval PKT SM AC
from IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. accepts no responsibility or liability for the consequence of this document being used for a purpose other than the
confirm his agreement to indemnify IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd for all loss or damage resulting there from IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. accepts no responsibility or liability for this
document to any party other than the person by whom it was commissioned.
IPS-MEHTALIA PVT. LTD. OWNER Perstorp
Document Title Specification of Valves Made / App PKT / AC
Index
1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 4
1.1 General .............................................................................................................................................. 4
1.2 Purpose.............................................................................................................................................. 4
2.0 PROJECT DETAILS .............................................................................................................. 4
3.0 DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................................... 5
4.0 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................ 5
4.1 General .............................................................................................................................................. 5
4.2 Valve Body ........................................................................................................................................ 6
4.3 End Connections .............................................................................................................................. 8
5.0 GENERAL CONDITIONS .................................................................................................. 8
5.1 Materials............................................................................................................................................ 8
5.2 Welded parts .................................................................................................................................... 8
5.3 Seats ................................................................................................................................................... 8
5.4 Stroke ................................................................................................................................................. 9
5.5 Seat Leakage ..................................................................................................................................... 9
5.6 Stem Packing’s ................................................................................................................................. 9
5.7 Flange contact face finish ................................................................................................................ 9
5.8 Tightness ......................................................................................................................................... 10
5.9 Markings & Arrows ....................................................................................................................... 10
5.10 Inspection & Expediting ............................................................................................................... 10
5.11 Material Test Certificates .............................................................................................................. 10
5.12 Surface Protection .......................................................................................................................... 10
5.13 Packing /crating ............................................................................................................................ 10
5.14 Documentation ............................................................................................................................... 10
6.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF VALVES ............................................................ 12
6.1 Specification of Gate Valve for Pipe Specification – 1............................................................... 12
6.2 Specification of Globe Valve for Pipe Specification – 1 ............................................................ 13
6.3 Specification of Wafer Check Valve for Pipe Specification – 1 ................................................ 14
6.4 Specification of Wafer Check Valve for Pipe Specification – 1 ................................................ 15
6.5 Specification of Swing Check Valve for Pipe Specification –1 ................................................. 16
6.6 Specification of Piston Valve for Pipe Specification – 1 ............................................................ 17
6.7 Specification of Thermodynamic Steam Trap for Pipe Specification – 1................................ 18
6.8 Specification of Ball Float Trap for Pipe Specification – 1 ........................................................ 19
6.9 Specification of Y-type strainer for Pipe Specification –1 ......................................................... 20
6.10 Specification of Pot type strainer for Pipe Specification –1 ...................................................... 21
6.11 Specification of Globe Valve for Pipe Specification –1 ............................................................. 22
6.12 Specification of Gate Valve for Pipe Specification – 1A ........................................................... 23
6.13 Specification of Plug Valve for Pipe Specification – 1A............................................................ 24
6.14 Specification of Y-type strainer for Pipe Specification –1A...................................................... 25
6.15 Specification of Pot type strainer for Pipe Specification –1A .............................................. 26
6.16 Specification of Butterfly Valve for Pipe Specification–1C ...................................................... 27
6.17 Specification of Check Valve (Swing Type) for Pipe Specification–1C .................................. 28
6.18 Specification of Check Valve (Dual plate Type) for Pipe Specification–1C ........................... 29
6.19 Specification of Ball valve flanged end for Pipe Specification–1C .......................................... 30
6.20 Specification of Plug Valve for Pipe Specification – 4............................................................... 31
6.21 Specification of Ball Check Valve for Pipe Specification –4 ..................................................... 32
6.22 Specification of Ball Valve for Pipe Specification –5 ................................................................. 33
6.23 Specification of Butterfly Valve for Pipe Specification –5 ........................................................ 34
6.24 Specification of Wafer Check Valve for Pipe Specification –5 ................................................. 35
IPS-ME-DOC-21-V1.0 IPS-MBD18019-ME-354-40KTPA-DE-Valve Specification-R5


6.34 Specification of Globe Valve for Pipe Specification –6 ............................................................. 45
6.35 Specification of Plug Valve for Pipe Specification – 6B ............................................................ 46
6.36 Specification of Butterfly Valve for Pipe Specification –6B ...................................................... 47
6.37 Specification of Y type strainer for Pipe Specification –6B....................................................... 48
6.38 Specification of Pot type strainer for Pipe Specification –6B ................................................... 49
6.39 Specification of Ball Valve for Pipe Specification –6C .............................................................. 50
6.40 Specification of Butterfly Valve for Pipe Specification –6C ..................................................... 51
6.41 Specification of Wafer Check Valve for Pipe Specification –6C .............................................. 52
6.42 Specification of Plug Valve for Pipe Specification – 6C ............................................................ 53
6.43 Specification of Swing Check Valve for Pipe Specification –6C .............................................. 54
6.44 Specification of Gate Valve for Pipe Specification – 6C ............................................................ 55
6.45 Specification of Y-type strainer for Pipe Specification –6C ...................................................... 56
6.46 Specification of Pot type strainer for Pipe Specification –6C ................................................... 57
6.47 Specification of Gate Slide Valve for Pipe Specification – 6P .................................................. 58
6.48 Specification of Butterfly Valve for Pipe Specification –6P ................................................. 59
6.49 Specification for Liquid Sampling Valve .................................................................................... 60
6.59 Specification of Ball Check Valve for Pipe Specification –9 ..................................................... 70
6.60 Specification of Y-Type Strainer for Pipe Specification –9 ....................................................... 71
6.61 Specification of Pot Type Strainer for Pipe Specification –9 .................................................... 72
6.62 Specification of Ball Valve for Pipe Specification –10 ............................................................... 73
6.63 Specification of Ball Check Valve for Pipe Specification –10 ................................................... 74
6.64 Specification of Y Type Strainer for Pipe Specification –10...................................................... 75
6.65 Specification of Pot Type Strainer for Pipe Specification –10 .................................................. 76

1.0 Introduction
1.1 General
units in Asia, Europe & North America. The specialty chemicals Perstorp produces are added
to a range of products used every day at home, work or leisure. Customers are in coatings,
plastic processing and automotive industries as well as construction and engineering, the
agricultural sector and many more.
The current project is for setting up a Green field manufacturing facility at village Sayakha
1.2 Purpose
This specification is complementary to requirements of certifying authority, legislative

requirement, guidance note issued by any authority and documents referenced herein for the
Perstorp project.
All valves shall be designed, selected, manufactured and tested in accordance with the
International standards & codes. VENDOR to follow engineering specifications and
engineering procedures listed in this specification. The standards & codes shall be of the
Latest editions (with amendments) and shall form an integral part of this specification.
Compliance with this Specification, Standards & codes and documents referenced therein
does not relieve VENDOR of his responsibility .VENDOR to ensure of proper design,
workmanship and materials to meet the specified conditions and duties required in
datasheets.
Where other specifications & standards are referred in this specification, it is VENDOR’s
responsibility to obtain such documents and familiarize him with the requirements thereof.
2.0 Project Details
For the purpose of this specification, the words and expressions listed here under shall have
the meanings hereby assigned to them except where the context otherwise requires:
Owner M/s Perstorp Industries India Pvt. Ltd

Project Elephant
Owner’s Engineer M/s IPS-Mehtalia Consultant Pvt Ltd
Site Location Plot No T/49 to T/54 at village Sayakha, Gujarat, India
Power Supply Three Phase 415 V, AC, 50 Hz
Single phase 230 V, AC, 50 Hz
Dry bulb temperature (Summer) 41.5° C
Wet bulb temperature (Summer) 24.8° C
Relative humidity (Summer 27.55%
Dry bulb temperature (Monsoon) 33.4° C
Wet bulb temperature (Monsoon) 28.33° C
Relative humidity (Monsoon) 68.9%
Dry bulb temperature (Winter) 11.5° C

Wet bulb temperature (Winter) 8.99° C

Relative humidity (Winter) 72.6%
Design Ambient Temperature 40° C for Indoor Electrical Equipment’s
Design Ambient Temperature 50° C for Outdoor Electrical Equipment’s
Min. Design Ambient Temperature 9° C for outdoor Electrical Equipment’s
Altitude Below 1000 m above MSL
Seismic Zone Zone III
Environmental Condition Humid
Soil Resistivity 2.27 ohm-m
Maximum Rainfall (Avg. Annual) 577 mm
Latitude 21.785481º (N)
Longitude 72.805924º (E)
Nearest Railway station Bharuch
Nearest airport Vadodara
3.0 Definitions
OWNER: This is party that initiates the project and ultimately

receives and pay's for it's design and construction.
OWNER’S ENGINNER: This is the party that carries out all or part of the design,
engineering, procurement assistance, installation
management and commissioning of the project.
The OWNER may undertake all or part of the duties
(design, engineering, procurement assistance, installation
management and commissioning) of the ESP.(Engineering
Consultant).
VENDOR: Supplier of equipment, whom any enquiry or tender is
addressed, or becomes a supplier in terms of any subsequent
order or contract.
MANUFACTURER The party who designs, manufactures, fabricates and tests.
4.0 Design Requirements
4.1 General
Valve selection shall be based upon the type of fluid being measured, range ability,
controllability, turndown requirements, on-line maintenance capability and diagnostics as
well as process condition.
The direction of flow shall be clearly and permanently marked on valve body. Marking may
be stainless steel flow arrows attached with drive screws or arrows cast into valve body.
Body casting shall be free from injurious blowholes, porosity, shrinkage faults, cracks or
other defects. Construction shall meet or exceed minimum requirements of applicable
construction and testing codes. Reworked castings with defects plugged, welded, burned or
impregnated are unacceptable.
The end connection & pressure rating of the valves shall be same as end connection at piping
end & piping pressure rating.
VENDOR should provide sizing calculation sheet for all type of valves.

Valves used in steam application above 3.5 barg shall be certified as per IBR. For valves in
line sizes of 250 NB & above IBR is applicable at pressure of 1 barg & above.
Valves specified shall generally not be approaching obsolescence and shall have maintenance
spares available for a period not shorter than 25 years (15 years in active phase+10 years for
spares & technical support).
Valve having Quarter movement shall be provided with locking arrangement.
4.2 Valve Body
Valve shall be suitable for the service conditions i.e. flow control, temperature and pressure,
at which they are required to operate as per data sheet.
Valve body type shall be as per respective valve datasheet.
Butterfly (Wafer design), diaphragm valves plug or ball type (V-notch) rotary valve, plug
valve, angle valve or 3 ways valve shall be considered based on application & respective
valve datasheet.
Double flange type shall be considered for all other toxic / flammable services. (If
Applicable)
Valve body thickness shall be according to ASME. Additional margin for corrosion allowance
shall be considered as specified in piping material specification.
Valve body sizes shall be same or smaller than the line size. Valve body size shall not be
smaller than half the line size.
Odd body sizes shall not be used. Nominal sizes of the control valve body shall be selected
from the series as ½” 1”, 1.5”, 2”, 3”, 4”, 6”, 8”, 10” and higher sizes.
Lining may be used to protect the valve from corrosion or erosion. Internal lining of the
entire body shall be considered for valves in sea water service.
The valve shall be rated to meet the design pressure and design temperature of the
application.
4.2.1 Globe Valve
Globe valves should be considered as the first choice, for ease of characterization and better
controllability.
Globe type valves shall be used for all throttling services except where the allowable pressure
drop is low.

4.2.2 Ball valves
Ball valve body shall be full bore or reduce bore, as indicated in the valve data sheets. The valve shall
be fire safe & anti-static design wherever specified in data sheet & specification.
4.2.3 Butterfly Valve
The butter fly valve shall be wafer style with eccentric disc.
Butterfly valves shall normally be used for larger line sizes (generally for sizes larger than or
equal to 4”) or where a small pressure drop is required or where wider range ability is
desired.
Except for certain non-flammable and non-toxic services, flanges wafer styles of valves are
not to be used. However lug type Butterfly valve shall be used only for non-flammable and
non-toxic services.
Butterfly valves shall be double flanged type or wafer type ( VENDOR to advise for lug types
arrangement) and may be considered for the following circumstances:
a. If the required size would

make it economically attractive (usually due to a high flow rate with a low pressure
drop)
b. If eccentric plug / segmented
ball or globe valves are not suitable
c. For corrosive services, where
body lining of globe valves becomes economically unattractive.
Double or triple eccentric butterfly valves, also known as high performance butterfly valves
can be used in Class V .
The VENDOR shall apply all the necessary constructive measures to avoid overload of shaft,
disc, connecting elements to prevent shearing of the valve shaft. Shaft shall be non-blowout
type design. Interferences between flange facing and gasket by bores for seat retainers etc.
shall be avoided.
Note: For "Piping Material Specification refer IPS-MBD18019-PP-451-40KTPA-DE". Latest released

revision of the documents shall be followed.
4.2.4 Plug Valves
Plug valves can be considered for special applications such as throttling control in
Hydrochloric Acid, slurry service.
Plug valve is used in place of gate valve where a quick operation is required. It can be used in
high-pressure temperature services.
4.2.5 Gate Valves

Gate valves and knife valves are advantageous in applications involving slurries, as their
“gates” can cut right through the slurry. They are available in large sizes to better handle
thick flow. However, gate valves do have low-pressure limitations, and are not optimal in
applications that require cleanliness or sanitary conditions. They are excellent for use
anywhere a shutoff valve is needed. When needed, they can also be used where throttling
capabilities are desired, although this is not generally recommended as erosion of the seat

and disc occurs due to the vibrations of the disk in throttling applications.
4.2.6 Piston Valves
This valve provides positive shut off. The shut off assembly comprises of a metal piston, two
resilient valve rings and a metal lantern bush. The sealing surface consists of the outer
vertical surface of the piston and the corresponding inner surfaces of the sealing rings. This
provides a large sealing surface compared to globe valves of conventional design.
Piston valve is of two types, balanced and unbalanced. Balanced valve is used in high
pressure services and unbalanced one for low pressure services.
4.3 End Connections
In general valve shall have flanged end connection integral to the valve body.
Split body design shall not be used unless otherwise specified in valve datasheet.
Valve body rating shall be equal to or higher than the flange rating specified in valve
datasheet.
VENDOR shall advise face-to-face dimensions proposed for other types of valves.
5.0 GENERAL CONDITIONS
5.1 Materials
Material shall be considered as Per Piping Material Specification.
5.2 Welded parts
Valve Vendor Must submit a GA drawing including Location & design of welds & all
measurements required for stress calculation.
Welding drawing shown with Welding Process, Base Material, Filler Material joint
efficiency.
For butt welds heat treatment (all welds shall be stress relieved) testing of welds, Name of
Mark of welding company.
Identification number, Design pressure , Design temperature , test pressure & allowances
for corrosion & wear.
All welds must be radiographed & result including films, shall be submitted to Perstorp
Material test certificate.
All above prices included in selling price.
5.3 Seats
Seats shall be integral with the body or welded to the body. Machining, testing & heat
treatment as specified in respective ANSI standard.
This welding shall not be considered as ‘welded Parts’. Seats for Control, Ball & plug valves

are not included.
5.4 Stroke
Stroke length or lift is the distance which the plug and stem must move in order to go from
an entirely closed to an entirely open position, the larger the valve, the greater its stroke. The
stroke of Regin control valves ranges from 2 sec/ Valve size depending on valve size. Too
short a stroke may make fine adjustments difficult, especially at low flows. Too long a stroke
may generate control instabilities, including oscillations. Since stroke is dependent on valve
size, in practice one would not select a valve based on stroke but rather on its capacity. If the
valve has the required capacity (without being oversized), it helps to safeguard optimal
control both as far as comfort and economy are concerned.
5.5 Seat Leakage
Seat leakage classification shall be in accordance with ANSI/FCI 70-2.
The leakage class shall be determined by the service application and as specified on the valve
datasheets. Wherever no Leakage class is specified same shall be considered as class IV.
Soft-seated valves shall not be applied where process design temperature is more than the
VENDOR recommended soft seat material design temperature / pressure ratings or in
flashing Liquid services or in service containing sands.
The allowable seat leakage shall be defined in accordance with ANSI/FCI 70-2 and shall be
minimum class IV for single-seated valves and double-seated valves or cage guided valve.
All tight shut-off valves specified in data sheet shall meet class V seat leakage class
requirements for metal seated valves.
Unless otherwise specified, the Valves shall have valve seat leakage to Class VI bubble-tight
shutoff for soft seated valves as per ANSI/FCI 70-2 and ISO-5208.
For throttling control applications with unbalanced valves, the direction should be “flow-
tending-to-open” in order to avoid a very large unstable force in the nearly closed position.
For angle valves, the direction should be “flow-tending-to-close” in order to avoid high
velocity and turbulence in the valve body.
5.6 Stem Packing’s
Valve stem packing shall, where feasible , consist of three square sections Expanded
Graphite Packing Rings , Placed between one top & one bottom Packing rings in braided
Graphite Spacer ring to fill any void.
Stem packing’s for control valves & Hydrochloric acid valves are to be refer respective
datasheet.
5.7 Flange contact face finish
The flange contact faces shall be machined to 125- 250 AARH.

5.8 Tightness
All valves & components must comply with the tightness requirements specified as
following.
Metal to metal hard seated valves: Tightness acc. to ANSI B 16.104 class V (equal to ANSI
/FCI 70-2 Class V).
5.9 Markings & Arrows
Body & Bonnet ( and welded-on flanges if any) shall be clearly marked with the Heat
Numbers . Body shall be clearly marked with Dimension & Rating . Uni-directional Valves &
Components shall be furnished with two clearly marked flow indicating Arrows, One on
each side of the body.
All markings shall be integrally casted or low stress die-stamped.
5.10 Inspection & Expediting

Perstorp or IPS Personnel shall have admittqance to sellers/ Manufacurer’s facilities, in
order to witness tests or inspect the Valves or Components before delivery , as required.
5.11 Material Test Certificates
All Valves & components shall be certified to EN 10 204 / 3.1 , Expections shall be specified
by Perstorp.
5.12 Surface Protection
All machined exterior surfaces shall be protected from corrosion during transport & storage
with an easily removable rust preventive. All other exterior surfaces of carbon steel valves &
components shall be painted to approved manufacurer’s standard. Stainless steel valves &
components shall not be painted.
5.13 Packing /crating
All machined exterior surfaces shall be particularly protected, in order to withstand damages
& deteriorations during transport & Storage .
5.14 Documentation
Copies of Sectional drawings ,Spare Parts Lists & Maintenance Manuals for each type of
valve or component supplied, shall be submitted to Perstorp.

Legends for valve Fittings

For Perstorp
X X X X
Type of Fitting Fitting Code End Connection Piping Class
B : Ball V : Valve F – Flanged 1.Carbon Steel (IBR)

G : Globe S : Strainer B – Butt Weld 1A. Carbon Steel
R : Gate T- Trap W – Socket weld 1B. Carbon Steel
L : Lift Check G – View Glass 1C. Carbon Steel
S : Swing Check 4. Teflon/PFA Lined
W : Wafer Check 5. SS 304
N : Needle 6. SS 316L
D : Thermodynamic Trap/ Balance Type 6B. SS 316L
T : Butterfly 6C. SS 316L
I : Piston 7. SS 304L
Y : Y – Type 8. SS 317L
P : Plug 9. UPVC
P: Pot Type 10. HDPE
F: Float Type
E.g. RVF1; BVF1C; PVF4; TVF5; BVF6; PVF6B

6.0 Technical Specifications of Valves
6.1 Specification of Gate Valve for Pipe Specification – 1
Valve Code : RVF1(IBR)

Sr. Sr.
Description Description
No. No.
Gate Valves with bolted
1 Type bonnet and flexible 16 Hand Wheel IS 1865 Gr. SG400
wedge
Mfg. A193 Gr. B7 / A194 Gr.
2 ASME B16.34 17 Hardware
Std. 2H
Refer Piping Material
Specification IPS-
3 Bore Full Bore 18 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Flange Ends, ANSI 16.5, Vapor/
4 Ends 19 Yes/FV
SORF Vacuum
Max/Min
5 Rating 150# 20 196/ 90
Temp.(0C)
6 Body ASTM A 216 Gr. WCB Max/Min
Seat 21 Pressure 13.2/FV
7 A 105 + HF
Ring (Kg/cm2(g))
Make/
8 Disc A 217 Gr. CA15 22 *
Model
9 Bonnet ASTM A 216 Gr. WCB
Hydro Test As per
Spirally-wound SS316 23 Body
10 Gasket Pressure standard
with Graphite filler
Bonnet Statutory
11 A 276 Type 410 24 IBR Approval Required
Bush Approval
Die-molded Graphite
12 Packing packing with braided
end-rings 1. Material Test
Certificate.
13 Gland A 276 Type 410 Special
25 2. Valve shall be
Gland requirements
14 A 105 synthetic enamel
Flange painted.
Yoke
15 ASTM A439 Type D2
Sleeve
For Quantity Refer Excel Sheet
Note: - 1. Valve code nos. shall be punched on the valve body.
2. * Vendor to specify.

6.2 Specification of Globe Valve for Pipe Specification – 1
Valve Code:-GVF1
Sr. Sr.
No No
A193 Gr. B7 / A194 Gr.
1 Type Globe Valve 16 Hardware
2H (Galvanized)
Specification IPS-
2 Mfg. Std. BS 1873 17 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
3 Plug Solid Type 18 Vacuum YES
4 Ends Flanged RF 19 Vapor YES
Flange Max/Min
5 ANSI B16.5 20 196/ 90
Drilling Temp.(°C)
Max/Min
6 Rating 150# 21 Pressure 13.2/FV
(Kg/cm2 (g))
ASTM A 216 Gr.
7 Body 22 Make *
WCB
ASTM A 216 Gr. Body
8 Bonnet Hydro Test As per
WCB 23
Pressure Standard
9 Stem SS 304 Seat
Statutory
10 Plug Disc * 24 IBR Approval Required
Approval
Spirally-wound
11 Stem Packing SS316 with Graphite 1. Material Test
Certificate.
filler
2. Investment Casting.
Spirally-wound Special
3. Valve shall be
12 Gasket SS316 with Graphite 25 requirement
synthetic enamel
filler s
painted.
13 Gland Bush SS 304
4. Pneumatic Test for
ASTM A 216 Seat at 7.0 Kg/cm² (g).
14 Gland Flange
Gr.WCB
ASTM A 216
15 Handle Wheel
Gr.WCB
Note: 1. Valve code nos. shall be punched on the valve body.

6.3 Specification of Wafer Check Valve for Pipe Specification – 1
Valve Code :WVF1
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Refer Piping
Material
Specification IPS-
1. Type Wafer Check Valve 2. Service
MBD18019-PP-
451-40KTPA-DE
Latest
3. Mfg. Std. API 602/600 4. Vacuum Full
5. Ends Flanged RF 6. Vapour Yes

Max/Min
7. Flange Drilling ANSI B 16.5 8. 196/ 90
Temp.(0C)
Max/Min
9. Rating 150 # 10. Pressure 13.2/FV
(Kg/cm2(g))
ASTM A 216 Gr.
11. Body WCB 12. Make/Model *
Spirally-wound
Sealing Ring Statutory IBR Approval
13. SS316 with 14.
(‘O’ Ring) Approval Required.
Graphite filler
15. Seat Ring A 105 + HF
Hydro Test As per
16. Body
ASTM A 240 Gr. Pressure standard
17. Dual Plate
CF8
18. Spring SS304
1. Material test
Stop & Hinge
20. SS304 certificates.
Pin Special
19. 2. Valve shall be
Requirements
21. Retailer SS304 synthetic enamel
painted.
Body plate &
22. SS304
Spring Bearing

6.4 Specification of Wafer Check Valve for Pipe Specification – 1
Valve Code : WVF1
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Refer Piping
Material
Specification IPS-
1. Type Wafer Check Valve 2. Service
MBD18019-PP-
451-40KTPA-DE
Latest
3. Mfg. Std. API 602/600 4. Vacuum Full
5. Ends Flanged RF 6. Vapour Yes

Max/Min
7. Flange Drilling ANSI B 16.5 8. 196/ 90
Temp.(0C)
Max/Min
9. Rating 150 # 10. Pressure 13.2/FV
(Kg/cm2(g))
ASTM A 216 Gr.
11. Body WCB 12. Make/Model *
Spirally-wound
Sealing Ring Statutory IBR Approval
13. SS316 with 14.
(‘O’ Ring) Approval Required
Graphite filler
15. Seat Ring A 105 + HF
Hydro Test As per
16. Body
ASTM A 240 Gr. Pressure standard
17. Dual Plate
CF8
18. Spring SS304
1. Material test
Stop & Hinge
20. SS 304 certificates.
Pin Special
19. 2. Valve shall be
Requirements
21. Retailer SS304 synthetic enamel
painted.
Body plate &
22. SS 304
Spring Bearing

6.5 Specification of Swing Check Valve for Pipe Specification –1
Valve Code:- SVF1

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Check Valve Swing A 193 Gr. B7/A 194
1 Type 15 Studs / Nuts
Type Gr.2H
Specification IPS-
2 Mfg. Std. API602 16 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
3 Ends Flanged RF 17 Vacuum Full
Flange
4 ANSI B 16.5 18 Vapour YES
Drilling
Max. /Min.
5 Rating 150 # 19 196/ 90
Temp.
Max. /Min.
6 Body A 216 Gr. WCB 20 Pressure 13.2/FV
Kg/cm2(g))
7 Cover A 216 Gr. WCB – Bolted 21 Make *
8 Seat Ring 13% Cr Renewable Hydro Test Body As per
22
9 Disc ASTM A 276 Gr. 410 Pressure Seat Standard
MFR’s Test
10 Hinge A 216 Gr. WCB 23 Required.
Cert.
Statutory
11 Hinge Pin SS 304 24 IBR Approval Required
Approval
12 Disc Nut SS 304
1. Material Test
13 Split Pin SS 304
Certificate.
Internal Special
25 2. Valve shall be
Sealing/ Requirements
14 SPW 304 (graphite filled) synthetic enamel
External painted.
Sealing


6.6 Specification of Piston Valve for Pipe Specification – 1
Valve Code :IVF1(IBR)

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Belleville
1 Type Piston Valve 16 Spring Steel
Washer
Threaded
2 Mfg. Std. API600 17 *
Bush
3 Ends Flanged RF 18 Tension Pin *
Flange Specification IPS-
4 ANSI B16.5 19 Service
Drilling MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
5 Rating 150# 20 Vacuum Full
6 Body A 216 Gr. WCB 21 Vapour Yes
Max/Min
7 Bonnet A 216 Gr. WCB 22 196/ 90
Temp.(0C)
Max / Min
8 Piston 17% Cr. Steel 23 Pressure 13.2 / FV
Kg/cm2(g)
9 Spindle AISI 410 Body
Hydro Test As Per
Lantern 24
10 AISI 410 Pressure Seat Standard
Bush
Upper MFR’s Test
11 * 25 Required
Valve Ring Certificates
Lower Statutory
12 * 26 IBR Approval Required
Valve Ring Approval
A 193 Gr. B7, A 194
13 Hardware
Gr. 2H 1. Material Test
14 Certification.
Special 2. Valve shall be
Gland ASTM A216 Gr. WCB 27
requirements synthetic enamel
painted.
Hand
15 CI
Wheel
Note: - 1. Valve code nos. shall be punched on the valve body.

3. Valve with Insulation should be Provided with Extended Lever Arrangement for
smooth Operation of Valve.

6.7 Specification of Thermodynamic Steam Trap for Pipe Specification – 1
Valve Code :DTSW1(IBR)

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Steam Trap
Specification IPS-
1 Type (Thermodynamic 12 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
Type)
40KTPA-DE Latest
2 Body ASTM A105 13 Vacuum/Vapour Full/Yes
Max/Min
3 Ends Socket 14 196/ 90
Temp.(0C)
Max/Min
(Kg/cm2(g))
*
5 Disc AISI 420 16 Make / Model
Main
Hydro Test
6 Bore AISI 420 17 As Per Standard
Pressure
Cap
MFR’s Test
7 Isotub Stainless Steel 18 Required
Cert.
AISI 304 Statutory
8 Filter 19 IBR Certificate Required
(perforated sheet) Approval
Filter Special 1. Material Test
9 AISI 420 20
Cap Requirements Certification.
2. Steam trap shall be
Mesh
10 * provided with inbuilt
Size
strainer.
3. Valve shall be
Studs / A193 Gr. B7 / A
11 Synthetic enamel
Nuts 194 Gr. 2H
Painted.

6.8 Specification of Ball Float Trap for Pipe Specification – 1
Valve Code:-FTF1
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Steam Trap A193 Gr. B7 / A 194 Gr.
1 Type 11 Studs / Nuts
(Float Type) 2H
Manufacturing Specification IPS-
2 * 12 Service
Std. MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Max/Min
3 Ends Flanged RF 13 196/ 90
Temp.(0C)
Max/Min
Flange
4 ANSI B16.5 14 Pressure 13.2/FV
Drilling
(Kg/cm2(g))
5 Rating 150# 15 Make / Model *
Hydro Test
6 Body A 216 Gr. WCB 16 As Per Standard
Pressure
MFR’s Test
7 Ball ASTM A240 Gr. 304 17 Required
Cert
Statutory IBR Certificate
8 Ball Lever ASTM A240 Gr. 304 18
Approval Required
9 Pivot Frame AISI 410 1. Material Test
Certification.
19
10 Valve SS 304 Requirements Synthetic enamel
Painted.

3. Dimensions standards shall be as per ANSI B 16.10.
4. Valve with Insulation should be Provided with Extended Lever Arrangement for
smooth Operation of Valve.

6.9 Specification of Y-type strainer for Pipe Specification –1
Valve Code:-YSF1
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Strainer (Y type) Specification IPS-
1. Type 14 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Design / Test *
2. 15 Vacuum Full
Std
Flanged
3. Ends 16 Vapour Yes
Max/Min
4. Flange Drilling ANSI B16.5 17 196/ 90
Temp.(0C)
Max / Min
5. Rating 150# 18 Pressure 13.2 / FV
Kg/cm2(g)
ASTM A216 Gr.
6. Body WCB 19 Make / Model *
ASTM A216 Gr.

Hydro Test
7. Body Cover WCB 20 As Per Standard
Pressure
SS Perforated
MFR’s Test
8. Element sheet & SS 304 21 Required
Certificates
Wire Mesh
9. Screen Mesh 20 Mesh
10. Screen Gasket AF 120/UNISIL 18 1. Material Test Certificate.
2. Valve shall be Synthetic
11. Body Gasket AF 120/UNISIL 18 Special
22 enamel Painted.
12. Drain size (NB) * requirements
3. Element shall be easily
A193 Gr. B7 / removable.
13. Hardware
A194 Gr. 2H

6.10 Specification of Pot type strainer for Pipe Specification –1
Valve Code:-PSF1
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Strainer (Pot Specification IPS-
1. Type 14 Service
type) MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Design / Test * Vacuum
2. 15 Full
Std
Flanged
Max/Min
4. Flange Drilling ANSI B16.5 17 196/ 90
Temp.
Max/Min
5. Rating 150# 18 13.2 / FV
Pressure
ASTM A216 Gr.
ASTM A 515 Gr. Hydro Test

7. Shell Cover 20 As Per Standard
60 Pressure
ASTM A 515 Gr.
MFR’s Test
8. Shell Bottom 60 21 Required
Certificates
SS Perforated
9. Element sheet & SS 304
Wire Mesh 1. Material Test
Certificate.
2. Valve shall be
Screen / Body AF 120/UNISIL Special
11. 22 Synthetic enamel
Gasket 18 requirements
Painted.
Drain/ Vent 3. Element shall be easily
12. *
size (NB) removable.
A193 Gr. B7 /
13. Hardware
A194 Gr. 2H

6.11 Specification of Globe Valve for Pipe Specification –1
Valve Code:-GVF1
Sr. Sr.
No No
A193 Gr. B7 / A194 Gr.
2H (Galvanized)
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
3 Plug Solid Type 18 Vacuum Full
4 Ends Flanged RF 19 Vapor Yes
Flange Max/Min
5 ANSI B16.5 20 196/ 90
Drilling Temp.(°C)
Max/Min
6 Rating 150# 21 Pressure 13.2 / FV
(Kg/cm2 (g))
ASTM A 216 Gr.
7 Body 22 Make *
WCB
ASTM A 216 Gr. Body
8 Bonnet Hydro Test As per
WCB 23
Pressure Standard
9 Stem SS 304 Seat
MFR’s Test
10 Plug Disc * 24 Required.
Certificates
Die-moulded
Graphite packing 1. Material Test
11 Stem Packing
with braided end- Certificate.
rings 2 .Investment Casting.
Special
Spirally-wound 3. Valve shall be
25 requirement
12 Gasket SS316 with Graphite Synthetic enamel
s
filler Painted.
13 Gland Bush SS 304 4. Pneumatic Test for
ASTM A 216 Seat at 7.0 Kg/cm² (g).
14 Gland Flange
Gr.WCB
ASTM A 216
15 Handle Wheel
Gr.WCB

6.12 Specification of Gate Valve for Pipe Specification – 1A
Valve Code :RVF1A

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
1 Type bonnet and flexible 16 Hand Wheel IS 1865 Gr. SG400
wedge
A193 Gr. B7 / A194 Gr.
2 Mfg. Std. ASME B16.34 17 Hardware
2H
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Flange Ends, ANSI 16.5, Vapour/
4 Ends 19 Yes/No
SORF Vacuum
Max/Min
5 Rating 150# 20 65 /25
Temp.(0C)
6 Body ASTM A 216 Gr. WCB Max/Min
21 Pressure 6/1.0
7 Seat Ring A 105 + HF (Kg/cm2(g))
Make/
8 Disc A 217 Gr. CA15 22 *
Model
9 Bonnet ASTM A 216 Gr. WCB
Hydro Test As per
Spirally-wound SS316 23 Body
Bonnet Statutory
11 A 276 Type 410 24 Not Required
Bush Approval
Die-moulded Graphite
12 Packing packing with braided 1. Material Test
end-rings. Certificate.
Special
13 Gland A 276 Type 410 2. Valve shall be
25 requirement
Gland Synthetic enamel
14 A 105 s
Flange Painted.
Yoke
15 ASTM A439 Type D2
Sleeve


6.13 Specification of Plug Valve for Pipe Specification – 1A
Valve Code :PVF1A

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Specification IPS-
1 Type Plug Valve 16 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
2 Design API 599 17 Vacuum No
3 Bore Full Bore 18 Vapor Yes

Max/Min
4 Ends Flanged RF 19 65 /25
Temp.(0C)
Max/Min
Flange
5 ANSI B16.5 20 Pressure 6/1.0
Drilling
(Kg/cm2(g))
6 Rating 150# 21 Operation Wrench
7 Body ASTM A216 Gr WCB 22 Make / Model *
8 Cover ASTM A216 Gr WCB Hydro Test Body As Per

23 Pressure
9 Plug ASTM A216 Gr WCB Seat Standard
MFR’s Test
10 Lever Boss ASTM A216 Gr WCB 24 Required
Certificates
11 Packing PTFE
1. Material Test
12 Lever Rod Carbon Steel
Certificate.
13 Handle GI with PVC Cover Special 2. Valve shall be
25
requirements Synthetic enamel
Stopper Painted.
14 Carbon Steel
Pin
A193 Gr. B7 / A194
15 Hardware
Gr. 2H
3. Valve having quarter movement should be Provided with integrated Locking
arrangement.

6.14 Specification of Y-type strainer for Pipe Specification –1A
Valve Code:-YSF1
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
1. Type 14 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Design / Test *
2. 15 Vacuum No
Std
Flanged
Max/Min
4. Flange Drilling ANSI B16.5 17 65 /25
Temp.(0C)
Max / Min
5. Rating 150# 18 Pressure 6/1.0
Kg/cm2(g)
ASTM A216 Gr.
ASTM A216 Gr.

Hydro Test
7. Body Cover WCB 20 As Per Standard
Pressure
SS Perforated
MFR’s Test
Certificates
Wire Mesh
10. Screen Gasket AF 120/UNISIL 18 1. Material Test Certificate.
2. Valve shall be Synthetic
11. Body Gasket AF 120/UNISIL 18 Special
22 enamel Painted.
12. Drain size (NB) * requirements
3. Element shall be easily
A193 Gr. B7 / removable.
13. Hardware
A194 Gr. 2H

6.15 Specification of Pot type strainer for Pipe Specification –1A
Valve Code:-PSF1
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
14. Type 14 Service
40KTPA-DE Latest
15. 15 No
Std
Flanged
Max/Min
17. Flange Drilling ANSI B16.5 17 65 /25
Temp.(0C)
Max / Min
18. Rating 150# 18 Pressure 6/1.0
Kg/cm2(g)
ASTM A216 Gr.
ASTM A 515 Gr. Hydro Test

20. Shell Cover 20 As Per Standard
60 Pressure
ASTM A 515 Gr.
MFR’s Test
21. Shell Bottom 60 21 Required
Certificates
SS Perforated
22. Element sheet & SS 304
Wire Mesh 1. Material Test
Certificate.
2. Valve shall be
Screen / Body AF 120/UNISIL Special
24. 22 Synthetic enamel
Gasket 18 requirements
Painted.
Drain/ Vent 3. Element shall be easily
25. *
A193 Gr. B7 /
26. Hardware
A194 Gr. 2H

6.16 Specification of Butterfly Valve for Pipe Specification–1C
Valve Code : -TVF1C

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Butterfly Valve –
Specification IPS-
1 Type Wafer Type, Centric 15 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
Disc
40KTPA-DE Latest.
2 Mfg. Std. BS 5155 16 Vacuum Full
Wafer Type Suitable
3 Ends for Mounting 17 Vapor NA
Between Flanges
ANSI B 16.5 RF, Max/Min
4 Flange Std. 18 65 / 25
ASA Temp.(0C)
Max / Min
5 Rating 150# 19 Pressure 6 / FV
Kg/cm2(g)
ASTM A 216 Make /
6 Body 20 * / *
GR.WCB Model
7 Disc / Flap A 351 Gr. CF8 21 Operation Manual
Up to / Incl.
8 Seat EPDM (Renewable) 22 Lever Type
150 NB
Seal Ring / O Above 150
9 EPDM Gear operated
ring NB
Hydro Test
10 Stem AISI 410 23 Body 15.0 Kg/cm2 (g)
Pressure
11 Stem Seal EPDM (API 598) Seat 11.0 Kg/cm2 (g)
MFR’s Test
12 Stem Bushing PTFE 24 Required
Certificates
GI with PVC 1 .Material Test
Handle /
13 Cover/ CS Zinc Certificate.
Wheel
Coated Special 2. Valve shall be Synthetic
25
requirements enamel Painted.
A193 Gr. B7 / A194
14 Hardware 3. Tight shut off for Seat
Gr. 2H
Leakage.
arrangement.

6.17 Specification of Check Valve (Swing Type) for Pipe Specification–1C
Valve Code : -SVF1C

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Check Valve Swing A 193 Gr. B7/A 194
1. Type 15 Studs / Nuts
Type(Full Bore) Gr.2H
Specification IPS-
2. Mfg. Std. BS 1868 16 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
3. Ends Flanged 17 Vacuum Full
Flange
4. ANSI B16.5 18 Vapour NA
Drilling
Max/Min
5. Rating 150# 19 65 / 25
Temp.(0C)
Max / Min
6. Body A 216 Gr. WCB 20 Pressure 6 / FV
Kg/cm2(g)
A 216 GR WCB
7. Cover 21 Make/Model */*
Bolted
Hydro Test
8. Seat Ring 13 % Cr Renewable 22 Body 30 Kg/cm2(g)
Pressure
9. Disc ASTM A 276 Gr.410 (API 598) Seat 21 Kg/cm2(g)
MFR’s Test
10. Hinge A 216 Gr. WCB 23 Required
Cert.
Statutory
11. Hinge Pin SS 410 24 Not Required
Approval
Special 1. Material test
12. Disc Nut SS 304 25
Requirements certificates.
13. Split Pin SS 304 2. Valve shall be
Synthetic enamel
14. Body Gasket Reinforced PTFE Painted.


6.18 Specification of Check Valve (Dual plate Type) for Pipe Specification–1C
Valve Code : - WVF1C

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Check Valve-Dual Specification IPS-
1. Type 14 Service
Plate Type MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
2. Mfg. Std. API 594 15 Vacuum Full
3. Ends Flanged RF 16 Vapour NA
Flange Max/Min
4. ANSI B 16.5 17 65 / 25
Drilling Temp.(0C)
Max / Min
5. Rating 150 # 18 Pressure 6 / FV
Kg/cm2(g)
ASTM A 216 Gr.
6. Body 19 Make/Model */*
WCB
Sealing Ring MFR’s Test
7. EPDM - Renewable 20 Required
(‘O’ Ring) Cert.
Hydro Test 21.0
8. Seat Ring 13 % Cr Renewable Body
Pressure Kg/cm2(g)
21
ASTM A 240 Gr. 14.0
9. Dual Plate Seat
CF8 Kg/cm2(g)
10. Spring SS304
Stop & 1. Material test
11. SS304
Hinge Pin certificates.
Special
12. Retailer SS304 22 2. Valve shall be
Requirements
Synthetic enamel
Body plate &
Painted.
13. Spring SS 304
Bearing

6.19 Specification of Ball valve flanged end for Pipe Specification–1C
Valve Code : - BVF1C

Sr. Sr.
No No
Ball Valve – (Two
A193 Gr. B7 / A194 Gr.
1. Type Piece), Floating 16 Hardware
2H
Design
Specification IPS-
2. Mfg. Std. BS 5351 17 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
3. Bore Full Port 18 Vacuum Full
4. Ends Flanged RF 19 Vapour NA
Flange Max/Min
5. ANSI B16.5 20 65 / 25
Drilling Temp.(0C)
Max / Min
6. Rating 150# 21 Pressure 6 / FV
Kg/cm2(g)
7. Body A 216 Gr. WCB 22 Make/ Model */ *
8. Ball A 351 Gr. CF 8 Hydro Test Body 20.0 Kg/cm2 (g)
Pressure
23
9. Seat Reinforced PTFE (BS 6755 Part Seat 15.0 Kg/cm2 (g)
1)
MFR’s Test
10. Stem AISI 304 24 Required
Certificates
11. Stem Seal Grafoil 1. Material Test
12. Body Seal Grafoil Certificates.
Special
13. Gland A 216 Gr. WCB 2. Valve shall be synthetic
requir
Gland 25 enamel painted.
14. Graphite ement
Packing 3. Pneumatic Test for Seat
s
GI with PVC at 7.0 Kg/cm2 (g).
15. Handle
Cover
arrangement.

6.20 Specification of Plug Valve for Pipe Specification – 4
Valve Code :PVF4

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
2 Design API 599 17 Vacuum No
3 Bore Full Bore 18 Vapour Yes

Max/Min
4 Ends Flanged RF 19 120/ 25
Temp.(0C)
Max/Min
Flange
5 ANSI B16.5 20 Pressure 10.0/1.0
Drilling
(Kg/cm2(g))
ASTM A216 Gr WCB
7 Body 22 Make / Model *
PFA Lined
ASTM A216 Gr WCB
8 Cover Hydro Test Body
PFA Lined As Per
23 Pressure
ASTM A216 Gr WCB Standard
9 Plug Seat
PFA Lined
MFR’s Test
10 Lever Boss ASTM A216 Gr WCB 24 Required
Certificates
11 Packing PTFE
1. Material Test
12 Lever Rod Carbon Steel
Certificate.
13 Handle GI with PVC Cover Special 2. Valve shall be
25
Stopper painted.
14 Carbon Steel
Pin 3. Spark Test Repot.
A193 Gr. B7 / A194
15 Hardware
Gr. 2H
arrangement.

6.21 Specification of Ball Check Valve for Pipe Specification –4
Valve Code :BLVF4

Sr. Sr.
No No
1 Type Ball Check Valve 13 Vapor Yes
Max/Min
2 Design API 599 14 120/ 25
Temp.(0C)
Max/Min
3 Ends Flanged RF 15 Pressure 10.0/1.0
(Kg/cm2(g))
Flange
4 ANSI B16.5 16 Make / Model *
Drilling
5 Rating 150# Hydro Test Body
As Per
ASTM A216 Gr WCB 17 Pressure
6 Body Seat Standard
PFA Lined
ASTM A216 Gr WCB MFR’s Test
7 Side Piece 18 Required
PFA Lined Certificates
8 Ball PTFE
9 Packing PTFE
1. Material Test
A193 Gr. B7 / A194 Gr. Certificate.
10 Hardware
2H Special 2. Valve shall be
Refer Piping Material 19
Specification IPS- painted.
11 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
12 Vacuum No


6.22 Specification of Ball Valve for Pipe Specification –5
Valve Code :BVF5

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Ball Valve – (Two
1 Type Piece) ,Floating 16 Hardware A193 Gr. B8 / A194 Gr. 8
Design
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
3 Bore Full Port 18 Vacuum Full
Flange Max/Min
5 ANSI B16.5 20 120/ 25
Drilling Temp. (0C)
Max/Min
(Kg/cm2(g))
A182 F304/A 351
7 Body 22 Make/ Model *
Gr. CF8
8 Ball A 351 Gr. CF8 Hydro Test Body
As Per
23 Pressure
9 Seat RPTFE Seat Standard
MFR’s Test
10 Stem AISI 304 24 Required
Certificates
11 Stem Seal Grafoil
12 Body Seal Grafoil
13 Gland A 351 Gr. CF8 1. Material Test
Special
Gland 25 Certificates.
14 Grafoil requirements
Packing
SS304 with PVC
15 Handle
Cover

arrangement.

6.23 Specification of Butterfly Valve for Pipe Specification –5
Valve Code:- TVF5

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Butterfly Valve –
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-40KTPA-
Disc
DE Latest
Wafer Type Suitable
3 Ends for Mounting 17 Vapour Yes
Between Flanges
ANSI B 16.5 RF, ASA Max/Min
4 Flange Std. 18 120/25
150# Temp. (0C)
Max/Min
Pressure
5 Rating 150# 19 10.0/FV
(Kg/cm2(g
)
Make /
6 Body ASTM A216 Gr WCB 20 *
Model
Up to /
8 Seat EPDM (Replaceable) 22 Incl. 150 Ratchet Type
NB
Seal Ring / Above 150
9 EPDM Gear Actuated
O ring NB
10 Stem AISI 410 Hydro Test Body
23 As Per Standard
11 Stem Seal EPDM Pressure Seat
Stem MFR’s Test
12 PTFE 24 Required
Bushing Certificates
Handle /
13 SS304 Special
Wheel 1. Material Test Certificate.
25 requireme
A193 Gr. B8 / A194
14 Hardware nts
Gr. 8

arrangement.

6.24 Specification of Wafer Check Valve for Pipe Specification –5
Valve Code:- WVF5

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Body
plate&
1. Type Wafer Check Valve 14 SS 304
Spring
Bearing
Specification IPS-
2. Mfg. Std. API 594 15 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Wafer type to
3. Ends mount between 16 Vapour Yes
Flanges
Specific
4. Flange Drilling ANSI B16.5 17 ~1.0
Gravity
Max. /Min.
5. Rating 150# 18 120/25
Temp. (0C)
Max. /Min.
ASTM A351 Gr.
Pressure
6. Body CF8 19 10.0/FV
(Kg/cm2(g)
)
Sealing Ring EPDM - Renewable
7. 20 Make *
(‘O’ Ring)
13 % Cr Hydro Test
8. Seat Ring 21 As Per Standard
Replaceable Pressure
ASTM A 240 Gr.
9. Dual Plate 22 Model *
CF8
10. Spring SS304
Stop & Hinge
11. SS 304 Special 1. Material Test
Pin
23 requiremen Certification.
12. Retailer SS304 ts
A193 Gr. B8 / A194
13. Hardware
Gr. 8

Valve Code:- SVF5

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Check Valve Swing
1 Type 15 Studs / Nuts A 193 Gr. B8/A 194 Gr.8
Type
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Flange
Drilling
Max. /Min.
5 Rating 150 # 19 120/25
Temp. (0C)
Max. /Min.
A 351 Gr. CF8
6 Body 20 Pressure 10.0/FV
(Kg/cm2(g))
7 Cover A 351 Gr. CF8 – Bolted 21 Make *
A 351 Gr. CF8
8 Seat Ring Hydro Test Body As per
Replaceable 22
Pressure Standard
9 Disc ASTM A 276 Gr.304 Seat
MFR’s Test
10 Hinge A 351 Gr. CF8 23 Required
Cert.
Statutory
11 Hinge Pin SS 304 24 Not Applicable
Approval
12 Disc Nut SS 304
13 Split Pin SS 304
1. Material Test
Internal Special
25 Certificate.
14 RPTFE /Grafoil
External
Sealing

3. Dimensions standards shall be as per ANSI B 16.10

Valve Code:-YSF5
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
1. Type 14 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Design / Test
2. * 15 Vacuum Full
Std
3. Ends Flanged 16 Vapour YES
Specific
Gravity
Max/Min
5. Rating 150# 18 120/25
Temp. (0C)
Max/Min
ASTM A351 Gr.
6. Body 19 Pressure 10.0/FV
CF8
(Kg/cm2(g))
ASTM A351 Gr.
7. Body Cover 20 Make / Model *
CF8
SS Perforated
Hydro Test
8. Element sheet & SS 304 21 As Per Standard
Pressure
Wire Mesh
MFR’s Test
9. Screen Mesh 20 Mesh 22 Required
Certificates
AF 120/UNISIL
10. Screen Gasket
18
AF 120/UNISIL 1. Material Test
11. Body Gasket Special
18 23 Certificate.
requirements
12. Drain size (NB) *
A193 Gr. B8 /
13. Hardware
A194 Gr. 8

Valve Code:-PSF5
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
1. Type 14 Service
40KTPA-DE Latest
Design / Test Vacuum
2. * 15 Full
Std
Specific
Gravity
Max/Min
5. Rating 150# 18 120/25
Temp. (0C)
Max/Min
ASTM A351 Gr.
CF8
(Kg/cm2(g))
ASTM A351 Gr.
7. Shell Cover 20 Make / Model *
CF8
ASTM A351 Gr. Hydro Test
8. Shell Bottom 21 As Per Standard
CF8 Pressure
SS Perforated
MFR’s Test
Certificates
Wire Mesh
Screen / Body AF 120/UNISIL
11. 1. Material Test
Gasket 18
Special Certificate.
Drain/ Vent 23
12. * requirements 2. Element shall be easily
size (NB)
removable.
A193 Gr. B8 /
13. Hardware
A194 Gr. 8

Valve Code:- SVF6

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Check Valve Swing
Type
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Flange
Drilling
Max. /Min.
5 Rating 150 # 19 160/25
Temp. (0C)
Max. /Min.
6 Body A 351 Gr. CF8M 20 Pressure 11.0/FV
(Kg/cm2(g))
7 Cover A 351 Gr. CF8M – Bolted 21 Make *
A 351 Gr. CF8M Hydro Test
8 Seat Ring Body As per
Replaceable 22 Pressure
Standard
MFR’s Test
10 Hinge A 351 Gr. CF8M 23 Required
Cert.
Statutory
Approval
12 Disc Nut SS 316
13 Split Pin SS 316
1. Material Test
Internal Special
25 Certificate.
14 RPTFE /Grafoil
External
Sealing


Valve Code :BVF6

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Ball Valve – (Two
Design
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
4 Ends Flanged RF 19 Vapour Yes
Flange Max/Min
5 ANSI B16.5 20 160/25
Drilling Temp. (0C)
Max/Min
(Kg/cm2(g))
A182 F316/A 351
Gr. CF8M
8 Ball A 351 Gr. CF8M Hydro Test Body
As Per
23 Pressure
MFR’s Test
Certificates
13 Gland A 351 Gr. CF8M 1. Material Test
Special
14 Grafoil requirements
Packing
SS304 with PVC
15 Handle
Cover

arrangement.
4 . Valve with Insulation should be Provided with Extended Lever
Arrangement for smooth Operation of Valve.

Valve Code:- TVF6

Sr. Sr.
No. No
Butterfly Valve –
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
Disc
40KTPA-DE Latest
Wafer Type Suitable
Between Flanges
4 Flange Std. 18 160/25
150# Temp. (0C)
Max/Min
(Kg/cm2(g))
Make /
6 Body A351 Gr. CF8M 20 *
Model
7 Disc / Flap A 351 Gr. CF8M 21 Operation Manual
Up to / Incl.
8 Body Seat SS316 22 Ratchet Type
150 NB
Above 150
9 Disc Seat RPTFE Gear Actuated
NB
10 Stem SS316 Body
Hydro Test As Per
Laminated SS + 23
11 Stem Seal Pressure Seat Standard
Grafoil seal
Stem Laminated SS + MFR’s Test
12 24 Required
Bushing Grafoil seal Certificates
Handle /
13 SS304 1. Material Test
Wheel Special
25 Certificate
A193 Gr. B8 / A194 requirements
14 Hardware
Gr. 8

arrangement.
4 . Valve with Insulation should be Provided with Extended Lever

Valve Code:-YSF6
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Specification IPS-
1. Type Strainer (Y type) 14 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Design / Test
2. * 15 Vacuum Full
Std
3. Ends Flanged 16 Vapour Yes
Specific
Gravity
Max/Min
5. Rating 150# 18 160/25
Temp. (0C)
Max/Min
ASTM A351 Gr.
6. Body 19 Pressure 11/FV
CF8M
(Kg/cm2(g))
ASTM A351 Gr.
CF8M
SS316L
Perforated sheet Hydro Test
8. Element 21 As Per Standard
& SS 316L Wire Pressure
Mesh
MFR’s Test
Certificates
10. Screen Gasket RPTFE
11. Body Gasket RPTFE 1. Material Test
Special
12. Drain size (NB) * 23 Certificate.
requirements
A193 Gr. B8 /
13. Hardware
A194 Gr. 8

Valve Code:-PSF6
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
1. Type 14 Service
40KTPA-DE Latest
Design / Test Vacuum
2. * 15 Full
Std
3. Ends Flanged 16 Vapor Yes
Specific
Gravity
Max/Min
5. Rating 150# 18 160/25
Temp. (0C)
Max/Min
ASTM A351 Gr.
CF8M
(Kg/cm2(g))
ASTM A351 Gr.
CF8M
ASTM A351 Gr. Hydro Test
CF8M Pressure
SS316L
Perforated sheet MFR’s Test
9. Element 22 Required
& SS 316L Wire Certificates
Mesh
Screen / Body
11. RPTFE 1. Material Test
Gasket
Drain/ Vent 23
size (NB)
removable.
A193 Gr. B8 /
13. Hardware
A194 Gr. 8

Valve Code:- WVF6

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Wafer Check Body plate &
1. Type 14 SS 316
Valve Spring Bearing
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Wafer type to
Vacuum/
3. Ends mount between 16 Full/ Yes
Vapor
Flanges
Specific
Gravity
Max. /Min.
5. Rating 150# 18 160/25
Temp (0C)
Max. /Min.
ASTM A351 Gr.
CF8M
(Kg/cm2(g))
Sealing Ring
7. RPTFE 20 Make *
(‘O’ Ring)
13 % Cr Hydro Test
ASTM A 240 Gr.
CF8M
10. Spring SS316
Stop & Hinge
11. SS 316 1. Material Test
Pin Special
23 Certificate.
12. Retailer SS316 requirements
A193 Gr. B8 /
13. Hardware
A194 Gr. 8
3. Valve with Insulation should be Provided with Extended Lever

6.34 Specification of Globe Valve for Pipe Specification –6
Valve Code:- GVF6

Sr. Sr.
No No
A193 Gr. B7 / A194 Gr.
2H (Galvanized)
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
3 Plug Solid Type 18 Vacuum Full
Flange Max/Min
5 ANSI B16.5 20 160/25
Drilling Temp.(°C)
Max/Min
6 Rating 150# 21 11/FV (Kg/cm2 (g))
Pressure
ASTM A351 Gr.
7 Body CF8M 22 Make *
ASTM A351 Gr. Body

8 Bonnet
CF8M Hydro Test As per
23
ASTM A351 Gr. Pressure Standard
9 Stem Seat
CF8M
MFR’s Test
10 Plug Disc * 24 Required.
Certificates
11 Stem Packing PTFE – Renewable 1. Material Test
12 Gasket PTFE – Renewable Certificate.
2. Investment Casting.
13 Gland Bush SS316 Special
3. Valve shall be
25 requirement
Synthetic enamel
ASTM A351 Gr. s
14 Gland Flange Painted.
CF8M 4. Pneumatic Test for
Seat at 7.0 Kg/cm² (g).
ASTM A351 Gr.
15 Handle Wheel
CF8M

6.35 Specification of Plug Valve for Pipe Specification – 6B
Valve Code:-PSF6B
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Specification IPS-
1 Type Sleeved Plug Valve 16 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
2 Design API 599 17 Vacuum Full

Max/Min
4 Ends Flanged RF 19 120/25
Temp.(0C)
Max/Min
Flange
5 ANSI B16.5 20 Pressure 10.0/Full Vacuum
Drilling
(Kg/cm2(g))
Wrench for up to 6” and
6 Rating 150# 21 Operation
above 6” Gear Operated
7 Body ASTM A351 Gr CF8M 22 Make / Model *
8 Cover ASTM A351 Gr CF8M Hydro Test Body As Per

23 Pressure
9 Plug ASTM A351 Gr CF8M Seat Standard
MFR’s Test
10 Lever Boss ASTM A351 Gr CF8M 24 Required
Certificates
Inner 1. Material Test
11 RPTFE
Sealing Certificate.
12 Lever Rod SS304 2. Valve shall be
provided with
13 Handle SS304 with PVC Cover Special double body sealing,
25
requirements multiple stem
External
14 Grafoil sealing & with blow
Sealing
out proof stem.
A193 Gr. B8 / A194 3. Valve should be of
15 Hardware
Gr. 8 anti-static design.
arrangement.
4 .Valve with Insulation should be Provided with Extended Lever

6.36 Specification of Butterfly Valve for Pipe Specification –6B
Valve Code:- TVF6B

Sr. Sr.
No. No
Butterfly Valve – Lug
Specification IPS-
1 Type Type, Double 15 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-40KTPA-
Eccentric Disc
DE Latest
3 Ends Lug Type 17 Vapor Yes
4 Flange Std. 18 120/25
150# Temp.(0C)
Max/Min
Pressure
5 Rating 150# 19 10.0/Full Vacuum
(Kg/cm2
(g))
Make /
6 Body A 351 Gr. CF8M 20 *
Model
Up to /
8 Body Seat RPTFE Incl. 150 Ratchet Type
NB
22
Stainless Steel ASTM
Above
9 Disc Seat A240 Type S31803 + Gear Actuated
150 NB
Grafoil
10 Stem SS316 Hydro Body
Laminated SS + 23 Test As Per Standard
11 Stem Seal Pressure Seat
Grafoil seal
MFR’s
Stem Laminated SS + Test
12 24 Required
Bushing Grafoil seal Certificate
s
Handle /
13 SS304 Special
Wheel 1. Material Test Certificate
25 requireme
A193 Gr. B8 / A194
14 Hardware nts
Gr. 8

arrangement.

6.37 Specification of Y type strainer for Pipe Specification –6B
Valve Code:- YSF6B

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
1. Type 14 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Design / Test *
2. 15 Vacuum Full
Std
Flanged
3. Ends 16 vapor Yes
Specific
Gravity
Max/Min
5. Rating 150# 18 120/25
Temp. (0C)
ASTM A351 Gr Max/Min
6. Body CF8M 19 Pressure 10.0/FV
(Kg/cm2(g))
ASTM A351 Gr
CF8M
SS316L
Mesh
MFR’s Test
Certificates
10. Screen Gasket RPTFE
11. Body Gasket RPTFE 1. Material Test
Special
12. Drain size (NB) * 23 Certificate
requirements
A193 Gr. B8 /
13. Hardware
A194 Gr. 8

6.38 Specification of Pot type strainer for Pipe Specification –6B
Valve Code:-PSF6B
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
1. Type 14 Service
40KTPA-DE Latest
2. 15 Full
Std
Flanged
3. Ends 16 vapor Yes
Specific
Gravity
Max/Min
5. Rating 150# 18 120/25
Temp. (0C)
(Kg/cm2(g))
ASTM A351 Gr
CF8M
ASTM A351 Gr Hydro Test
CF8M Pressure
SS316L
Mesh
Screen / Body
11. RPTFE 1. Material Test
Gasket
Drain/ Vent 23
size (NB)
removable.
A193 Gr. B8 /
13. Hardware
A194 Gr. 8

6.39 Specification of Ball Valve for Pipe Specification –6C
Valve Code :BVF6C

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Ball Valve – (Two
1 Type Piece) , Floating 16 Hardware A193 Gr. B8 / A194 Gr. 8
Design
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Flange Max/Min
5 ANSI B16.5 20 180/25
Drilling Temp.( 0C)
Max/Min
(Kg/cm2(g))
A182 F316/A 351
Gr. CF8M
As Per
ASTM A 276 Type 23 Pressure
9 Seat Seat Standard
316 Stellited
MFR’s Test
Certificates
11 Stem Seal Grafoil 1. Material Test
12 Body Seal Grafoil Certificate.
2. Valve shall be VOC
13 Gland A 351 Gr. CF8M
Rated & Fire Safe
Gland
14 Grafoil Design.
Packing
25
requirements provided with double
body sealing, multiple
SS304 with PVC stem sealing & with
15 Handle
Cover blow out. proof stem.
4. Valve should be of
anti-static design.

arrangement.

6.40 Specification of Butterfly Valve for Pipe Specification –6C
Valve Code:- TVF6C

Sr. Sr.
No. No
Butterfly Valve – Lug
Specification IPS-
1 Type Type, Triple Eccentric 15 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
Disc
40KTPA-DE Latest
3 Ends Lug Type 17 Vapour Yes
4 Flange Std. 18 180/25
150# Temp.( 0C)
Max/Min
(Kg/cm2(g))
Make /
Model
Up to / Incl.
8 Body Seat SS316L Ratchet Type
150 NB
Stainless Steel ASTM 22
Above 150
9 Disc Seat A240 Type S31803 + Gear Actuated
NB
Grafoil
10 Stem SS316 Body
Hydro Test
Laminated SS + 23 As Per Standard
11 Stem Seal Pressure Seat
Grafoil seal
Stem Laminated SS + MFR’s Test
12 24 Required
Bushing Grafoil seal Certificates
Handle / 1. Material Test
13 SS304
Wheel Certificate.
Rated & Fire Safe
Design.
Special
3. Valve shall be
25 requirement
A193 Gr. B8 / A194 provided with double
14 Hardware s
Gr. 8 body sealing, multiple
stem sealing & with
blow out. proof stem
anti-static design.

3 . Valve having quarter movement should be Provided with integrated Locking
arrangement.
4 .Valve with Insulation should be Provided with Extended Lever Arrangement
for smooth Operation of Valve.

6.41 Specification of Wafer Check Valve for Pipe Specification –6C
Valve Code:- WVF6C

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Wafer Check Body plate&
1. Type 14 SS 316
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Wafer type to
3. Ends mount between 16 Vacuum Full
Flanges
4. Flange Drilling ANSI B16.5 17 Vapour Yes
Max/Min
5. Rating 150# 18 180/25
Temp.( 0C)
Max/Min
ASTM A351 Gr.
CF3M
(Kg/cm2(g))
Sealing Ring
7. RPTFE 20 Make *
(‘O’ Ring)
13 % Cr Hydro Test
ASTM A 240 Gr.
CF8M
10. Spring SS316 1. Material Test
Stop & Hinge Certificate.
11. SS 316 2. Valve shall be VOC
Pin
12. Retailer SS316 Rated & Fire Safe
Design.
3. Valve shall be
Special
23 provided with
requirements
double body sealing,
A193 Gr. B8 / multiple stem sealing
13. Hardware
A194 Gr. 8 & with blow out.
proof stem
anti-static design.

6.42 Specification of Plug Valve for Pipe Specification – 6C
Valve Code :PVF6C

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
2 Design API 599 17 Vacuum Full

Max/Min
4 Ends Flanged RF 19 180/25
Temp.( 0C)
Max/Min
Flange
5 ANSI B16.5 20 Pressure 11.5/FV
Drilling
(Kg/cm2(g))
7 Body ASTM A351 Gr CF8M 22 Make / Model *
8 Cover ASTM A351 Gr CF8M Hydro Test Body As Per

23 Pressure
9 Plug ASTM A351 Gr CF8M Seat Standard
MFR’s Test
10 Lever Boss ASTM A351 Gr CF8M 24 Required
Certificates
Inner 1. Material Test
11 RPTFE
Sealing Certificate.
12 Lever Rod SS304 2. Valve shall be VOC
Rated & Fire Safe
13 Handle SS304 with PVC Cover Design.
3. Valve shall be
External Special
14 Grafoil 25 provided with
Sealing requirements
double body sealing,
multiple stem sealing
A193 Gr. B8 / A194 & with blow out.
15 Hardware proof stem.
Gr. 8
anti-static design.
3 . Valve having quarter movement should be Provided with integrated Locking
arrangement.
4 .Valve with Insulation should be Provided with Extended Lever Arrangement

6.43 Specification of Swing Check Valve for Pipe Specification –6C
Valve Code:- SVF6C

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Check Valve Swing
Type
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Flange
4 ANSI B 16.5 18 Vapour Yes
Drilling
Max/Min
5 Rating 150 # 19 180/25
Temp.( 0C)
Max/Min
6 Body A 351 Gr. CF8M 20 Pressure 11.5/FV
(Kg/cm2(g))
7 Cover A 351 Gr. CF8M – Bolted 21 Make *
A 351 Gr. CF8M Hydro Test
Standard
MFR’s Test
10 Hinge A 351 Gr. CF8M 23 Required
Cert.
Statutory
Approval
12 Disc Nut SS 316 1. Material Test
13 Split Pin SS 316 Certificate.
Rated & Fire Safe
Design.
3. Valve shall be
Special
25 provided with
Body Requirements
14 RPTFE double body sealing,
Gasket multiple stem
sealing & with blow
out proof stem
anti-static design.


6.44 Specification of Gate Valve for Pipe Specification – 6C
Valve Code :RVF6C

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
1 Type 16 Hand Wheel SS304
bonnet
Mfg.
2 API 602 17 Hardware A 193 Gr. B8/A 194 Gr.8
Std.
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
4 Ends 19 Yes/FV
SORF Vacuum
Max/Min
5 Rating 150# 20 180/25
Temp.(0C)
6 Body A 351 Gr. CF8M Max/Min
Seat 21 Pressure 11.5/FV (Kg/cm2(g))
7 SS316 (Kg/cm2(g))
Ring
Make/
8 Disc A 351 Gr. CF8M 22 *
Model
9 Bonnet A 351 Gr. CF8M
Hydro Test As per
Spirally-wound SS316L 23 Body
Bonnet Statutory
11 SS316 24 Not Required
Bush Approval
Die-moulded Graphite 1. Material Test
12 Packing packing with braided Certificate.
end-rings 2. Valve shall be VOC
Rated & Fire Safe
13 Gland SS316
Design.
Gland Special 3. Valve shall be
14 SS316 25
Flange requirement provided with double
stem sealing & with
Yoke
15 SS316 blow out proof stem.
Sleeve
anti-static design.

6.45 Specification of Y-type strainer for Pipe Specification –6C
Valve Code:-YSF6C
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Strainer (Y-type) Specification IPS-
1. Type 14 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Design / Test *
2. 15 Vacuum Full
Std
Flanged
3. Ends 16 Vapor Yes
Specific
Gravity
Max/Min
5. Rating 150# 18 180/25
Temp (0C)
(Kg/cm2(g))
ASTM A351 Gr
CF8M
SS316L
Mesh
MFR’s Test
Certificates
10. Screen Gasket RPTFE 1. Material Test
11. Body Gasket RPTFE Certificate.
Rated & Fire Safe
Design.
3. Valve shall be
Special
23 provided with
requirements
A193 Gr. B8 / double body sealing,
13. Hardware multiple stem sealing
A194 Gr. 8
& with blow out
proof stem.
anti-static design.

6.46 Specification of Pot type strainer for Pipe Specification –6C
Valve Code:-PSF6C
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
1. Type 14 Service
40KTPA-DE Latest
2. 15 Full
Std
Flanged
Specific
Gravity
Max/Min
5. Rating 150# 18 180/25
Temp. (0C)
(Kg/cm2(g))
ASTM A351 Gr
CF8M
CF8M Pressure
SS316L
Mesh
1. Material Test
Screen / Body Certificate.
11. RPTFE
Gasket 2. Valve shall be VOC
Drain/ Vent Rated & Fire Safe
12. *
size (NB) Design.
3. Valve shall be
provided with
Special
23 double body sealing,
requirements
multiple stem sealing
A193 Gr. B8 / & with blow out
13. Hardware proof stem.
A194 Gr. 8
anti-static design.
5. Element shall be
easily removable.


6.47 Specification of Gate Slide Valve for Pipe Specification – 6P
Valve Code:-RVF6 (K)

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
1 Type Slide Valves Knife Type 16 Hand Wheel SS304
Mfg.
2 * 17 Hardware A 193 Gr. B8/A 194 Gr.8
Std.
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
4 Ends 19 Yes/FV
SORF Vacuum
Max/Min
5 Rating 150# 20 120/25
Temp (0C)
6 Body A 351 Gr. CF8M Max/Min
Seat 21 Pressure 0.5/ Partial Vacuum
7 SS316
Ring
Slide Make/
8 A 351 Gr. CF8M 22 *
Plate Model
9 Bonnet A 351 Gr. CF8M
Hydro Test As per
Spirally-wound SS316L 23 Body
Bonnet Statutory
11 SS316 24 Not Required
Bush Approval
Die-moulded Graphite 1. Material Test
12 Packing packing with braided Certificate.
end-rings 2. Valve shall be Fire
13 Gland SS316 Safe Design.
3. Valve shall be
Gland Special
14 SS316 25 provided with double
Flange requirement
stem sealing & with
Yoke blow out proof stem.
15 SS316
Sleeve 4. Valve should be of
anti-static design.

6.48 Specification of Butterfly Valve for Pipe Specification –6P
Valve Code:-TVF6
Sr. Sr.
No. No
Butterfly Valve – Lug Specification IPS-
1 Type 15 Service
Type, Eccentric Disc MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
3 Ends Lug Type 17 Vapour Yes
4 Flange Std. 18 120/25
150# Temp. (0C)
Max/Min
5 Rating 150# 19 Pressure 0.5/ Partial Vacuum
(Kg/cm2(g))
Make /
Model
Up to / Incl.
8 Body Seat SS316 Ratchet Type
150 NB
22
Above 150
9 Disc Seat RPTFE Gear Actuated
NB
10 Stem SS316 Hydro Test Body
23 As Per Standard
11 Stem Seal PTFE Pressure Seat
Stem MFR’s Test
12 PTFE 24 Required
Handle / 1. Material Test
13 SS304 Special
Wheel Certificate
25 requirement
A193 Gr. B8 / A194 2. Valve should be of
14 Hardware s
Gr. 8 anti-static design.

arrangement.

6.49 Specification for Liquid Sampling Valve
Valve Code:-LSV6
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Ball Valve with
1. Type Spring Return 18 Hardware A193 Gr. B8/ A194 Gr. 8
Handle
2. Mfg. Std. BS:5351 19 Service Utility
3. Bore Full Port 20 Vacuum No
4. Ends Screwed 21 Vapour No
Type of Max/Min
5. BSPT (F) 22 175/25
Thread Temp. (°C)
Max/Min
6. Rating 600# 23 Pressure 37/FV
(Kg/cm2 (g))
7. Body A 351 Gr. CF8M 24 Make/ Model */ *
8. Ball A 276-316 Hydro Test Body 56 Kg/cm2 (g)
25 Pressure
9. Seat Multifill PTFE Seat 40 Kg/cm2 (g)
(BS 6755 Part 1)
MFR’s Test
10. Stem A 276-316 26 Required
Certificates
11. Lever Nut 18-8 SS
12. Stem Seal Grafoil 1. Material Test
13. Body Seal PTFE Certificates.
ASTM A 351 Gr. 2. Valve shall be Synthetic
14. Gland enamel Painted.
CF8
3. Pneumatic Test for Seat
15. Gland nut A276-316
at 7.0 Kg/cm2 (g).
16. Gland Packing Grafoil 4. Gaskets shall be
asbestos free.
5. All components of lever
are stainless steel.
Special
27 6. Operating torque is
requirements
approximately three
times standard valve
17. Handle SS w/ vinyl torque.
7. Blow out proof stem
design.
8. Adjustable packing
gland.
9. Meets NACE MR-01-75
10. Investments cast
components.


Valve Code :BVF7

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Ball Valve – (Two
Design
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Flange Max/Min
5 ANSI B16.5 20 120/25
Drilling Temp. (0C)
Max/Min
6 Rating 150# 21 Pressure 3/(720 mm Hg absolute )
Kg/cm2(g)
A182 F316L/ A
351 Gr. CF8M
As Per
23 Pressure
MFR’s Test
Certificates
13 Gland A 351 Gr. CF8M Special 1 .Material Test
Gland 25
14 Grafoil requirements Certificates.
Packing
SS316L with PVC
15 Handle
Cover

arrangement.

Valve Code:- TVF7

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Butterfly Valve –
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-40KTPA-
Disc
DE Latest
Wafer Type Suitable
3 Ends for Mounting 17 Vapor Yes
Between Flanges
4 Flange Std. 18 120/25
150# Temp. (0C)
Max/Min
5 Rating 150# 19 Pressure 3/(720 mm Hg absolute )
Kg/cm2(g)
Make /
6 Body ASTM A216 Gr WCB 20 *
Model
Up to /
8 Seat EPDM 22 Incl. 150 Ratchet Type
NB
9 RPTFE Gear Actuated
O ring NB
23 As Per Standard
11 Stem Seal RPTFE Pressure Seat
Stem MFR’s Test
12 PTFE 24 Required
Handle /
13 SS304 Special
Wheel 1. Material Test Certificate.
25 requireme
A193 Gr. B8 / A194
14 Hardware nts
Gr. 8

arrangement.

Valve Code:- WVF7

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Wafer Check Body plate&
14. Type 14 SS 304
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Wafer type to
16. Ends mount between 16 Vapour Yes
Flanges
Specific
Gravity
Max. /Min.
18. Rating 150# 18 120/25
Temp. (0C)
Max. /Min.
ASTM A 182 Gr F
19. Body 19 Pressure 3/(720 mm Hg absolute )
304L
(Kg/cm2(g))
Sealing Ring EPDM -
20. 20 Make *
(‘O’ Ring) Renewable
13 % Cr Hydro Test
22. Dual Plate A 351 Gr.CF8 22 Model *
23. Spring SS304
Stop & Hinge 1. Material Test
24. SS 304
Pin Special Certificate.
23
25. Retailer SS316 requirements 2. Valve should be of
A193 Gr. B8 / anti-static design.
26. Hardware
A194 Gr. 8

Valve Code:- SVF7

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Check Valve Swing Studs /
1 Type 15 A 193 Gr. B8/A 194 Gr.8
Type Nuts
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Flange
Drilling
Max. /Min.
5 Rating 150 # 19 120/25
Temp. (0C)
A 351 Gr. CF8 Max. /Min.
6 Body 20 3/(720 mm Hg absolute )
Pressure
7 Cover A 351 Gr. CF8 – Bolted 21 Make *
A 351 Gr. CF8 Hydro Test
Standard
MFR’s Test
10 Hinge A 351 Gr. CF8 23 Required
Cert.
Statutory
Approval
12 Disc Nut SS 304 1. Material Test
13 Split Pin SS 304 Certificate.
2. Valve shall be provided
Special with double body.
Internal 25 Requireme sealing, multiple stem
Sealing/ nts sealing & with blow out
14 RPTFE /Grafoil
External proof stem.
Sealing 3. Valve should be of anti-
static design.


Valve Code:-YSF7
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Strainer (Y-type) Specification IPS-
1. Type 14 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Design / Test *
2. 15 Vacuum Full
Std
Flanged
3. Ends 16 Vapour YES
Specific
Gravity
Max/Min
5. Rating 150# 18 120/25
Temp. (0C)
ASTM A351 Gr
Max/Min
6. Body CF8 19 3/(720 mm Hg absolute )
Pressure
ASTM A351 Gr
7. Body Cover CF8 20 Make / Model *
SS316L
& SS 316LWire Pressure
Mesh
MFR’s Test
Certificates
AF 120/UNISIL
10. Screen Gasket
18
AF 120/UNISIL 1. Material Test
11. Body Gasket Special
18 23 Certificate.
requirements
A193 Gr. B8 /
13. Hardware
A194 Gr. 8

Valve Code:-PSF7
Sr. Sr.
No. No.
1. Type 14 Service
40KTPA-DE Latest
Design / Test
2. * 15 Vacuum Full
Std
Specific
Gravity
Max/Min
5. Rating 150# 18 120/25
Temp. (0C)
6. Body 19 3/(720 mm Hg absolute )
CF8 Pressure
ASTM A351 Gr
CF8
CF8 Pressure
SS
316LPerforated MFR’s Test
sheet & SS Certificates
316LWire Mesh
Screen / Body AF 120/UNISIL
11. 1. Material Test
Gasket 18
Drain/ Vent 23
A193 Gr. B8 /
13. Hardware
A194 Gr. 8

Valve Code :BVF8

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Ball Valve – (Two
Design
Specification IPS-
MBD18019-PP-451-
40KTPA-DE Latest
Flange Max/Min
5 ANSI B16.5 20 200/25
Drilling Temp. (0C)
Max/Min
(Kg/cm2(g))
7 Body SS317L 22 Make/ Model *
8 Ball SS317L Hydro Test Body
As Per
23 Pressure
9 Seat PTFE Seat Standard
MFR’s Test
10 Stem SS317L 24 Required
Certificates
11 Stem Seal PTFE
12 Body Seal PTFE
13 Gland SS317L 1. Material Test
Special
14 PTFE requirements
Packing
SS304 with PVC
15 Handle
Cover

arrangement.
4. Valve with Insulation should be Provided with Extended Lever Arrangement

Valve Code:- TVF8

Sr. Sr.
No. No.
Butterfly Valve –
Specification IPS-
1 Type Wafer Type, Double 15 Service
MBD18019-PP-451-
Ecentric Disc
40KTPA-DE Latest
Wafer Type Suitable
Between Flanges
4 Flange Std. 18 200/25
150# Temp. (0C)
Max/Min
(Kg/cm2(g))
Make /
6 Body A 216 Gr.WCB 20 *
Model
7 Disc / Flap SS317L 21 Operation Manual
Up to / Incl.
8 Seat PTFE Lined 22 Ratchet Type
150 NB
9 PTFE Lined Gear Actuated
O ring NB
23 As Per Standard
11 Stem Seal EPDM Pressure Seat
Stem MFR’s Test
12 PTFE 24 Required
Handle /
13 SS304 Special 1. Material Test
Wheel
25 requirement Certificate.
A193 Gr. B8 / A194
14 Hardware s
Gr. 8

arrangement.

Valve Code:-BVF9
Sr.
Description
No.
1. Type Ball Valve
2. Material, body UPVC
ASTM F 1970_ASTM D 2467 For Flange
3. Design spec, end connection
End Connections
4. Testing standards ASTM D 1599
5. End connection type & standards ASTM D 2467 For Flange End Connections
Finish, flange facing or end connection type &
6. ANSI B 16.5 RF, ASA 150#
standards
7. Pressure design, Flange Ends CL #150
8. Material, packing Corrugated Box
9. Material, plug Not Applicable
10. Material, seat PTFE
11. Material specification, seat retainer Not Applicable
12. Material specification, shaft UPVC
13. Design Pressure Kg/cm2(g) 7

Valve Code:-LVF9
Sr.
Description
No.
1. Type Ball Check Valve
End Connections
ASTM D 2467 For Flange End
5. End connection type & standards
Connections
Finish, flange facing or end connection type
6. ANSI B 16.5 RF, ASA 150#
& standards

6.60 Specification of Y-Type Strainer for Pipe Specification –9
Valve Code:-YSF9
Sr.
Description
No.
1. Type Y-Type Strainer
End Connections
Connections
Finish, flange facing or end connection type
6. ANSI B 16.5 RF, ASA 150#
& standards
11. Material specification, Screen UPVC
12. Screen Size 20 Mesh

6.61 Specification of Pot Type Strainer for Pipe Specification –9
Valve Code:- PSF9

Sr.
Description
No.
1. Type Pot Type Strainer
End Connections
Connections
Finish, flange facing or end connection
6. ANSI B 16.5 RF, ASA 150#
type & standards
11. Material specification, Screen UPVC
14. Design Pressure Kg/cm (g) 2 7

Valve Code:-BVF10
Sr.
Description
No.
1. Type Ball Valve
2. Material, body PP
ASTM F 1970_ASTM D 2467 For
Flange End Connections
Connections
Finish, flange facing or end connection type &
6. ANSI B 16.5 RF, ASA 150#
standards
10. Material, seat SS304 with PP lining
12. Material specification, shaft PP

Valve Code:-LVF10
Sr.
Description
No.
1. Type Ball Check Valve
End Connections
Connections
6. ANSI B 16.5 RF, ASA 150#
type & standards

6.64 Specification of Y Type Strainer for Pipe Specification –10
Valve Code:-YSF10
Sr.
Description
No.
1. Type Y Type Strainer
End Connections
Connections
6. ANSI B 16.5 RF, ASA 150#
type & standards
11. Material specification, Screen PP

6.65 Specification of Pot Type Strainer for Pipe Specification –10
Valve Code:-PSF10
Sr.
Description
No.
1. Type Pot Type Strainer
End Connections
Connections
6. ANSI B 16.5 RF, ASA 150#
type & standards
11. Material specification, Screen PP

Consulting Engineers  Construction Management  Commissioning & Qualification
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
SURFACE PREPARATION
AND
PAINTING WORK
Project Elephant, Dahej
R4 Aug 30, 19 Approved For RFQ SNS NKG KVV

R3 Aug 19, 19 Comments Incorporated and For Approval SNS PKT KVV
R2 July 19, 19 Comments Incorporated and For Approval SNS PKT KVV
R1 June 25, 19 For Approval SNS PKT KVV
Issued this Revision In-house Review & comments Purchase
from IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd... IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. accepts no responsibility or liability for the consequence of this document being used for a purpose other than the
confirm his agreement to indemnify IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. for all loss or damage resulting there from. IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. accepts no responsibility or liability for
B101-109, 1st Floor, Kailash Vaibhav Industrial Complex, Vikhroli (W), Mumbai – 400 079 Project No MBD18019
Technical Specifications for Surface
Document Title Made /APP. SNS/KVV
Preparation and Painting Work
Index
1.0 General ........................................................................................................................................ 3

2.0 Scope............................................................................................................................................ 3
3.0 Normative and informative references ................................................................................. 3
4.0 General Requirements ............................................................................................................. 4
5.0 Hot Dip Galvanize (HDP) ....................................................................................................... 6
6.0 Surface Preparation .................................................................................................................. 7
7.0 Paint Application .................................................................................................................... 10
8.0 Identification of Equipment, Piping Etc............................................................................. 10
9.0 Inspection & Testing .............................................................................................................. 12
10.0 Guarantee ................................................................................................................................. 24
11.0 Guarantee Period .................................................................................................................... 24
12.0 Maintenance Coating ............................................................................................................. 24
IPS-ME-Doc-021-V1.0 IPS-MBD18019-ME-378-40KTPA-DE-Tech Spec for Surface Preparation and Painting Works - R4.doc
1.0 General
This engineering standard specification covers the requirements for painting including surface
preparation, method of application, inspection of paints / coating and painted surface for
equipment, piping, structures, electrical, and instrumentation equipment for the plants
engineered by IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd.
Building / Concrete Painting is not covered under this Specification. For Building / concrete
Protection Painting refer Civil Specification.
2.0 Scope
This specification covers the minimum requirements for the selection of coating material, surface
preparation, application procedures and inspection & testing for protective coatings, fireproofing
and hot dip galvanizing to be applied during the construction and installation of steel pipes,
beams, columns, structures etc. for Client. This specification covers only the new painted items
and touch-up painting after erecting at site. For maintenance coatings of old structures, see
instructions in section no 12 in this specification.
3.0 Normative and informative references
The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent defined herein. Unless
otherwise specified herein, use the latest edition at purchase order award/subcontractor
placement.
ASTM D 4285 – Standard Test Method for Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air.
EN 1090-2:2008 – Requirements for Execution of Structural Steelwork
ISO 1461:2009 – Metallic coatings – Hot-dip galvanized coating on fabricated ferrous products –
Requirements
ISO 2814:2006 – Paints and varnishes – Comparison of contrast ratio (hiding power) of the same
type and colour.
ISO 4624:2002 – Paints and varnishes – Pull off test for adhesion
ISO 4628/2:2004 – Paints and varnishes – Designation of degree of blistering
ISO 4628/3:2004 – Paint and varnishes – Designation of degree of rusting
ISO 4628/4:2004 – Paint and varnishes – Designation of degree of cracking
ISO 4628/5:2004 – Paint and varnishes – Designation of degree of flaking
ISO 8501:1:2007 – Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products
– Visual assessment of surface cleanliness – Part 1: Rust grades and preparation grades of
uncoated steel substrates and of steel substrates after overall removal of previous coatings.
ISO 8501-3:2006 – Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and related products
– Visual assessment of surface cleanliness – Part 3: Preparation grades of welds, edges and other
areas with surface imperfections.
– Test for the assessment of surface cleanliness – Part 3: Assessment of dust on steel surface
prepared for painting (pressure sensitive tape method).
– Test for the assessment of surface cleanliness – Part 6: Extraction of soluble contaminants for
analysis – The Bresle method.3
– Test for the assessment of surface cleanliness – Part 9: Field method for the conduct metric
determination of water-soluble salts.
– Surface roughness characteristics of blast cleaned substrates.
– Surface preparation methods – Part 2: Abrasive blast cleaning
ISO 12944:1998 and 2007 – Paints and varnishes – Corrosion protection of steel structures by
protective paint systems – Part 1 – Part 8.
ISO 19840:2004 – Paints and varnishes – Corrosion protection of steel structures by protective
paint systems – Measurement of, and acceptance criteria for, the thickness of dry film on rough
surfaces.
NACE RPO188 – Discontinuity (holiday) testing of protective coatings.
SSPC – Steel Structures Painting Council – Removal of oil and grease – SSPC Volume 2, grade
SP1 – Solvent Cleaning.
3.1 The paint manufacturer’s latest approved published instruction shall be followed as far as
practicable at all times. Particular attention shall be paid to the following.
1. Proper Attention to avoid exposure as well extremes of temperature

2. Surface preparation prior to painting
3. Mixing & thinning
4. Application of paints and recommend limit on time intervals between coats.
5. The paint materials for any paint system including primer, intermediate coating, finished
coating and thinner shall be from a single approved manufacturer.
3.2 Any painting work (Including surface preparation) on piping or equivalent shall commence only
after the system tests have been completed and clearance for taking up painting work is given by
the engineer in charge in writing.
4.0 General Requirements
4.1 General
Supplier shall control the quality of items and services to meet the requirements of this
specification including applicable codes and standards, and other procurement documents.
Documentation shall be prepared and maintained to provide evidence of compliance with

approved procedures and this specification. A copy of all coatings inspection documentation
shall be provided to the purchaser at the conclusion of any project. All measurements and
inspection results required by this specification shall be recorded, and the records shall provide
traceability to the associated parts of the coated objects. Supplier shall prepare and maintain
reports that include these records. Defective work shall be reported and included in the records.
Corrosivity category C 5 in accordance with SS-EN ISO 12944-2 is applicable at Perstorp India.
4.2 Planning
All blasting & painting activities shall be fully incorporated in the fabrication plan.
Details of management, inspectors, operators, facilities, equipment and qualified procedures shall
be established and documented before commencing work.
All steel surfaces shall be blast cleaned and coated prior to installation.
4.3 Equipment protection and clean up
All equipment and structures shall be fully protected from mechanical damages, ingress of
abrasive and dust from cleaning. Sags droplets and paint over-spray (inclusive dry-spray) shall
be avoided. Major defects can lead to a new painting at the expense of the supplier.
Adjacent areas not to be painted or already finished shall be protected. On completion of the
work in any area, all masking material, spent abrasive, equipment etc. shall be removed.
4.4 Ambient conditions
No final blast cleaning or coating application shall be done if the relative humidity is more than
80 % (or in accordance with the paint supplier’s technical datasheet) and when the steel
temperature is less than 3° C above the dew point. Coating shall only be applied or cured at
ambient and steel temperatures above 5° C or higher if stated by the paint supplier.
The coating manufacturer shall specify the maximum and minimum application and curing
temperature and other relevant limitations regarding application and curing conditions for each
product in any coating system (CSDS).
4.5 Coating Materials
All coating materials and solvents shall be protected from ignition sources and shall remain
within storage temperatures and storage condition recommended by the coating manufacturer.
All coating materials and solvents shall be stored in the original container bearing the
manufacturer’s label and instructions. Each product shall have batch number showing year and
month of manufacture and giving full traceability of production. Shelf life shall be included in the
technical data sheet.
4.6 Welding zones
Surfaces that are to be welded shall not be painted of practical reasons. Mask at least 50 mm. All
welds shall be prepared in accordance with ISO 8501-3, preparation grade 3.
4.7 Foundry details
Steel surfaces to be founded into concrete shall be coated with a full system of at least 50 mm
under the concrete foundry. The concrete upper surface shall be coated with a suitable system for
concrete surfaces.
4.8 Steel materials & shop primers
Steel subject to surface preparation shall as a minimum requirement be in accordance with rust
grade A or B according to ISO 8501:1. Shop primers shall be regarded as temporary corrosion
protection and shall be removed prior to the application of the coating systems herein.
4.9 Unpainted surfaces
The following items shall not be coated unless otherwise specified:
Aluminium, titanium, chrome plated, nickel plated, copper, brass, lead, glass,
electrical/instrument wire/cables, grease fittings, gauges and thermometers, plastic or similar.
If stainless steel is connected to carbon steel, the stainless steel part shall be coated 50 mm beyond
the weld zone onto the stainless steel. The coating for the stainless steel part shall not contain
metallic zinc.
4.10 Handling and transportation of coated steel
Painted equipment/structures shall be handled in a way to minimize damage to painted

surfaces. No handling shall be performed before the coating system is cured to an acceptable
level. Major handling and transportation damages can lead to a new painting at the expense of
the supplier.
4.11 Handling and transportation of coated pumps
All stainless steel welds shall be pickled and flushed or machine brushed (with equipment
suitable for stainless steel). Equipment shall be delivered fully cleaned and sealed. Suitable
packing shall be performed with wooden saddles and security device for land transport.
5.0 Hot Dip Galvanize (HDP)
5.1 Hot dip Galvanizing
The structure shall be in hot dip galvanizing & shall be governed by codal provisions as per IS
2629 and special requirements of the project. Surface preparation and delivery shall be as
discussed herein document.
The work should be so handled in the degreasing bath as to allow free circulation of liquid over
all parts, taking care to clean the scum that may collect. If necessary, the work should be raised
and lowered in order to allow the degreasing solution to enter inaccessible areas, threaded
sections, etc., for a thorough cleaning action. When using sodium hydroxide solution, the
temperature of the solution may be usually kept between 85 and 90 and the immersion time
varying from 1 to 20 minutes depending on the nature and degree of contamination. When using
other proprietary degreasing agents; manufacturers' recommendation should be followed.
Cleaning of Strip in the Continuous Galvanizing Process - The cold-rolled strip is passed through
an oxidizing furnace at temperature around 450 0 C where rolling lubricant is burnt and surface
gets slightly oxidized. This is followed by reduction of surface oxides in the
annealing/normalizing furnace under controlled atmosphere and subsequently allowing the
strip to pass through molten zinc bath.
Bath Temperature: The control of bath temperature is essential if the quality of the product is to
be consistent and zinc is to be used economically. Articles should be galvanized at the lowest
possible temperature which will allow the free drainage of zinc from the work piece during
withdrawal. A low temperature reduces the formation of ash and dross, besides safeguarding the
pot and conserving fuel. The bath temperature may vary from 440°C to 460°C and a working
temperature of 450oC is commonly used. The temperature of the molten metal should not
ordinarily exceed 475°C to prevent excessive attack of molten zinc on the work as well as on the
pot. In case of high silicon steels, a higher galvanizing bath temperature of 550°C is adopted in
order to obtain normal coating mass - the behavior of silicon steels at 550°C is similar to that of
ordinary steels at the normal galvanizing temperature at 450°C. However, for high temperature
galvanizing, top heated ceramic bath are generally used.
All galvanized members shall withstand tests as per IS: 2633-1972

For Galvanize thickness Refer Annexure -4
5.1.1 Special attention shall be given to locations not accessible, where water can collect and which after
assembly and erection cannot be inspected, painted and maintained. Holes shall be provided for
water drainage.
Hot dip galvanized items shall not normally be coated with a full painting program. Only touch-
up of damage galvanizing shall be repaired with “cold galvanizing paint” (single component zinc
rich epoxy ester). All touch-up painting of galvanized steel structures shall be permitted and
approved by Client. The paint shall be applied with brush by an authorized painter. All touch-up
of galvanized steel shall be avoided. Bolted steel structures shall be selected instead of welded
steel structures if possible. NOTE! Spray galvanizing “touch- up” with “cold galvanizing paint”
is not permitted.
All hot dip galvanizing shall be performed in accordance with ISO 1461, the thickness of the hot
dip galvanizing shall be in accordance with the Annexure-4
Thicker coatings may be obtained principally by stating the content of silicon needed in the steel.
When ordering, the designation of the steel shall be stated together with additional regarding
silicon content according to the below table:
Sr. Content of Silicon in

Value of Aim Limits
No. Steel
1 Fe/Zn 165 0.25% 0.22% to 0.28%
Full Painting Program/ Galvanizing shall be done in vendor shop.
6.0 Surface Preparation
6.1 Compressed Air
Compressed air shall be clean, dry and free from oil. Traps (in addition to oil and water
extractors mounted on the compressor) shall be used in compressed air lines to remove oil and
moisture from air close to the point of use. Instruction for the air quality test is found in section
no 9:4 in this specification.
6.2 Pre-blasting Preparation
Sharp edges, fillets, corners and welds shall be rounded or smoothened by grinding (minimum
radius 2 mm) according to ISO 8503-3, preparation grade P3.
Hard surface layers (e.g. resulting from flame cutting) shall be removed by grinding prior to
blast cleaning.
The surface shall be free from any foreign matter such as weld flux, residue, slivers, oil, grease,
salt etc. prior to blast cleaning. All surfaces should be washed with clean fresh water prior to
blast cleaning.
Any major surface defects, particularly surface laminations or scabs detrimental to the
protective coating system shall be removed by suitable dressing. Where such defects have been
revealed during blast cleaning, and dressing has been performed, the dressed area shall be re-
blasted to the specified standard. All welds shall be inspected and if necessary repaired prior to
final blast cleaning of the area. Surface pores, cavities etc. shall be removed by suitable dressing
or weld repair.
Surface Preparation before pre-blasting
Reference
Method of Procedure & Degree of Steel Surface
Classification Standard
Cleaning finish
SIS / ISO
Solvent Cleaning with solvents, vapour alkali,
Grease and Oil
Cleaning emulsion or steam to remove oil, grease, St 1
cleaning
soil, salts.
Very thorough scrapping and wire
Very brushing, machine brushing-grinding
thorough etc. The treatment shall remove loose
Hand and Hand and mill scale, rust and foreign matter.
Power Tool Power Tool Finally, the surface is cleaned with a St 3
Cleaning Cleaning vacuum cleaner, clean dry compressed
air or a clean brush. After removal of
dust, the surface shall have a
pronounced metallic shine.
By using oxy acetylene flame dehydrate
Flame
Removal of rust, and remove rust loose mill scales and
Cleaning of F1
loose mill scale tight mill scales followed by wire
new steel
brushing
Acid pickling or electrolytic pickling to
complete remove mill scales (may
Pickling Pickling -
reduce resistance of the surface to
corrosion if not primed immediately)
Weathering
followed Weathering to remove all particle of mill
Weathering -
by blast scale followed by blast cleaning.
cleaning
SIS : Swedish Standard Institution “SIS 05-5900-1967”

ISO : International Organization for Standardization ISO 8501-1:1998(E)
6.3 Blast Cleaning
Blasting abrasives shall be dry, clean and free from contaminants, which will be detrimental to
the performance of the coating.
The content of oil and grease in the blasting abrasives shall not exceed 100 mg/kg.
Size of abrasive particles for blast cleaning shall be such that the prepared surface profile height
(anchor pattern profile) is in accordance with the requirements for the applicable coating
system. The surface profile shall be graded in accordance with ISO 8503:2. Grit shall be used as
blast medium. The grit shall be non-metallic and free from chlorides when used on stainless
steel substrates.
The cleanliness of the blast cleaned surface shall be as referred to for each coating system in
accordance with ISO 8501-1.
Surface Preparation
Reference
Method of Procedure & Degree of Steel Surface
Classification Standard
Cleaning finish
SIS / ISO
Very thorough blast cleaning. Mill scale,
rust and foreign matter shall be removed
Very
to the extent that the only traces Sa 2½
through Near White
remaining are slight stains in the form of 95%
blast Blast Cleaning
spots or strips. Finally, the surface is Pure
cleaning
cleaned with a vacuum cleaner, clean
dry compressed air or a clean brush.
6.4 Final surface conditions
The surface to be coated shall be clean, dry and free from dust, oil & grease, and have the
specified roughness (ISO 8503:2) and cleanliness (ISO 8501:1) until the first coat is applied.
Dust blast abrasives etc., shall be removed from the surface after blast cleaning such that the
particle quantity and particle size do not exceed rating 2 of ISO 8502-3.
The maximum content of soluble impurities on the blasted surface as sampled using ISO 8502-6
and distilled water, shall not exceed a conductivity measured in accordance with ISO 8502-9
corresponding to a NaCl content of 20 mg/m2. Any deviation from this shall be approved by
the paint supplier in writing.
6.5 After surface preparation and prior to any coating application the substrate shall be checked for
soluble salt contamination using a suitable salt contamination meter. Maximum allowable is 5 µ
gm/cm2
7.0 Paint Application
7.1 Application equipment
Application equipment shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer and shall be

suitable to apply the coating as specified. Roller application of the first primer coat is not
acceptable. Usages of brush or roller as application method for the total area must be approved
by the company before any performance.
Depending on application equipment used, several layers may be needed to achieve total dry
film thickness and complete coverage.
7.2 Application
For each coat, a stripe coat shall be applied by brush to all welds, corners, behind angles, edges
of beams etc. and other areas not fully reachable in order to obtain the specified coverage and
thickness.
Each coat shall be applied uniformly over the entire surface. Skips, runs, sags and drips shall
be removed and re-painted. Each coat shall be free from pinholes, blisters and holidays.
Contamination of painted surfaces between coats shall be avoided. Any contamination shall
be removed.
7.3 Coating materials
Contrasting colour shall be used for each coat of paint! It is not permitted to use different paint
supplier’s material on the same object. All products used for one object must be from one of the
listed paint suppliers in section no 14 in this specification.
The coating manufacturer shall provide a CSDS (Coating System Data Sheet) for each
coating system to be used, containing as a minimum.
Surface pre-treatment requirements
Film thickness (maximum, minimum and specified)

Max and min re-coating intervals at relevant temperatures
Minimum curing temperature for each product and for the total painting system
Information on thinners to be used (quantities and type)
Coating repair system
8.0 Identification of Equipment, Piping Etc
Equipment number shall be stenciled in black or white on each equipment after painting.
Line number in Black or White shall be stenciled on all pipelines at more than one location as
directed by engineer in charge.
8.1 Flow Direction
8.1.1 Flow direction bands are described in Sketch 1 and 2.
8.1.2 Arrows can also be used to indicate the flow direction as described in Sketch 3
8.1.3 The arrows shall be in white or black colour. Following sizes are recommended.
1. For pipes diameter 1½” to 6” dia., arrow to fit in a 25 mm x 100 mm rectangle.
2. For pipes diameter 8” dia and above, arrow to fit in a 80 mm x 150 mm rectangle.
8.1.4 In case of flow of fluid is possible in either direction; two arrows shall be indicated one above the
other and both in same colour.
8.1.5 Arrows and band markings shall be made at the unit battery limits and then on convenient location
at the point of use. It is recommended to adopt one method for the entire plant.
8.2 Hazardous Mediums
Where the piping system carries a hazardous product, a panel of equal diagonal stripes (black
and yellow colour) shall be superimposed on the pipe on both ends of the basic identification
panels as detailed in Sketch-4.
8.3 Details of Code Indications
8.3.1 Colour
The Line nos. and equipment nos. shall be painted either in white or in black in order to contrast
clearly with the colour of paint on the pipe or equipment. For insulated lines, the code
indications shall be painted over the cladding of the insulation.
8.3.2 Requirements
The full name or well-known abbreviations of chemical and symbol of fluid flowing (as per
Project Spec.) inside a pipeline shall be indicated. The line number shall also be painted on the
pipelines. The pressure or temperature of the fluid inside the pipeline shall not be indicated.
8.3.3 Location
The code indication as described above shall be painted at following locations or such other
places where quick identification is deemed necessary.
Pipelines: At all junctions, both sides of valves, both sides of service appliances and at intervals of
25 m on straight pipe lengths.
Note: For long straight lengths of pipelines e.g. transfer lines, the interval of 25 m for code
indication may be varied at the discretion of the Client/IPS
8.4 Lettering for Pipe
The recommended size of lettering to be used for code indications on the insulated as well as
uninsulated pipes shall be as per following:
For Pipes - Diameter 2” 25 mm letters

For Pipes - Diameter 2½” – 4” 40 mm letters
For Pipes - Diameter 6” and above 80 mm letters
8.5 Code Indication for Small Diameter Pipes
Code indication marking by paint may not be done for uninsulated pipelines of nominal
diameter 1½” and below and for insulated lines less than 1” diameter. For such pipes, the
indication markings shall be punched on lead tags and then secured to the pipe. Such tags shall
be provided at locations as described earlier. The size of the tag and the method of tying it with
pipeline shall be as per advice of Engineer in charge.
8.6 Lettering for Equipment
Lettering for the equipment should be marked on each equipment at a clearly visible location.
The letters should have following minimum height
For Equipment with Diameter 1 m - 50 / 80 mm

For Equipment with Diameter 1 m to 5 m - 100 mm
For Equipment with Diameter more than 50 m - 900 mm
9.0 Inspection & Testing
9.1 General
The company or it’s contracted inspection company will inspect blasting & painting works to
such extent he find necessary. For all projects, the paint supplier’s inspector should, after
agreement, execute the inspections. All personnel carrying out inspections or verification shall be
qualified paint inspectors. Inspectors qualified in accordance with NACE (www.nace.org) or
FROSIO (www.frosio.no) should be used.
9.2 Responsibility
Contractor and Supplier shall control the quality items and services to meet the requirements of
the applicable codes and standards and other requirements of this specification. Documentation
shall be prepared and maintained to provide evidence of compliance with approved procedures
and this specification. Contractor will be responsible for quality and warranty values and time
frame, even if the purchaser or paint supplier has been inspecting the blasting & coating works.
9.3 Purchaser Access
Supplier/contractor shall grant purchaser inspector free access to inspect all work performed by
the supplier/contractor.
Supplier/contractor shall furnish the necessary testing and inspection instruments, properly
calibrated and maintained. Such equipment shall be available for use by purchaser in conducting
surveillance of the work.
9.4 Air Quality Test
Prior to using compressed air, the quality of the air downstream of the separator shall be tested in
accordance with ASTM D4285.
The test shall be performed by a blotter test at the beginning of each shift and at not less than
four-hour intervals.
The test shall also be made after any interruption of the air compressor operation or as required
by the purchaser.
The air shall be used only if the blotter test indicates no visible contamination, oil or moisture. If
contaminants are evident, the equipment deficiencies shall be corrected and the air stream shall
be re-tested.
Separators shall be checked continuously.

All hoses/lines shall be tested individually prior to use.
Surface determined to have been blasted or blown down with contaminated air, shall be cleaned
of that contamination and re-blasted with clean air and abrasive.
Any defects disclosed by inspection shall be re-inspected after correction.
9.5 Documentation
Supplier/Contractor shall prepare issue and maintain daily reports which indicate:
The areas worked on.
Surface cleanliness (including dust and salt test) and surface roughness.
Coating materials applied, including batch numbers of base and curing agent.
Ambient and substrate temperature.
Relative humidity
Atmospheric dew point
DFT (dry film thickness) of primer, intermediate and finish coats.
In addition adhesion test reports (performed at separate plates) and holiday test reports
where applicable, shall be provided after the coating system has cured.
A log shall be maintained of all reports, inspection and tests.
Testing & Inspection shall be carried out in accordance with table 9.6.
9.6 Inspection Table
Test Method Frequency Acceptance Criteria Consequence

type
Environ Ambient and steel Before start of each shift In accordance No blasting and
mental temperature. Relative + minimum twice per with specified coating
conditio humidity. Dew point. shift requirements
ns
Visual Visual for sharp edges, 100% of all surfaces No defects, see specified Defects to be repaired
examin weld spatter, slivers. requirements
Rust grade etc.

type
ation according to ISO 8501-

3, preparation P3
Compre ASTM D Before start of each shift No visible Replace hoses,

ss air 4285 or change in contaminations install clean filters,
cleanlin (Blotter compressor operation re-blast
ess test) contaminated
surfaces
Cleanlin ISO 8501:1 100% visual of all In accordance Re-blasting
ess surfaces with specified
requirements
Dust ISO 8502-3 Spot checks Max quantity and size Re-cleaning and re-
test rating 2 testing until
acceptable
Salt test ISO 8502-6 Spot checks Maximum Repeated washing

and ISO conductivity with potable water
8502-9 corresponding to 20 and re-testing until
mg/m2 NaCl accetable
Roughn Comparator instrument Each As specified Re-blasting

ess according to ISO 8503 component or once per
10 m2
Visual Visual to determine 100% of surface According to specified Repair of defects
examin curing, contamination, after each coat requirements
ation of solvent retention,
coating pinholes/popping,
sagging and surface
defects
Holiday NACE RPO188 Only for internal tank No holidays Repair and re-testing
detectio lining system and
n immersed areas (100%)
Film ISO 19840. ISO 19840 ISO 19840 and coating Repair, additional
Thickne Annex B, system data sheet coats or re-coating
ss Multiple (5) as appropriate
readings
Adhesio ISO 4624 using Spot checks 4 MPa Coating to be rejected
n equipment with
automatic centered
pulling force, and
carried out when
coating system are

type
fully cured. Shall be

performed at separate
plates
Annexure 1– Painting Colour Code
1. Colour Code
Topcoat Colour Colour standard Objects/Components

uninsulated storage tanks, columns,
White RAL 9010
reactors
Safety Red RAL 3020 Fire Installation
Safety Yellow RAL 1003 Safety Valves, handrails
Grey RAL 7038 Skirts
First Colour Second

Sr. No. Contents Ground Colour
Band Colour Band
Water
1. Cooling Water Sea green French blue -
2. Boiler feed water Sea green Gulf red -
3. Condensate Sea green Light brown -
4. Drinking Sea green French blue Signal red
5. Treated Sea green Light orange -
6. Fire water Fire red Crimson red -
Cold water down service Canary
7. Sea green French blue
from storage tanks yellow
8. Domestic, hot Sea green Light grey -
9. Sea, river, untreated Sea green White -
10. Filtered water Sea green Light brown -
11. Soft water Sea green Light brown Signal red
Canary
12. Chilled water Sea green Black
yellow
Sprinkle and hydrant
13. Sea green White Signal red
water
First Colour Second

Band Colour Band
Canary
14. Waste water Sea green Signal red
yellow
Air
Compressed, up to and
15. Sky blue - -
including 15 Kg/cm2
16. Plant air Sky blue Silver grey -
17. Instrument air Sky blue French blue -
18. Dry vacuum White - -
19. Wet vacuum White Dark violet -
Aluminium to IS
20. Very high pressure steam Signal red -
2339
Aluminium to IS
21. High pressure steam French blue -
2339
Aluminium to IS
22. Medium pressure steam Gulf red -
2339
Aluminium to IS Canary
23. Low pressure steam -
2339 yellow
24. Drainage Black - -
Oil
25. Light diesel fuel Light Brown Brilliant green -
26. High speed diesel fuel Light Brown - -
27. Furnace fuel Light Brown French blue -
Others
28. Ammonia Canary Yellow Dark violet -
29. Chlorine Canary Yellow Dark violet Light Orange
Service
30. Acetylene Canary Yellow -
Brown
31. Freon Canary Yellow Light grey Dark violet
32. Nitrogen Canary Yellow Black -
33. Oxygen Canary Yellow White -
Dark Admirality
34. Ethylene Glycol Brilliant green -
grey
Dark Admirality
35. Ethylene Di-chloride Gulf red -
grey
Dark Admirality
36. Acetone Black -
grey
Dark Admirality
37. Methanol Deep buff -
grey
38. Sulphuric Acid Dark violet Brilliant green Light orange
39. Hydrochloric Acid Dark violet Signal red Light orange
First Colour Second

Band Colour Band
40. Brine Black White -
41. Mercury Black White Brilliant green
Annexure 2- Building Structure Galvanizing
Type Description Spec./ Code DFT ( Dry Film Thickness)
1 Type of Galvanizing Hot dip Galvanizing -
2 Surface Preparation As per IS: 2629

Galvanizing of Structure As per IS:2629/ IS:
3
Member 4759 LA
For Steel Less than 6mm 120micron
a
thickness
For Steel More than 6mm 165micron
b
thickness
4 Withstand test As per IS : 2633-1972
Note:-
1. Galvanizing test of each sample i.e. dip test, hammer test and mass of zinc test to
demonstrate as per client/ Consultant requirement.
2. Random verification Zinc coating over galvanized surface by Elcometer.
Annexure 5- Painting Systems
Dry film
Perstorp Paint system To be used Painting
Surface Thickness Notes
system limitations at: system
(DFT)
Blast clean to
Carbon steel 40 μm DFT +
Sa2.5 acco
Perstorp -Structural
ISO8501-1 Zinc rich
MP 1 steel, exteriors 150 μm DFT +
epoxy shall
Corrosivity of equipment, Uninsulated
Zinc rich fulfill the
Category = vessels, <0°C–120°C surfaces 50 μm DFT
epoxy + requirement
C 5-I piping, tanks <0°C-120°C
Epoxy s in ISO
according to and valves Total DFT:
intermediate 12944-5 (5.2)
ISO 12944-2 Uninsulated 240 μm
(MIO) +
surfaces
Polyurethane
Carbon steel Blast clean to 50 μm DFT Only
Hot surfaces Uninsulated Sa2.5 acco aluminium
Perstorp
Insulated and 200°C-540°C surfaces ISO8501-1 colour.
MP 2
uninsulated 200°C-540°C Insulated
surfaces Inorganic 25 μm DFT steel
Dry film
(DFT)
zinc rich surfaces
ethyl silicate with
High continuous
temperature 25 μm DFT operating
silicon temperature
aluminium. > 150°C
High Total DFT: shall not be
temperature 100 μm coated.
silicon
aluminium.
Limited
colour range
phenolic
epoxy will
chalk &
Insulated Blast clean to discolor on
surfaces Sa2.5 acco exterior
Carbon steel
<0°C-200°C ISO8501-1 125 μm DFT exposure
Hot surfaces
Perstorp (150°C)* 125 μm DFT *) Insulated
Insulated and <0°C-200°C
MP 3 Uninsulated Epoxy Total DFT: steel
uninsulated
surfaces Phenolic 250 μm surfaces
surfaces
120°C-200°C Epoxy with
(150°C)* Phenolic. continuous
operating
temperature
> 150°C
shall not be
coated.
Stainless steel,
aluminium Blast clean to
and hot dip Sa2.5 acco 80 μm DFT
galvanized ISO8501-1
Perstorp
steel when <0°C-120°C 80 μm DFT
MP 4
painting is Epoxy Total DFT:
required primer 160 μm
Uninsulated Polyurethane
surfaces
Blast clean to
Depending Sa2.5 acco
In accordance
on storage ISO8501-1
with the paint Contact
media,
Perstorp Interior tank suppliers contractor
temperature Shall be
MP 5 linings approved for suitable
and selected approved by
certificate by tank linings
paint MSBFS
MSBFS 2011:8
product 2011:8
www.msb.se
Perstorp Structural Blast clean to Se section 5
N/A Fe/Zn 165
MP 6 steel in surface in this
Dry film
(DFT)
Hot dip corrosively profile fine specification
Galvanizing category acco to ISO
C 5-I 8503:1
According to
ISO 1461 and
national
annex NA
Blast clean to
Fireproofing
Sa2.5 acco Operating
(hydrocarbon) 50μm DFT
ISO8501-1 temperature
Structural Acc. To
up to 150°C
Perstorp steel, vessels, ANSI/UL
<0°C-80°C Approved with special
MP 9 skirts 1709
(up to 150°C, primer insulation
Fireproofin (0,5 – 3,5
see notes) Intumescent material
g (Intumescent hours
pep under the
passive fire protection)
pep. Contact
protection, 50 μm DFT
Approved contractor.
pep)
topcoat
Sketch – 1 - With Primary Colour Band
Pipe  A B C Size of Letters for Line No.
2” 100 50 100 25 mm
2½” – 4” 100 50 100 40 mm
6” – 16” D D/2 “D” 80 mm
Sketch – 2 -With Primary & Secondary Colour Band
Pipe  E F G H Size of Letters for Line No.
2” 100 50 50 50 25 mm
2½” – 4” 100 50 50 50 40 mm
6” – 16” D D/2 D/2 D 80 mm
For the pipes of area > 16”
E = 400 Max.
F = 200 Max.
G = 200 Max.
H = 400 Max.
Sketch – 3 - With Primary & Secondary Colour Band with Direction By Arrows
Pipe  J K Size of Letters for Line No.
2” 100 50 25 mm
2½” – 4” 100 50 40 mm
6” – 16” D D/2 80 mm
For the pipes of sizes more than 16” the dimensions
J = 400 Max.
7K = 200 Max.
Sketch – 4 - Colour Bands with Hazard Markings
Pipe  L M N P R Size of Letters for Line No.
2” 100 50 50 100 100 25 mm

2½” – 4” 100 50 50 100 100 40 mm
6” – 16” D D/2 D/2 D D 80 mm
10.0 Guarantee
Contractor and supplier of coated items/structures is responsible for keeping up with the below
standard during agreed time of guarantee.
Any deviation from the guarantee claims due to construction, design etc. shall be sent to Perstorp
in writing:
Degree of rusting: Ri 1 according to ISO 4628/3
Degree of blistering: 0 according to ISO 4628/2
Degree of flaking: 0 according to ISO 4628/5
Degree of cracking: 0 according to ISO 4628/4
11.0 Guarantee Period
New steel (rust grade A or B according to ISO 8501:1): 4 years. A guarantee inspection can be
performed within the guarantee period by the company. The contractor will be contacted before
the inspection and shall be present at the inspection together with the company.
Maintenance coating = 2 years. Excluded are surfaces classified as rust grade D according to ISO
8501:1.
12.0 Maintenance Coating
The paint supplier shall supply coating instructions to the contractor for all touch-up works after
the assembly at site.
For old structures (maintenance objects) that shall be re-coated at site. Contact the contractor for
suitable coatings and surface preparation instructions. A site visit/survey shall always be
performed by the contractor together with the company to determine the conditions of the
structures and what kind of surface treatment that is possible to perform at site.
12.1 Surface Preparation
Structural steel, pipe support and ladders.
All rust must be carefully taken away by picking the rust.
After that thoroughly high pressure washing must be done. Places which are very dirty use
heavy chemical washing or use degreasing agent if there is oil.
Thereafter use light blasting of all surfaces with Okgritt 55 in order to rug the surface.
Surfaces with rust shall be blasted to SA 2,5 and sharp edges shall be smoothed.
All pipes shall be lifted from the support.
12.2 Painting
All lifted and narrow surfaces shall be painted by hand with Mastic Epoxy, one layer.
After that everything will be high pressure spray painted with Mastic Epoxy, one layer.
Approximately 150 µ of the blasted surfaces.
Same painting system shall be done with the second layer epoxy (MIO) approx. 75-80 µ, one
layer.
The same painting system for the final layer will be done with a (Polyurethane top coat) as final
layer.
*****End of Document*****
STANDARD
FOR
STATIC EQUIPMENT
Project Elephant
R2 Aug 28, 19 For comments/ approval SNS NKG JAL

R1 July 23, 19 For comments/approval SNS NKG JAL
R0 Jan 16, 19 Enquiry SM KVV SSD
Document Title Standard for static equipment Made / App SNS/JAL
Index
1.0 Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 4

2.0 Project Details ............................................................................................................................ 4
3.0 Purpose........................................................................................................................................ 4
4.0 Design Criteria .......................................................................................................................... 5
4.1 Design basis given below covers following types of equipment:- ................................................ 5
4.2 Codes, Standards and Specifications ................................................................................................... 5
4.3 Reference documents .............................................................................................................................. 6
5.0 Statutory Approvals.................................................................................................................. 6
6.0 General Requirements / Design Philosophy ....................................................................... 6
6.1 Equipment Sizing .................................................................................................................................... 7
6.2 Equipment End Closure ......................................................................................................................... 7
6.3 Design Life ............................................................................................................................................... 8
6.4 Design Pressure ....................................................................................................................................... 8
6.5 Test Pressure............................................................................................................................................. 8
6.6 Design Temperature ............................................................................................................................... 8
6.7 Corrosion Allowance .............................................................................................................................. 8
6.8 Wind Consideration ................................................................................................................................ 9
6.9 Earthquake Consideration ..................................................................................................................... 9
6.10 Tank Capacity .......................................................................................................................................... 9
6.11 Supports .................................................................................................................................................... 9
6.12 Pipes ......................................................................................................................................................... 10
6.13 Nozzles .................................................................................................................................................... 10
6.14 Manholes................................................................................................................................................. 10
6.15 Flanges ..................................................................................................................................................... 11
6.16 Fasteners & Gaskets .............................................................................................................................. 11
6.17 Internals/ Externals ............................................................................................................................... 12
7.0 Welding..................................................................................................................................... 12
8.0 Staircase, railing, platforms and ladders ............................................................................ 12
9.0 Vent / Drain / Ventilation nozzle connection .................................................................... 12
10.0 Spares ........................................................................................................................................ 13
11.0 Important Consideration ....................................................................................................... 13
11.1 Vessels and Columns ............................................................................................................................ 13
11.2 Exchangers .............................................................................................................................................. 14
11.3 Tanks ....................................................................................................................................................... 15
11.4 Silos, Hoppers and Bins ....................................................................................................................... 16
12.0 Inspection and Pressure Testing .......................................................................................... 16
12.1 General requirement for Inspection & Testing ............................................................................... 16
12.2 Material Identification & Inspection stages ..................................................................................... 17
12.3 Testing & Approval............................................................................................................................... 17
13.0 Cleaning and Painting ........................................................................................................... 19
13.1 Surface treatment................................................................................................................................... 19
13.2 Painting ................................................................................................................................................... 19
14.0 Insulation.................................................................................................................................. 20
15.0 Transportation ......................................................................................................................... 20
IPS-ME-DOC-14-V1.0 Doc 379 -40KTPA- Standard for Static Equipments - R2.doc

16.0 List of Abbreviations .............................................................................................................. 21

17.0 List of Annexures .................................................................................................................... 22

1.0 Introduction
units in Asia, Europe & North America. The specialty chemicals Perstorp produces are added
to a range of products used every day at home, work or leisure. Customers are in coatings,
plastic processing and automotive industries as well as construction and engineering, the
agricultural sector and many more.
The current project is for setting up a Green filed manufacturing facility at village Sayakha
2.0 Project Details
a. Client : Perstorp Industries India Pvt. Ltd

b. Project : Elephant
c. Consultant : IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd.
d. Location :
Gujarat, India
e. Latitude : 24º46‟57”(N)
f. Longitude : 72º48‟25”(E)
g. Min. dry bulb temperature : 11.5 ºC
h. Max. dry bulb temperature : 41.5 ºC
i. Min. wet bulb temperature : 8.99 ºC
j. Max. wet bulb temperature : 28.33 ºC
k. Min. RH : 38%
l. Max. RH : 73%
m. Site elevation above mean sea level : 16 m
n. Basic wind speed : 44 m/sec
o. Nearest city : Bharuch
p. Nearest railway station : Bharuch 12 KM
q. Nearest airport : Vadodara 100 KM
r. Nearest port : Dahej
3.0 Purpose
This specification covers the minimum requirements for design, fabrication, inspection &
testing of pressure vessels and static equipment and supplements the specifications and
requirements of the applicable code.

4.0 Design Criteria
4.1 Design basis given below covers following types of equipment:-
1. Vessels
2. Columns
3. Reactors
4. Heat Exchangers, Plate Heat Exchangers (PHE), Air Cooled Heat Exchangers (ACHE)
5. Storage Tanks, Receiver
6. Steel Silos, Bins, Hoppers
4.2 Codes, Standards and Specifications
Latest editions, amendments of following design codes, standards and specifications shall be
followed:-
4.2.1 Codes / Standards
ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 For pressure vessels

IBR Indian Boiler Regulation-1950
The Static and Mobile Pressure Vessels
SMPV rules
(Unfired) Rules 1981
API 650 Storage Tanks
For workmanship of Vessels not categorized
ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1
under any other code
GRP tanks & vessels for use above ground
BS EN 13121-3
for design and workmanship
ASME SEC. X FRP pressure vessels
ASME SEC II / IS (As applicable) For material specification
IS:875 - PART 3 For wind load consideration
For seismic design consideration of new
IS: 1893 - PART 1
equipment on totally new foundation
IS:1893 - PART 4 For seismic design
ASME Sec. IX For welding
ASME B 16.5 For flanges
ASME B 16.47 For large diameter flanges
ASME B 16.20 For gaskets
TEMA For shell and tube Exchanger
API 661 For Air Cooled Heat Exchanger
API 662 Plate Heat Exchanger
ASME SEC.V For non-destructive testing
IS 9178: PART 1 / PART 2 / PART 3 For Steel Bins
WRC Bulletin # 537 ( WRC 107 replaced by Local Stresses in Spherical & Cylindrical
WRC 537) Shells due to External Loadings

Local Stresses in Cylindrical Shells due to

WRC Bulletin # 297
External Loadings on Nozzles
Stresses in intersecting Cylindrical Shells
WRC Bulletin # 368
subject to pressure
For venting atmospheric and low pressure
API 2000
storage tanks
4.3 Reference documents
E-MEC-SPEC-Pr. Vessel details-10045-A, Perstorp Pressure vessel standard

Rev -F
E-MEC-SPEC-Pr. Vessel Spec-10041-A, Issue Technical Specification pressure vessels
Dated:- 19-01.2018
E-SFTY-BoD-EHS for Construction-10038, EHS for Construction
Rev- A
E-SFTY-BoD-EHS for Design-10035, Rev-A EHS for Design
In addition to the above codes, standards and specifications, vendor can use his own
specifications, however prior approval is required before implementing.
5.0 Statutory Approvals
All the pressure vessels coming under IBR as per the definition of “Boiler” given in IBR 1950
shall be manufactured in accordance with the IBR and supplied along with necessary IBR
certification by vendor.
For vessels coming under purview of “Static and mobile pressure vessel rules” shall be
manufactured as per the rules and necessary approval shall be obtained from “PESO” by
vendor.
Vendor shall follow all local rules and regulation prevalent at fabrication shop and site.
6.0 General Requirements / Design Philosophy
1. Reinforcement pads shall be in the same material as vessel wall. Clips to be in SS or hot
dip galvanized CS as described in specification/MDS
2. Bolts/Studs, nuts and washers for supports, in appropriate quality and hot dip
galvanized or as described in specification/MDS
3. All external attachments such as lifting lugs, support legs, clips for supports and
platforms e.g., to have a backing pad on the vessel.
4. Vendor‟s nameplate holder to be sized to allow space for Perstorp nameplate (210x45
mm), to be located below vendors. Name plate holder shall be designed to be outside of
the insulation.
5. Main flanges and tube sheets to be at least 2 mm thicker than required, for future
machining.
6. As a minimum, the heat exchanger tubes to be welded and light expanded to tube sheet.
7. Vendor‟s standard to be approved.
8. 100% of tube welds to be LPE, unless stated otherwise.
9. Tube sheets and heads to have attachments for lifting, pulling, jacking and guiding.
10. Welded tubes may be used for non-flammable and non-hazardous media in pressure
class 150# and 300#.

11. Main flanges shall be designed for use of hydraulic torque tool.
12. Torque values for the bolts/studs shall be stated on the drawing.
13. All vessels shall be designed in a way that they can be pressure tested in installed
position on site.
14. Wind speed for wind load calculation to be determined for actual location
15. All design calculations shall be performed considering all applicable loads for Erection,
Operating and Hydro test conditions.
16. Flange face finish for standard flanges to be “stock finish”
17. A minimum of 10% X-ray on welds shall be performed, even if code states less.
18. On stainless steel vessels, all flanges, including blind flanges, shall be in SS material.
19. Lifting lugs shall be designed to carry the equipment fully dressed.
20. Flange face finish for fabricated (body flanges, tube sheets) to be Ra 6.3, (min 5.0 max 8.0)
21. The flatness tolerances on peripheral gasket contact surfaces shall be as given in Table
below: Nominal diameter of Shell / Pipe
Tolerance (mm)
<375 + 0,08
375 to 750 + 0,15
751 to 1125 + 0,20
>1125 + 0,20
22. Flatness and surface finish shall be measured after welding and PWHT if any.
The results shall be tabulated in a protocol.
23. All sharp edges on baffle plates, base plate of legs to be removed.
6.1 Equipment Sizing
1. All Vessels Based on inside diameter

2. All Columns Based on inside diameter
3. All Tanks Based on inside diameter
4. All Reactors Based on inside diameter
5. All Heat Exchangers Based on inside diameter
6. All Receivers Based on inside diameter
6.2 Equipment End Closure
Types of dished ends, specified inside the MDS, shall be used for pressure vessels & heat
exchangers. Dished ends shall be preferably of seamless construction. Dished ends with one
chordal weld seam are acceptable. In such cases width of the chordal plate shall not be less
than one third of the blank diameter and chordal seam should clear nozzles and opening.
Intermediate heat treatment if required shall be carried out by vendor.
When dished end is made up of multiple plates it must have a seamless crown plate. If there
is a nozzle to be fitted at the centre of the dished end, crown plate shall be bigger than the
nozzle or man hole reinforcement pad.
Pipe Caps may be used for vessels diameter <= 600mm having no internals
Vessels having conical bottoms shall be provided with tori conical bottom
Flat covers may be used for atmospheric vessels with stiffeners, as required

Flanged Covers shall be used for Vessels/Columns of Diameter <= 900mm having internals
All columns below 900 mm diameter shall be provided with intermediate body flanges.
Numbers of intermediate flanges shall be decided based on column height and type of
internals. Column dia 1000mm and above will have welded shell with the provision of
packing filling and removal.
6.3 Design Life
Equipment to be designed for a lifetime of > 20 years.
6.4 Design Pressure
Unless otherwise specified, design pressure requirements shall be as follows:

1. Design pressure shall be as per Process Data Sheet/MDS/Specification.
2. Design pressure shall be at the top of vertical vessel or at the highest point of horizontal
vessel
3. The design pressure at any lower point is to be determined by adding the maximum
operating liquid head and any pressure gradient within the vessel
4. Vessel operating under vacuum / partial vacuum shall be designed for an external
pressure of 1.055 kg/cm2 g
5. For vessels operating at ATM pressure minimum design pressure shall be ATM+
hydraulic weight
6. Pressure chambers of combination units including heat exchanger shall be designed for
testing independently without pressure in the adjacent chamber in corroded condition
6.5 Test Pressure
1. Equipment shall be hydrostatically tested in the vendor's shop as per design code
2. Equipment open to atmosphere shall be tested by filling with water to the top
3. Coils shall be tested separately to code test pressure.
4. Unless otherwise specified in applicable design code allowable stress during hydro test in
tension shall not exceed 90% of yield point.
5. Storage tanks shall be tested as per applicable code.
6.6 Design Temperature
Unless otherwise specified in data sheets, design temperature requirements shall be as

follows:
1. For vessel operating at 0ºC and over, design temperature shall be equal to maximum
operating temperature plus 15ºC subject to minimum of 65ºC
2. For vessel operating below 0ºC, design temperature shall be equal to lowest operating
temperature.
3. In case of heat exchangers Parts in contact with both shell and tube side fluids, shall be
designed for more severe of the temperature conditions
4. Minimum design metal temperature (MDMT) shall be lower of minimum atmospheric
temperature and minimum operating temperature envisaged during operation.
6.7 Corrosion Allowance
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, minimum corrosion allowance shall be considered as

follows:
Carbon Steel equipment : : 1.5 mm*

Low alloy steel equipment : 1.5mm
Stainless steel equipment : 0.5mm
CS Storage Tank bottom most shell course 1.5 mm
:
and bottom plate
CS Storage Tank shell (other courses) : 1.5 mm
CS Storage tank Fixed roof : 1.5 mm
Skirt for Column : 1.5 mm
*Except for tubes
Corrosion allowance for nozzles and manhole neck shall be at least equal to that specified for
the equipment. No Corrosion allowance is required for gasket seating face of girth flanges.
However, for non-standard blind flanges of channel covers the corrosion allowance will be
applied.
6.8 Wind Consideration
Wind load for equipment shall be calculated on the basis of IS 875 / site data for all
equipment.
6.9 Earthquake Consideration
For seismic design consideration of new equipment on totally new foundations Earthquake
loads shall be calculated in accordance with IS:1893 (Latest), if site specific acceleration
spectra is not specified in the project specification
For sites not addressed by ASCE method, where site spectra is not available, while using API
650, design level peak ground acceleration parameter Sp is to be taken as „Z‟ factor in
accordance with IS:1893. Seismic zone III shall be considered for design.
6.10 Tank Capacity
Capacity shall be specified as Nominal capacity and stored capacity. Nominal capacity for
fixed roof tanks shall be volume of cylindrical shell
Stored capacity for fixed roof tanks shall be equal to nominal capacity minus free board
volume (equivalent to 500mm of shell height or that required as per process data sheet).
6.11 Supports
Skirt supports shall be provided for tall columns and reactors. However, small vertical
equipment of SS construction may be supported on leg support made out of SS-304 ERW
pipes and small Mild steel or carbon steel vessels will be supported on leg supports made out
of open structural section or brackets. All horizontal vessels and exchangers shall be
supported on two or more saddles depending on weight & length of the equipment
Equipment supports for horizontal heat exchangers with removable tube bundle shall be

designed to withstand a pulling force of not less than 1.5 times the bundle weight taken at
center line of the exchanger. In case of stacked exchangers, the lower shell(s) or stacked
exchanger shall be designed to appropriately consider the load of upper shell(s) without
distorting the lower shell and causing bending of tube bundles. Vertical exchangers shall be
supported by lugs welded to wrapper plate in such way that the shell is not overstressed or
deformed
Skirt Thickness
The thickness for the skirt inclusive of corrosion allowance shall be maximum of following:
1. 6mm
2. Thickness required by design / strength calculation
Corrosion allowance of total 1.5mm shall be considered for skirt unless otherwise specified in
the project specifications to achieve final skirt thickness
Fire protective paint shall be applied to skirt support wherever specified in

specification/MDS to increase fire resistance.
6.12 Pipes
Shall be as per piping standard Document No.: IPS-MBD18019-PP-451-40KTPA-DE, Rev-8

All spools to be cleaned, sealed and protected during transportation.
Every spool to be individually marked for easy identification prior to assembly
6.13 Nozzles
See standard details for Nozzles.
Maximum external forces of nozzles are to be confirmed by vendor and stated on the
drawing. For minimum allowable nozzle loads see dwg IPS-MBD18019-FEG-8006-40KTPA-
DE-B
All nozzles to be sealed and protected during transportation.
6.14 Manholes
Whenever possible 600mm manhole size is always preferred.
Vessels and columns with diameter between 900mm and 1000 mm (including both) shall be
provided with 450 NB manholes. Vessels and columns with diameter greater than 1000 mm
and up to 1500 mm shall be provided with 500 NB manhole. However, if required, vessels
and columns with diameter above 1500 mm shall be provided with 600 NB manholes.
For Vessels and Columns manholes shall be provided with davit arm.
For storage tanks minimum number of 600NB manholes and clean out doors shall be as
follows:

Flush type cleanout

Tank Diameter Shell Manhole Roof Manhole*
fittings (if specified)
Dia ≤ 12 m 1 1 1
> 12 m <Dia ≤ 45m Dia 2 1 2
*Unless specified in MDS
Tank manholes including bolting and gasket shall be as per API 650
Clean out doors shall be provided as per client's / process requirements and Size of clean out
doors fittings for tanks shall be 36" (900 mm) x 48" (1200mm), unless specified otherwise in
process data sheet
Manholes shall be provided with davit as per Annexure 05 for Horizontal entry, Document
No.: IPS-MBD18019-ME-3610, Sheet-01 of 03 and Annexure 05 for vertical entry, Document
No.: IPS-MBD18019-ME-3610, Sheet-02 of 03. Hand holes should be provided with handles
for removal purpose as per Annexure 05, Document No.: IPS-MBD18019-ME-3610, Sheet-03
of 03.
Inside edges of nozzle, manholes, hand holes pipes should be ground smooth.
All nozzles shall be set in type unless otherwise stated.
6.15 Flanges
Nozzle flanges up to 600 NB shall be as per ASME/ANSI B16.5 or as mentioned in MDS and
above 600 NB shall be as per ASME/ANSI B 16.47 Series B unless stated otherwise.
Nonstandard flanges shall be designed as per ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 or detailed as mentioned
in MDS
Flange rating shall be established based on design pressure, design temperature and
considering all external loads (moments and axial force)
6.16 Fasteners & Gaskets
All bolts/ studs shall have ISO threading unless otherwise stated. Studs shall extend beyond
nut by min two to three threads. Bolts and studs shall be full threaded. Bolts/studs shall be
tightened with torque indicating wrench up to required torque.
Standard gasket shall conform to ASME B16.20 and ASME B16.21.
Material of construction of standard gasket shall be as per MDS & shall be free of silicon.
Non-asbestos sheet gaskets shall be used for atmospheric vessels / tanks unless otherwise
specified.
Nonstandard gaskets as follows:
Grooved metal gasket (kamm profile) 316ss + graphite, profile B7A, B9A or B15A depending
on application.
316ss + PTFE may be used for non-flammable/combustible media.

Graphite to be expanded and have a purity > 98%.

Specific weight between 0, 7-1, 1 kg/dm3

Minimum surface pressure to be 50 N/mm2
2 sets of spare gaskets for each nozzle/man way/insp. nozzle to be supplied.
Standard gaskets according to drawing or specification.
6.17 Internals/ Externals
All internals which are fixed shall be designed for load conditions
For fixed internals corrosion allowance shall be twice process corrosion allowance as
specified in Process data sheet
Internals which are of bolted construction shall be designed with single corrosion allowance
unless otherwise specified elsewhere in project specification
Bolting shall be stainless steel type 304 as minimum

All internals which are fixed shall be designed for load conditions
For shell & tube heat exchangers, floating head bolting shall be compatible to shell material.
Bolting SA 193 Gr. B7M/2HM shall be used as a minimum.
7.0 Welding
Plate edges shall be prepared for welding as per the applicable welding figures according to
drawing/ code. Edges shall be free from paint, grease, oil, slag, and burr. Edges shall be
smooth and free from scratches.
All welding seams should not foul nozzle, reinforcement pads, internal support rings, cleats
& stiffening rings etc.
Vendor shall submit and get approved welding procedure specification (WPS) & Procedure
qualification record (PQR) to client as per ASME Boiler and pressure vessels code as per
ASME Section IX.
All welding consumables such as electrodes, filler wires etc. shall be as per ASME Boiler and
pressure vessels code Section. II Part C.
8.0 Staircase, railing, platforms and ladders
Staircase, railing, ladders and platforms shall be as per Perstorp standard document No.: E-
CIV-SPEC-Design struc. steel-10046-A, Rev.-A, Specification for the design of structural steel
work.
9.0 Vent / Drain / Ventilation nozzle connection
Vessel shall be provided with one number vent/drain connection as per following unless
otherwise specified in process data sheet or else specified in specification.
Vessel Volume Length of (Horizontal Ventilation

Vent Nozzle Drain Nozzle
(V), m3 Vessel) (L), mm Nozzle
V<6.0 - 40 NB 40 NB -
6.0<V< 15 - 50 NB 40 NB -

V>15 - 50 NB 80 NB -
- 3000mm<L<4500 mm - - 100 NB
- 4500mm<L< 7500 mm - - 150 NB
- L>7500mm - - 200 NB
Vertical vessel not having any nozzle on the top shall be provided with 50 NB nozzles for
conducting hydro test in vertical conditions
Exchanger shall be provided with vent and drain connection as per process data sheet or 40
NB vent / drain nozzle connection with blind flange etc. if not shown in PDS. These shall be
provided for both channels and shells.
10.0 Spares
Gaskets for each gasket joint = 200%
Bolts/ Studs, nuts and washers = 10% but not less than two of each size
Sight glasses = 2 sets

Spares philosophy as per client‟s requirements
11.0 Important Consideration
11.1 Vessels and Columns
Vessels and columns shall be designed considering maximum operating liquid head in
addition to design pressure
All columns and vessels shall be capable of withstanding water full condition during system
testing.
In addition, all vertical vessels, columns and horizontal vessels shall be designed so as to
permit site testing of the equipment with water at the test pressure on the top of the
equipment considering 33% of design wind load. The design shall be based on fully corroded
condition.
Hydro test pressure calculation shall be as per applicable code based on design pressure or as
mentioned in MDS.
All vertical equipment shall be provided with minimum two lifting lugs unless stated
otherwise. Lifting lugs shall be designed with impact factor of two.
Mechanical design of self-supporting Tall Columns /Tower shall be carried out for various
load combinations such as Erection condition, Operating condition and Test conditions
Projection of vacuum stiffening rings, on insulated vessel shall be less than insulation
thickness wherever possible. Alternatively, the stiffening rings shall be covered with
insulation & cladding.
Vertical vessels shall be checked for vibration due to vortex shedding from wind to ensure
their structural safety

Lifting lugs, trunnnions for columns / vessels shall be designed for erection condition
Legs, brackets and saddle supports shall be designed for the stability of the vessel and also
for stresses developed in the vessel shell within the code acceptable limits
Support lugs and the vessel shall be designed to resist the frictional forces imposed due to
thermal expansion. Provision shall be made in the form of slots or obround holes in bearing
plates to enable growth of vessel during thermal movement
Skirt supports shall be designed with adequate flexibility to prevent excessive localized
stresses due to differential thermal expansion
Skirt shell to vessel shell / dish joint shall be full penetration welded. This joint shall be
designed with joint efficiency 0.55
Skirt shell thickness for vessel / columns shall be checked for stresses due to reaction during
anchor bolt tightening i.e. local stresses in skirt
Skirt shell material shall be the same material as the vessel shell for the upper part with
minimum length of 500mm for upper part
Skirt shall be provided with vent and man way access
All horizontal vessels shall be supported by saddle supports fabricated to fit the outside
surface of the vessel within the tolerances required by the design to prevent excessive
localized stresses in the shell. Saddles shall not be placed over vessel girth welds
11.2 Exchangers
Where practical, exchangers shall be designed for maximum interchangeability of parts

including tube bundles
Following shall be compiled with for shell and tube heat exchangers:
1. Provision of davits, jack screws and dowel pins on removable parts.

2. Provision of sliding rails for removable tube bundles.
3. Provision of sealing strips wherever required.
During the design of fixed tube sheet exchangers, consideration must be given to the stresses
induced in operating, alternate operating, and start up, shut down and other upset conditions
where necessary expansion joints shall be provided
In general tube to tube sheet joints shall be lightly expanded and strength welded or as
mentioned in MDS.
Tube holes in tube sheets shall be furnished in conformance with the special close fit
dimensions as per TEMA
Expansion joint / Bellow for exchangers
1. All expansion bellows shall be provided with internal sleeve and shall have suitable

venting and draining provision

2. Design cycle life shall be 7000 operating cycles
Testing rings shall be provided on all ‟U‟ & floating 'S' & 'T' head type exchangers
Dummy shell shall be provided for fixing test ring for exchangers such as kettle type or
floating head without shell covers (TEMA 'AHT' or 'AKT') or stub-in bundle where shell
design pressure is higher than tube side pressure
Test flanges shall be provided
1. For exchangers with removable bundle and bonnet type channel

2. For exchanger with removable bundle and channel with flat cover if tube side pressure is
greater than shell side pressure
Minimum number of test rings/ test flanges/dummy shells shall be at least one per set of
three bundles for shell side interconnected and stacked exchangers the minimum number of
test rings shall be equal to the number of exchangers in one stack
For 'U' tube & removable bundle exchanger, number of test flanges shall be equal to number
of exchangers in one stack
11.3 Tanks
All conical / open roof storage tanks shall be designed as per code considering liquid height
up to top curb-angle of shell
Maximum height of un-stiffened shell shall be calculated based on the corroded thicknesses
of shell courses. Section modulus of wind girders shall also base on corroded thickness of
shell courses
Annular bottom plates shall be provided for all storage tanks of 12 meter diameter and above.
Generally annular plate thickness needs to be one thickness higher than bottom plate
thickness
Anchor bolts shall be provided based on design considering wind/seismic loads, uplift due
to internal pressure etc. However, tanks having diameter <=10 meter shall be provided with
anchor bolts and shall be spaced at approximately 1.8M of circumference or as per
calculation.
Cone roof, dome roof tanks shall have approach to the center with roof treads (removable
gratings) along with hand railings
Roof shall be joined to the shell by means of continuous fillet (5mm max.) welded on the curb
angle. Roof to shell joint shall be frangible type OR suitable emergency venting shall be
provided as per code
Roof plates shall not be welded to the roof supporting structure. It shall rest on the surface of
the Curb angle.
In general internal roof structure shall be provided for CS tanks, when required. Tanks
storing DM water, storage fluids emitting corrosive vapors external roof structure shall be

provided, when required.
Nozzle loads shall be limited to calculated loads as per API 650. In case actual loads are more,
nozzles shall be checked with Nozzle-Pro.
11.4 Silos, Hoppers and Bins
Capacity and configuration of silos, hoppers and bins shall be matching with PDS/MDS
exactly since these parameters are of utmost importance in the satisfactory performance of
silo, hopper or bin.
Access shall be provided to top of the silos, outlet by way of providing staircase, ladder,
platform with railing.
Silos, Hoppers and Bins shall be designed for the additional load of man movement,
mounting of bin mounted bag filter, induced vibrations of bag cleaning systems, material
handling system, flow inducing methods such as vibrations, aeration, hammering as
applicable apart from filled weight of material, wind load etc.
Silo, Hopper and Bin‟s outlet size and shape shall be exactly as per PDS and MDS, because
this is critical for satisfactory performance of the silo, hopper or bin.
Silo, Hopper and Bins shape, angle and internal surface shall be exactly as per PDS and MDS,
because this is critical for satisfactory performance of the silo, hopper or bin.
Proper flow activating equipment such as vibration pads, Air nozzles shall be provided as per
PDS and MDS.
Unless stated otherwise Silos, Hoppers and bins shall be supported on Lugs, Leg supports.
Surface preparation and painting of external surface shall be as per respective section.
12.0 Inspection and Pressure Testing
12.1 General requirement for Inspection & Testing
1. Vendor will prepare QAP for all equipment‟s, with all the stages of manufacture and
submit for approval.
2. Vendor to give inspection call one week in advance for all the stages to be witnessed by
client.
3. Client/ client‟s representative shall have access to vendor‟s works for purpose of
inspection/ checking.
4. All equipment shall be hydrostatically tested as per the code. Necessary precaution shall
be taken to guard against the risk of brittle fracture during hydrostatic test.
5. The chloride content of water shall not exceed 25 PPM for testing equipment fabricated
from stainless steel or lined with stainless steel
6. Test pressure shall be maintained for one hour minimum

7. After testing all water shall be drained. Vessel shall be dried thoroughly after hydrostatic
testing to prevent the possibility of evaporation and concentration of chlorides. Hot air
drying is not permitted
8. For carbon and low alloy steel vessels the water quality shall be potable
9. Reinforcing pads to have telltale holes tapped 1/4” NPT. Pads to be air tested with 1.05
kg/cm2g pressure and checked for leakage with soap solution. After testing holes to be
plugged with hard grease
10. Gasket used for hydro testing shall be same as service gasket.
12.2 Material Identification & Inspection stages
1. Material identification of all pressure and process contact parts.

2. Stamp transferring on all identified material for the individual components of the tank.
3. Dimensional check & penetrant testing of end closures.
4. Long-seam set up of individual shell course.
5. Penetrant testing of shell long-seam joints after back chipping.
6. Cir-seam set up of shell to shell and bottom dish to shell joints.
7. Penetrant testing of shell cir-seam joints after back chipping.
8. Nozzles setup on top dish/shell in tack weld condition with R.F. Pads wherever
applicable.
9. Penetrant testing of nozzles to dish/shell after back chipping.
10. Inspection of internal surface finish of shell/top dish & Pneumatic testing of R.F. Pads of
shell/dish nozzles.
11. Cir-seam setup of top dish to shell cir-seam.
12. Penetrant testing of top dish to shell cir-seam joint.
13. Interpretation of Radiographs.
14. Supporting bracket/legs setup inspection in tack weld condition.
15. Final dimensional checkup of tank with external & internal touch-ups and finish.
16. Agitator running trial on” no load” and” load” condition
17. Hydro testing of the tank.
18. Cleaning & painting of the tank before dispatching to site.
19. Verification of internal inspection documents.
12.3 Testing & Approval.
1. Material Identification & Stamp Transfer

a. All pressure parts, process contact parts, all SS components and load bearing parts
for items subjected to stress, destructive tests and Chemical analysis shall be carried
out as per the relevant applicable specification mentioned in individual specification
datasheet of Equipment. Apart from the above, plate material of thickness 16mm and
above shall be ultrasonically tested. Bought out components such as pipe fittings
shall be subjected for lot testing as per relevant specifications.
2. Material identification and stamp transfer will be carried out at Fabricators workshop
only.
3. S.S. material will be additionally subjected to microstructure examination.
4. Following procedure shall be followed for lot identification.
a. Plates bearing the same heat numbers shall be considered as 1 lot. 2 samples at
random shall be selected for testing for identical parameters. The test results should

be identical complying to the norms of the relevant material code with variation in
values not exceeding 5% between the selected samples. Failure to comply with
above & material code value the total lot shall be rejected.
b. Plates without heat numbers or with different numbers shall be considered as
individual plate & 100% samples will be tested as per relevant material code.
5. All S.S. forged material shall be solution annealed and supported by certificate.
6. Testing of the compensation pads, liners, hydrostatic test of the equipment and jacket,
vacuum test of the equipment. No load & load trial of agitator and other applicable tests
as per the data sheets. Test pressures will be as indicated in Specification data sheet under
„Test Data‟ heading.
7. Any other inspection stages and tests required as per code shall be applicable apart from
the above points.
8. The supplier shall offer full facilities to the Inspecting Authority during the course of
manufacture and shall arrange for access to sub-contractors works where necessary.
Subcontractor may be selected with prior approval of IPS.
9. The supplier shall ensure that adequate notice is given to the Inspecting Authority to
enable them to arrange their visit to suit the manufacturing program in accordance with
the conditions of the order. IPS and Client shall be given the opportunity to inspect
fabrication at any stage. Any inspection shall not relieve the Vendor of sole responsibility
for correctness of his work.
10. R.T., M.P.T, U.T. PWHT and Hydro test shall be carried out as per code and as per
instructions on equipment drawing.
11. Stainless steel plates > 16 mm thick and forgings >35 mm thick shall also be ultrasonically
tested if specifically required in purchase requisition.
12. The IPS Inspector or nominated representative shall inspect the equipment at agreed
stages of manufacture detailed in the agreed Quality Assurance Plan. IPS reserves the
right to specify additional inspection if deemed necessary.
13. As a minimum the following inspection is envisaged. However additional requirements,
if required based on critical rating of the equipment shall be indicated during Quality
plan review.
a. Random check of weld fit ups, DP checks of root welds and final welds.
b. Check of nozzle and cleat positions w.r.t nozzle orientation sketch and their fit ups.
c. Inspection of main seam after first side weld and cleaning back side weld.
d. Fixing of spot radiography points and review of all radiographs.
e. Chloride check certificate for DP test regents.
f. Review and approval of procedures viz. welding procedures, post weld heat
treatment
g. Procedure, repair procedures, hydro test & IGC test etc.
h. Visual inspection of all finished welds.
i. Final dimensional checks including internal and external attachments and trial
assembly of internals that are not fitted for shipping.
j. Witnessing of hydraulic test using calibrated instruments and stamping of name
plates.
k. Joint recording of as built details.
l. Examination of equipment data book prior to their release to IPS
14. The extent of radiography shall be specified on the mechanical data sheet. In no case shall
the radiographic examination be less than specified in the code. However, spot
radiography is the minimum requirement for all equipment.
15. When spot radiography is considered, the following requirements shall supplement the
requirements specified in code
a. All “T” joints shall be radiographed
b. Minimum 10% of total weld length excluding “T” joints shall be radiographed

All joints which are repaired shall undergo radiography as per code requirements
16. All nozzles fabricated from plate, irrespective of thickness of plate, shall be 100%
radiographed
17. Dished ends shall normally be fabricated in single piece. However if its blank has to have
welded joint, the joint shall stagger the center line and the joint shall be 100%
radiographed after forming and heat treated required.
18. The technique employed and the weld quality achieved shall meet the requirement of the
code.
19. Root and final runs of all nozzles to shell welds shall be examined by magnetic particle /
dye penetrate test.
20. All pressure retaining welds which are not required to be radiographed shall be subject to
either magnetic particle or dye penetration check or both at the discretion of inspector
after root pass welding, final welding and back chipping.
21. If radiography is being substituted by UTS for the final closing seam as permitted by code
magnetic particle inspection shall be carried out in addition UTS.
22. All forgings shall be ultrasonically tested as per ASTM A-388 and acceptance standard
shall be as per ASME sec. VIII div. 2
23. Plates having thickness 16mm to 50mm (both inclusive) shall be ultrasonically examined
as per ASTM A-435.
24. Plates having thickness above 50mm shall be ultrasonically examined as per ASTM A-578
and shall have acceptance standard for level B.
13.0 Cleaning and Painting
13.1 Surface treatment
1. Surface treatment shall be according to Standard for painting, Doc No.: IPS-MBD18019-
ME-378-40KTPA-DE, Rev.1
2. All single CS consoles, steel parts, piping supports to be Painted as per specification.
3. Equipment
a. Inside CS-skirt and legs/saddles on vessels to be painted acc. to Standard for
painting, Doc No.: IPS-MBD18019-ME-378-40KTPA-DE, Rev. R1
b. SS welds to be pickled and flushed or machine brushed.
c. Cleaning, descaling & passivation of SS tanks, pressure vessels & heat exchangers
shall be as per ASTM A 380.
d. Equipment to be delivered fully cleaned and sealed.
13.2 Painting
1. Equipment that are specified to painted shall have all exterior surfaces including inside of
skirt and exterior of bottom head painted in accordance with following specifications
2. Surface preparation and painting shall be as per Standard for painting, Doc No.: IPS-
MBD18019-ME-378-40KTPA-DE Rev. R1
3. All painting shall be performed after pressure testing
4. In case of CS Tanks, bottom plate shall be painted before erection.
5. If tank is provided with internal coating, internal roof structure and roof plate shall also
be painted.

14.0 Insulation
Vessel requiring insulation shall be provided with insulation with supports as per
specifications Doc No.: IPS-MBD18019-ME-377-40KTPA-DE-Rev. R2
Technical specification for Insulation work.
15.0 Transportation
1. All critical equipment‟s shall be fabricated completely in workshop transported in single

piece. Vendor to devise transportation plan for all over dimensional cargo (ODC). This
plan should include route survey from vendors work to plant site for checking
obstructions such as narrow bridges, tunnels, low level bridges, underpasses etc.
Requirement and availability of transport vehicles, cranes etc. Vendor to take necessary
permission from RTO in advance for transporting equipment‟s under ODC.
2. For large non critical vessel/column which cannot be transported in single piece from the
shop, following methodology shall be adopted
a. The vessel/column shall be fully fabricated in parts with minimum site joints
b. Transported to site, fit up, fabrication welding carried out, and 100 % radiography of
the weld joints carried out for site joints.
c. Additional cleats to be welded on the equipment for erecting temporary platforms
d. Adequate number of supports shall be provided during transportation. Support shall

be placed in such a way that local stresses, bending in the equipment shall not exceed
the allowable. The same support may be used for temporary storage of equipment at
site.
e. In some of the case vessel/Tanks need to be fabricated at site shop in complete and
then moved to its final location inside the plant. This is required since fabrication at
place will not be feasible.

16.0 List of Abbreviations
Sr.
Title Description
No.
1. ASME American society of mechanical engineers.
2. ATM Atmospheric
3. API American Petroleum Institute
4. CS Carbon steel
5. FRP Fiber reinforced plastic
6. GRP Glass reinforced plastic
7. IS Indian standard
8. ISO Indian standard organization
9. LPE Liquid penetrant examination
10. PESO Petroleum and Explosives Safety Organisation
11. PPM Parts per million
12. PWHT Post weld heat treatment
13. QAP Quality assurance plan.
14. RTO Regional transport office.
15. SS Stainless steel
16. TEMA Tubular Exchangers Manufacturers Association
17. MTO Material take-off
18. ODC Over dimensional cargo
19. RTO Regional transport office.
20. EHS Employee environmental health and safety
21. MDS Mechanical data sheet
22. WPS Welding procedure specification
23. WPQ Welding procedure qualification
24. PQR Procedure qualification record
25. NDT Nondestructive testing
26. QC Quality control
27. KM Kilometer

17.0 List of Annexures
Revisi
Sr.
Description Description on
No.
No.
IPS-MBD18019-ME-8001-
1. Base ring and lug details for vertical vessels B
40KTPA-DE
IPS-MBD18019-ME-8002-
2. Typical construction details for pressure vessel B
40KTPA-DE 5sheets
IPS-MBD18019-ME-8003-
3. Male Female flange facing on vessels B
40KTPA-DE
IPS-MBD18019-ME-8004-
4. Construction tolerances for pressure vessels B
40KTPA-DE 3sheets
Davit details for man way covers 150# and 300# IPS-MBD18019-ME-8005-
5. B
(Horizontal entry) 40KTPA-DE 3sheets
Min allowable load for 150#, 300# and 800# IPS-MBD18019-ME-8006-
6. B
carbon steel and low alloy steel flanges. 40KTPA-DE
Fire proofing insulation support details vertical IPS-MBD18019-ME-8007-
7. B
vessels 40KTPA-DE
IPS-MBD18019-ME-8008-
8. Arrangement of earthlings boss for vessels B
40KTPA-DE
IPS-MBD18019-ME-8009-
9. Jack & guiding devices for heat exchanger B
40KTPA-DE
IPS-MBD18019-ME-8010-
10. Pull & lifting devices for heat exchanger B
40KTPA-DE
IPS-MBD18019-ME-8011-
11. Saddle for horizontal vessels B
40KTPA-DE
IPS-MBD18019-ME-8012-
12. Support leg details for vertical vessels C
40KTPA-DE
IPS-MBD18019-ME-
13. Head platform details (Typical) B
801340KTPA-DE -
IPS-MBD18019-ME-
14. Typical vessel clip details B
801440KTPA-DE -
IPS-MBD18019-ME-8015-
15. Insulation supports- Vertical vessels B
40KTPA-DE
Details of gussets for nozzle sizes 40NB and IPS-MBD18019-ME-8016-
16. B
below 40KTPA-DE
IPS-MBD18019-ME-
17. Orientation of bolt holes for vessel B
801740KTPA-DE -
Specification for the design of structural steel E-CIV-SPEC-Design struc.
18. A
work steel-10046-A
***** End of Document *****

DO CU ME NT N O. IPS -M B D 18 019 - PP -4 51 -4 0K T P A - D E
PIPING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION
(PROJECT STANDARDS
AND SPECIFICATIONS)
R9 July 25,19 For Approval PT SSD AC
R8 July 03,19 For Approval PT SSD AC

confirm his agreement to indemnify IPS- Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd for all loss or damage resulting there from. IPS- Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. accepts no responsibility or liability for this
document to any party other than the person by whom it was commissioned.
Document Title Specification for Piping Material Made / App PKT/AC
Document No. IPS-MBD18019-PP-451-40KTPA-DE Rev R9
Index
1.0 General ........................................................................................................................................ 3

1.1 Scope .......................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 Code and Standards ................................................................................................................................ 3
1.3 Pressure-Temperature design ............................................................................................................... 6
1.4 Pipe Wall Thickness Allowance ........................................................................................................... 6
1.5 Ends............................................................................................................................................................ 7
1.6 Units ........................................................................................................................................................... 7
1.7 Language ................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.0 Material ....................................................................................................................................... 7
2.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
3.0 Piping Material Specification Abbreviations ...................................................................... 8
4.0 Piping Material Specification Index ..................................................................................... 9
5.0 Piping Material Specifications ............................................................................................. 12
5.1 PIPE CLASS : 1 ..................................................................................................................................... 12
5.2 PIPE CLASS : 1A .................................................................................................................................. 15
5.3 PIPE CLASS : 1B (Fire) ....................................................................................................................... 19
5.4 PIPE CLASS : 1C .................................................................................................................................. 23
5.5 PIPE CLASS : 4 ..................................................................................................................................... 27
5.6 PIPE CLASS : 5 ..................................................................................................................................... 29
5.7 PIPE CLASS : 6 ..................................................................................................................................... 34
5.8 PIPE CLASS : 6B .................................................................................................................................. 38
5.9 PIPE CLASS : 6C .................................................................................................................................. 41
5.10 PIPE CLASS : 6P .................................................................................................................................. 45
5.11 PIPE CLASS : 7 ..................................................................................................................................... 49
5.12 PIPE CLASS : 8 ..................................................................................................................................... 52
5.13 PIPE CLASS : 9 ..................................................................................................................................... 56
5.14 PIPE CLASS : 10 ................................................................................................................................... 59
6.0 Annexures ................................................................................................................................. 60
6.1 IPS-MBD18019-PP-454-40KTPA-DE Piping design specification. ............................................ 60
6.2 IPS-MBD18019-PP-453-40KTPA-DE Design Basis Report of Piping. ...................................... 60
6.3 IPS-MBD18019-PP-455-40KTPA-DE Piping Fabrication & installation specification. ............ 60
6.4 IPS-MBD18019-PP-462-40KTPA-DE Specification Typical Piping details. ........................... 60
6.5 IPS-MBD18019-PP-458-40KTPA- DE Specification for Pipe Support. ...................................... 60
IPS-ME-DOC-21-V1.0 IPS-MBD18019-PP-451-40KTPA-DE-Piping Material Specifications - R9

1.0 General
1.1 Scope
1.1.1 This specification covers the requirements of materials selected for piping to be used for the
Project Elephant.
1.1.2 This specification covers specific requirements for the selection of materials to be used in the
construction and fabrication of all process and utility piping systems except the following items;
1. Fabrication ducts, square ducts and other special piping
2. Heating, plumbing, ventilation and similar piping inside buildings
3. Instrumentation tubing
1.1.3 Instrument Piping
This specification does not apply to instrument piping with the exception of the first isolation
valve which isolates the Instrument from the general piping, or the first two isolation valves
when dual isolation valves are specified.
1.1.4 This specification shall be applied to piping materials indicated on piping & instrument diagram
(P & ID) and utility flow diagram (UFD).
1.1.5 Limits of the Piping System
This specification applies to the following items when connected to a nozzle located on a
piece of equipment:
1. Flanges, gaskets, bolts, and nuts at the equipment nozzle.
2. Any valves or blinds connected to the equipment nozzle.
3. Piping between the equipment nozzle and the first isolation valve going to an instrument
(or second valve if dual isolation is specified.)
1.2 Code and Standards
1.2.1 All codes and standards specified in this document refer to the latest revision at the time of
signing the contract for this project unless otherwise specified.
1.2.2 This specification is based on the American Society of Mechanical Engineers /IS.
1.2.3 (ASME) Code for Pressure Piping, ASME B31.3, "Process Piping".
1.2.4 Design, fabrication, testing, and inspection of piping materials shall be accomplished in
accordance with the applicable codes and standards, which are in effect as of the date contract
signed.
1.2.5 Where conflicts between the specification and other drawings, documents, codes, standards and
specifications, etc., the most stringent shall be applied.
1.2.6 The code and standards shall be applied below lists, but not limited to the following;

AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)
Code Description
ASME B31.3 Process Piping
ASME B1.1 Unified Inch Screw Threads
ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
ASME B16.5 Piping Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings
ASME B16.10 Face-to-Face and End-to-End dimensions of Valves
ASME B16.11 Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
ASME B16.20 Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges-Ring Joint, Spiral
Wounds and Jacketed
ASME B16.21 Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
ASME B16.25 Butt welding Ends
ASME B16.34 Valves-Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End
ASME B16.47 Large Diameter Steel Flanges, NPS 26 through NPS 60
ASME B16.48 Line Blanks
ASME B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series)
ASME B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)
ASME B36.10 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
ASME B36.19 Stainless Steel Pipe
ASME B46.1 Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay)
AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE (API)
Code Description
ANSI/API SPEC.5L Specification for Line Pipe
API 594 Check Valves: Flanged, Lug, Wafer and Butt-Welding
API 598 Valve Inspections and Test
API 599 Metal Plug Valves - Flanged and Welding Ends
API 600 Steel Gate Valves – Flanged and Butt-Welding Ends, Bolted
Bonnets
API 602 Steel Gate, Globe and Check Valves for Size NPS 4(DN100)
and Smaller for the Petroleum and Natural Gas Industries.
API 603 Corrosion-Resistant, Bolted Bonnet Gate Valves-Flanged
and Butt welding Ends.
API 607 Fire Test for Soft-seated Quarter-turn Valves.
API 608 Metal Ball Valves-Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End.
API 609 Butterfly Valves: Double Flanged, Lug- and Wafer-Type
API 610 Centrifugal Pump

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
Code Description
ASTM For materials of regular piping part
MANUFACTURERS STANDARD SOCIETY (MSS)
Code Description
MSS-SP-25 Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions
MSS-SP-44 Steel Pipeline Flanges
MSS-SP-53 Quality Standard for Steel Castings and Forgings for Valves,
Flanges, and Fittings and Other Piping Component - Magnetic
Particle Examination Method
Flanges, and Fittings and Other Piping Component - Radiographic
Examination Method
MSS-SP-75 Specification for High Test Wrought Butt Welding Fittings
MSS-SP-80 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
Flanges, and Fittings and Other Piping Component – Liquid
Penetrant Examination Method
MSS-SP-95 Swage(d) Nipples and Bull Plugs
MSS-SP-97 Integrally Reinforced Forged Branch Outlet Fittings-Socket
Welding, Threaded and Butt welding Ends
MSS-SP-110 Ball Valves, Threaded, Socket Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and
Flanged Ends
OTHERS
ISO International Organization for Standardization
PFI Pipe Fabrication Institute
INDIAN STANDARD (IS)
Code Description
IS-1239 Steel, tubes, tubular and other wrought steel
fittings
IS-3589 Steel Pipes for water and sewage
IS-2062 Carbon steel flanges

1.3 Pressure-Temperature design
1.3.1 The design pressure-temperature to be used as a basis for the design of piping system and
selection of standard piping material components shall be in accordance with the requirements
of the ASME B31.3 “Process Piping” or other governing codes.
1.3.2 Design pressure-temperature limitations are in general based on the flange ratings
1.3.3 ASME B16.5, ASME B16.47 series A and are shown on individual line class specifications, unless
otherwise noted.
1.3.4 These design conditions shall not be less than the most severe conditions of coincident internal
and external pressure and temperature expected during service including start-up, shutdowns,
and possible emergency situations (e.g. emergency depressurization, etc.).
1.3.5 Unless otherwise specified, piping component wall thickness, specified in the pipe classes are
based only on design consideration of pressure, temperature, and allowances for corrosion and
minus tolerance according to ASME B31.3 “Process Piping”.
1.3.6 Piping component wall thickness do not include additional thickness required to compensate for
design considerations such as thermal loads due to restrains, live load, hydraulic shock or load
and sources from other caused all of which must be considered in the design of piping systems.
1.3.7 Pipe classes intended for vacuum service or steam service and some pipe classes, especially
requested for vacuum design condition, must be verified for vacuum design condition.
1.4 Pipe Wall Thickness Allowance
1.4.1 Wall thickness as determined by design formulas shall be increased to provide for:
1. Corrosion allowance.
2. Tolerances for threading and machining, thinning allowance when pipe is to be bent.
3. Pipe manufacturer's manufacturing tolerances.
1.4.2 Corrosion and erosion allowances are not set forth in the code, but are left to the discretion of the
designer. The following corrosion allowances are specified as minimum requirement.
Corrosion
Material Remarks
Allowance
Carbon steel and alloy up to 9 Cr-Mo in dry service 1.5 mm
Carbon steel and alloy up to 9 Cr-Mo in wet service 3.2 mm
Galvanized steel 1.5 mm
Stainless steel 0/ 0.5 mm
Non-Metal such as GRP, HDPE, UPVC, Non-metal lined, etc. 0 mm
In special cases a greater corrosion allowance may be required. If a higher corrosion

allowance for a specific service is specified in any of the specifications, then that corrosion
allowance will govern for that service. Likewise, if the Licensor specifies a greater corrosion
allowance than that specified in this paragraph or one of the other specifications, then the
Licensor’s corrosion allowance will govern for that service.
1.4.3 Threading and Machining Tolerances
1. Pipe which is to be threaded shall have an allowance equal to the thread depth added to
the calculated wall thickness.
2. For machine surfaces or grooves where the tolerance is not specified, the tolerance shall
be assumed to be 0.5 mm in addition to the specified depth cut.

1.4.4 Manufacturing Tolerances
The manufacturers minus tolerance for wall thickness must be added to the calculated wall
thickness in accordance with applicable ASTM or API.
1.4.5 Dual Grade Materials
Where dual grade materials i.e. 304/304L, 316/316L, 317/317L, or Stainless steel are
available, they shall be used. The corresponding allowable stresses of the higher strength
material shall be used in calculating wall thicknesses and the pressure limits of the class.
1.5 Ends
Unless otherwise specified, the ends shall be to the following standard:
Ends Type Standard Remarks
SW / SCRD ASME B16.11

BW ASME B16.25
Flanged ASME B 16.5 or ASME B16.47- series A
Threaded ASME B1.20.1 (BSPT, Taper Threads)
1.6 Units
All units are expressed in the international SI system, except for nominal bore sizes of pipes,
which are in inches. Pressures are gauge pressures (in bars), unless otherwise stated.
Temperatures are in degrees Celsius. Pressure/Temperature ratings of flanges are based on
the latest version of the ASME B 16.5 or ASME B16.47- series A.
1.7 Language
The language used in drawings, correspondence and other technical document shall be
English.
2.0 Material
2.1 General

2.1.1 Piping materials shall be in accordance with ASME B31.3 or where applicable.
2.1.2 Material used in the fabrication of piping and piping components shall be new, clean and free
from rust, pits and obvious defects.
2.1.3 All underground piping components shall be coated or cold tape wrapping except non-metal
such as HDPE, FRP, etc as per client requirements or standard industry practices.
2.1.4 Material used in the piping systems shall comply with ASTM standards. During the engineering
and procurement stage the Company will consider allowing other internationally recognized
standards to be used for limited application in the piping system.
2.1.5 Galvanized pipes and fittings and flanges, etc. shall be only hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153.
Threads for galvanized items shall be clean and free from any galvanizing. External surfaces
where galvanizing has been burned-off during field welding, etc., shall be wire brushed and zinc
coated or cold galvanized using proper paint only for external surfaces.
2.1.6 Low Temperature Carbon Steel (LTCS) is defined for this project as Charpy V-notch impact-
tested carbon steel. The minimum low design temperature where LTCS may be used is -46 ℃.
2.1.7 Carbon steel piping and components requiring welding or heat cutting (torch) shall have carbon
content less than 0.33% wt%.
2.1.8 Austenitic stainless steel material (pipe, fitting, flange, plate, forging, casting, etc.) shall be
furnished in the solution annealed condition wherever applicable.
2.1.9 Structural grade steel is prohibited from being used in any piping system except for structural
support.
2.1.10 Undressed flame cut weld bevels on butt-welding ends are not permitted.
2.1.11 Material marking methods shall be in accordance with applicable product specifications, except
that hard stamping using other than "low stress" (round nose) dies is prohibited.
2.1.12 When piping components shall be required 100% Radiography Test to weld area, the piping
components shall be provided a weld joint efficiency of 1.00.
2.1.13 All forgings shall be supplied in normalized condition except designated other heat treatment in
related code and standard, and weld repair are not acceptable.
2.1.14 Positive Material Identification (PMI) test shall be applied in accordance with specification for
Positive Material Identification.
3.0 Piping Material Specification Abbreviations
Sr.
Abbreviation Abbreviation Description
No
1. BE BEVEL END
2. BW BUTT WELD
3. CA CORROSION ALLOWANCE
4. FF FLAT FACE
5. FLGD FLANGED
6. HSD HIGH SPEED DIESEL
7. PBE PLAIN BOTH ENDS
8. PE PLAIN END
9. RF RAISED FACE
10. RTJ RING TYPE JOINT
11. SAW SUBMERGED ARC WELDED
12. SCRF SCREWED END - FEMALE
13. SCRM SCREWED END - MALE
14. SW SOCKET WELD

4.0 Piping Material Specification Index
Sr. Piping Basic

Rating C.A Service / Code Remarks
No Class Material
Carbon
1 1 150 # 1.5 Steam Condensate/ SMC
Steel
Carbon
2 1 150# 1.5 Steam (1.7 bar g)/ SML
Steel
Carbon
3 1 150# 1.5 Steam (12 bar g)/ SMM
Steel
Carbon
4 1A 150# 1.5 Light Diesel Oil/ LDO
Steel
Carbon
5 1A 150# 1.5 High Speed Diesel / HSD
Steel
Carbon
6 1A 150# 1.5 Natural Gas/ NG
Steel
Carbon
7 1B 150# 1.5 Fire Water/FW
Steel
Carbon Raw water, Cooling
8 1C 150# 1.5
Steel Water,
PTFE
lined Hydrochloric Acid 5-20%
9 4 150# 0 Corrosive
Carbon HCL
Steel
Air compressed/ AC
10 5 150# 0.5 SS304L Effluent Treated
water/ETW
11 5 150# 0.5 SS304L Cooling Water/ CW Canceled / deleted
Cooling Water Return/
12 5 150# 0.5 SS304L
CWr
13 5 150# 0.5 SS304L Hot Water/ HW
14 5 150# 0.5 SS304L Nitrogen (g) / N2
15 5 150# 0 SS304L Soft Water/ SW
16 5 150# 0 SS304L Recycled Water/ REW
17 5 150# 0 SS304L Raw Water/ RW deleted
Chilled Water(HVAC) /
18 5 150# 0 SS304L
CHW
HW Water(HVAC) /
19 5 150# 0 SS304L Canceled / deleted
CHW
20 5 150# 0 SS304L Caustic Lye
21 5 150# 0 SS304L Potable Water /W Inside Plant
22 5 150# 0 SS304L Process Drain/ PDR
23 6 150# 0.5 SS316L Inhibitor/ IN
24 6 150# 0.5 SS316L Flocculant/ PAM
25 6 150# 0.5 SS316L Antifoam / XF

Sr. Piping Basic

No Class Material
Mother Liquor (with Cafo
26 6 150# 0.5 SS316L Often hot & sticky
/ ML
27 6 150# 0.5 SS316L Process gas /PG
28 6 150 # 0.5 SS316L Synthesis solution /RKL
29 6 150# 0.5 SS316L Air VOC laden/ AV Irritant
30 6 150# 0.5 SS316L Process Condensate /PC
Process Condensate
31 6 150# 0.5 SS316L
/PC70
Process Condensate
32 6 150# 0.5 SS316L
/PC40
Calcium Hydroxide /
33 6 150# 0.5/0 SS316L Corrosive
CaOH
34 6 150# 0.5 SS316L RO water /RO
35 6 150# 0 SS316L Process Drain /PDR
Penta solution (sometimes
36 6/ 6B 150# 0.5 SS316L Often hot & sticky
with Cafo)/ PE
37 6/ 6B 150# 0.5 SS316L Penta Slurry/ PEx
Calcium Formate Slurry /

38 6B 150# 0.5 SS316L
CaFx
38 6C 150# 0.5 SS316L Methanol recovered /MEr Flammable
Extremely Flammable,
39 6C 150# 0.5 SS316L Acetaldehyde / AA earthing lugs wherever
applicable
Corrosive >10%,
40 6C 150# 0.5 SS316L Formaldehyde /FA
poisonous
Corrosive, flammable
41 6C 150# 0.5 SS316L Formic Acid 85% /FAC
>60°
Calcium Hydroxide /
42 6P 150# 0.5 SS316L Powder handling
CaOH
Calcium Formate Dry / Powder handling
43 6P 150# 0.5 SS316L
CaF
44 6P 150# 0.5 SS316L Calcium Formate Slurry Powder handling
45 6P 150# 0.5 SS316L Penta Dry Powder handling
earthing lugs wherever
46 7 150# 0 SS304L Air dust laden/ AD
applicable
47 7 150# 0 SS304L Air fresh / AF
Calcium Formate Dry
48 7 150# 0 SS304L
/CaF
Dust explosions,
49 7 150# 0 SS304L Penta Dry/ PEs earthling lugs wherever
applicable
317L/ Process gas with
50 8 150# 1.5 Irritant
1.4462 formaldehyde / PGF
Sr. Piping Basic

No Class Material
51 8 150# 1.5 SS317L Process gas/ PG
52 9 150# 0 UPVC Potable Water / W Outside Plant
53 10 150# 0 HDPE Effluent / EFF

5.0 Piping Material Specifications
5.1 PIPE CLASS :1
Rating : 150#
Base material : CARBON STEEL
Corrosion Allowance (MM) : 1.5
Design Temperature (°C) : 0 To 196
Design Pressure Bar (g) : 13.2/ FULL VACUUM
Special Requirement : IBR approval wherever applicable
SIZE
15 20 25 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400
(ND)
SCH 80 80 80 80 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 20 20 20 20
SERVICE
SMM- Steam (12 bar g); SML- Steam (1.7 bar g); SMC- Steam Condensate
NOTES
1. All vents and drains shall be provided with Piston valve unless otherwise indicated in
P&ID.
2. For Testing & Installation Refer this Document. ( Specification for Installation & testing
IPS-MBD18019-PP-466-40KTPA- DE).
3. Piping design as per ASME B 31.3.
4. Branch connections on mainline shall be Weldolet/ Sockolet/ Tee (reducing/equal) as
applicable. Refer branch table for details.
5. * Indicates It is only to be used for bypass & when specially indicated on P&ID.
SPECIAL NOTES
ITEM SIZE DESCRIPTION

MAINTAINENCE ALL Flanged, to be kept minimum
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS 0.5" TO 1.5" SW coupling
2.0" & ABOVE Butt welded
DRAINS 1"
IPS-MBD18019-PP-462-40 KTPA-DE Specification Typical
Piping details
VENTS 1"
Piping details
TEMPERATURE 1.5"
IPS-MBD18019-PP-462-40KTPA-D Specification Typical
CONNECTION
Piping details
PRESSURE GAUGE 1"
CONNECTION IPS-MBD18019-PP-462-40 KTPA-DE Specification Typical
Piping details

400 16 4
350 14 4 6
300 12 4 6 6
250 10 4 6 6 6
200 8 4 6 6 6 6
150 6 4 6 6 6 6 6
Branch Size
100 4 4 6 6 6 10 10 10
80 3 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10
50 2 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10
1
40 1 6 6 6 11 11 11 11 11 11
1/2
25 1 1 5 6 6 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
20 3/4 1 5 5 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
15 1/2 1 5 5 5 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
mm In 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
mm 15 20 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Header Size
For Header Size >250 mm; Sockolet or Weldolet < 0.5 x Header Size <= Reducing Tee
CODE DESCRIPTION
Code Description
1 SW Equal Tee
4 BW Equal Tee
5 SW Reducing Tee
6 BW Reducing Tee
10 Weldolet
11 Sockolet

Lower Size Upper Size Dimension

Item Type Material Description
(Inch) (Inch) STD
PIPE 00.500 01.500 B-36.10 ASTM A 106 GR.B PE, SEAMLESS
PIPE 02.000 16.000 B-36.10 ASTM A 106 GR.B BE, SEAMLESS
NIPPLE 00.500 00.750 B-36.10 ASTM A 106 GR.B BE, SEAMLESS
NIPPLE 01.000 01.500 B-36.10 ASTM A 106 GR.B BE, SEAMLESS
FLNG.SW 00.500 1.500 B-16.5 ASTM A 105 RF, #150
FLNG.WN 2.000 16.000 B-16.5 ASTM A 105 RF, #150
FLNG.BLIND 00.500 1.500 B-16.5 ASTM A 105 RF, #150
ELBOW.90 00.500 01.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW
ELBOW.90 02.000 16.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 234 GR.WPB BW, 1.5D
ELBOW.45 00.500 01.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW
ELBOW.45 02.000 16.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 234 GR.WPB BW, 1.5D
Item Type Lower Size Upper Size Dimension

Material Description
(Inch) (Inch) STD
T.EQUAL 00.500 01.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
T.EQUAL 02.000 16.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 234 GR.WPB BW, #150
T.RED 00.500 01.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
T.RED 02.000 16.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 234 GR.WPB BW, #150
REDUC 02.000 16.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 234 GR.WPB BW, #150
CONC
ECC
SWAGE 00.500 03.000 MSS-SP95 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
CONC
ECC
CAP 02.000 16.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 234 GR.WPB BW, #150
COUPLING 01.000 01.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SCRF, #3000
HALF
WELDOLET 02.000 04.000 MSS-SP97 ASTM A 105 ASME B16.9, BW,
#3000
SOCKOLET 00.500 01.500 MSS-SP97 ASTM A 105 ASME B16.9, BW,
#3000
BOLT.STUD 00.500 16.000 B-18.2 BOLT:A193 GR.B7, UNC, hot dip
NUT:A194 GR.2H galvanized
GASKET 00.500 16.000 B-16.20- Laminated Graphite
ANSI B16.5
TRAP 00.500 01.500 B-16.5 B:A105; T:13%CR; S: FLGD, THERMO-

Item Type Lower Size Upper Size Dimension

(Inch) (Inch) STD
STEAM SS304 DYNAMIC, #150
DTW1(IBR)
BALL 00.500 08.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, RF, #150
FLOAT GR.WCB
TRAP
FTF1(IBR)
STRNR 00.500 01.500 B-16.5 BA105; INT: SS304 FLGD, Y-TYPE,
YSSW(IBR) #3000
STRNR 02.000 08.000 B-16.5 BA105; INT: SS304 FLGD, Y-TYPE,
YSF1(IBR) #150
STRNR 10.000 12.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, POT TYPE,
PSF1(IBR) GR.WCB #150

(Inch) (Inch) STD
VALVES
VLV.GATE 12.000 16.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, RF, #150,
RVF1(IBR) GR.WCB manual
*VLV.GLOBE 00.500 16.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, RF, #150,
GVF1(IBR) GR.WCB manual
Note-5
VLV.CHECK 00.500 10.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, RF, #150,
SVF1(IBR) GR. WCB
VLV.CHECK 12.000 16.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, RF, #150,
WVF1(IBR) GR. WCB
VLV.PISTON 00.500 10.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, RF, #150,
IVF1(IBR) GR.WCB manual/ ON-OFF
operation
CONTROL VALVES
VLV.GLOBE 00.500 16.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, RF, #150,
CGVF1(IBR) GR.WCB Actuated
5.2 PIPE CLASS : 1A
Rating : 150#
Design Temperature (°C) : 65
Design Pressure Bar (g) : 6.0
Special Requirement : Flammable & Combustible media that requires fire safe
design.
SIZE
15 20 25 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400
(ND)
SCH 80 80 80 80 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 20 20 20 20

SERVICE
Natural Gas, Light Diesel Oil, High Speed Diesel
NOTES
IPS -MBD18019-PP-466-40KTPA- DE).
2. All vents and drains shall be provided with Plug /Gate valve unless otherwise indicated
in P&ID.
4. For vent, drain, pressure and temperature connection, branch connection shall be as per
branch connection table given.
5. Branch connections on mainline shall be Weldolet/Sockolet/ Tee (reducing/equal) as
SPECIAL NOTES

JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS 1.5" & BELOW SW coupling
DRAINS 1"
Piping details
VENTS 1"
Piping details
TEMPERATURE 1.5"
IPS-MBD18019-PP-462-40KTPA-DE Specification
CONNECTION
Typical Piping details
PRESSURE 1"
CONNECTION IPS-MBD18019-PP-462-40 KTPA- DE Specification Typical
Piping details

BRANCH TABLE:
400 16 4
350 14 4 6
300 12 4 6 6
250 10 4 6 6 6
200 8 4 6 6 6 6
150 6 4 6 6 6 6 6
100 4 4 6 6 6 10 10 10
Branch Size
80 3 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10
50 2 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10
1
40 1 6 6 6 11 11 11 11 11 11
1/2
25 1 1 5 6 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
20 3/4 1 5 5 6 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
15 1/2 1 5 5 5 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
1
mm In 1/2 3/4 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
1/2
mm 15 20 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Header Size
CODE DESCRIPTION
Code Description
1 SW Equal Tee
4 BW Equal Tee
5 SW Reducing Tee
6 BW Reducing Tee
10 Weldolet
11 Sockolet


(Inch) (Inch) STD
PIPE 00.500 01.500 B-36.10 ASTM A 106 GR.B PE, SEAMLESS
PIPE 02.000 16.000 B-36.10 ASTM A 106 GR.B BE, SEAMLESS
NIPPLE 00.500 00.750 B-36.10 ASTM A 106 GR.B PBE, SEAMLESS
NIPPLE 01.000 01.500 B-36.10 ASTM A 106 GR.B PBE, SEAMLESS
FLNG.SW 00.500 1.500 B-16.5 ASTM A 105 RF, #150
FLNG.WN 2.000 16.000 B-16.5 ASTM A 105 RF, #150
ELBOW.90 00.500 01.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
ELBOW.90 02.000 16.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 234 GR.WPB BW, 1.5D, #150
ELBOW.45 00.500 01.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
Item Lower Size Upper Size Dimension

Type (Inch) (Inch) STD
T.EQUAL 00.500 01.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
T.RED 00.500 01.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #150
CONC
REDUC ECC 02.000 16.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 234 GR.WPB BW, #150
CONC
ECC
COUPLING 01.000 01.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SCRF, #3000
HALF
#3000
#3000
GASKET 00.500 16.000 B-16.20-ANSI Laminated Graphite
B16.5
STRNR 00.500 08.000 B-16.5 B:A105; INT: SS304 FLGD, Y-TYPE,
YSF1A #3000

STRNR 10.000 12.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, POT TYPE,
YSF1A GR.WCB #150

VALVES
VLV.GATE 00.500 16.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, RF, #150,
RVF1A GR. WCB manual
(HSD/LDO)
VLV.PLUG 00.500 04.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, RF, #150,
PVF1A GR. WCB manual/ ON-OFF
( Natural Gas) operation
CONTROL VALVES
CGVF1A GR.WCB Actuated
( Natural Gas)
5.3 PIPE CLASS : 1B (Fire)

Rating : 150#
Design Temperature (° C) : 65
Design Pressure Bar (g) : 12
Pipe Size
15 20 25 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400
(ND)
Thickness 3.25 3.25 4.05 4.05 4.47 4.47 4.85 5.40 5.40 5.40 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35
Fitting
Rating/ 3000 # 40 20
schedule
SERVICE
Fire Water
NOTES
1. All vents and drains shall be provided with ball valve unless otherwise indicated in
P&ID.
5. Branch connections on mainline shall be Butt Weld/Socket Weld/Threaded as applicable.
Refer branch table for details.

SPECIAL NOTES
MAINTAINENCE JOINTS ALL Flanged, to be kept minimum
PIPE JOINTS 0.5" TO 2" SW coupling
DRAINS 1" to 2"
As per Fire Protection System Layout
VENTS 1" to 2"
PRESSURE GAUGE CONN 1" to 2" Coupling One End Threaded, BSPT(F) and other End
Socket Weld with Isolation valve
BRANCH TABLE:
400 16 4
350 14 4 6
300 12 4 6 6
250 10 4 6 6 6
200 8 4 6 6 6 6
150 6 4 6 6 6 6 6
125 5 4 6 6 6 6 9 9
100 4 4 6 6 6 6 9 9 9
Branch Size
3
90 4 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9
1/2
80 3 4 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9
2
65 4 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9
1/2
50 2 4 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9
1
40 1 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
1/2
25 1 1 5 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
20 3/4 1 5 5 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
15 1/2 1 5 5 5 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
1 2 3
mm In 1/2 3/4 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16
1/2 1/2 1/2
mm 15 20 25 40 50 65 80 90 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400
Header Size
CODE DESCRIPTION

Code Description
1 SW Equal Tee
4 BW Equal Tee
5 SW Reducing Tee
6 BW Reducing Tee
9 Stub-in with RF pad ( Where ever Applicable)

PIPE 00.500 06.00 IS: 1239 IS: 1239 Heavy Class BW (ERW)
PIPE 08.000 14.000 IS: 3589 IS: 3589, 6.35 mm BW (ERW)
Thick
FLNG SW 00.500 1.500 B-16.5 A 105 RF #150
FLNG. SO 2.000 16.000 B-16.5 ASTM A 105 RF, #150
ELBOW.90 00.500 01.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000

T.EQUAL 00.500 02.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
T.RED 00.500 02.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
REDUC. 00.500 02.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 234 GR.WPB SW, #3000
CONC
CONC
REDUC 00.500 02.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 234 GR.WPB SW, #3000
ECC
ECC
CAP 00.500 02.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 234 GR.WPB SW, #3000
PLUG 00.500 02.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SCRM, #150
CPLNG 00.500 02.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
FULL
BOLT STUD 00.500 14.000 B-18.2 BOLT:A193 GR.B7, UNC, hot dip
GASKET 00.500 14.000 B-16.20-ANSI Laminated Graphite
B16.5


STRNR 03.000 14.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, Y-TYPE
YSF1B GR.WCB
Lower Upper
Item Dimension
Size Size Material Description
Type STD
(Inch) (Inch)
VALVES (manual/ ON-OFF operation)
VLV.GATE (O S & 03.00 12.000 IS:14846 BODY, BODY & BOLTING-IS FLGD,
Y, RISING STEM DISC & SEAT RING- 1367 #150
VALVE) HAND GM AS PER
FOR ABOVE WHEEL- IS:318 LTB 2
GROUND C.I TO STEM-13%
IS:210 CR STEEL
GR.FG 200
VLV.GATE (O S & 03.00 12.000 IS:14846 BODY,DIS BODY & BOLTING-IS FLGD,
Y, NON-RISING C& SEAT RING- 1367, #150
STEM VALVE HAND GM AS PER
WITH POST WHEEL- IS:318 LTB 2
INDICATOR)FOR C.I TO STEM-13%
UNDERGROUND IS:210 CR STEEL
GR.FG 200
VLV.BUTTERFLY , 03.000 6.000 BS 5155 BODY- END IDENTIFICA FLGD,
LEVER OPERATED C.I,DISC- CONNECTIO TION #150
LOCKABLE TYPE SGI,UPPE N WAFER PLATE-
R STEM- SANDWICH ALUMINIU
S.S,FLOW BETWEEN M
CONTROL ASME B16.5
LEVER-C.S CLASS 150
FLANGED
VLV.BUTTERFLY , 08.000 12.000 BS 5155 BODY- END IDENTIFICA FLGD,
GEAR OPERATED C.I,DISC- CONNECTIO TION #150
LOCKABLE TYPE SGI,UPPE N WAFER PLATE-
R STEM- SANDWICH ALUMINIU
S.S,FLOW BETWEEN M
CONTROL ASME B16.5
LEVER-C.S CLASS 150
FLANGED
VLV.CHECK , SELF 02.00 12.000 API-594 BODY-C.I BODY SEAT- DISC TYPE– FLGD,
ACTING DUAL NITRILE WITH #150
PLATE WAFER INTEGRAL
TYPE SWING HINGE PIN
CHECK VALVE
VLV.BALL BVS1B 00.500 02.500 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 GR.WCB SCRF,#150
VLV.AIR RELEASE 00.500 01.000 ISI GUN BALL – WASHER- SCRF,#150

SINGLE ACTING METAL IS RUBBER RUBBER
318 LTB COATED,

Lower Upper
Item Dimension
Size Size Material Description
Type STD
(Inch) (Inch)
VLV.DELUGE , 04.000 08.000 UL BODY- FINISH RAL FLGD FLGD, #150
VERTICLE CAST 3000 CONNECTI (TEST
(AUTO-MANUAL STEEL ON ANSI B PRESSURE
#300)
OPERATION) ASTM A
216 WCB
VLV. DELUGE , 04.000 08.000 UL BODY- FINISH RAL FLGD FLGD, #150
HORIZONTAL(AU CAST 3000 CONNECTI (TEST
PRESSURE
TO-MANUAL STEEL ON ANSI B #300)
OPERATION) ASTM A
216 WCB
STRAINER 03.00 0.600 ISI BODY-C.I FILTER BOLTING- FLGD, #150
Y TYPE TO IS-210 SCREEN AISI CS AS PER
GR.FG 200 410 IS 1367,
(STAINLESS MESH-30
STEEL)
STRAINER 08.00 12.00 ISI BODY-C.I FILTER BOLTING- FLGD,
BASKET TYPE TO IS-210 SCREEN AISI CS AS PER #150
GR.FG 200 410 IS 1367,
(STAINLESS MESH-30
STEEL)
BELLOWS 03.00 12.00 IS 2062 FLANGE- BELLOWS-S.S SLEEVES-S.S FLGD, #150
C.S 304 304
A. Underground pipes shall be laid at least 1.0 m deep below final grade level. Underground
pipes shall be treated with anti-corrosive treatment, as per IS-10221.
5.4 PIPE CLASS : 1C
Rating : 150#
Design Temperature (°C) : 65
Design Pressure Bar (g) : 6 +Full Vacuum
Pipe Size
15 20 25 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400
(ND)
Thickness 3.25 3.25 4.05 4.05 4.47 4.47 4.85 5.40 5.40 5.40 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35
Fitting
Rating/ 3000 # 40 20
schedule

Pipe Size
450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800
(ND)
Thickness 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35 6.35
Fitting
Rating/ 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
schedule
SERVICE
Raw water, Cooling Water
NOTES
P&ID.
5. Branch connections on mainline shall be Butt Weld/Socket Weld/Threaded as applicable.
Refer branch table for details.
SPECIAL NOTES:
JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS 1.5" & BELOW SW coupling
DRAINS 1"
Piping details
VENTS 1"
Piping details
TEMPERATURE 1.5"
CONNECTION
Piping details
PRESSURE 1"
Piping details

BRANCH TABLE:
800 32 4
750 30 4 6
700 28 4 6 6
650 26 4 6 6 6
600 24 4 6 6 6 6
550 22 4 6 6 6 6 6
500 20 4 6 6 6 6 6 6
450 18 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
400 16 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
350 14 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
300 12 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 9
Branch Size
250 10 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9
200 8 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9
150 6 4 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
100 4 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
80 3 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
50 2 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
1
40 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
1/2
25 1 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
20 3/4 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
15 1/2 4 6 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
1
mm In 1/2 3/4 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
1/2
mm 15 20 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800
Header Size
CODE DESCRIPTION
Code Description
4 BW Equal Tee
6 BW Reducing Tee
10 Weldolet


PIPE 00.500 06.00 IS: 1239 IS: 1239 Heavy Class BW (ERW)
PIPE 08.000 32.000 IS: 3589 IS: 3589, 6.35 mm BW (ERW)
Thick
FLNG SW 00.500 01.50 B-16.5 A 105 RF #150
FLNG SO 02.00 24.00 B-16.5 A 105 RF #150
FLNG SO 26.00 32.00 B-16.47 A 515 Gr.60 RF #150
ELBOW.90 00.500 01.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000

T.EQUAL 00.500 1.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
T.RED 00.500 1.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
REDUC. 00.500 1.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
CONC
CONC
REDUC 00.500 1.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
ECC
ECC
CAP 00.500 1.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
PLUG 00.500 1.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SCRM, #3000
CPLNG 00.500 1.500 B-16.11 ASTM A 105 SW, #3000
FULL
BOLT STUD 00.500 32.000 B-18.2 BOLT:A193 GR.B7, UNC, hot dip
FOR FLNG NUT:A194 GR.2H galvanized
GASKET 00.500 32.000 B-16.20-ANSI Reinforce PTFE -

B16.5
STRNR 03.000 8.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD #150, Y-
YSF1C GR.WCB TYPE
STRNR 08.000 24.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD #150,POT-
PSF1C GR.WCB TYPE


VALVES
VLV.CHECK 00.500 03.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 105/ Swing type , B-16.5,
SVF1C ASTM A 216 #150,
GR.WCB
VLV.CHECK 04.000 24.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 105/ Wafer or lug type,
WVF1C ASTM A 216 B-16.5, #150
GR.WCB
VLV.BTRFY 04.000 24.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 Wafer Type, B-16.5,
TVF1C GR. WCB, SEAT: .EPDM,#150,
EPDM manual/ON-OFF
operation
VLV.BALL 00.500 03.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, RF, #150,
BVF1C GR. WCB, manual/ ON-OFF
SEAT: RPTFE operation
CONTROL VALVES
CGVF1C GR.WCB Actuated
VLV. 05.000 24.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 Wafer Type,
BUTTERFLY GR. WCB SEAT: B-16.5, , PTFE, #150
CTFV1C EPDM Actuated
A. Underground pipes shall be laid at least 1.2 deep below final grade level or below drain
trench. Underground pipes shall be treated with anti-corrosive treatment, as per IS-10221.
5.5 PIPE CLASS: 4
Rating : 150#
Base material : CARBON STEEL WITH PTFE LINED
Design Temperature (°C) : 0 To 120
Design Pressure Bar (g) : 10.0
SIZE
15 20 25 40 50 65 80 100
(ND)
SCH 80 80 80 80 40 40 40 40
SERVICE
HCL- Hydrochloric Acid
NOTES
1. All vents and drains shall be provided with Plug valve unless otherwise indicated in
P&ID.
5. Branch connections on mainline shall be Tee (reducing/equal) as applicable. Refer branch

table for details.
SPECIAL NOTES

JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS 1.0" & ABOVE Flanged Ends
DRAINS 1"
Piping details
VENTS 1"
Piping details
TEMPERATURE 1.5"
IPS-MBD18019-PP-462-40 KTPA-DE Specification
CONNECTION
PRESSURE 1"
Piping details
Lower
Item Upper Size Dimension
Size Material Description
Type (Inch) STD
(Inch)
PIPE 01.000 4.000 B-36.10 ASTM A 106 GR.B FLGD, SEAMLESS
RESIN-PTFE ASTM F1545- ASTM D 4895
2003
FLNG.SO 01.000 4.000 B-16.5 ASTM A 105 RF, #150
RESIN-PTFE 4.000 ASTM F1545- ASTM D 4895
2003
FLNG.BLND 01.000 4.000 B-16.5 ASTM A 105 RF, #150
RESIN-PTFE 4.000 ASTM F1545- ASTM D 4895
2003
ELBOW.90 01.000 4.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 234 GR. FLGD, #150
WPB
POLYMER-PTFE 4.000 ASTM F1545- ASTM D 4895
2003
ELBOW.45 01.000 4.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 234 BW, 1.5D, #150
GR.WPB-W
POLYMER-PTFE 4.000 ASTM F1545- ASTM D 4895
2003
T.EQUAL 01.000 4.000 B-16.5 ASTM A 395 FLGD, #150
POLYMER-PFA ASTM F1545- ASTM D 3307
2003
T.RED 01.500 x 4.000 x 3.000 B-16.5 ASTM A 395 FLGD, #150
01.000

Lower
Item Upper Size Dimension
Size Material Description
Type (Inch) STD
(Inch)
2003
REDUC.CONC 01.500 x 4.000 x 3.000 B-16.5 ASTM A 395 FLGD, #150

01.000
2003
REDUC.ECC 01.500 x 4.000 x 3.000 B-16.5 ASTM A 395 FLGD, #150
01.000
2003
BOLT.STUD 01.000 4.000 B-18.2 BOLT:A193 UNC
GR.B7, NUT:A194
GR.2H
GASKET 01.000 4.000 B-16.21 PTFE enveloped, 3 mm Thick
Asbestos free
VALVES
VLV.CHECK 01.000 4.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A PFA LINED, FLGD,
BLVF4 216, GR. WCB RF, #150
VLV.PLUG 01.000 4.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A PFA LINED, FLGD,
PVF4 216 GR. WCB RF, #150
CONTROL VALVES
VLV.GLOBE 00.500 04.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A PFA LINED,FLGD, RF,
CGF4 216 GR.WCB #150, Actuated
VLV. 05.000 04.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A PFA LINED,FLGD, RF,

BUTTERFLY 216 GR.WCB #150, Actuated
TVF4
5.6 PIPE CLASS :5
Rating : 150#
Base material : SS 304L
Design Temperature (° C) : 0 To 120
SIZE
15 20 25 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400
(ND)
SCH 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
SERVICE
N2- Nitrogen; AC-Air compressed; HW60- Hot water (hose systems); HW95- Hot water
(process); SW-Soft Water; REW-Recycled Water, CC-Caustic Lye, PDR - Process Drain , ETW-
Effluent Treated Water, W- Potable Water

NOTES
P&ID.
3. Safety flange covers to be used in Caustic installation.
7. * Not to be used for Caustic Lye.
SPECIAL NOTES

JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS 0.5" & BELOW Butt welded
DRAINS 1"
Piping details
VENTS 1"
TEMPERATURE 1.5"
CONNECTION
Piping details
PRESSURE 1"
CONNECTION IPS-MBD18019-PP-462-40 KTPA-DE Specification

BRANCH TABLE:
400 16 4
350 14 4 6
300 12 4 6 6
250 10 4 6 6 6
200 8 4 6 6 6 6
150 6 4 6 6 6 6 6
125 5 4 6 6 6 6 9 9
100 4 4 6 6 6 6 9 9 9
Branch Size
3
90 4 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9
1/2
80 3 4 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9
2
65 4 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9
1/2
50 2 4 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9
1
40 4 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
1/2
25 1 4 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
20 3/4 4 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
15 1/2 4 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
1 2 3
mm In 1/2 3/4 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16
1/2 1/2 1/2
mm 15 20 25 40 50 65 80 90 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400
Header Size
CODE DESCRIPTION
Code Description
4 BW Equal Tee
6 BW Reducing Tee


PIPE 00.500 00.750 B-36.19 ASTM A 312 TP304L BE, ERW
NIPPLE 00.500 00.750 B-36.19 ASTM A 312 TP304L BE, ERW
FLNG 00.500 16.000 B-16.5 ASTM A 105 CS lap joint, #150
STUB 00.500 16.000 B-16.7 ASTM A403 GR. WPS -
304L
GR.F304L
ELBOW.90 00.500 16.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, 1.5D, #150
GR.WP304L
ELBOW.45 00.500 16.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, 1.5D, #150
GR.WP304L
T.EQUAL 00.500 16.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, #150
GR.WP304L
T.RED 00.500 16.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, #150
GR.WP304L
RED.CONC 00.500 16.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 182 BW, #150
GR.F304L
RED.ECC 00.500 16.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 182 BW, #150
GR.F304L
CAP 00.500 08.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 182 BW, #150
GR.F304L
CPLNG.HALF 01.000 01.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 182 SCRF, #3000
GR.F304L
GR.F304L #3000
GR.F304L #3000
GASKET 00.500 16.000 B-16.20-ANSI Reinforced PTFE
B16.5
STRNR YSF5 00.500 08.000 B-16.5 B: A 182GR. F304L ; FLGD, Y-TYPE
INT: SS304L
STRNR PSF5 10.000 16.000 B-16.5 B: A 403GR. WP304L; FLGD, POT TYPE
INT: SS304L

VALVES
VLV.CHECK 00.500 03.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 182 FLGD, B-16.5,
SVF5 GR.F304L, TRIM- swing type, #150,
STELLITED
VLV.CHECK 04.000 16.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 182/ FLGD, B-16.5,


WVF5 A 351 GR.F304L, wafer or lug type,
TRIM- STELLITED #150,
VLV.BTRFY 05.000 24.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A FLGD, B-16.5, RF,
TVF7 216 GR.WCB Rubber lined, #150,
SEAT: EPDM manual/ ON-OFF
operation *
VLV.BALL 00.500 03.000 B-16.5 BODY- ASTM A 351 FLGD, RF, #150,
BVF5 GR.CF8 manual/ ON-OFF
CONTROL VALVES
VLV.GLOBE 00.500 04.000 B-16.5 BODY- ASTM A 351 FLGD, RF, #150,
CGVF5 GR.CF8 Actuated
VLV.BTRFY 05.000 24.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A FLGD, B-16.5, RF,

CTVF7 216 GR.WCB Rubber lined, #150,
SEAT: EPDM Actuated *

5.7 PIPE CLASS :6

Rating : 150#
Design Pressure Bar (g) : 11/ FULL VACUUM
SIZE
15 20 25 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400
(ND)
SCH 10S 10S 10S 10S 10S 10S 10S 10S 10S 10S 10S 10S 10S 10S 10S
SERVICE
ML- Mother liquor (with Cafo); AV-Air VOC laden; CaOH-Calcium hydroxide; PC-Process
condensate; PC40- Process condensate; PC70- Process condensate; AD-Air dust laden; WW-
Inflow WWTP; IN-Inhibitor; RKL-Synthesis solution; PAM-Flocculant; XF-Antifoam; PG-
Process gas; PE-Penta solution (sometimes with Cafo) ; PEx- Penta slurry, RO-Raw Water
NOTES
P&ID.
6. * indicates Globe valve for Bypass.
SPECIAL NOTES

JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS 0.5" & ABOVE Butt welded
DRAINS 1"
Piping details
VENTS 1"
Piping details
TEMPERATURE 1.5"
CONNECTION
Piping details
PRESSURE 1"
Piping details
BRANCH TABLE:

800 32 4
750 30 4 6
700 28 4 6 6
650 26 4 6 6 6
600 24 4 6 6 6 6
550 22 4 6 6 6 6 6
500 20 4 6 6 6 6 6
450 18 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
400 16 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
350 14 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
300 12 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 9
Branch Size
250 10 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9
200 8 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9
150 6 4 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
100 4 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
80 3 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
50 2 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
1
40 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
1/2
25 1 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
20 3/4 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
15 1/2 4 6 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
1
mm In 1/2 3/4 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
1/2
mm 15 20 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800
Header Size
CODE DESCRIPTION
Code Description
4 BW Equal Tee
5 SW Reducing Tee
6 BW Reducing Tee
10 Weldolet
11 Sockolet

Code Description
316L
GR.F316L
GR.F316L
ELBOW.90 00.500 32.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, 1.5D, #150
GR.WP316L
ELBOW.45 00.500 32.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, 1.5D, #150
GR.WP316L
T.EQUAL 00.500 32.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, #150
GR.WP316L
T.RED 00.500 32.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, #150
GR.WP316L
GR.F316L
RED.ECC 00.500 32.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 182 BW, #150
GR.F316L
CAP 00.500 08.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 182 BW, #150
GR.F316L
CPLNG 01.000 01.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 182 SCRF, #3000
HALF GR.F316L
GR.F316L #3000
B16.5
STRNR YSF6 00.500 08.000 B-16.5 B: A 182GR. F304L; FLGD, Y-TYPE
INT: SS316L
STRNR PSF6 10.000 12.000 B-16.5 B: A 403 GR. FLGD, POT
WP316L; INT: SS316L TYPE


VALVES
VLV.BALL 00.500 03.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 351 FLGD, B-16.5 #150,
BVF6 GR.CF8M, manual/ ON-OFF
VLV.BTRFY 04.000 32.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 351 FLGD, B-16.5 #150,
TVF6 GR. CF8M, manual/ ON-OFF
SVF6 GR.CF8M swing type, #150
WVF6 GR.CF8M wafer type, #150
CGVF6 (*Note- GR. CF8M manual
5)
CONTROL VALVES
CGVF6 GR. CF8M Actuated
VLV. 05.000 16.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 351 FLGD, B-16.5,
BUTTERFLY GR. CF8M, #150, Actuated
CTVF6 SEAT: RPTFE
VLV.BALL 00.500 04.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 351 FLGD, B-16.5,
CBVF6 GR. CF8M, V-NOTCH TYPE,
SEAT: RPTFE #150, Actuated

5.8 PIPE CLASS : 6B
Rating : 150#
Corrosion Allowance( MM) : 0.5
SIZE
15 20 25 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400
(ND)
SERVICE
CaFx-Calcium Formate slurry; PE- Penta solution (sometimes with Cafo)

saturated; PEx-Penta slurry crystalizing and saturated.
NOTES
P&ID.
SPECIAL NOTES

JOINTS
DRAINS 1"
Piping details
VENTS 1"
Piping details
TEMPERATURE 1.5"
CONNECTION
PRESSURE 1"
Piping details
BRANCH TABLE:

800 32 4
750 30 4 6
700 28 4 6 6
650 26 4 6 6 6
600 24 4 6 6 6 6
550 22 4 6 6 6 6 6
500 20 4 6 6 6 6 6
450 18 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
400 16 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
350 14 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
300 12 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 9
Branch Size
250 10 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 10 9
200 8 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9
150 6 4 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
100 4 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
80 3 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
50 2 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
1
40 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
1/2
25 1 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
20 3/4 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
15 1/2 4 6 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
1
mm In 1/2 3/4 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
1/2
mm 15 20 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800
Header Size
CODE DESCRIPTION
4 BW Equal Tee
6 BW Reducing Tee
10 Weldolet


FLNG 26.000 32.000 B-16.47 A 515 Gr.60 CS lap joint, #150
316L
FLNG.BLIND 00.500 32.000 B-16.5 ASTM A 182 GR.F316L RF, #150
ELBOW.90 00.500 32.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, 1.5D, #150
GR.WP316L
ELBOW.45 00.500 32.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, 1.5D, #150
GR.WP316L
T.EQUAL 00.500 32.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, #150
GR.WP316L
T.RED 00.500 32.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, #150
GR.WP316L
RED.CONC 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 182 GR.F316L BW, #150
RED.ECC 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 182 GR.F316L BW, #150
CAP 00.500 08.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 182 GR.F316L BW, #150
COUPLING 01.000 01.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 182 GR.F316L SCRF, #3000
HALF
WELDOLET 00.500 32.000 MSS-SP97 ASTM A 182 GR.F316L ASME B16.9, BW,
#3000
B16.5
STRNR YSF6B 00.500 08.000 B-16.5 B: A 182GR. F304L ; FLGD, Y-TYPE
INT: SS316L
STRNR PSF6B 10.000 12.000 B-16.5 B: A 403GR. WP316L; FLGD, POT
INT: SS316L TYPE
VALVES
FLGD, RF, B-16.5,
BODY-ASTM A 351 GR.
VLV.PLUG RPTFE Sleeved,
00.500 03.000 API 599 CF8M; PLUG: ASTM A
PVF6B #150, manual/ ON-
351 GR. CF8M
OFF operation
VLV.BTRFY 04.000 24.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 351 GR. FLGD, B-16.5,
TVF6B CF8M; SEAT: RPTFE #150, manual/ ON-
OFF operation
Control valve


VLV.BALL 00.500 04.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 351 GR. FLGD, B-16.5,
CBVF6B CF8M; SEAT: RPTFE V-NOTCH TYPE,
#150, Actuated
5.9 PIPE CLASS : 6C
Rating : 150#
Corrosion Allowance ( MM) : 0.5
Special Requirement : Flammable, Combustible & VOC Media that requires fire
safe & anti-static design.
SIZE
15 20 25 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400
(ND)
SERVICE
AA-Acetaldehyde; FA-Formaldehyde; FAc-Formic acid; MEr-Methanol

recovered
NOTES
P&ID.
IPS-MBD18019-PP-466-40KTPA- EXT.BE).
6. Lines must have earthing lugs.
SPECIAL NOTES

JOINTS
DRAINS
1" IPS-MBD18019-PP-462-40 KTPA-DE Specification Typical
Piping details


VENTS
1" IPS-MBD18019-PP-462-40 KTPA-DE Specification
TEMPERATURE
CONNECTION 1.5"
Piping details
PRESSURE
CONNECTION 1"
Piping details
BRANCH TABLE:
800 32 4
750 30 4 6
700 28 4 6 6
650 26 4 6 6 6
600 24 4 6 6 6 6
550 22 4 6 6 6 6 6
500 20 4 6 6 6 6 6 6
450 18 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
400 16 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
350 14 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
300 12 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 9
Branch Size
250 10 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 10 9
200 8 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9
150 6 4 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
100 4 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
80 3 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
50 2 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
1
40 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
1/2
25 1 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
20 3/4 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
15 1/2 4 6 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
1
mm In 1/2 3/4 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
1/2
mm 15 20 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800
Header Size

CODE DESCRIPTION
Code Description
4 BW Equal Tee
6 BW Reducing Tee
10 Weldolet


FLNG.WN 00.500 01.500 B-16.5 ASTM A 182 GR.F316L RF, #150
FLNG.WN 02.000 24.000 B-16.5 ASTM A 182 GR.F316L RF, #150
ELBOW.90 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, 1.5D
GR.WP316L
ELBOW.45 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, 1.5D
GR.WP316L
T.EQUAL 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW
GR.WP316L
T.RED 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW
GR.WP316L
RED.CONC 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 182 GR.F316L BW
RED.ECC 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 182 GR.F316L BW
CAP 00.500 08.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 182 GR.F316L BW
GR.F316L #3000
GASKET 00.500 24.000 B-16.20-ANSI SP.WND SPIRAL, 150
B16.5 SS316L + GRAPHITE
STRNR 00.500 08.000 B-16.5 B: A 182GR. F316L; FLGD, Y-TYPE
YSF6C INT: SS316L
STRNR 02.000 12.000 B-16.5 B: A 403GR. WP316L; FLGD, POT TYPE
PSF6C INT: SS316L


ALL VALVES TO BE FIRE SAFE & OF ANTI-STATIC DESIGN
VLV.GATE 00.500 01.500 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A FLGD, RF, B-16.5,
RVF6C 351 GR.CF8M #150, manual/
ON-OFF operation
VLV.CHECK 00.500 03.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A FLGD, RF, B-16.5,
SVF6C 351 GR. CF8M Swing type, #150,
VLV.CHECK 04.000 12.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A FLGD, RF, B-16.5,
WVF6C 351 GR. CF8M Wafer type, #150,
VLV.BALL 02.00 02.00 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A FLGD, 150, B-16.5,
BVF6C 351 GR. CF8M/ #150, only to be
ASTM A 182 used at bottom
GR.F316, TRIM- outlet of
SEAT: ASTM A276 Acetaldehyde Tank
Type 316 Stellited Remotely Operated
VLV.BTRFY 04.000 32.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A FLGD, B-16.5, Lug
TVF6C 351 GR. CF8M, type, Triple
Laminated SS + Eccentric, #150,
Grafoil seal manual/ ON-OFF
operation
VLV.PLUG 00.500 03.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A FLGD, B-16.5,
PVF6C 351 GR. CF8M RPTFE SEAT, #150,
PLUG- ASTM A manual/ ON-OFF
351 GR. CF8M operation
CONTROL VALVES
VLV.GLOBE 00.500 04.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A FLGD, RF, #150,
CGVF6C 351 GR. CF8M, Actuated
VLV.BALL 00.500 04.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A FLGD, B-16.5,
CBVF6C 351 GR. CF8M, V-NOTCH TYPE,
SEAT: RPTFE #150, Actuated
VLV.BTRFY 04.000 24.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A FLGD, B-16.5, Lug
TVF6C 351 GR. CF8M, type, Triple
Laminated SS + Eccentric, #150,
Grafoil seal Actuated
5.10 PIPE CLASS : 6P

Rating : 150#
Design Pressure Bar (g) : 0.5/ PARTIAL VACUUM
Special Requirement : Anti-static design.
SIZE (ND) 15 25 50 80 150 200
SCH 10S 10S 10S 10S 10S 10S
SERVICE

CaOH-Calcium hydroxide; CaF -Calcium Formate Dry; CaFx -Calcium Formate Slurry; PEs-
Penta Dry
NOTES
IPS-MBD18019-PP-466-40KTPA-DE).
3. Branch connections on mainline shall be Stub in as applicable. Refer branch table for
details.
4. Same Parts of the system to be square ducts constructed in 3mm Plate.
5. Spec included For Powder.
SPECIAL NOTES

DRAINS 1"
Piping details
VENTS 1"
Piping details
TEMPERATURE 1.5"
CONNECTION
Piping details
PRESSURE 1"
CONNECTION
Piping details
QUICK OPENING 3” to 8”
INSPECTION
Piping details
HATCH (Special
Part)
BRANCH TABLE:
200 8 4
150 6 4 9
100 4 4 9 9
80 3 4 9 9 9
Branch Size
50 2 4 9 9 9 9
25 1 1 6 9 9 9 9
15 1/2 1 5 6 9 9 9 9
mm In 1/2 1 2 3 4 6 8
mm 15 25 50 80 100 150 200
Header Size

CODE DESCRIPTION
Code Description
1 SW Equal Tee
4 BW Equal Tee
5 SW Reducing Tee
6 BW Reducing Tee

NIPPLE 00.500 00.750 B-36.19 ASTM A 312 TP316L --
NIPPLE 01.000 01.500 B-36.19 ASTM A 312 TP316L --
316L
FLNG.BLIND 00.500 08.000 B-16.5 ASTM A 182 RF
GR.F316L
ELBOW.90 00.500 08.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, 5D
GR.WP316L
ELBOW.45 00.500 08.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, 5D
GR.WP316L
T.RED 03.000 08.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW
GR.WP316L
RED.CONC 00.500 08.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 182 BW
GR.F316L
RED.ECC 00.500 08.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 182 BW
GR.F316L
CPLNG HALF 00.500 01.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 182 SCRF, #3000
GR.F316L
B16.5



ALL VALVES TO BE ANTI-STATIC DESIGN
VLV.BTRFY 03.000 08.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 351 FLGD, B-16.5,
TVF6P GR. CF8M, #150, manual/ ON-
SEAT: RPTFE OFF operation
VLV.GATE 03.000 08.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 351 KNIFE TYPE

RVF6P GR.CF8M FLGD, RF, B-16.5,
#150, manual/ ON-
OFF operation
Valve. BALL 00.500 02.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 351 FLGD, B-16.5,
BVF6P GR.CF8M #150, manual/ ON-
OFF operation

5.11 PIPE CLASS :7
Rating : 150#
Design Pressure Bar (g) : 3 to (720 mm Hg absolute)
Special Requirement : Media requires anti-static design.
SIZE
15 20 25 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400
(ND)
SERVICE
AD- Air dust laden; AF- Air fresh; Ax- Exhaust air
NOTES
P&ID.
5. Branch connections on mainline shall be Stub in/Red Tee/ Equal Tee as applicable. Refer
branch table for details.
6. Lines must have earthing lugs.
SPECIAL NOTES

JOINTS
DRAINS 1"
Piping details
VENTS 1"
Piping details
TEMPERATURE 1.5"
CONNECTION
Piping details
PRESSURE 1"
CONNECTION
Piping details
BRANCH TABLE:
800 32 4
750 30 4 9
700 28 4 9 9
650 26 4 9 9 9
600 24 4 9 9 9 9
550 22 4 9 9 9 9 9
500 20 4 9 9 9 9 9 9
450 18 4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
400 16 4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
350 14 4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
300 12 4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Branch Size
250 10 4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
200 8 4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
150 6 4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
100 4 4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
80 3 4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
50 2 4 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
1
40 4 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
1/2
25 1 4 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
20 3/4 4 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
15 1/2 4 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
1
mm In 1/2 3/4 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
1/2
mm 15 20 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800
Header Size

CODE DESCRIPTION
Code Description
4 BW Equal Tee
6 BW Reducing Tee

PIPE 00.500 00.750 B-36.19 ASTM A 312 TP316L PE, ERW
PIPE 01.000 01.500 B-36.19 ASTM A 312 TP316L PE, ERW
NIPPLE 00.500 00.750 B-36.19 ASTM A 312 TP316L PBE, ERW
NIPPLE 01.000 01.500 B-36.19 ASTM A 312 TP316L PBE, ERW
304L
ELBOW.90 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, 1.5D, #150
GR.WP316L-S
ELBOW.45 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, 1.5D, #150
GR.WP316L-S
T.EQUAL 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, #150
GR.WP316L-S
RED.CONC 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 182 GR.F304L BW, #150
RED.ECC 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 182 GR.F304L BW, #150
CAP 00.500 08.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 182 GR.F316L BW, #150
CPLNG HALF 01.000 01.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 182 GR.F304L SCRF, #3000
B16.5
STRNR YSF7 00.500 08.000 B-16.5 B: A 182GR. F304L ; FLGD, Y-TYPE
INT: SS316L
STRNR PSF7 10.000 12.000 B-16.5 B: A 403GR. WP316L; FLGD, T-TYPE
INT: SS316L


VALVES
VLV.CHECK 00.500 03.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 182 FLGD, B-16.5, swing
SVF7 GR.F304L, TRIM- type, #150,
STELLITED
VLV.CHECK 04.000 24.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 182 FLGD, B-16.5, wafer
WVF7 GR.F304L, TRIM- type, #150,
STELLITED
VLV.BALL 00.500 03.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 351 FLGD, RF, #150,
BVF7 GR.CF8 SEAT: RPTFE manual/ ON-OFF
operation
VLV.BTRFY 04.000 24.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, B-16.5, RF,
TVF7 GR.WCB SEAT: EPDM Rubber lined, #150,
manual/ ON-OFF
operation
CONTROL VALVES
CGVF7 GR.CF3M, Actuated
VLV.BTRFY 05.000 24.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 216 FLGD, B-16.5, RF,
CTVF7 GR.WCB SEAT: EPDM Rubber lined, #150,
Actuated
VLV.BALL 00.500 04.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 351 FLGD, B-16.5,
CBVF7 GR.CF3M SEAT: V-NOTCH TYPE,
RPTFE #150, Actuated
5.12 PIPE CLASS :8
Rating : 150#
SIZE
15 20 25 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400
(ND)
SERVICE
PGF- Process gas with formaldehyde; PG- Process gas
NOTES
P&ID.
IPS-MBD18019-PP-466-40KTPA-DE) per standard codes.


SPECIAL NOTES

JOINTS
DRAINS 1"
Piping details
VENTS 1"
Piping details
TEMPERATURE 1.5"
CONNECTION
Piping details
PRESSURE 1"
CONNECTION
Piping details

BRANCH TABLE:
800 32 4
750 30 4 6
700 28 4 6 6
650 26 4 6 6 6
600 24 4 6 6 6 6
550 22 4 6 6 6 6 6
500 20 4 6 6 6 6 6
450 18 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
400 16 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
350 14 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
300 12 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 9
Branch Size
250 10 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 10 9
200 8 4 6 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9
150 6 4 6 6 6 6 6 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
100 4 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
80 3 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
50 2 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
1
40 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
1/2
25 1 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
20 3/4 4 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
15 1/2 4 6 6 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 9
11/
mm In 1/2 3/4 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
2
mm 15 20 25 40 50 80 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800
Header Size
CODE DESCRIPTION
Code Description
4 BW Equal Tee
6 BW Reducing Tee
9 Stub-in with RF pad
10 Weldolet


STUB 00.500 24.000 B-16.7 ASTM A403 GR. -
WPS 317L
GR.F317L
ELBOW.90 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, 1.5D, #150
GR.WP317L-S
ELBOW.45 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, 1.5D, #150
GR.WP317L-S
T.EQUAL 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, #150
GR.WP317L-S
T.RED 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 403 BW, #150
GR.WP317L-S
GR.F317L
RED.ECC 00.500 24.000 B-16.9 ASTM A 182 BW, #150
GR.F317L
CAP 00.500 02.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 403 BW, #150
GR.WP317L-S
CPLNG.HALF 01.000 01.000 B-16.11 ASTM A 182 SCRF, #3000
GR.F317L
GR.F317L #3000
GR.F317L #3000
B16.5
STRNR YSF8 00.500 01.500 B-16.5 B: A 182GR. F317L; FLGD, Y-TYPE,
INT: SS317L #150
STRNR PSF8 02.000 24.000 B-16.5 B: A 403GR. FLGD, T-TYPE,
WP317L; INT: #150
SS317L

Item Type Lower Size Upper Size Dimension Material Description

(Inch) (Inch) STD
VALVES
VLV.BALL 00.500 3.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 351 FLGD, RF,
BVF8 GR.317L B-16.5, #150,
SEAT: RPTFE manual/ ON-OFF
operation
VLV.BTRFY 04.000 24.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 105, FLGD, B-16.5,
TVF8 PTFE lined, wafer
type, #150,
manual/ ON-OFF
operation
CONTROL VALVES
CGVF8 GR.317L Actuated
VLV.BTRFY 04.000 24.000 B-16.5 BODY-ASTM A 105, FLGD, B-16.5,
TVF8 PTFE lined, wafer
type, #150,
Actuated
5.13 PIPE CLASS :9

Rating : 150#
Base material : UPVC
Corrosion Allowance( MM) :0
Design Temperature (° C) : 50
Design Pressure Bar (g) :7
Schedule : 80
SERVICE
POW- Potable Water
NOTES
P&ID.
3. Piping design as per ASTM D 1785.
5. Branch connections on mainline shall be Weldolet/Sockolet/ Tee (reducing/equal) as
SPECIAL NOTES


JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS 0.5" & ABOVE Socket Weld/ Flanged
DRAINS 1"
IPS-MBD18019-PP-462-40KTPA-DE Specification Typical
Piping details
VENTS 1"
Piping details
TEMPERATURE 1.5"
CONNECTION
Piping details
PRESSURE 1"
CONNECTION
Piping details

PIPE 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 1785 UPVC GREY PE
FLNG 00.500 12.000 ANSI B-16.5 UPVC GREY SW, #150
FLNG.BLIND 00.500 12.000 ANSI B-16.5 UPVC GREY RF, #150
ELBOW.90 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 2467 MOULDED UPVC LONG RADIUS,
SW, #150
ELBOW.45 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 2467 MOULDED UPVC SW, #150
T.EQUAL 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 2467 MOULDED UPVC SW, #150
T.RED 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 2467 MOULDED UPVC SW, #150
CONCENTRIC 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 2467 MOULDED UPVC SW, #150
REDUCER
ECCENTRIC 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 2467 MOULDED UPVC SW, #150
REDUCER
CAP 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 2467 MOULDED UPVC SW, #150
BOLT STUD 00.500 12.000 ANSI B 18.2.1, BOLT: A193 Gr.B8, HEXAGONAL
ANSI B 18.2.2 NUT: A194 GR.8 HEADED
GASKET 00.500 12.000 ANSI B-16.21 PTFE FULL FACE/
RING, 3 mm
STRNR YSF9 00.500 08.000 ASTM F1970; UPVC FLGD, Y-TYPE,
ASTM D 2467 #150
STRNR PSF9 10.000 12.000 ASTM F1970; UPVC FLGD, POT TYPE,
ASTM D 2467 #150

(Inch) (Inch) STD
VALVES

VLV.BALL 00.500 12.000 ASTM F1970; BODY-UPVC FLGD, 2 piece,

BVF9 ASTM D 2467 SEAT: SS 304 with #150, manual/
UPVC lining ON-OFF operation
VLV.CHECK 00.500 12.000 ASTM F1970; BODY-UPVC FLGD, 2 piece,
LVF9 ASTM D 2467 #150, Ball Check,

5.14 PIPE CLASS : 10

Rating : 150#
Base material : HDPE
Corrosion Allowance( MM) :0
Deign Temperature (° C) : 50
Design Pressure Bar (g) :7
Schedule : 80
SERVICE
EFF- Effluent
NOTES
P&ID.
3. Piping design as per IS4984:1995; PE100.
SPECIAL NOTES

JOINTS
PIPE JOINTS 0.5" & ABOVE Socket Weld/ Flanged
DRAINS 1"
Piping details
VENTS 1"
Piping details
TEMPERATURE 1.5"
CONNECTION
Piping details
PRESSURE 1"
CONNECTION
Piping details


PIPE 00.500 12.000 IS4984:1995; HDPE PE
PE100
FLNG 00.500 12.000 ANSI B-16.5 HDPE BW, #150
FLNG.BLIND 00.500 12.000 ANSI B-16.5 HDPE RF, #150
ELBOW.90 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 2467 MOULDED HDPE LONG RADIUS,
BW, #150
ELBOW.45 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 2467 MOULDED HDPE BW, #150
T.EQUAL 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 2467 MOULDED HDPE BW, #150
T.RED 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 2467 MOULDED HDPE BW, #150
SWAGE CONC 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 2467 MOULDED HDPE BW, #150
SWAGE ECC 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 2467 MOULDED HDPE BW, #150
CAP 00.500 12.000 ASTM D 2467 MOULDED HDPE BW, #150
BOLT STUD 00.500 12.000 ANSI B 18.2.1, BOLT: A193 Gr.B8, HEXAGONAL
ANSI B 18.2.2 NUT: A194 GR.8 HEADED
GASKET 00.500 12.000 ANSI B-16.21 PTFE FULL FACE/
RING, 3 mm
STRNR YSF10 00.500 08.000 MNF'STD PP FLGD, Y-TYPE,
#150
STRNR PSF10 10.000 12.000 MNF'STD PP FLGD, POT TYPE,
#150

(Inch) (Inch) STD
VALVES
VLV.BALL 00.500 12.000 MNF'STD BODY- PP FLGD, 2 piece, #150,
BVF10 SEAT: SS 304 with manual/ ON-OFF
PP lining operation
VLV.CHECK 00.500 12.000 MNF'STD BODY- PP FLGD, 2 piece, #150,
LVF10 Ball Check, P
6.0 Annexures
6.1 IPS-MBD18019-PP-454-40KTPA-DE Piping design specification.

6.2 IPS-MBD18019-PP-453-40KTPA-DE Design Basis Report of Piping.
6.3 IPS-MBD18019-PP-455-40KTPA-DE Piping Fabrication & installation
specification.
6.4 IPS-MBD18019-PP-462-40KTPA-DE Specification Typical Piping details.
6.5 IPS-MBD18019-PP-458-40KTPA- DE Specification for Pipe Support.
*****End of Document*****

Compressor
Appendix 3.3: Special conditions
This shall be discussed & freezed during Bidding Process.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
DO CU ME NT N O. IPS -M B D 18 019 - PC -8 50
Appendix 3.4 –General conditions Of

Purchase
Project Elephant
0 Sept 30,19 Issued For Enquiry PC SS MY

Document Title General Conditions of Purchase Made / App PC/MY
Document No. IPS-MBD18019-PC-850 Rev R0
Index
1.0 General Condition of Purchase .............................................................................................. 4

2.0 Definitions, Interpretation & entire agreement .................................................................. 4
3.0 Authorized Representatives.................................................................................................. 12
4.0 Changes ..................................................................................................................................... 12
5.0 Price and Payment................................................................................................................... 13
6.0 Title and Risk of Damage/Loss ............................................................................................ 15
7.0 Project Insurance ..................................................................................................................... 16
8.0 Supplementary Insurance ..................................................................................................... 16
9.0 Documents and Drawings ..................................................................................................... 18
10.0 Production Programme .......................................................................................................... 21
11.0 Development of Software and Electronic Functions........................................................ 21
12.0 Expediting ................................................................................................................................ 22
13.0 Inspection and testing ............................................................................................................ 23
14.0 Installation, Commissioning and Performance Test ........................................................ 24
15.0 Quality Standards and Audits .............................................................................................. 25
16.0 Interface with other Suppliers and Contractors etc. ......................................................... 27
17.0 Defects Liability Services ...................................................................................................... 28
18.0 Performance Security ............................................................................................................. 29
19.0 Suspension ............................................................................................................................... 30
20.0 Termination for Convenience............................................................................................... 31
21.0 Termination for Default ........................................................................................................ 32
22.0 Term........................................................................................................................................... 33
23.0 Delivery and Liquidated Damages For Delay ................................................................... 34
24.0 Force Majeure .......................................................................................................................... 34
25.0 Sub-Order(s) ............................................................................................................................ 37
26.0 Spare Parts ................................................................................................................................ 38
27.0 After Sales Services ................................................................................................................ 38
28.0 Confidentiality ........................................................................................................................ 38
29.0 Owner’s Rights in Specifications, Plans, Drawings, etc.................................................. 38
30.0 Infringement ............................................................................................................................ 39
31.0 Compliance with Laws and Regulations ............................................................................ 40
32.0 Indemnification and Limitation of Liability ..................................................................... 42
33.0 Consequential Damages ........................................................................................................ 42
34.0 Taxes & Duties (Import Orders)........................................................................................... 43
35.0 Other Warranties ..................................................................................................................... 43
36.0 Governing Law, Dispute Resolution and Jurisdiction .................................................... 44
37.0 Independent Vendor / No Partnership ............................................................................... 45
38.0 Costs and Expenses: ................................................................................................................ 46
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0 Doc 850 - GCP_Model 3 - R0

39.0 [Intentionally left blank] ....................................................................................................... 46

40.0 Language ................................................................................................................................... 46
41.0 Severability .............................................................................................................................. 46
42.0 Prevention of Corruption ...................................................................................................... 46
43.0 Safety and Security ................................................................................................................. 48
44.0 Assignment by Vendor .......................................................................................................... 51
45.0 Assignment by Owner ........................................................................................................... 51
46.0 Audits ........................................................................................................................................ 51
47.0 Survival ..................................................................................................................................... 51
48.0 Non-Waiver .............................................................................................................................. 51
49.0 Owner's Vendor Policy .......................................................................................................... 52
50.0 Notices....................................................................................................................................... 52
51.0 Communication and Reporting ............................................................................................ 53
52.0 Press Releases .......................................................................................................................... 53
53.0 Counter Parts ........................................................................................................................... 54

General Conditions of Purchase
Preamble
This document constitutes the ‘General Conditions of Purchase’ referred to in the Purchase
Order dated [•] (“Purchase Order”) issued by Perstorp Industries India Private Limited (the
“Owner”) to [•] (the “Vendor”) regarding ____________________, and will form an integral
part of the Purchase Order. Unless the context otherwise requires, all capitalized terms used
but not defined in this General Conditions of Purchase shall have the meaning ascribed to
such terms in the Purchase Order, or in the other documents forming part of the Purchase
Order Documents.
1.0 General Condition of Purchase
These General Conditions of Purchase are part of the Purchase Order and Vendor hereby
agrees to supply the Goods upon the terms and conditions contained in the Purchase Order
Documents which shall override and exclude any other conditions proposed by Vendor,
including such conditions on Vendor’s invoices, standard forms and correspondences with
the Owner / Owner’s Representative save in so far as they may have been expressly accepted
in writing as variations by the Owner and included in the Purchase Order Documents.
2.0 Definitions, Interpretation & entire agreement
2.1 In the Purchase Order Documents, unless the context otherwise requires, the capitalized
words and expressions, shall have the meaning as ascribed to them below; certain capitalised
expressions used in the Purchase Order Documents may be defined in the relevant clauses
and unless the context otherwise requires, shall have such meaning wherever such capitalised
expressions are used in the Purchase Order Documents:
2.1.1 “Advance Bank Guarantee” or “ABG” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [5.1.1] of the
Purchase Order;
2.1.2 “Acceptance of Goods” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [14.5] of the General
Conditions of Purchase;
2.1.3 Act of Insolvency:
(a). the Vendor is unable to or has admitted in writing its inability to, pay its debts as and
when the same are due.
(b). the Vendor commits any act of bankruptcy, insolvency or suspends payment to any of its
creditors generally.
(c). any corporate action, legal proceedings or other procedure or step is taken by any Person
in relation to:
i). the suspension of payments, a moratorium of any indebtedness, insolvency,

liquidation, winding-up, dissolution or reorganization (by way of voluntary
arrangement, scheme of arrangement or otherwise) of the Vendor for default under
financial debt or operational debt;
ii). the admission of any application by the National Company Law Tribunal to initiate

corporate insolvency resolution process against the Vendor for default under
financial debt or operational debt;
iii). The passage of a resolution by the members of the Vendor to initiate a voluntary
liquidation process in relation to the Vendor under the Insolvency and Bankruptcy
Code, 2016.
iv). The Vendor convenes a meeting of its creditors or makes or proposes to make any
arrangement with, or any assignment for the benefit of, its creditors on account of
financial stress; and/or
v). the appointment of a liquidator, receiver, administrator or other similar officer in

respect of the Vendor or in respect of substantial assets of the Vendor;
2.1.4 “Affected Party” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [24] of the General Conditions of
Purchase;
2.1.5 “Applicable Law” includes (but is not limited to) all applicable:
(a). statutes, enactments, acts of legislature or parliament, laws, ordinances, rules, local laws,
bye-laws, regulations, permits, licenses, consents, registrations, listing agreements,
notifications, guidelines, circulars or policies;
(b). administrative interpretation, writ, injunction, directions, directives, judgment, arbitral
award, decree, orders or governmental approvals of, or agreements with, any
Governmental Authority / court or recognized stock exchange; and
(c). international treaties, conventions and protocols;
as may be in force from time to time (including upon the jurisdiction in which Works are
to be executed);
2.1.6 “Anti-Corruption Laws” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [42.4] of the General
2.1.7 “Arbitration Act” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [36] of the General Conditions of
Purchase;
2.1.8 “Arbitral Tribunal” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [36] of the General Conditions
of Purchase;
2.1.9 “Dispute Intimation Notice” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [36] of the General
2.1.10 “Change Notice” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [4.1] of the General Conditions of
Purchase;
2.1.11 “Commissioning” means the successful pre-commissioning and commissioning of the Goods in
accordance with the Scope of Supply or as otherwise directed by the Owner / Owner’s
Representative, to determine the satisfactory performance of the Goods and that the Goods are in
all respects attaining the requirements in the Purchase Order Documents (including the
approved Drawings and Documents) and are fit for their intended purpose, in each case as per
the Owner’s confirmation and certification;

2.1.12 “Date of Acceptance of Goods” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [14.5] of the General
2.1.13 “Defects” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [17.2] of the General Conditions of
Purchase;
2.1.14 “Defects Liability Notice” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [17.2] of the General
2.1.15 “Defects Liability Period” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [7] of the Purchase Order;
2.1.16 “Delivery Term” means the terms for the delivery of the Goods or any part of the Goods as set
out in a Purchase Order and the Delivery Schedule and incorporating the relevant provisions of
INCOTERMS to the extent applicable along with the other details for such delivery set out in the
Purchase Order and the Delivery Schedule;
2.1.17 “Designate Person” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [36] of the General Conditions
of Purchase;
2.1.18 “Dispute” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [36] of the General Conditions of
Purchase;
2.1.19 “Dispute Intimation Notice” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [36] of the General
2.1.20 “Drawings and Documents” mean the design, plans (including the inspection and test plans),
reports, records, calculations, drawings, analysis, patterns, specifications, manufacturing and
fabrication methods, lists, database certificates, test results, installation description, as built
drawings, operating and maintenance manuals, information, documents and the other technical
documentation to be supplied by Vendor under the Purchase Order Documents (whether
recorded in writing or on electronic storage media) including the as-built Drawing and
Documents;
2.1.21 “Effective Date” shall have the meaning ascribed to it in the Purchase Order;
2.1.22 “Encumbrance” means any interest or equity of any person (including any right to acquire,
option or right of pre-emption) and any security, mortgage, charge, pledge, lien, assignment,
hypothecation or other priority interest, deferred purchase, non-disposal undertaking
conditional sale, trust, leasing and any other agreement or arrangement whatsoever having the
same effect as security;
2.1.23 “Financial Year” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [46] of the General Conditions of
Purchase;
2.1.24 “Force Majeure” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [24] of the General Conditions of
Purchase;
2.1.25 “Force Majeure Notice” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [24] of the General
2.1.26 “GST” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [3.1] of the Purchase Order;

2.1.27 “Goods” mean all items to be provided by Vendor whether raw materials, processed materials,
supplies, equipment, components, fabricated goods, finished products, spare parts, Drawings
and Documentation, data, related software and other documentation and all Services including
design, delivery, installation services, inspection, testing as applicable and more specifically
described in the Purchase Order Documents. It shall also encompass such terms as products,
items and equipment;
2.1.28 “Governmental Authority” means any governmental, central, state, local or statutory authority,
regulator, ministry, governmental department, agency, commission, board, tribunal, arbitrator/s
or court or other entity authorised to make laws, rules or regulations or pass directions having
jurisdiction, or any state or other subdivision thereof or any municipality, district or other
subdivision thereof having jurisdiction in respect of the subject matter pursuant to Applicable
Laws;
2.1.29 “Gross Negligence” means any act or failure to act (whether sole, joint or concurrent) by any
person which was intended to cause or which was in reckless disregard of or apparent
indifference to, harmful consequences which such person knew, or should have known, would
have harmful consequences on the safety or property of another;
2.1.30 “INCOTERMS” means the International Commercial Terms published in the year of 2010 by the
International Chamber of Commerce;
2.1.31 “Intellectual Property Right” means any patent, patentable claim, copyright (including rights in
computer software), trademark, service marks, trade names, trade dress, trade secret, design,
logos, circuit layout, proprietary information and technology, know-how, expertise, processes,
database rights, rights of authorship, inventor-ship and publicity, inventions, mask work rights,
moral rights, and all applications, registrations and renewals in connection with any of the above
and any other proprietary or intellectual property rights existing in India or world-wide whether
registered or unregistered;
2.1.32 “Losses” means all damages, losses, costs and expenses, claims (including demand, action, cause
of action), liabilities, interests and penalties (whether or not resulting from third party claims)
and amounts paid in settlement, interest, court costs, costs of investigation and reasonable out-
of-pocket expenses, including reasonable fees and expenses paid or payable to attorneys,
accountants, actuaries and other experts and other expenses of litigation or of any claim, default,
or assessment whatsoever. For the avoidance of doubt, the term “Losses” when used with
reference to a breach of the Purchase Order shall be limited to such Losses which naturally arise
in the usual course of things from the relevant breach, or which the Parties knew, when they
entered into the Purchase Order, to be likely to result from the breach of it and shall not include
any remote or indirect losses or damages;
2.1.33 “Maximum Liquidated Damages” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [21.1] of the
General Conditions of Purchase;
2.1.34 “Money Laundering Laws” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [42.4] of the General
2.1.35 “NDU” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [28] of the General Conditions of Purchase;
2.1.36 “Notice of Default” means the notice the Owner / Owner’s Representative issues to the Vendor,
specifying the occurrence and nature of event of default and Owner’s intention to terminate the

Purchase Order, in whole or in part, for such default as detailed under Clause [21] (termination
for default);
2.1.37 “Notice of Termination” means written notice by the Owner to Vendor specifying the extent to
which performance of Vendor’s obligations under the Purchase Order is terminated (wholly or
partially), and the date upon which such termination becomes effective;
2.1.38 “Owner’s Representative” shall, mean IPS – Mehtalia Private Limited engaged by the Owner as
Owner’s Representative during the implementation of the Project;
2.1.39 “Party” means either Perstorp or Vendor, as the context requires;
2.1.40 “Performance Security” shall have the meaning as ascribed to it Clause [6.1] of the Purchase
Order;
2.1.41 “Performance Test” means the test to be carried out for the purpose of demonstrating that the
Goods comply with and fulfill all functional and performance related requirements and that
such Goods are in all respects fit for their intended purpose, in each case as per the Owner’s
confirmation and certification.
2.1.42 “Persons” or “Person” means any natural person, limited or unlimited liability company,
corporation, general partnership, limited partnership, proprietorship, trust, union, association,
court, tribunal, agency, government, ministry, department, commission, self-regulatory
organization, arbitrator, board, or other entity, enterprise, authority, or business organization;
2.1.43 “Plant” shall have the meaning ascribed to it in the Purchase Order;
2.1.44 “Price Break-Down” shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Clause [3.2] of the Purchase Order;
2.1.45 “Project” shall have the meaning ascribed to it in the Purchase Order;
2.1.46 “Project DMS” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [50.5] of the General Conditions of
Purchase;
2.1.47 “Purchase Order” shall mean the written and signed document issued by Owner to Vendor
dated [●], specifying all terms and conditions, Scope of Supply, specifications, services, Drawings
and Documents, data, instructions, schedules, annexure, attachments, and any other documents
and the like that accompany or are incorporated by reference into the Purchase Order and
revisions, modifications or amendments thereof pursuant to which Vendor has agreed to supply
the Goods;
2.1.48 “Purchase Order Documents” shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Clause [1] of the Purchase
Order;
2.1.49 “Quality Manager” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [15.10] of the General
2.1.50 “Rules” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [36] of the General Conditions of Purchase;
2.1.51 “Sanctions Laws and Regulations” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [42.4] of the

2.1.52 “Scope of Supply” shall mean all quantitative, qualitative and functional requirements and
obligations with respect to the supply of the Goods and the work and activities to be performed
by Vendor related to the supply of the Goods by Vendor incorporated as part of the Purchase
Order Documents;
2.1.53 “Settlement Period” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [36] of the General Conditions
of Purchase;
2.1.54 “Site” means land and other places being located at Saykha Industrial Estate in Bharuch, in the
state of Gujarat, India on which the Plant is to be built;
2.1.55 “Sole Arbitrator” shall have the meaning ascribed to in Clause [36] of the General Conditions of
Purchase;
2.1.56 “Special Conditions” means the terms and conditions of purchase of Goods incorporated as part
of the Purchase Order Documents;
2.1.57 “Sub-Vendor” means any Person (of any tier) engaged by the Vendor for supplying parts of
Goods in connection with the Purchase Order, in the manner approved under the General
2.1.58 “Supplementary Insurance/s” shall have the meaning ascribed to it under Clause [8.1] of the
2.1.59 “Term” or “Contract Period” shall have the meaning ascribed to it under Clause [22] of the
2.1.60 “Total Order Value” means the total price payable to Vendor by Perstorp for the supply of
Goods under the Purchase Order Documents, including where applicable, [freight, insurance,]
installation services, and such other services and related costs as may be specified in the
Purchase Order Document;
2.1.61 “Unit Rates” shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Clause [3.2] of the Purchase Order;
2.1.62 “Vendor’s Equipment” means all plant and machinery, materials, consumables, apparatus, tools
and tackles, all other temporary attachments, and equipment to be provided and used by the
Vendor, pursuant to the Purchase Order Documents, in order to carry out obligations under the
Purchase Order Documents for and in connection with the supply of the Goods and installation
thereof at the Site but not forming or intending to form a permanent part of the Goods, unless
the otherwise is stipulated in the terms of the Purchase Order Documents;
2.1.63 “Warranties” means the assurances, guarantees, undertakings and warranties provided by the
Contractor under Clause [17] (Warranties) of the General Conditions of Purchase;
2.1.64 “Working Day” shall mean any day (other than a Saturday, Sunday or a public holiday) on
which commercial banks are open for business in Mumbai and in Gujarat for normal business in
relation to any financial or banking transaction;
2.2 Interpretation:
Unless the context of the Purchase Order Documents otherwise requires:

2.2.1 Approval given by the Owner / Owner’s Representative shall relate only to the specific purpose
for which it was given.
2.2.2 Approval, consent, checking, assistance, inspection or test given or made by the Owner /
Owner’s Representative shall not relieve the Vendor from any obligations under the Purchase
Order Documents.
2.2.3 Words imparting the singular only also include the plural and vice versa where the context
requires and words denoting natural persons shall include partnerships, firms, companies,
corporations, joint ventures, trusts, associations, organizations or other entities.
2.2.4 The words “include” and “including” shall be construed without limitation.
2.2.5 The word “consent” wherever used, shall mean prior written consent.
2.2.6 The Vendor recognizes that time is the essence of these Purchase Order Documents. If at any
time, the period for the performance of a certain obligation is extended in accordance with the
terms of these Purchase Order Documents, or by mutual agreement of the Parties in writing,
such extended time shall also be the essence of these Purchase Order Documents.
2.2.7 Any reference to any agreement/contract / purchase order, deed, instrument, license, code or
other document of any description shall be construed, at the particular time, as a reference to that
agreement/contract / purchase order, deed, instrument, license, code or other document as the
same may be or have been amended, varied, supplemented, modified, suspended or novated.
2.2.8 No failure on the part of any Party to exercise, and no delay in exercising, any right hereunder
shall operate as a waiver thereof, and no single or partial exercise of any such right shall preclude
any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right.
2.2.9 Where the day on which any thing is to be done is not a Working Day, that thing must be done
on or by the immediately occurring next Working Day.
2.2.10 All headings of, and marginal notes, if any to the clauses of the Purchase Order Documents, or
of, and to, the specifications or any other Purchase Order Documents are solely for the purpose
of giving a concise indication and not a summary of the contents thereof and they shall never be
deemed to be part thereof, or be used in the interpretation or construction thereof, of the
Purchase Order Documents.
2.2.11 “written” or “in writing” means hand-written, written, or electronically made and resulting in a
permanent record;
2.2.12 Any reference to any provision of an Act of Parliament or of a state legislature shall be construed,
at the particular time, as including a reference to any modification, extension or re-enactment
thereof, to all instruments, orders or regulations then in force.
2.2.13 In event of a conflict between the requirements under the Safety Manual and requirements
under Applicable Laws, the Vendor shall follow / implement stricter of such requirements.

2.2.14 Reference to “these Purchase Order Documents” or any part thereof or any other agreement or
document or Applicable Law shall be construed as a reference to such agreement/s or document
or Applicable Law as amended, modified or supplemented and in effect from time to time and
shall include a reference to any document which amends, modifies or supplements it.
2.2.15 The Purchase Order Documents are a result of negotiations between the Parties and have been
reviewed by the Parties’ and their respective advisors including counsels. Accordingly, these
Purchase Order Documents shall be deemed to be the product of the Parties, and there shall be
no presumption that any ambiguity should be construed in favour of or against any Party solely
as a result of such Party’s actual or alleged role in the drafting of the Purchase Order Documents.
2.2.16 Materials, equipment, workforce, inspection and test related activities or other activities in
relation to the Scope of Supplies if not specifically defined or elaborated or specifically
mentioned in the Purchase Order Documents, and which have a well-known technical or trade
meaning or process shall be deemed to conform to the internationally recognized standards
associated with such items.
2.2.17 Each reference to the Purchase Order Documents or to any other document shall include a
reference to each permitted variation of or supplement to the Purchase Order Documents and
such other document and as such Purchase Order Documents or to any other document may
have been amended, varied or supplemented from time to time.
2.2.18 If Vendor consists of more than one person, the persons comprising the same shall be jointly and
severally liable for each and every liability and obligation of Vendor under the Purchase Order
Documents.
2.3 Entire Agreement
2.3.1 The Purchase Order Documents and the NDU embodies the entire agreement between the
Owner and the Vendor in relation to the subject matter thereof including the purchase of the
Goods. The Parties shall not be bound by or liable for any and all prior oral or written statement,
Instructions to Bidders and bid submissions, representation, promise or understanding not set
forth in the Purchase Order Documents.
2.3.2 Nothing contained in the proposals, replies, statements, correspondence, discussions or

negotiations prior to the Effective Date of the Purchase Order has any effect on the Purchase
Order Documents unless specifically incorporated thereunder.
2.3.3 No proposed amendments or remarks regarding the terms and conditions of the Purchase Order
made by the Vendor prior to the Effective Date shall have any effect on the Purchase Order
Documents, unless expressly incorporated therein or annexed thereto by written amendment
signed as agreed between Owner and the Vendor.
2.3.4 Nothing contained in acknowledgements or equivalent in the procurement process has any
effect on the Purchase Order Documents unless specifically incorporated in writing in the
2.3.5 No changes, amendments, variations or modifications to the Purchase Order Documents shall be
valid unless confirmed in writing and signed by Owner and the Vendor, or as per the procedure
provided under Clause [4 (Changes)]. Notwithstanding anything contained to the contrary
contained in the Purchase Order Documents, the Safety Manual is subject to changes that can be
made by the Owner / Owner’s Representative in their sole discretion and notified to the Vendor,

and all provisions relating to Safety Manual in the Purchase Order Documents will apply to such
amended Safety Manual.
2.3.6 Vendor acknowledges that it has not been unfairly induced to enter into the Purchase Order,
having negotiated and freely entered into the Purchase Order.
2.3.7 In the case of any proposed change in constitution of the Vendor’s set up or proposed change,
whether direct or indirect, in the majority shareholding / partnership interest or control or
management, partners or directors of the Vendor, it shall forthwith notify the Owner’s
Representative and shall seek the prior written consent of the Owner for effecting such change
which consent shall be provided by the Owner in its sole discretion.
3.0 Authorized Representatives
3.1 All instructions given by the Owner’s Representative vis-à-vis the Vendor in connection with
the Purchase Order Documents shall be deemed to be instructions given by Owner.
3.2 Before performing any work at the Site, the Vendor shall appoint an authorized
representative with full power to act on its behalf vis-à-vis Owner / Owner’s Representative
on all matters related to the Purchase Order Documents including receipt of notices. The
authorized representative shall be present at the Site as long as any work is performed at the
Site by the Vendor
3.3 The respective authorized representatives appointed by the Parties shall remain authorized
unless replaced by either Party giving the other Party not less than 10 Working Days prior
notice of a replacement in writing.
4.0 Changes
4.1 Owner, may at any time, by notice to Vendor direct, in writing, changes, including but not
limited to changes in any one or more of the following: (1) Drawings and Documents; (2)
Scope of Supply (3) Delivery Schedule; (4) method of shipment or packing; (5) place of
delivery; (6) these General Conditions of Purchase and Special Conditions; (7) Codes and
Standards (8) additions to or deletions from quantities ordered (each a “Change Notice”). If
any such change causes an increase or decrease in the cost of, or the time required for
delivery of, any part or parts of the Goods, or affects any of the technical requirements in the
Purchase Order, Vendor shall be entitled to propose an equitable adjustment in the Scope of
Supply, Total Order Value or Delivery Schedule, as applicable and present full reasoning and
facts supporting its proposed adjustment. In particular, price adjustments shall be based on
applicable Unit Rates or Price Break-Down (as set out in the Purchase Order Document titled
‘Price Break-Down’) and changes to Delivery Schedule shall show changes to planned
activities.
4.2 Any claim by Vendor for adjustment under [Clause 4.1] must be asserted within 3 days from
the date of receipt by Vendor of the Change Notice.
4.3 Following the receipt of any Change Notice, and unless otherwise directed by the Owner in
writing, Vendor shall comply with the terms of such Change Notice as directed by Owner
notwithstanding any remaining differences or unsettled aspects in relation to the validity or
interpretation of the Change Notice, or in relation to any required adjustments to the
Purchase Order as a result thereof.

4.4 Upon receipt of proposed adjustments to the Purchase Order from Vendor with full
supporting details, if in the reasonable opinion of Owner an equitable adjustment is required
or deserves to be made, Owner shall determine the appropriate equitable adjustment to the
Scope of Supply, Total Order Value and Deliver Schedule and the Purchase Order Documents
shall be accordingly modified in writing and executed by authorized representatives of both
Owner and Vendor.
4.5 If a Change Notice includes review and comment by Owner on Vendor’s technical
documents, then Owner may require Vendor to make adjustments to such technical
documents. In the event that such required adjustments mean any change to the Scope of
Supply, Vendor shall assert any claims for adjustment to the Purchase Order, which would
result from implementation of Owner’s comments within five (5) Business Days from the date
of Vendor’s receipt of such comments. No adjustment of any type will be made hereunder
unless Owner confirms the change in writing or issues an amendment to the Purchase Order.
5.0 Price and Payment
5.1 Except as expressly provided otherwise in the Purchase Order, the prices specified in the
Purchase Order specifically the Total Order Value are fixed and firm and not subject to
escalation or price adjustment and shall include all resources, charges, cost, expenses, taxes,
duties and packing of the Goods and their carriage to, and unloading at the place of delivery
specified in the Purchase Order in accordance with the Delivery Terms and fulfilling all
requirements in the Scope of Supply and in all respects making the Goods fit for its intended
purpose.
5.2 Owner shall not be liable to make any further payments to the Vendor or any third party
whatsoever over and above Total Order Value in connection with the purchase or use of the
Goods, including for any license fees, royalties, levies or the like for use of the Intellectual
Property Rights embodied in or utilised with the Goods.
5.3 The Vendor’s invoice shall be paid according to terms of payment stated in Purchase Order.
In the absence of any specific payment terms in the Purchase Order, payment is made upon
Acceptance of Goods. The invoices shall include all information required for showing the
right to payment and accompanied by such supporting documents as may be so specified in
the Purchase Order or otherwise required for justifying payment. Vendor shall be paid as
stated in the Purchase Order, in thirty (30) days after receipt of a correct invoice. If invoices
have to be returned for correction the time of payment will be computed from date of receipt
by Owner of the correct invoice. If any advance payment is agreed by Owner, this will only
be made after receipt of an advanced bank guarantee in the manner provided in the Purchase
Order
5.4 Payment may, however, be withheld or portions thereof may be deducted if in Owner’s
reasonable opinion: (a) proper set-off in favour of Owner in other transactions are asserted,
or (b) Vendor is not performing work in accordance with the provisions of the Purchase
Order as a result of which Owner has requested in writing assurances from Vendor that the
Goods will be delivered in accordance with the Purchase Order and Vendor has failed to
provide adequate assurances within seven (7) days of Owner’s written request. Owner
reserves the right to make payments due under the Purchase Order directly to Sub-Vendor(s)
whenever Owner has reason to believe Vendor has not paid or is likely not to pay such Sub-
Vendors amounts due to them on a timely basis.

5.5 Final payment is conditional upon the fulfilment of Vendor’s obligations to achieve
Acceptance of Goods and provide all Drawings and Documents. Invoices shall not be
processed for payment until all such obligations are fulfilled. Owner may elect to pay Vendor
through Owner’s electronic disbursement system (EDS). Vendor shall advise Owner in
writing within thirty (30) days prior to due date of first invoice of the bank and account
number to which EDS payments may be made to Vendor.
5.6 Vendor shall maintain at all times, in a reasonable level of detail and in the format reasonably
directed by Owner, all cost records and accounts relating to the Purchase Order and shall
retain such cost records and accounts for a minimum of thirty-six (36) months after the end of
the Financial Year in which all Vendor’s obligations under the Purchase Order have been
performed including in connection with the Defect Liability Period. The Owner may require
the Vendor to provide it with all such records, and the Vendor shall do so promptly.
5.7 Owner shall have the right to examine, with advance notification, such records and accounts
for the limited purpose of verifying requests for payment or for evaluating the reasonableness
of proposed adjustment to the Total Order Value.
5.8 Subject to the Owner’s other remedies in the Purchase Order Documents, Owner reserves the
right to recover or retain 5 (five) per cent of the Total Order Value less taxes and duties from
any payment(s) due to Vendor, if the supply of spare parts (wherever included in the
Purchase Order) is not completed along with the supply of the main Goods. Owner also
reserves the right to consider the entire supply as undelivered and levy liquidated damages
as per Clause 8 of the Purchase Order and Clause [●](Delay and Liquidated Damages) hereunder
if the Goods cannot be repaired or put into use because of absence of spare parts which were
supposed to be supplied along with the main Goods as per the Purchase Order and the
Delivery Schedule.
5.9 Vendor shall promptly pay all reasonable claims of Sub-Vendors. Owner may at any time,
require Vendor to submit satisfactory evidence of payment and releases of all such claims. If
Vendor fails to submit such evidence, Owner may, at its sole discretion:
5.9.1 Withhold the amount of such claim from any payment otherwise due to be made by Owner
under the Purchase Order unless and until Vendor has furnished such evidence of payment; and
5.9.2 Make direct payment after informing Vendor to the relevant Sub-Vendor of the amount claimed
and deduct the amount of such direct payment from any amount otherwise owed by Owner to
Vendor or, if no amount is owed by Owner to Vendor, recover the amount of such direct
payment from Vendor as a debt immediately due and payable.
5.10 Vendor shall protect, defend, indemnify and hold Owner / Owner’s Representative harmless
from and against any loss, cost, damage, claim, suit or proceeding (including attorneys’ fees)
on a full indemnity basis arising from a failure of Vendor to properly pay and compensate
Sub-Vendors.
5.11 In order to assure Owner of the prompt and unrestricted use of the Plant, Vendor agrees to
waive any and all Encumbrances over the Goods which it might otherwise assert in the
resolution of disputes arising out of the performance or non-performance of the Purchase
Order. This waiver is not intended to be, nor will it be construed to be, a limitation of any of
Vendor’s other rights under the Purchase Order or its other legal remedies. Vendor further
agrees to incorporate the substance of this provision into all of its agreements with Sub-
Vendors so that all Sub-Vendors shall similarly waive any and all Encumbrances against the

Goods which the Sub-Vendors might otherwise assert in the resolution of disputes with
Vendor or otherwise.
5.12 The Owner may set-off any amount which it owes to the Vendor by way of debt (whether
actual or contingent) pursuant to the Purchase Order, pursuant to any other contractual or
other arrangement, whatsoever (including any purchase order), in any currency and in any
jurisdiction, against any amount, which the Vendor may be liable to pay to the Owner
pursuant to the Purchase Order. For the purpose of such set-off, Owner may convert any such
amount owed by Vendor into any currency in which the obligation of Owner is to be paid. If
any obligation of Vendor is unliquidated or otherwise unascertained, Owner may set-off an
amount estimated by it in good faith on account of such obligation without prejudice to the
obligation of Vendor to pay or account for any shortfall.
5.13 The Vendor shall retain all employer’s / contractor’s duties towards its employees,
workmen, labour, contract labour etc. including the payment of salaries, fees etc. and any and
all contributions or taxes for social security or towards other employee/ labour welfare
funds/ provident fund, employee state insurance etc. or old age retirements benefits,
gratuity, pensions, annuities as well as labour, wage or taxes now or hereinafter imposed by
Applicable Laws, or by any Government Authorities, and Vendor shall be responsible for any
personal injuries or damages to itself or to its Sub-Vendors and each of their respective
employees/staff/workmen/ labour incurred or caused while carrying out any work at the
Site or any activities pursuant to the Purchase Order . In the event of any injury or death in
connection with the Purchase Order (including at the Site), Owner shall have the right, in its
sole discretion, according to explicit terms to withhold an amount reflecting the expected
right of compensation from any payment due to the Vendor until the matter is settled in
relation to the suffering individual or his/her family. Vendor shall keep records of all duties
to be performed in its role as an employer / contractor and submit such records to the
relevant authorities pursuant to Applicable Law and established practices.
6.0 Title and Risk of Damage/Loss
6.1 Except as otherwise provided herein, the Goods or relevant part thereof to be furnished and
supplied by the Vendor hereunder shall become the property of the Owner when the first of
the following events occurs:
6.1.1 The Goods or part thereof are first identifiable as being appropriated to the Purchase Order;
6.1.2 When the Owner pays in full or in part for the Goods or any part thereof in accordance with the
terms of the Purchase Order.
6.1.3 When the Goods or part thereof are delivered to Owner as per the Delivery Term.
6.2 Notwithstanding the foregoing, Vendor shall be responsible for the care of, and shall bear any
and all risk of loss or damage to the Goods until completed delivery in accordance with the
applicable Delivery Term. Upon completed delivery, risk of loss or damage shall pass to
Owner; provided however, that any loss or damage to the Goods appearing after completed
delivery and resulting from Vendor’s non-conforming packaging, improper caretaking,
crating or handling shall be borne by the Vendor. Further, the Vendor also assumes
responsibility for caretaking of the Goods while performing the installation of the Goods and
to the extent participating in the commissioning and performance testing of the Goods.

6.3 Passing of title and risk for loss or damage to the Goods shall not in any way impair the
Vendor’s duty to complete all tasks related to the Goods and Owner’s right to withhold
Acceptance of Goods until all those tasks have been properly fulfilled (including the Owner
having the right to withhold payments to the Vendor for improper accomplishment of a
Milestone).
7.0 Project Insurance
Project Insurance to be arranged by Owner [Note: Introduction of the Project Insurance

Policy together with procedural rules associated therewith will be inserted here before
Contract execution]
8.0 Supplementary Insurance
8.1 Vendor to arrange, obtain, maintain and pay for the following supplementary insurances
(“Supplementary Insurances”):
8.1.1 Vendor’s Equipment: The Vendor shall take and maintain (and shall require all Sub-Vendors to
take and maintain) full insurance cover, at its own cost, against loss or damage to Vendor’s
Equipment;
8.1.2 Transit Insurance ( Not Applicable ) : The Vendor shall take and maintain (and shall require all
Sub-Vendors to take and maintain) full insurance cover, at its own cost, against loss or damage
connected with transportation, delivery to, and to, and unloading at Site for all items to be
transported by the Vendor to the Site (including the Goods (unless transport thereof is arranged
by Owner), Vendor’s Equipment, materials, articles, and consumables and other resources in
accordance with the requirements in the Scope of Supply and elsewhere in the Purchase Order
Documents). The risks that are to be covered under the insurance shall include, but not be
limited to the loss or damage in handling, transit, theft, pilferage, riot, civil commotion, weather
conditions, accidents of all kinds, fire, war risk etc.; the Vendor to have Transit Insurance that
cover at least the replacement value of the Goods with the Institute Cargo Clauses (A), ICC(A)
8.1.3 Motor Vehicle Third Party and Passenger Liability: The Vendor shall take and maintain, at its
own cost and shall require all Sub-Vendors to take and maintain, motor vehicle third party and
passenger liability insurance in respect of death of, or injury to person and/or damage to
property in respect of all motor vehicles owned or hired by the Vendor or Sub-Vendor,
respectively, and used in connection with the Works whether on or off the Site.
8.1.4 Workmen’s Compensation Insurance: The Vendor shall take and maintain, and shall require all
Sub-Vendors to take and maintain, at its and their respective costs, Workmen’s Compensation
Insurance covering all personnel and workmen of the Vendor and the Sub-Vendors involved in
the Scope Of Supply (including the personnel and workmen to be present on the Site),
respectively, for any liability that may accrue as a result of the Workmen’s Compensation Act,
1923 and the rules made thereunder and any other applicable law on workmen’s compensation;
for bodily injury caused by accident or disease (or as aggravated by the conditions of
employment), death, permanent total or partial disablement, or temporary disablement
sustained by personnel of the Vendor or Sub-Vendors arising out of or in the course of his/her
employment. The limit of liability under the Workmen’s Compensation Insurance shall not be
less than the minimum amount required by Applicable Law.
8.1.5 Employer’s liability Insurance: The Vendor shall take and maintain, and shall require all Sub-
Vendors to take and maintain, at its and their respective costs, Employer’s liability insurance

covering all personnel and workmen of the Vendor and the Sub-Vendors involved in the Scope
of Supply (including the personnel and workmen to be present on the Site), respectively, for any
liability that may accrue as a result of injury, death or disease sustained by such personnel and
workmen arising out of or in the course of his/her employment and when that liability is not
adequately covered by workmen’s compensation.
8.1.6 Third Party Liability Insurance: The Vendor shall take and maintain, and shall require all Sub-
Vendors to take and maintain, at its and their respective costs, Third Party Liability Insurance
policy covering liability towards paying for claims for injury sustained or death suffered by third
parties at the Site or damage to third parties’ property at the Site due to any act or omission on
the part of the Vendor or its Sub-Vendor, agents, personnel, workmen, and representatives.
8.2 Other Terms Associated with Supplementary Insurances
8.2.1 If the Vendor or the Sub-Vendor engaged by it shall fail to effect and keep in force the insurances
referred to in Clause [8.1] (Supplementary Insurances) above then, and in such case Owner may
effect and keep in force any such insurance and pay such premium or premiums as may be
necessary for the purpose and from time to time deduct the amount so paid by Owner as
aforesaid from any monies due or which may become due to the Vendor or recover the same as a
debt due from the Vendor. The Vendor shall not dispute the extent and validity of such
payments made.
8.2.2 The Vendor shall provide to Owner/ Owner’s Representatives with a copy of all insurance
policies, certificates and documents taken out by it and its Sub-Vendors (including pursuant to
any renewal or revalidation or obtaining a new policy, as the case may be) immediately upon the
Vendor / its Sub-Vendor having taken such insurance coverage, and in any event prior to
undertaking any activities under the Purchase Order Documents.
8.2.3 The Vendor shall also inform Owner/ Owner’s Representatives at least 60 days in advance
regarding the expiry, cancellation and/or changes in any of such insurance policies obtained by
the Vendor and ensure revalidation/renewal / obtaining a new policy etc., as may be necessary
and as required under Clause [8.1] (Supplementary Insurances) above, well in time to ensure
constant insurance coverage (in each such renewal / revalidation / new policy will be for the
insurance coverage and policies specified above in Clause [8.1] (Supplementary Insurances).
8.2.4 The Supplementary Insurances shall be valid from prior to undertaking any activities under the
Purchase Order Documents, and at the minimum, until the completed delivery as per the
Delivery Schedule and completion of any work (including the installation services) at the Site.
The Vendor shall (and shall cause its Sub-Vendors’ to) keep the Supplementary Insurances’
policies maintained and renewed from time to time even for the extended period of Purchase
Order, if any, at the Vendor’s cost (or the Sub-Vendor’s cost, as the case may be) until the expiry
of the Defect Liability Period plus for a period of three months following the expiry of the
Defects Liability Period or until all the Defects notified to the Vendor during the Defects Liability
Period and within three months following the expiry of the Defects Liability Period have been
replaced, repaired or otherwise made good by the Vendor to the complete satisfaction of the
Owner / Owner’s Representative, whichever is later. If at any time, the policy so obtained and
kept with Owner expires; it shall be lawful for Owner to withhold payments until the duly
renewed policy is lodged with the Owner.
8.2.5 The insured amounts, form, terms and conditions and deductibles (which will be borne by the
Vendor and the Sub-Vendor, as the case may be) of such Supplementary Insurances, shall

comply with Indian standards used by professional vendors under similar circumstances and
work requirement as under the Purchase Order.
8.2.6 The Vendor must not do or pursue any act or permit, or suffer any circumstances by which any
Supplementary Insurance policy or the cover under such policy, may at any time become void or
voidable, and the Vendor must at all times and at its own expense comply with the conditions of
the Supplementary Insurance policies and the requirements of the insurers so as to prevent the
invalidation of such insurance policies or prejudice of the rights of any of the insured persons
there under.
8.2.7 All the Supplementary Insurance policies shall name Owner and their respective assignees, the
Owner’s Representatives as additional insured. The Vendor shall not cancel or make any
material modification of the insurance policies without the prior consent of Owner.
8.2.8 All insurer’s rights of subrogation against Owner and Owner’s Representatives as additional
insured persons or otherwise, for losses or claims arising out of the performance of the Purchase
Order Documents shall be waived under the insurance policies.
8.2.9 The Vendor shall undertake (and shall cause the Sub-Vendors to undertake) the required process
and take all necessary action for submission of claims to the insurance company and follow
through with the insurance company, on a best efforts basis to ensure that the insurance
company compensates for all losses as provided for in the insurance policies.
8.2.10 The required coverage referred to and set forth herein shall in no way affect the Vendor’s liability
and obligations with respect to the performance of the Scope of Supply or any other obligations
under the Purchase Order Documents. It is further clarified that the Vendor or its Sub-Vendor’s
failure to maintain adequate insurance as required under the Purchase Order Documents or
despite maintaining such insurance cover as required under the Purchase Order Documents,
shall not relieve the Vendor of any of its responsibilities, liabilities and obligations under the
Purchase Order.
8.2.11 Notwithstanding anything contained to the contrary in this Purchase Order, delay in settlement
or non-settlement or partial settlement of any insurance claim by the insurer shall, not entitle the
Vendor to seek any extension of time under the Purchase Order Documents, and
notwithstanding the said delay in settlement or non-settlement or partial settlement of the said
claims, the Vendor shall re-instate, repair or replace any damages or destruction or make good
the loss, fully and completely, on a priority basis and the Vendor shall ensure that the Goods are
supplied, as scheduled under the Purchase Order Documents.
8.2.12 All insurance claims shall be preferred and conducted under notice and information to Owner
and Owner’s Representatives .
8.2.13 The Vendor shall ensure that the insurance policies have the necessary non-vitiation clause and
shall ensure that any error or action on the part of the Vendor (or the Sub-Vendor) shall not
vitiate the claim of Owner or of any assignee of Owner and Owner’s Representatives.
9.0 Documents and Drawings
9.1 Vendor shall take the full responsibility for the design of the Goods, the ultimate fitness to
purpose of the Goods as per the Scope of Supply and Drawings and Documents submitted /
prepared / approved in accordance with the terms of the Purchase Order Documents
(including the Scope of Supply). The Vendor is responsible for supplying everything

necessary for attaining the proper end-result intended from the Goods as per the
requirements under the Scope of Supply with the exception of such inter-related equipment,
services and conditions that are explicitly falling outside its Scope of Supply. The Vendor is
responsible to ascertain the conditions for proper functionality of the end-result intended
from the Goods as per the requirements under the Scope of Supply and that the end-result’s
compliance with all requirements under the Scope of Supply having been met. For this
purpose, the Vendor must check that all inter-related equipment, services and conditions
supplied/ to be supplied by the Owner or other vendors / contractors / service providers are
made available and are fully compatible with the Vendor’s work including the intended end-
result and the Vendor must initiate the necessary process of communication for removing any
uncertainty in this regard early in the design phase. The Vendor shall be responsible for the
correct positioning of the Goods and all parts thereof at the designated place, and shall rectify
any error in the positions, levels, dimensions or alignment of the Goods and all parts thereof.
9.2 No review, approval or other communication by the Owner, the Owner’s Representatives, or
other vendors / contractors / service providers shall relieve the Vendor of its responsibility
for the Goods, the design of the Goods, its responsibility for the ultimate fitness of Goods to
purpose, its responsibility for Drawings and Documents as per the requirements of the
Purchase Order Documents (including the Scope of Supply), the proper end-result intended
from the Goods as per the requirements under the Scope of Supply or the compatibility of the
Goods with all inter-related equipment, services and conditions supplied / to be supplied by
the Owner or other vendors / contractors / service providers. The Vendor’s only possibility
to be discharged from its responsibility for any failure related to the intended end-result as
above is to demonstrate that the requirements of the Vendor which were clearly and timely
communicated in writing by the Vendor to the Owner’s Representative and agreed between
such parties on inter-related equipment, services or conditions explicitly supplied by others
were non-compliant with the Vendor’s work despite the Vendor having notified in writing
regarding such non-compliance and in such case how and to what extent such non-
compliance has affected the intended end-result of its Scope of Supply.
9.3 The Vendor shall prepare and submit to the Owner’s Representative for prior written
approval within the timelines provided in the Delivery Schedule, such Drawing and
Documents as may be called for therein, and in the numbers required, and otherwise as
Owner’s Representative reasonably may require for the purpose of fulfilling all of the
obligations of the Vendor under the Purchase Order Documents and the reporting obligations
/ making applications to the Governmental Authorities. All of the Drawing and Documents
shall be in such details as shall constitute an adequate basis for processing by the Owner and
the Owner’s Representative for their intended purpose.
9.4 The submission of Vendor’s Drawing and Documents shall follow an established
documentation plan pursuant to the requirements in the Scope of Supply, and shall be
submitted for the prior approval of the Owner / Owner’s Representative within the time
period set out under the Scope of Supply and the Delivery Schedule, as may be applicable.
The content and quality of each submission shall enable a methodical review of the subject
matter in its full context and shall follow the requirements specified in the Scope of Supply.
For the purpose of facilitating the approval procedure the Vendor is free to seek guidance
from Owner / Owner’s Representative on the basis of draft documents provided that any
comments given by the Owner / Owner’s Representative on such draft documents will by no
way restrict or prejudice the Owner’s rights under the Purchaser Order Documents or limit /
relieve the Vendor of its responsibility under the Purchase Order Documents, when the
Drawing and Documents are submitted for review. Following the review by the Owner /
Owner’s Representative of the Drawing and Documents, the Vendor shall to the extent

required arrange for the approval of the concerned Drawing and Documents, pursuant to the
applicable inspection and test plans, by an accredited inspection body according to a
procedure to be arranged by the Vendor.
9.5 Submission of the Drawings and Documents by the Vendor shall follow a logical and review
friendly mode. Subject to the Vendor’s compliance with the requirements on each submission
of Drawings and Documents, the Owner / Owner’s Representative shall within 21 days of
receipt convey one of the following positions:
9.5.1 Approved. Work may proceed.

9.5.2 Revise and resubmit. Work may proceed subject to incorporation of changes indicated.
9.5.3 Revise and resubmit. Work may not proceed.
9.5.4 Review not required. Work may proceed.
In the event, the Owner / Owner’s Representative would fail to convey its position within the
prescribed period of time specified above, the subject submission shall be deemed approved
by the Owner as set out in Clause 9.5.1 above (Approved).
The Vendor´s submissions which fall under the category of positions set out in under Clause
9.5.2 or 9.5.3 above (Revise and Resubmit), shall be resubmitted not later than fourteen (14)
days after the date of communication by the Owner’s/ Owner’s Representative’s position;
such revised Drawings and Documents must include revision numbers (letters) with a
description of the change, and the areas of changes shall be highlighted and identified with
the revision number (letter).
9.6 The Drawings and Documents approved by the Owner as provided above shall not be
departed from by the Vendor. Any approval, review or other communication by the Owner /
Owner’s Representative in the manner provided in this Clause 9 (Drawings and Documents)
will not relieve the Vendor from the full compliance with its obligations under the Purchase
Order Documents including its responsibility for the end-result intended from the Goods as
per the requirements under the Scope of Supply; review, the approval and/or permission to
proceed by the Owner / Owner’s Representative does not constitute final acceptance or
approval of design details, Drawings and Documents, calculations, analyses, methods,
certificates or materials developed or selected by the Vendor. The Owner / Owner’s
Representative has the right to subsequently reject such approved Vendor’s Drawings and
Documents and any work based on those if non-compliance in relation to any requirements
in the Purchase Order Documents is detected in the course of further implementing the Scope
of Supply or any other obligation under the Purchase Order Documents.
9.7 In the event of any inconsistency, inaccuracy or ambiguity in the requirements set out in the
Scope of Supply, or if, in the reasonable professional opinion of the Vendor, any detail thereof
requires modification; Vendor shall notify the Owner’s Representatives immediately in
writing and obtain its instructions before proceeding with the work in question, which it shall
perform in compliance with such instructions.
9.8 The Vendor shall promptly correct at its cost, any error, discrepancy or omission in any
Drawings and Documents. If Vendor neglects or refuses to make any such correction, Owner
may, without prejudice to any other of its rights, and after giving notice to the Vendor of its
intention to do so, proceed to make the correction itself, or Owner may employ another party
to do so, in each case at the cost and risk of the Vendor, and to recover the cost thereof from
Vendor, and the Vendor shall continue to be responsible for such corrected Drawings and
Documents. Owner shall not be obliged to accept from Vendor any Drawings and Documents

corrected by Vendor under this Clause after the date of such notice. Owner shall not be
obliged to make any payment for or associated with such incorrect Drawings and
Documents.
9.9 Vendor shall reimburse to Owner any costs for correcting measures, which Owner may have
incurred as a result of on any incorrect drawing.
9.10 Vendor shall furnish all Drawings and Documents as stated in the Purchase Order
Documents or as otherwise required by Vendor to perform its responsibilities under the
Purchase Order Documents. Such Drawings and Documents shall be in sufficient detail to
show that the Goods to be manufactured and supplied and services to be performed under
the Purchase Order Documents complies with the Scope of Supplies and the other
requirements set forth in the Purchase Order. Vendor will maintain and provide all of the
Drawings and Documents produced in connection with the manufacture and supply of the
Goods, and services to be performed under the Purchase Order (including the Drawings and
Documents) and any other documents / records that may be required by the Owner (a) to
meet and comply with any Applicable Laws; or (b) for operation and maintenance of the
Goods. Vendor shall be responsible for any loss arising out of or relating to the negligent act
or omission of Vendor, or its employees or its Sub-Vendors in failing to maintain proper
records and documentation. Vendor shall reimburse Owner for any such loss, at the
replacement cost applicable thereto. Any liability accruing due to wrong documentation shall
also be borne by the Vendor.
9.11 Vendor agrees to provide required number of set of all Drawings and Documents, both in
paper and electronic media as specified in the Purchase Order Documents.
9.12 As a pre-condition to Acceptance of the Goods, the Vendor shall supply the final as-built
Drawings and Documents including any associated certificates and reports by the accredited
inspection body.
10.0 Production Programme
Vendor shall within fourteen (14) Business Days from Effective Date, or as otherwise stated in
the Purchase Order, submit to Owner a production program stating start, duration and finish
of engineering, issue of Drawings and Documents and other documentation, procurement of
raw materials, manufacturing, fabrication, testing, inspection, delivery and installation
services in accordance with the Delivery Schedule. The Vendor shall issue revisions to its
program without delay to reflect Owner’s/ Owner’s Representative’s notification of start of
installation and timing of installation and commissioning services or any change(s) agreed by
Owner resulting from Change Orders. Vendor shall submit progress reports every fortnight
to the Owner’s Representative’s.
11.0 Development of Software and Electronic Functions
11.1 Without compromising the attainment of all Owner’s requirements, the Vendor shall to the
extent feasible use standardized solutions in terms of software and electronic functions.
Standardized solution shall be fully described to the Owner/ Owner’s Representative’s with
details about developer, previous use, extent and method of updating, availability of source
code, etc.
11.2 In case the Vendor needs to develop bespoke solutions with respect to software and/or
electronic functions in order to meet Owner’s requirements, it shall deliver a prior written

explanation why this is necessary and describe the technical and financial consequences if a
standardized solution instead would be used. It is then up to Owner to decide which
alternative should apply.
11.3 If Owner decides that the bespoke solution should apply, the Vendor shall within three
weeks submit to Owner for its approval a description of the bespoke solution to be developed
together with a plan describing how the solution will be developed in a transparent,
methodical and fully controlled process. The plan should give full comfort that possible
errors and/or deficiencies are detected early and that they are always possible to trace and
identify the origin to the problem. There should be distinct and logical steps defined in the
development plan so that possible errors or deficiencies are detected before the development
moves into the next step. Upon completion of each step, the Vendor will prepare a report
describing the development work performed and how the result has been properly verified
following a state-of-the-art testing program.
11.4 In the event that the Owner at any stage wishes to have any further clarification of the
development work made or any part of the testing repeated or further tests to be performed,
the Vendor shall act accordingly without delay. The extra costs incurred by the Vendor in
complying with Owner’s request will be compensated unless it is shown that the
development work did not follow the description given or any errors or deficiencies are
found.
11.5 Owner shall be given unrestricted, royalty-free and perpetual rights to use all software and
electronic functions including all future adjustments thereto for the purpose of operating,
maintaining and upgrading the Plant, irrespective whether the software and/or electronic
functions are based on standardized or bespoke solutions.
12.0 Expediting
12.1 Vendor shall be solely responsible for delivery in accordance with the requirements of the
Purchase Order Documents and for expediting all matters relating to the Purchase Order
Documents and sub-orders with Sub-Vendors.
12.2 Without prejudice to any rights of Owner, Vendor shall notify Owner of any actual or
anticipated delays in delivering any part of the Goods immediately upon becoming aware of
the same. Such notice shall include all relevant information concerning the estimated period
of delay and the cause(s) and corrective action(s) being taken or to be taken by Vendor.
Vendor shall also by way of notice give Owner such information within a reasonable time
following Owner’s written demand thereof (and in any event, no later than two (2) days after
such demand); in the event that Owner anticipates or becomes aware of any such delay.
12.3 Slippage in Vendor’s schedule shall be deemed to be reasonable grounds for Owner to
demand in writing that Vendor provide adequate assurances that Vendor shall correct such
slippage and deliver in accordance with the Delivery Schedule. If Vendor fails to provide
such adequate assurances in writing within seven (7) days of Owner’s written request, Owner
may suspend the payment of any invoice of Vendor until assurances have been given.
12.4 If Owner considers that corrective actions being taken by Vendor are insufficient or, if within
a reasonable period as determined by Owner, Vendor does not improve its performance to
meet stipulated delivery requirements in the Purchase Order, Owner may require Vendor to
make changes or modifications to its manufacturing or delivery operations or require specific
additional measures such as an increase in Vendor’s management, staff and work forces,

overtime operations, additional days of work per week or the like. Vendor shall not be
entitled to any increase in the price for Vendor’s efforts arising from any of the
aforementioned measures undertaken by it.
13.0 Inspection and testing
13.1 Vendor shall carry out all examinations and tests and provide all information and
certification pursuant to such examinations and tests, in accordance with the inspection and
test plans approved as part of the Drawings and Documents, for the purpose of showing
that the Goods are in all respects compliant with all requirements in the Purchase Order
Documents. The inspection and test plan will need to be submitted by the Vendor to the
Owner’s Representative within [30] days from the Effective Date for the latter’s written
approval (and will specify third party laboratory as require by the Owner’s Representative).
Without limitation inspection and test plans shall describe the site acceptance test program
and the factory acceptance test program.
13.2 Owner /Owner’s Representative (including through a nominee) reserves the right to attend
and witness all examinations and tests of Goods and at its discretion, to carry out its own
examination, testing and inspection of Goods at all reasonable times during the execution of
Purchase Order. Vendor shall give Owner / Owner’s Representative at least five (5) Working
Days’ notice in writing of Goods being available for such examination, testing and inspection
including the address at which such examination, testing and inspection is to take place.
Owner / Owner’s Representative reserves the right to carry out its own examination, testing
and inspection on receipt of Goods.
13.3 Vendor shall provide to Owner / Owner’s Representative without charge, examination,
testing and inspection personnel, and all reasonable and necessary equipment, supplies and
facilities to enable their tasks to be carried out.
13.4 Goods, which are required to be painted before despatch, shall be in an unpainted condition
for examination, testing and inspection and any approval stamp mark shall be left unpainted,
or if not practicable, the mark shall be encircled with paint specified by Owner/ Owner’s
Representative, for easy identification.
13.5 The attendance of Owner/ Owner’s Representative at examination and testing performed by
Vendor and the performance of examination, testing and/or inspection by Owner / Owner’s
Representative shall not relieve Vendor of any obligations, liabilities, warranties and
guarantees under the Purchase Order Documents.
13.6 The Owner reserves the right to nominate Owner’s Representative /authorities/ third party
inspection agencies to examine, test and inspect on its behalf and Vendor shall treat these
nominees as if they were Owner’s own examination, testing and inspection personnel.
13.7 Any inspection, checking, approval or acceptance given on behalf of the Owner/ Owner’s
Representative or their attendance of testing / inspection, or failure by Owner / Owner’s
Representative to inspect or witness tests shall not relieve the Vendor of any of its obligations
or liabilities under the Purchase Order Documents.

13.8 All examination, testing and inspection pursuant to the inspection and test plan shall be
carried out at the sole cost and expense of the Vendor. The Owner will take all its own costs
(working hours, tickets, accommodation, transport etc.) related to inspections and tests if
nothing else is explicitly agreed in the Purchase Order Documents.
14.0 Installation, Commissioning and Performance Test
14.1 In the event the Vendor or his Sub-Vendors are responsible for or are to assist with
installation or Commissioning or the supervision of erection or Commissioning of the Goods
on Site, the Vendor shall make available skilful supervisors and workmen in adequate
number in order to ensure that its activities comply with the Delivery Schedule and the
Owner / Owner’s Representative instructions with respect to the timing of installation and
commissioning services at the Site. The responsibilities of the Vendor in relation to the
installation services, Commissioning, Performance Tests and the start-up services are more
particularly detailed in the Scope of Supply.
14.2 All the Applicable Law regarding safety at the Site and compliances under the Safety Manual
shall be fulfilled by the Vendor/Sub-Vendor / and each of their respective
employees/staff/workmen/ labour.
14.3 After successful completion of Commissioning, the Performance Test will be carried out by
the by the Owner / Owner’s Representative and the Goods will be tested in production for a
duration of [●].
14.4 The Owner / Owner’s Representative will inform the Vendor in writing not later than two
weeks before the Performance Test, and keep the Vendor continuously informed about the
result of the testing. The Vendor has the right to supervise the test to the extent the Vendor
may require.
14.5 Acceptance of Goods: The Owner will only accept the Goods, and that the obligations of the
Vendor as contained in the Purchase Order Documents will have been satisfied (save and
except for Defect Liability Services) only upon the occurrence of successful completion of
Commissioning, successful completion of the Performance Test, and all the approved
Drawings and Documents having been submitted to the Owner, in each case as per the
Owner’s confirmation and certification in writing (all of these items are cumulatively referred
to as “Acceptance of Goods”), the last of such certification in writing from the Owner will be
the “Date of Acceptance of Goods” for the purposes of the Purchase Order Documents.
14.6 If the Goods (in whole or in part) should not attain all the functional requirements and
performance parameters set out in the Purchase Order Documents during the Performance
Test, Owner / Owner’s Representative will inform the Vendor of this fact in writing. The
Vendor shall without delay and within a period of [●] such notification from the Owner /
Owner’s Representative remedy any deficiency in order to ensure that the Goods complies
with all the requirements and performance parameters as set out in the Purchase Order
Documents. Post this a new Performance Test shall be carried out. If the Goods have still not
fulfilled the requirements, Owner in its sole discretion shall either:

14.6.1 revoke the purchase of the non-compliant Goods , in which case the Vendor is to repay such
portion of the Total Order Value already paid for the non-compliant Goods and compensate
Owner for costs and expenses associated with engineering, installation and dismounting of the
equipment, and re-ordering and installation of such non-compliant Goods, if applicable, from
another Vendor;
14.6.2 keep the non-compliant Goods with a price reduction from the Total Order Value corresponding
to the reduced value for the Owner caused by the non-compliance of the Goods / non-compliant
Goods and if a substantial amount of the Total Order Value has already been paid by the Owner
to the Vendor, then the Vendor will be required to refund to the Owner such reduced value
In each of the cases as specified in Clauses 14.6.1 and 14.6.2 above, (i) the amounts payable by
the Vendor for the non-compliant Goods or the reduced value, as the case may be, shall be
determined by the Owner based on, to the extent applicable, on the Price Break-Down and
Unit Rates as set out in the Purchaser Order Document titled ‘Price Break Down’, and (ii) the
Vendor shall continue to comply with all of its obligations under the Purchase Order
Documents (including the Defects Liability Services) even if the non-compliant Goods are
replaced from another Vendor; or
14.6.3 terminate the Purchase Order in their entirety, in which case the Vendor will refund to the
Owner the entire amount of the Total Order Value paid by the Owner to the Vendor till the date
of such termination together the Vendor being responsible for payment to the Owner of all
Losses incurred by the Owner on account of the termination of the Purchase Order including for
replacing the Vendor with another vendor and the provision of defects liability services from any
other vendor.
14.7 If Owner revokes the purchase it shall nevertheless have the right to use the Goods during a
period of up to 6 months from the revocation of the purchase. Owner is to inform the Vendor
in writing the time period Owner intends to use the Goods in connection with the revocation
or as soon as possible thereafter. At the end of this period the Vendor will take back the
Goods at its own cost. The reimbursement of the price paid for the revoked Goods and the
costs incurred by Owner with respect to engineering, installation and dismounting of the
Goods and re-ordering and installation of such non-compliant Goods, if applicable, from
another Vendor is to be made before the Goods are taken back and not later than by the time
when Owner ceases to use the Goods.
14.8 Should the Performance Test not take place within 12 months from completed installation for
reasons solely attributable to Owner, Acceptance of the Goods shall be deemed to have taken
place.
15.0 Quality Standards and Audits
15.1 In the performance of its entire obligation under the Purchase Order Documents, the Vendor
shall comply with the standards of quality specified in the Purchase Order Documents in
addition to those state-of-the-art standards and international practices customary in the
industry.
15.2 Owner shall have the right to inspect, examine and test the Goods in accordance with the
quality surveillance terms and otherwise as may be reasonably requested by Owner. Owner’s
quality surveillance representative shall be allowed free access during working hours to
workshops of Vendor and Vendor agrees to procure a similar right for Owner for quality

surveillance purposes in relation to Sub-Vendors in order to monitor compliance with quality

requirements.
15.3 Owner’s right to inspect, examine, and test the Goods shall extend through the
manufacturing process, the time of shipment and a reasonable time after arrival at the Site.
Vendor’s failure to adhere to the standards of quality required under the Purchase Order
Documents shall be deemed to be reasonable grounds for Owner to demand in writing that
Vendor provides adequate assurances in writing of Vendor’s ability to meet the said
standards.
15.4 In the event that any inspection or test indicates that the Goods fail to meet the quality
requirements of the Purchase Order Documents, Vendor shall take immediate steps to rectify
the failure at its own cost and expense. Upon completion of said rectification, Vendor shall
notify Owner of availability for re-inspection or retest, and this procedure shall be repeated as
necessary until the Goods are deemed by Owner to be in complete conformity with the
requirements of the Purchase Order Documents. For the avoidance of doubt, no actions
undertaken by Vendor in accordance with this Clause shall entitle Vendor to an adjustment
of the price(s) set out in the Purchase Order nor release Vendor from its obligations under the
15.5 The making or failure to make an inspection, examination or test of the Goods shall in no way
relieve Vendor from its obligation to conform to all of the requirements of the Purchase Order
Documents and shall in no way impair Owner’s right to reject or revoke acceptance of non-
conforming Goods, or to avail itself of any other remedies to which Owner may be entitled.
15.6 If during the installation, Commissioning, start-up, Performance Testing at the Site, a
problem develops in the Goods, Vendor shall, upon notification from Owner, without delay
remedy the problem. If Vendor does not commence within a reasonable time to remedy the
problem, Owner, after notice to Vendor, shall have the right to perform itself or by a third
party the necessary remedy, and the costs thereof shall be borne by Vendor. Subsequent to
the remedy of the problem, an investigation by Owner with the full assistance of Vendor will
determine the actual origin of the problem and the cost of the repairs will be allocated
accordingly.
15.7 Vendor shall protect, defend, indemnify and hold Owner / Owner’s Representative harmless
from and against any Losses, cost, damage, claim, suit or proceeding (including attorneys’
fees on a full indemnity basis) incurred by Owner/ Owner’s Representative as a result of any
occurrence resulting into injury to person or damage to property at Vendor’s workshop or
other place designated by Vendor: (i) during the period of test carried out in accordance with
the terms of the Purchase Order Documents, and/or (ii) during any visit, inspection,
examination or test by Owner and/or(iii) due to any act or omission on the part of Vendor
during the test.
15.8 Owner, upon at least fifteen (15) days advance notice to Vendor, shall have the right to
inspect and audit, during normal business hours, all records and documents supporting
costs, expenditures, expenses, receipts and income, such as Vendor’s and the Sub-Vendors’
accounts, books, records, invoices, cash vouchers, debit notes, price lists or similar
documentation with respect to its performance of the Purchase Order in each Financial Year,
within two (2) years (or such longer period as may be required in exceptional circumstances)
from the end of such Financial year. Owner may access the premises of Vendor and the Sub-
Vendors in order to exercise its rights.

15.9 The Owner reserves the right to nominate Owner’s Representative /authorities/ third party
inspection agencies / insurers to carry out the functions set out above.
15.10 Quality Assurance System
15.10.1 The Vendor shall have in force a quality assurance system, which as a minimum complies with
ISO 9001:2008, occupational health and safety management system which minimum complies
with OSHAS 18001 and an environment management system, which as a minimum complies
with ISO 14001.
15.10.2 The Vendor shall have in effect and shall at the latest two months after the Effective Date,
provide to the Owner’s Representative a ‘state of the art’ quality assurance plan specifically
adopted to the Scope of Supplies with mechanism for ascertaining quality assurance in each step
of the Scope of Supplies including the right of Owner / Owner’s Representative’s inspection at
the Vendor’s or its Sub-Vendor’s workshops and also on the Site. The quality assurance plan to
be prepared by the Vendor and to be adhered to by the Vendor shall be aligned by the Vendor
with the and shall adhere to the Scope of Supply and the technical requirements provided
thereunder.
15.10.3 Such quality assurance plan shall follow the applicable ISO standard (as may be further
elaborated in the Scope of Supplies) or any other similar or better standard satisfactory to the
Owner’s Representative. The quality assurance plan shall set out the production/ manufacturing
and decision-making process within its organization and ensuring that each and every activity is
properly organized with appropriate control mechanisms and responsibility of all decisions is
unambiguous.
15.10.4 The quality assurance plan shall form the basis for developing method statements for each
element of the Scope of Supplies. It shall be the Vendor’s responsibility to ensure that the agreed
procedures and standards set out thereunder are complied with by its Sub-Vendors and their
employees/staff/workmen/ labour.
15.10.5 The quality assurance control mechanism should be done by an independent member within the
Vendor’s organization (“Quality Manager”) who is not involved with the Project, accompanied
by recording which would be open to Owner / Owner’s Representative for auditing. Full access
to premises, employees and records should be given to Owner / Owner’s Representative free of
charge.
15.10.6 The Quality Manager shall be a competent, fully qualified and suitably experienced in quality
procedures. The appointment shall be communicated to the Owner’s Representative stating the
name and qualifications of the quality manager. The quality manager shall be responsible for all
quality aspects of the Scope of Supplies. The quality manager responsible for verifying quality of
the Scope of Supplies shall be adequately qualified and experienced and be independent from
the personnel actually involved in the performance of the activities under the Purchase Order
Documents.
16.0 Interface with other Suppliers and Contractors etc.
16.1 Vendor shall work with the Owner, the Owner’s Representatives and other suppliers, service
providers, authorities, agencies and contractors to ensure effective management and
resolution of all technical issues encountered at any interface between the Goods and all other
works, goods and equipment to be used in relation to the Project and shall, subject to its

obligations of confidentiality, share all relevant information with such other vendors and
contractors.
16.2 When required by the Owner / the Owner’s Representatives, Vendor shall provide qualified
technical personnel acceptable to the Owner / the Owner’s Representatives to participate in
the design review process, project management, schedule monitoring, Commissioning,
factory acceptance tests, site acceptance tests, system integration test and interface
management detailed in the Purchase Order Documents or otherwise required for proper
management of interfaces. No compensation other than that specified in the Purchase Order
shall be paid for such support provided by Vendor.
16.3 Vendor shall ensure that the Goods shall be fully interoperable with equipment supplied by
others as set forth in the Purchase Order Documents, the Scope of Supply and any other
relevant Purchaser Order Document. The Vendor shall reasonably co-operate with third party
providers (including suppliers, service providers, authorities, agencies and contractors) as
directed by the Owner/ the Owner’s Representatives to the extent necessary for the
implementation of Project and operation of the Plant.
17.0 Defects Liability Services
17.1 Vendor warrants, undertakes, guarantees to, and assures (“Warranties”) the Owner that the
Goods and the Drawings and Documents shall be:
17.1.1 Free from Encumbrances, liens, charges or security interest;
17.1.2 Free from defects, non-compliances and deficiencies in design, material, workmanship and be fit
for their intended purpose under normal operating conditions;
17.1.3 shall be new and of the quality as specified in the Purchase Order Documents, and if no quality
is specified, shall conform to state-of-the-art quality as per international standards;
17.1.4 shall conform to and comply at all times with and in all respects to the requirement of the
Purchase Order Documents including the Scope of Supply and the technical requirements
thereunder, functional requirements and performance criteria as mentioned in the Scope of
Supply or in the other Purchase Order Documents and to the applicable approved Drawings and
Documents issued for manufacture;
17.1.5 Solely owned by the Owner, once the title passes to the Owner, and the Owner will have good,
clear and marketable title to such Goods.
17.1.6 [The Goods shall be of such quality and durability that the technical lifetime will not be less than
20 years from the Date of Acceptance of Goods.]
17.2 In the event the Goods, in whole or in part, are found to be defective or deficient as to design,
workmanship or materials or non-compliant, are found to be functionally and performance
based non-compliant or in breach of the Vendor’s Warranty (each a “Defect”), it remains the
responsibility of the Vendor to promptly correct any such Defect when so directed by the
Owner/ Owner’s Representative (“Defect Liability Notice”) during the Defect Liability
Period or within three months following the expiry of the Defects Liability Period. Vendor
shall at its own cost and expense, promptly repair, replace and correct and make good such
Defect without delay and in any event within 15 days of such Defect Liability Notice or such
time period as may be extended in writing by the Owner’s Representative / Owner in their

sole discretion. The rectification shall remove the true cause of the problem and not only the
symptoms. Vendor shall search for the true cause of the problem until it is clearly identified.
Owner / Owner’s Representative will take reasonable measures to observe and notify any
Defect without delay; however, failure to do so shall in no way relieve Vendor of its
responsibility for the notified Defects during the Defect Liability Period or within three
months following the expiry of the Defects Liability Period or during Defect Liability
Renewal (as set out below), to promptly search the true cause of the problem and make such
corrective measures as are required to remove and replace the Defect.
17.3 If in the reasonable opinion of Owner/ Owner’s Representative, a visit to the Site where the
Goods are installed is required by the Vendor's for searching the cause of a problem or for
making good any Defect then such service and visit shall be provided by Vendor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
17.4 However, in the event Vendor is unable or refuses to search for the cause of a problem or
making good any Defect in the Goods or replacement thereof; Vendor shall be deemed to be
in material breach of its obligations pursuant to the Purchase Order Documents. In such an
event, without prejudice to its rights and remedies under the Purchase Order, the Owner, at
its option, may require Vendor:
17.4.1 to bear and pay any reasonable additional costs incurred by Owner for rectifying or replacing
non-compliant Goods; or
17.4.2 to remove non-compliant Goods and repay the price paid by Owner for such Goods; or
17.4.3 to reduce the Total Order Value reflecting the diminished value of such non-conforming Goods
and repay the corresponding part of the price received.
17.5 Defect Liability Renewal: If the Vendor or a third party (under Clause [17.4.1]) replaces,
rectifies or repairs or makes good the Defect or replaces the Goods, a fresh Warranty for a
period of twenty four (24) months from the date of replacement or rectification or making
good the Defect, as the case may be, shall apply to the Goods / Defects so replaced, rectified
or made good and the applicable provisions as contained in this Clause [17] (Defect Liability
Services) shall apply renewed to the Goods/ Defect so replaced, rectified or made good.
17.6 Vendor's liability hereunder shall extend to all damages directly caused by the breach of any
of the foregoing Warranties, including incidental damages such as removal, inspection, re-
installation and costs of return or warehousing.
17.7 In the event where Sub-Vendors provide defect liability period on the Goods or part thereof
that is different from the Defect Liability Period herein, then Vendor shall extend such defect
liability period to twenty four (24) months from successful Commissioning of the Goods or
that period given by the Sub-Vendor, whichever is longer. If Vendor assigns an extended
warranty given by the Sub-Vendor after having obtained the Owner’s approval of such
assignment, Vendor shall do any acts and execute any documents necessary to effect such
assignment.
18.0 Performance Security
18.1 Owner shall be entitled to make a claim and be permitted to draw / recover/ encash such
amount under the Performance Security, inter alia, in the event of:

18.1.1 failure by Vendor to timely execute the Purchase Order with binding effect in accordance with
the terms and conditions of the Purchase Order;
18.1.2 failure by Vendor to extend the validity of ABG or extend the validity or increase the value of the
Performance Security as described in Clause 6 of the Purchase Order;
18.1.3 failure by Vendor to pay to Owner any amount due in accordance with any provision of these
General Conditions of Purchase, Purchase Order or elsewhere in the Purchase Order Documents;
18.1.4 failure by the Vendor to fulfill its Defects Liability Services, and any Losses suffered by the
Owner in this regard;
18.1.5 failure by Vendor to remedy a default which is capable of remedy within seven [7] days after
receiving the Notice of Default in relation to such default; or
18.1.6 serving of a Notice of Default by Owner in relation to a default which is not capable of remedy.
18.2 The Performance Security will be returned to the Vendor upon the later to occur of: (i) upon
the Vendor’s proper performance of all its obligations under the Purchase Order Documents,
or (ii) until the expiry of the Defect Liability Period plus for a period of three months
following the expiry of the Defects Liability Period or until the Vendor has repaired, replaced
or otherwise made good all the Defects notified during the Defects Liability Period or within
three months following the expiry of the Defects Liability Period (whichever is later).
19.0 Suspension
19.1 Notwithstanding anything contained to the contrary in any other provisions of the Purchase
Order Documents, Owner may at any time upon seven (7) days prior written notice to
Vendor, order Vendor in writing, to suspend any part of the Scope of Supply or any other
performance required under the Purchase Order Documents for such reasonable period of
time as Owner may determine.
19.2 Upon withdrawal of such suspension by Owner in writing, Vendor shall resume performance
of its obligations as specified under the Purchase Order within seven (7) days of the receipt of
such notice. Owner shall not be liable to pay any compensation, costs or expenses to Vendor
for any such suspension up to a period of sixty (60) days.
19.3 In the event of such suspension beyond sixty (60) days, Vendor shall be entitled to
reimbursement for additional direct costs reasonably and necessarily incurred by Vendor in
effecting such suspension, to the extent that such additional costs are actually incurred and
appropriately substantiated within thirty (30) days after resumption of performance.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Vendor shall not be entitled to such reimbursement if the
suspension was due to any act or omission of Vendor, or because of reasons attributable to
the Vendor, e.g. workers' strike, quality issues or waiting for material etc., in such cases the
Vendor to bear all costs incurred.
19.4 The Vendor shall during such suspension properly protect and secure the Goods (whether
finished or in progress), and any other elements of Scope of Supply, and in the manner
specified by the Owner’s Representative, if so directed.

19.5 Owner will grant extension of time in the Delivery Schedule to the extent shown necessary by
Vendor in the event of suspension under this Clause.
20.0 Termination for Convenience
20.1 Vendor’s performance of its obligations under the Purchase Order may be terminated by
Owner in whole or in part at any time in accordance with this Clause. Any such termination
shall be effected by issuing of Notice of Termination to Vendor specifying the extent to which
performance of its obligations under the Purchase Order is terminated, and the date upon
which such termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of such Notice of Termination,
Vendor shall, unless such notice requires otherwise: (a) immediately discontinue any work
under the Purchase Order on the date and to the extent specified in the Notice of
Termination; (b) place no further orders for materials, equipment or services other than as
may be necessarily required for completion of such portion of work that is not terminated; (c)
promptly make every reasonable effort to either obtain cancellation on terms satisfactory to
Owner of all orders to Sub-Vendors or assign the sub-orders to Owner (as per the directions
of the Owner); and (d) assist Owner, upon request in the maintenance, protection, and
disposition of Goods and or any property acquired by Owner under the Purchase Order.
20.2 If requested in writing by Vendor within thirty (30) days after the Notice of Termination,
Owner will pay to Vendor as full and final settlement of any amounts payable by Owner to
Vendor under the Purchase Order: (a) all amounts due and not previously paid to Vendor for
the Goods delivered in accordance with the Purchase Order prior to such Notice of
Termination, and for work thereafter completed by Vendor pursuant to Owner’s directions
contained in the Notice of Termination; (b) a reasonable amount for any Goods then in
production; provided, that, no such adjustment shall be made in favour of Vendor with
respect to any Goods which are a part of Vendor's standard stock; (c) any other direct and
unavoidable costs incurred by Vendor in the performance of the Purchase Order as on the
date of such Notice of Termination; and (d) reasonable amounts towards settling any claims
arising out of cancelled sub-orders. Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use
for any purpose any Goods for which payment has been made or is to be made to Vendor.
20.3 The total sum to be paid by Owner to Vendor, inclusive of settlement costs as aforesaid, shall
not exceed the net Total Order Value as reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made
or otherwise due and payable by Owner and as further reduced by the value of any part of
the Scope of Supply not being terminated. For avoidance of doubt, total sum to be paid by
Owner will not include any consideration for loss of anticipated profits or consequential or
indirect losses on the terminated work. All amounts which are payable by the Vendor to the
Owner under the Purchase Order shall be reduced from the total sum to be paid by Owner to
Vendor under this Clause 20.3.
20.4 Vendor agrees to provide Owner / Owner’s Representative with such substantiation of its
claims for payment as shall be required by Owner / Owner’s Representative to fully evaluate
and determine the validity of Vendor’s claims.
20.5 Vendor shall mitigate any loss, cost or damage which it may incur as a result of the
termination of the Purchase Order or any part of the Purchase Order pursuant to this Clause.
20.6 Termination of the Purchase Order by the Owner for any reason whatsoever shall not affect
or prejudice any rights, claims or liabilities which may have accrued to Owner prior to the
date and time of termination.

21.0 Termination for Default
21.1 Owner may terminate the whole or any part of the Purchase Order in any one of the
following circumstances: (a) Vendor fails to deliver the Goods or to perform any other
obligation within the stipulated time period or any extension thereof (notwithstanding any
payment of liquidated damages by the Vendor); or (b) Vendor fails to comply with
specifications, instructions, and condition of the Purchase Order Documents or to deliver
Goods in whole or in part in accordance with Purchase Order Documents; (c) Vendor fails to
meet the quality, functional and performance standards / parameters / requirements as
specified for the Goods in the Purchase Order Documents (including in accordance with the
terms of Clause 14.6 (performance test failure)); (d) Vendor fails to perform or provide
adequate assurance of its ability to meet any of its obligation under this Purchase Order
Documents in accordance with its terms or so fails to make progress as to endanger
performance of the Purchase Order; (e) if any other purchase order / contract for Goods or
services as required for the Project, to which Owner and Vendor and/or any of the Vendor’s
affiliate/s are party, is terminated by reason of Vendor’s (and/or its affiliate/s’) breach under
that purchase order / contract; (f) any other material breach by the Vendor of the Purchase
Order Documents; (g) if the Vendor is made subject to an Act of Insolvency; or (h) in the
event, the total amount of liquidated damages (paid or payable) by the Vendor reaches or,
because of failing progress, will apparently reach 10% of the Total Order Value i.e. an amount
of INR [●](“Maximum Liquidated Damages”) on failure to supply the Goods or any portion
thereof in accordance with the timelines set out under the Delivery Schedule including failure
to be present at Site as per the installation and commissioning schedule provided by the
Owner’s Representative. Each of the aforesaid circumstances mentioned in this Clause are
hereinafter referred to as an event of default.
21.2 In the event of any such circumstance as mentioned above, Owner will provide Vendor with
Notice of Default. In the event that the circumstance is remediable and Vendor does not
remedy such failure within ten (10) days of receipt of such Notice of Default, except in case of
events of default identified in items (e) and (g) above for which no cure period shall apply,
Owner may then immediately terminate the Purchase Order in whole or in part, as
applicable. In the event that the circumstance is not remediable, the Notice of Default shall
have the effect of immediately terminating the Purchase Order in whole or in part, as
applicable. Any Goods held in Vendor’s works on the happening of any events giving the
right of termination that have already been paid for by Owner in whole or in part shall not be
held to be part of the assets of Vendor as title thereof has already passed to Owner and such
Goods shall be released to Owner on demand.
21.3 In the event, Owner terminates the Purchase Order in whole or in part due to fault of Vendor
and rejects the Goods, Vendor shall refund any payment made by Owner for the Goods so
rejected, including the net price, import duty, any transportation, clearing and forwarding,
storage and insurance cost incurred by Owner, provided that Vendor shall at all times
continue the performance of its obligations under the Purchase Order to the extent not
terminated.
21.4 If Owner intends to exercise or exercises its termination rights, Vendor agrees to assist Owner
by transferring to Owner the Drawings and Documents and other information, relevant to the
supply of the Goods (including in respect of those Goods not delivered by Vendor) and
transferring to Owner the works in progress and residual material, and accommodate all
other reasonable requests made by Owner.

21.5 In the event of termination of the Purchase Order on account of this Clause, Owner shall have
the right to retain all amounts otherwise due to Vendor under the Purchase Order and to use
such retained monies to pay the costs incurred by Owner of having substitute goods supplied
and the works completed by itself or by any other vendor and to discharge any other liability
of Vendor to Owner. If such costs and liabilities are less than the monies retained, as
aforesaid, Owner shall pay the excess to Vendor. If the costs and expenses of, and any other
Losses suffered by the Owner in order to have the Goods (or substitute goods) supplied and
work (or similar works) or other obligations (including the Defect Liability) completed
exceed the monies retained as aforesaid, then Vendor shall, forthwith after being notified of
the said amount, pay the difference to Owner. Such difference shall be recoverable as a debt
immediately due and payable by Vendor to Owner including by means of recovering from
the Performance Security.
21.6 Vendor shall be liable to Owner for all costs in excess of the value of such Goods not supplied
due to termination of Purchase Order in whole or in part (such value to be determined with
reference to the calculation of the Total Order Value) reasonably and necessarily incurred by
Owner in the procurement of the Goods (or substitute goods) and the completion of the work
(or similar works) not supplied/ not completed by Vendor, including the cost of
administration of any purchase order / contract awarded by Owner to others for completion
of the supply of such goods and work.
21.7 Upon termination of Purchase Order or any part thereof, Vendor shall:
21.7.1 immediately discontinue the work on the date and to the extent specified in the notice and place
no further purchase orders or sub-orders to the extent that they relate to the performance of the
terminated scope;
21.7.2 maintain inventory and hand over to Owner all materials, plant, tools, equipment, and property
provided by Owner for performance of the terminated work;
21.7.3 promptly obtain cancellation upon terms satisfactory to Owner of all sub-orders, rentals or any
other agreements existing for the performance of the terminated Scope of Supply or assign or
novate any of those agreements to such Persons as directed by Owner;
21.7.4 Provide to the Owner all Drawings and Documents, and any other that have been paid for the
Owner, in each case as accepted by the Owner;
21.8 Termination of the Purchase Order by the Owner for any reason whatsoever shall not affect
or prejudice any rights, claims or liabilities which may have accrued to Owner prior to the
date and time of termination.
22.0 Term
The term of the Purchase Order shall commence from the Effective Date and such term will
include the period during which the Scope of Supplies are executed by the Vendor up to the
Date of Acceptance of Goods and thereafter the Defects Liability Period and up to the time
when the Vendor has repaired, replaced or otherwise made good all the Defects notified
during the Defects Liability Period or within three months following the expiry of the Defects
Liability Period, unless the Purchase Order is terminated earlier in accordance with the terms
hereof (“Term” or “Contract Period”). Termination of the Purchase Order upon the expiry of
the Term or otherwise shall not affect the accrued rights and obligations of the Parties hereto.

23.0 Delivery and Liquidated Damages For Delay
23.1 The date(s) and Delivery Schedule stipulated for delivery of the Goods shall be of paramount
importance, and time is the essence of the Purchase Order. The Vendor shall complete the
delivery of the Goods within the time, stated in the Purchase Order and deliver the Goods
timely at the delivery points as specified in the Purchase Order Documents. If the Goods are
incorrectly delivered, the Vendor shall be held responsible for any additional expense
incurred by Owner.
23.2 The Vendor and Owner agree that damages for delay / failure are difficult to calculate
accurately and not reasonably determinable at the time of execution of the Purchase Order
and therefore agree that liquidated damages agreed by the Vendor and Owner are genuine
and reasonable pre estimate of the likely loss to Owner as a result of Vendor’s failure to
supply the Goods in accordance with the Delivery Schedule or for the timely provision of the
installation services. Accordingly, the Vendor and Owner agree that liquidated damages
should not be considered as a penalty under any applicable law.
23.3 The provisions on calculation of the liquidated damages are contained in the Purchase Order.
23.4 The Owner may, at its sole discretion, deduct the sum of liquidated damages for delay from
any monies due or that may become due to Vendor or if such monies are insufficient, Vendor
shall forthwith pay the deficient amount within forty-five (45) days of written request.
24.0 Force Majeure
24.1 “Force Majeure” shall mean any circumstances beyond the reasonable control of the Parties
to the Purchase Order which prevent or makes it impossible or illegal for the party claiming
Force Majeure (“Affected Party”) to perform its obligations under the Purchase Order and
which act or event is:
24.1.1 beyond the control and not arising out of the fault of the Affected Party;
24.1.2 the Affected Party has been unable to overcome such act or event by the exercise of due diligence
and best efforts, skill and care; and
24.1.3 has an adverse effect on the Works. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing possible
Force Majeure events may include the following:
1) act of God or events beyond the reasonable control of the Affected Party and against
which an experienced party could not be reasonably expected to take precautions,
including exceptionally adverse weather conditions, lightning, earthquake, cyclone,
flood, volcanic eruption or fire to the extent originating from a source external to the Site,
Vendor’s or its Sub-Vendor’s workshop or beyond design specification for the Goods;
2) riot, commotion or disorder, strikes or boycotts which interrupt supplies and services in
relation to the Goods for a period exceeding a continuous period of 10 days in a year,
unless solely restricted to employees / personnel of the Vendor’s or its Sub-Vendor’s
currently or formerly engaged in the Scope of Supplies;
3) any discoveries or archaeological findings that prevents a party from discharging its
obligations;

4) expropriation or compulsory acquisition by any governmental agency of any assets or

rights of the Owner or the Vendor which affect the Scope of Supplies;
5) an Act of war (whether declared or undeclared), invasion, armed conflict or act of foreign
enemy, blockade, embargo, insurrection, terrorist or military invasion or civil commotion
which interrupt supplies for a period exceeding a continuous 10 days in a year;
6) industry wide, city wide, state wide or India wide strikes or industrial action or any
public agitation;
7) law or order of any Governmental Authority or pursuant to Applicable Laws which

delays or impedes the Vendor or the Owner in the execution of the Scope of Supplies
provided that such law or order is not resulting from any failure by the Affected Party;
8) denial of the use of any Railway, Port, Airport, Shipping services and other means of
public transport provided that such denial is not resulting from any failure by the
Affected Party; or
9) the spread of epidemic diseases.
24.1.4 Force Majeure shall not include occurrences as follows:
1) Late delivery of materials caused by congestion at Vendor’s facilities or elsewhere, an

oversold condition of the market, inefficiencies, or similar occurrences.
2) Late performance or non-performance by Vendor and/or any Sub-Vendor caused by

unavailability of equipment, supervisors or labor, services inefficiencies or similar
occurrences.
3) Mechanical breakdown of any item of Vendor’s or its Sub-Vendor’s equipment, plant or

machinery.
4) Delays due to ordinary storm or inclement weather or other weather conditions which
are or may be reasonably expected.
5) Financial distress of / Act of Insolvency affecting Vendor or any Sub-Vendor.
6) Labor strikes, lockouts or other industrial disputes or action solely among employee of
Vendor or its Sub-vendors.
7) Shortage of labor, materials or utilities shall not constitute Force Majeure unless caused
by circumstances which are themselves Force Majeure.
24.2 In the event of either Party being rendered unable by Force Majeure to perform any
obligation required to be performed by it under the Purchase Order Documents, the relevant
obligation of the Party affected by such Force majeure shall be suspended for the period
during which such Force Majeure event lasts.
24.3 If either of the Parties being an Affected Party is prevented or delayed from or in performing
any of its obligations under the Purchase Order by a Force Majeure event, then it shall notify
(“Force Majeure Notice”) the other Party of the circumstances constituting such Force
Majeure event within seven days of its occurrence and specify the obligations, the

performance of which is thereby delayed or prevented and the Party giving notice shall
thereupon be granted suitable extension in the performance or punctual performance, as the
case may be, for so long as circumstances of prevention or delay continue. If a Party does not
issue the Force Majeure Notice regarding a certain event within seven days of its occurrence,
the said event shall be deemed not to have affected the Party and the Purchase Order shall
continue to have effect as such, until a Force Majeure Notice is issued by the Affected Party.
24.4 Effect of Force Majeure Event
Neither the Vendor nor the Owner shall be considered in default or in contractual breach to
the extent that performance of their obligations is prevented by a Force Majeure event which
arises after the Effective Date. Upon the occurrence of such Force Majeure event, the Affected
Party shall endeavour to continue to perform its obligations as far as reasonably practicable.
24.5 Vendor’s Responsibility
If affected by such Force Majeure event, the Vendor shall within a period of seven days of the
occurrence of the Force Majeure event, promptly notify the Owner and the Owner’s
Representative of any proposals for overcoming the consequences of the Force Majeure event,
including any reasonable alternative means for performance, but shall not carry out these
proposals without the written consent of the Owner/ Owner’s Representative.
24.6 Owner’s Responsibility
If affected by such Force Majeure event, the Owner / the Owner’s Representative shall within
a period of seven days of the occurrence of the Force Majeure event, promptly notify the
Vendor of any proposals for overcoming the consequences of the Force Majeure event.
24.7 Notwithstanding the foregoing, the affected Party shall make every reasonable effort to
remove or remedy the cause of such Force Majeure or mitigate its effect as quickly as possible
and resume performance whenever and to whatever extent possible without delay, including
through the use of alternate sources, workaround plans or other means.
24.8 Resumption of Work
The obligations under the Purchase Order shall be resumed as soon as practicable after the
Force Majeure event has come to an end or ceased to exist. In case of doubt or dispute,
whether a particular occurrence should be considered a Force Majeure event as defined under
this Clause [24] (Force Majeure), the decision of the Owner shall be final and binding.
24.9 If an event of Force Majeure has occurred and its effect continues for a continuous period of
180 continuous days or more after the Force Majeure Notice above has been issued, then the
Owner shall thereafter be entitled to terminate the Purchase Order subject to giving Vendor,
thirty (30) days prior Notice of Termination which termination shall take effect at the end of
such 30 days. Upon such termination of the Purchase Order any payment received by the
Vendor for terminated Goods shall be refunded.
24.10 If the Purchase Order is terminated in accordance with this Clause, neither Party shall be
liable to the other in any respect except to the extent of any liabilities, which accrued to them,
under the Purchase Order, prior to the event of the Force Majeure.

24.11 Any delay or failure in performance by either Party hereto shall not give rise to any claims for
damages or loss of anticipated profits if, and to the extent, such delay or failure is caused by
Force Majeure.
25.0 Sub-Order(s)
25.1 The engagement by Vendor of any Sub-Vendor for the supply of any part of the Goods or
Scope of Supply is subject to the prior written consent of the Owner, and explicit
commitment by the Sub-Vendor to refrain from disclosing and/or appropriating any
technical or business information related to the Project.
25.2 Vendor shall obtain the prior written consent of Owner to the technical specifications of the
supply under all the sub-orders and to any change to such technical specifications.
25.3 Vendor shall furnish Owner with copies of unpriced sub-orders no later than one week after
execution of any such sub-orders. Such copies shall be in the English language and shall be
complete with all attachments, drawings and specifications applicable. All sub-orders shall
quote Owner’s Purchase Order number(s) and Owner’s item number(s) of the Goods where
applicable. Vendor shall ensure that the Sub-Vendor complies with the terms of the Purchase
Order Documents.
25.4 Vendor shall promptly notify Owner of Sub-Vendor’s obligations in respect of delivery
date(s), subsequent changes thereto and such Sub-Vendor’s reference number.
25.5 Owner reserves the right to inspect and review the performance of Sub-Vendor. Vendor shall
ensure that Owner shall have the right of access, at all reasonable times, to Sub-Vendors
premises and employees in order to exercise such right. The appointment of Sub-Vendor does
not in any way relieve Vendor from its obligations and liabilities under the Purchase Order
Documents and Vendor remains liable for the performance of the Sub-Vendor at all times.
25.6 All sub-orders shall include a provision entitling Vendor to assign the sub-order and the
rights and obligations of Vendor thereunder to Owner or a person designated by Owner
however in each case only with the prior written permission of the Owner.
25.7 Vendor shall ensure that sub-orders reflect the requirements of Purchase Order Documents,
to the extent applicable.
25.8 All provisions applicable to the Vendor under the Purchase Order Documents for such part of
the supply of any part of the Goods or Scope of Supply or Drawings and Designs which have
been sub-contracted, shall, mutatis mutandis, also apply to such Sub-Vendor, and it will be
responsibility of the Vendor to fully govern such compliance and bear any responsibilities
and liabilities thereto on account of contraventions or otherwise, and provide such reports
and information to the Owner / Owner’s Representative as may be required by them in this
regard; (ii) the Vendor shall be responsible for the observance of the requirements in the
Purchase Order Documents by Sub-Vendors engaged by it in the execution of the Scope of
Supply; and (ii) [the Vendor shall provide two copies of such sub-order agreements to the
Owner’s Representative; it is hereby clarified that provision of such copies shall not absolve
the Vendor of its duties and obligations under the Purchase Order Documents,] and these
sub-order agreements will be executed between the Vendor and the Sub-Vendor and the
Owner/ Owner’s Representatives will not be parties to such sub-order agreements. However,
without prejudice to the provisions of this clause, the Owner/ Owner’s Representatives may

require the Sub-Vendor to provide such certification in relation to the safety and security
aspects on the Site, as may be prescribed by the Owner/ Owner’s Representatives.
25.9 The Purchase Order shall not be assigned or sub-let as a whole by the Vendor. The Vendor
shall not sub-let any part of the Purchase Order without Owner’s prior written consent. The
restriction contained in this condition shall not apply to Sub-Vendor’s order for materials, or
minor details, or for any part of the Purchase Order for which Sub-Vendors are named in the
Purchase Order. The Vendor shall be responsible for all work done and goods supplied by all
Sub-Vendors.
26.0 Spare Parts
Vendor agrees that in the event of obsolescence of Goods or part thereof, it shall stock
sufficient spare parts for the Goods which shall be available to Owner to enable Owner to
effectively operate and maintain the Goods for their design life or not less than twenty (20)
years from the Date of Acceptance of the Goods, whichever is later. Vendor shall supply such
spare parts as and when required by Owner at a favorable market price (“most favored
customer concept”). Vendor gives to Owner equivalent Warranties in respect of the spare
parts as are given in relation to the Goods and the rights and remedies of Owner shall be
equivalent to those granted to Owner in respect of the Goods except that the Defect Liability
Period in respect of each spare part shall be the period of thirty (24) months from the date of
delivery of such spare parts to Owner.
27.0 After Sales Services
Vendor agrees to provide effective after sales services as reasonably requested by Owner, and
shall attend to problems and queries relating to the Goods and Scope of Supply in a timely
manner throughout the Defect Liability Period. If thereafter, services are to be provided by
Vendor on a regular basis then Vendor is prepared to enter into a service purchase order with
Owner based on favorable market conditions and rates (“most favored customer concept”).
28.0 Confidentiality
The Vendor acknowledges it, and shall continue to adhere to its obligations and duties
towards the Owner under the Non-Disclosure Undertaking dated [•] (“NDU”) executed by
the Vendor in favour of the Owner which shall continue to be valid and enforceable (as if it
was never terminated) throughout the Contract Period, and for a period of [●] years post the
completion / termination of the Purchase Order and by reference the NDU shall be deemed
to form part of the Purchase Order including for the application of Clause [●] (Governing
Law, Jurisdiction and Dispute Resolution).
29.0 Owner’s Rights in Specifications, Plans, Drawings, etc.
29.1 Any specifications, plans, drawings, patterns or designs, proprietary information,

instructions, site plans, technical information, processes, forecasts, trade secrets, data, know
how or any other form of Intellectual Property Rights and all other documentation supplied
by Owner / Owner’s Representative to Vendor or jointly developed by Vendor and Owner /
Owner’s Representative and any Intellectual Property Rights related thereto, including all
modifications and derivative works thereof, in connection with the Purchase Order shall be or
remain the exclusive property of Owner. Vendor's receipt of the aforesaid information shall
not be deemed to be an assignment of or license under Owner’s rights in such information,
inventions and works of authorship. Any use by Vendor of such information shall solely be

for the limited purpose of delivery of the Goods and shall inure to Owner’s exclusive benefit
and shall not be divulged by the Vendor or used by the Vendor for any other purpose.
29.2 Vendor shall grant to Owner a perpetual, irrevocable, non-exclusive, royalty free and fully
paid up right and license to use, copy, modify and prepare derivative works of Vendor’s
Intellectual Property Rights subsisting in Drawings and Documents for any purpose
including engineering, procurement, construction, operation, maintenance or repair,
modification and replacement of the Goods, or in relation to the Project or for operation of the
Plant. The Drawings and Documents being owned by the Owner, the Vendor acknowledges
that the Owner is entitled to copy, modify and prepare derivative works of all such Drawings
and Documents.
29.3 Title to all Drawings and Documents and other technical documentation prepared by Vendor
or any Sub-Vendor specifically in connection with the Purchase Order and for the purpose of
meeting Owner’s special technical requirements, including any modification or derivative
works thereof, whether in hard copy or electronic form and all Intellectual Property Rights
subsisting in such Drawings and Documents shall be transferred to Owner, together with all
relevant source codes, and shall vest in, and be owned by the Owner at the time of their
creation, and from time to time, and the Owner shall have the right to be provided with
copies of and exclusively use such Drawings and Documents for any purpose including
engineering, procurement, construction, operation, maintenance, modification, repair or
replacement of the Goods, or in relation to the Project or for operation of the Plant, or
otherwise to license it, without any obligation of any kind to Vendor or the Sub-Vendor.
30.0 Infringement
30.1 In additions to other representation, assurances, undertakings and warranties in the Purchase
Order Documents, Vendor represents, warrants, assures and undertakes that:
30.1.1 Goods, Drawings and Documents and Owner's proposed use and ownership thereof do not and
shall not infringe the Intellectual Property Rights of any third party;
30.1.2 to the best of its knowledge, it has no claim of such infringement been threatened or asserted;
and
30.1.3 on the Effective Date of the Purchase Order, Goods, Drawings and Documents are not the
subject of a pending Intellectual Property Right infringement suit against Vendor or its owners /
group entities.
30.2 Vendor shall, at its sole cost and expense, defend, indemnify and hold harmless Owner and
the Owner’s Representative and their employees and representatives from and against all
Losses which arise from, arise in connection with or are in any way related to any claim by
any third party that the Goods or any part thereof or Documents and Drawings in any form
supplied by Vendor or subsequently modified by Vendor or use thereof infringe or
misappropriate any third party’s Intellectual Property Rights; provided that (a) Vendor is
given written notice of any infringement claim against Owner; (b) Vendor is given full
authority to assume control, at its sole cost and expense, of the defence of the infringement
claim through its own counsel. However, Vendor shall not compromise or settle any
infringement claim or admit any criminal liability or wrongdoing by Owner without the
express prior written consent of Owner, unless such compromise or settlement includes an
unconditional release of any claims against Owner, does not affect the reputation of the
Owner, does not in any manner change, modify, alter the technical specifications and does

not involve any stipulation, judgment or injunction against Owner, in which event such
written consent of Owner shall not be required. Owner shall reasonably cooperate, at
Vendor's sole cost and expense, with Vendor in the defence of any infringement claim.
30.3 In the event Goods or any part thereof, or the use of Goods or any part thereof, or the
Drawings and Documents is held to constitute an infringement or misappropriation of any
third party’s Intellectual Property Rights, or the use of Goods or any part thereof, or the
Drawings and Documents is enjoined, Vendor shall, at its sole cost and expense: (a) procure
the right for Owner to continue the use of Goods or any part thereof or the Drawings and
Documents without interruption or cost and expense to Owner; (b) replace Goods or any part
thereof with non-infringing Goods or work or the Drawings and Documents that complies
with technical specifications and functional and performance parameters; or (c) modify said
Goods or parts thereof, or work or the Drawings and Documents so that the modified Goods
or part thereof, or work or the Drawings and Documents are non-infringing; provided, that (i)
the modified Goods or any part thereof or work or the Drawings and Documents complies
with technical specifications and functional and performance parameters, and (ii) Vendor
fully indemnifies Owner for all consequences of the infringement. If Vendor fails or refuses to
fulfil its obligations, Vendor shall (a) refund to Owner the full value of the infringing Goods
or work or the Drawings and Documents including the price, taxes, [import duty], any
transportation, clearing and forwarding, storage and insurance cost incurred by Owner with
respect to such infringing Goods or work or the Drawings and Documents without any
further obligation of Owner to pay any additional amounts in connection with such Goods or
work or the Drawings and Documents, and (b) bear and pay any Losses incurred by the
Owner in procuring the right to continue using such infringing Goods or part thereof or work
or the Drawings and Documents, or for replacing such infringing Goods or work or the
Drawings and Documents.
30.4 Notwithstanding any proprietary, Intellectual Property Rights legends or copyright notices to
the contrary, Owner may copy or reproduce Drawings and Documents and other information
or any other information furnished by Vendor in connection with Vendor's bid and with the
Purchase Order and distribute such copies or reproductions to others.
30.5 Vendor is responsible for obtaining necessary permissions and consents and shall, at its own
expense, hold harmless and defend Owner and the Owner’s Representative against any and
all claims, suits or proceedings based upon a claim whether rightful or otherwise that an
Intellectual Property Right has been infringed by copying, reproduction, distribution or use
by Owner.
31.0 Compliance with Laws and Regulations
31.1 Vendor warrants that Goods sold hereunder, the Scope of Supplies, and the Drawings and
Documents, and provision of the Defect Liability Services shall have been produced, sold,
delivered and furnished in strict compliance with all Applicable Laws. Vendor shall execute
and deliver to Owner any documents as may be required to effect or to evidence such
compliance. All stipulations in laws and regulations that are required to be incorporated into
agreements of this character are hereby incorporated herein by reference. Vendor undertakes
to obtain or to procure any and all licenses, permits, consents and approvals, which may be
required by any Governmental Authority to enable the supply of the Goods, the execution of
the Scope of Supplies, and the provision of the Drawings and Documents, and the Defect
Liability Services in accordance with the terms of the Purchase Order.

31.2 It is the duty and responsibility of the Vendor, at its own cost and expense, to obtain
necessary statutory and local approvals / permits / licenses, other third party consents and
make necessary filings in order to proceed with, carry out and complete the Scope of
Supplies, and other obligations under the Purchase Order Documents (including the Defect
Liability Services under the Purchase Order). Further, the Vendor shall be bound to provide
to the Governmental Authorities or third parties concerned such notices as may be provided
under Applicable Law.
31.3 The Vendor shall and shall cause its employees/staff/workmen/ labour, or its Sub-Vendors
to, at all times, comply with the provisions of such Applicable Laws which may be applicable
to the execution, carrying out and completion of the Scope of Supplies, other obligations
under the Purchase Order Documents and the provision of the Defect Liability Services under
the Purchase Order. Further, the Vendor shall itself and shall cause its
employees/staff/workmen/ labour, or its Sub-Vendors to, at all times, comply with the
provisions of such Applicable Laws which may be applicable to the Owner, Owner’s
Representative, the other contractors and vendors associated with the Project, so as to adhere
to such Applicable Laws, and not cause such Persons to breach such provisions.
31.4 In respect of all persons / workers directly or indirectly employed / engaged by the Vendor
/ its Sub-Vendor in the execution of the Scope of Supplies and provision of the Defect
Liability Services under the Purchase Order, (i) the Vendor shall comply with and cause its
Sub-Vendors to comply with the Applicable Laws (including tax laws) and the labour /
human resources code and/or regulations (including the Safety Manual) issued from time to
time by the Owner’s Representative, the labour and human resources related Applicable
Laws issued by Governmental Authorities; and (ii) the Sub-Vendor shall ensure that the
terms of employment / engagement of such person shall at all times be in compliance with
Applicable laws including (without limitations) in relation to obtaining permits and licenses,
payment of wages / salaries, periodic or tax related deductions from wages / salaries,
contribution to provident fund / labour welfare funds, crèche facilities, maternity benefits,
prevention of sexual harassment at work place, permitted work hours (including permissible
work hours for women), minimum and maximum age limit of workers, treatment of contract
labour, overtime payments, leave policy and leave encashment, weekly holidays, safety and
security, workmen’s compensation, employees state insurance corporation contributions,
payment of bonus, gratuity, workmen compensation policy, maintenance of wage register,
wage cards, publication of scale of wages, old age retirement benefits, pensions, annuities,
and other terms of employment, inspection and submission of periodical returns, maintaining
records, files and registers and making requisite filings and any or all other matters of a like
nature. The Sub-Vendor shall, and will ensure that its Sub- Sub-Vendor shall at all times
maintain records for such compliances, which shall be produced whenever required for
inspection by the Owner / Owner’s Representative.
31.5 In carrying out the Scope of Supplies and any other obligations under the Purchase Order, or
in connection with the Project, the Vendor shall and shall cause its Vendor to comply with all
Applicable Laws including but not limited to the following: (i) Contract Labour (Regulations
and Abolition) Act, 1970; (ii) Employees State Insurance Act, 1948; (iii) Employees’ Provident
Fund and Miscellaneous Provisions Act, 1952; (iv) Payment of Wages Act, 1936; (v) Minimum
Wages Act, 1948; (vi) Equal Remuneration Act, 1976; (vii) Payment of Bonus Act, 1965; (viii)
Payment of Gratuity Act, 1972; (ix) Maternity Benefit Act, 1961; (x) The Workmens’
Compensation Act, 1923; (xi) Factories Act, 1948; (xii) Industrial Disputes Act, 1947; (xiii)
Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act, 1946; (xiv) Trade Unions Act, 1926; (xv) Child
labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act, 1986; (xvi) Interstate Migrant Workmen’s
(Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act, 1979; (xvii) any other Applicable

Laws on safety; and (xix) any other local regulations and rules and regulations framed under
such laws.
31.6 None of the labour, workmen, employees or personnel of the Vendor or its Sub-Vendors will
be considered as employees or personnel of the Owner or the Owner’s Representative, and
the Vendor shall and shall cause its Sub-Vendor to not do or omit to do an act whereby an
inference / implication to the contrary is made or occurs.
31.7 The Vendor shall fully indemnify and keep indemnified the Owner and / or the Owner’s
Representative of all charges, fines, claims, damages, losses, payments and compensation of
whatsoever nature borne or suffered by or made against the Owner and / or the Owner’s
Representative as a result of the Vendor’s or its Sub-Vendors’ non-compliance with any
Applicable Law, contractual, statutory or customary requirements in the performance of their
obligations and duties with respect to the Project (including with respect to non-compliances
by them of the covenants set out in this Clause 31), and any other compensations and
payments (statutory, contractual or otherwise) which are due from the Vendor’s or its Sub-
Vendors’, or any claims from their workmen, employees or personnel. The Owner reserves
the right to withhold any payments to the Vendor in the event the requirements under this
Clause 31 are not complied with, or deduct therefrom such indemnity amounts.
32.0 Indemnification and Limitation of Liability
32.1 Vendor shall, at its own cost and expense, defend, indemnify and hold Owner, the Owner’s
Representative, and their respective employees, officers, directors, representatives and agents
harmless from and against any and all Losses which are brought against or incurred by any
of them for:
32.1.1 the breach of the terms of the Purchase Order, performance of (or failure to perform) the work,
supplies or services under this Purchase Order, whether as a result of a breach of contract, tort
liability, any wrongful acts, negligence (whether active or passive, or any other kind), fraud,
errors, breach of security and safety norms on the Site, or omissions, in each case either on
account of the Vendor or its Sub-Vendor/s or their employees, labour, agents, consultants, sub-
contractors or other representatives
32.1.2 injury to persons (including physical or mental injury, libel, slander and death) caused by or
relating to any fraud, negligent or willful act or omission, or default of Vendor, any Sub-Vendor
or their respective officers, employees, representatives or agents,
32.1.3 loss or damage to real and tangible property, arising out of or in any way connected with the
performance of the Purchase Order , or caused by or relating to any fraud, negligent or willful
act or omission, or default of Vendor any Sub-Vendor or their respective officers, employees,
representatives or agents,
32.1.4 violations of Applicable Laws by Vendor any Sub-Vendor or their respective officers, employees,
laborers, representatives or agents,
32.1.5 any other liability or loss that shall have resulted from any fraud, negligent or willful act or
omission or default of Vendor any Sub-Vendor or their respective officers, employees,
representatives or agents.
33.0 Consequential Damages

Without limiting the duty to compensate (including by way of liquidated damages) and
indemnify as explicitly stated in the Purchase Order Documents and except for Gross
Negligence, neither Party shall be liable under the Purchase Order to the other Party for any
consequential, indirect, exemplary or incidental damages (it is clarified here that the
liquidated damages payable pursuant to the Purchase Order are deemed not to be
consequential, indirect, exemplary or incidental damages).
34.0 Taxes & Duties (Import Orders)
34.1 All prices for Goods shall be inclusive of all taxes other than import duties, if any, payable on
the import of the Goods into India. Such import duties shall be the responsibility of Owner.
Vendor shall be liable for any increase in the customs duties during or post clearance
including fines, penalties, interest or any other liability imposed by authorities authorised in
terms of the [Customs Act, 1962], which are due to non-compliance of any rules, regulations,
notifications or statutory requirements or any valuation discrepancies, technical
documentation errors, errors in any bill of entry (wherever customs clearance is in the scope
of Vendor) or any error in any packing lists, supply, labels and shipping documents or any
reason otherwise attributable to Vendor.
34.2 Vendor shall pay, and hold Owner harmless from and against, any penalty, interest, tax or
other charge that may be levied or assessed as a result of the delay or failure of Vendor to pay
any tax properly payable by Vendor or file any return or information required by applicable
law. Owner shall not be liable to make any further payments, whatsoever in connection with
the purchase or the use of Goods to Vendor or any other third party, including for any licence
fees, royalties, levies or the like for use of the intellectual property embodied in or utilised
with the Goods.
34.3 For the avoidance of doubt, it is clarified that, Vendor shall be responsible for all income taxes
(including withholding taxes in India, if applicable) arising from Vendor’s activities and its
personnel under the Purchase Order, [as well as service taxes], if any, applicable.
35.0 Other Warranties
35.1 In addition to the other representations and warranties contained in the Purchase Order,
Vendor further represents, warrants and covenants that:
35.1.1 it is a corporation duly organized, validly constituted, and in good standing under the laws of
the jurisdiction in which it exists and is duly qualified to do business in all relevant jurisdictions
in which the transaction of its business are carried out;
35.1.2 execution, delivery and performance of the Purchase Order by Vendor and the consummation of
the transactions contemplated hereby do not and will not contravene the certificate of
incorporation or by-laws of Vendor and do not and will not conflict with or result in (i) a breach
of or default under any indenture, agreement, judgment, decree, order or ruling to which
Vendor is a party that would materially adversely affect Vendor’s ability to perform its
obligations under the Purchase Order; or (ii) a breach of any Applicable Law;
35.1.3 execution, delivery and performance of the Purchase Order has been duly authorized by its
board of directors or management, or has been duly executed by it’s duly authorized and
appointed legal representatives and constitutes its legal, valid and binding obligation; and

35.1.4 it has full legal and beneficial title to the Goods and the Drawings and Documents (to the extent
applicable for the Drawings and Documents if aspects of it are not already owned by the Owner
/ its affiliate) immediately prior to title in the Goods, and the Drawings and Documents (to the
extent applicable for the Drawings and Documents if aspects of it are not already owned by the
Owner / its affiliate) passing to Owner under the relevant clauses of the Purchase Order
Documents and that such Goods and Drawings and Documents (to the extent applicable for the
Drawings and Documents if aspects of it are not already owned by the Owner / its affiliate) shall
be free from all Encumbrances and defects in title.
35.2 Vendor warrants and guarantees that it has made itself aware of the Purchase Order
Documents terms including as to the engineering and other works required for the design,
fabrication, manufacture, testing, loading, transportation, installation, supervision, pre-
commissioning and Commissioning activities, in respect of the Goods, and the worksite
conditions. Vendor warrants that it is satisfied that it has the requisite expertise, knowledge,
experience, manpower and adequate infrastructure with capacity and ability to augment all
of these as may be necessary, and also the financial, manufacturing and testing capabilities to
successfully deliver the Goods covered under the Purchase Order Documents. All
authorizations by, approvals or orders by, consents of, notices to, filings with or other acts by
or in respect of any Governmental Authority or any other person required in connection with
the execution, delivery and performance of the Purchase Order by Vendor have been
obtained or shall be obtained in due course.
35.3 Vendor has and shall have full and sufficient right to assign or grant license to use the
Intellectual Property Rights included in the Scope of Supply (including the Drawings and
Documents).
36.0 Governing Law, Dispute Resolution and Jurisdiction
36.1 The Purchase Order Documents, all questions of its interpretation and the relationship
between the Parties hereto shall be governed by, construed and interpreted in accordance
with the laws of the Republic of India. Subject to Clause [36.2] below, courts situated at
Mumbai shall have exclusive jurisdiction over all matters and disputes arising pursuant to
the Purchase Order Documents.
36.2 Dispute Resolution:
36.2.1 If any dispute, differences, controversy, claim or disagreement of any kind arises amongst
Parties hereto during the subsistence of the Purchase Order Documents or thereafter, in
connection with the validity, interpretation, implementation or alleged breach of any provision
of the Purchase Order Documents or regarding a question, including the questions as to whether
the termination of this Purchase Order Documents has been legitimate (“Dispute”), the Parties
shall endeavour to settle such Dispute amicably. To that end, (i) any Party which claims that a
Dispute has arisen must give notice thereof (“Dispute Intimation Notice”) to the other Party as
soon as practicable, after the occurrence or knowledge of the event, matter or thing which is the
subject of such Dispute and in such notice such Party shall provide particulars of the
circumstances and nature of such Dispute and of its claim(s) in relation thereto; and (ii) person(s)
with decision making authority of each Party (each a “Designated Person”) shall meet /
communicate, and make every effort to amicably resolve the Dispute arising between the Parties
and attempt to negotiate an amicable settlement within a period of thirty (30) days from the
receipt of the Dispute Intimation Notice by the other Party (“Settlement Period”). If the
Designated Persons reach an amicable settlement for such Dispute within the Settlement Period,
then such decision of the Designated Persons shall become final and binding on the Parties, and

neither Party will invoke arbitration proceedings under this Clause [36.2]. In the event the
Designated Persons fail to reach an amicable settlement, any proposals made during the
Settlement Period should not be referred to in subsequent arbitration proceedings.
36.2.2 In the event, that the Designated Persons fail to reach an amicable settlement within the
Settlement Period, either Party may ,within 30 (thirty) days from the expiry of the Settlement
Period, refer the Dispute to arbitration as hereinafter provided.
36.2.3 Arbitration:
If any Dispute between the Owner and the Vendor are not resolved under Clause [36.2.1]
above, the same shall be referred to arbitration under the (Indian) Arbitration and
Conciliation Act, 1996 (“Arbitration Act”), and the rules and regulations framed thereunder
(collectively, “Rules”) in force at the relevant time (which are deemed to be incorporated in
the Purchase Order Documents by reference). The arbitration shall be conducted by a sole
arbitrator (“Sole Arbitrator”) who shall be jointly appointed by the Owner and the Vendor. In
the event, the Parties are unable to jointly appoint the sole arbitrator within 30 (thirty) days of
referral of the Dispute to arbitration, the Owner shall be entitled to appoint 1 (one) arbitrator
and the Vendor shall be entitled to appoint 1 (one) arbitrator and the 2 (two) arbitrators so
appointed shall jointly appoint a third arbitrator who shall preside over the arbitration
proceedings as the chairman (the three arbitrators together referred to as the “Arbitral
Tribunal”). The arbitration proceedings shall be in English and the place, seat, venue and
legal place of arbitration shall be Mumbai.
36.2.4 The costs and expenses of the arbitration, including, without limitation, the fees of the arbitration
and the Sole Arbitrator /Arbitral Tribunal (as the case may be), shall be borne equally by the
Parties to the dispute and each Party to the dispute shall pay its own fees, disbursements and
other charges of its counsel etc., except, in each case, as may be otherwise determined or directed
by the Sole Arbitrator /Arbitral Tribunal (as the case may be).
36.2.5 The award passed by the Sole Arbitrator /Arbitral Tribunal (as the case may be) shall be final
and binding on each of the Parties to the Dispute and the Parties hereby undertake to promptly
abide by, and implement the award passed by the Sole Arbitrator /Arbitral Tribunal without
delay.
36.2.6 The Vendor recognizes the high degree of interdependency and associated time constraint
between its obligations and the obligations by others in the project and the Vendor has full
respect for the Owner’s /Owner’s Representative’s coordination role. Accordingly, if so required
by the Owner, the Vendor shall continue to perform its obligations under the Purchase Order
Documents as directed by the Owner during the pendency of any Dispute / arbitration
proceedings and the Owner will pay for obligations performed according to its directions
pursuant to the prices, rates and payment terms set forth in or reasonably inferred from the
Purchase Order Documents, provided that any possible allowance given to the Vendor in the
arbitration award will be honoured retroactively by the Owner when the award becomes final
and binding.
37.0 Independent Vendor / No Partnership
37.1 Nothing in the Purchase Order Documents shall be deemed to constitute either Party as a
partner, agent or legal representative of the other Party, or to create any fiduciary relationship
between the Parties. Vendor is and shall remain an independent company in the performance
of its obligations hereunder, maintaining complete control of its employees, agents, Sub-

Vendors and operations required for performance of the obligations under the Purchase
Order.
37.2 The Vendor shall have no right or authority to and shall not do any act to, enter into any
contract or purchase order, make any representation, give any warranty, incur any liability or
assume any obligation (express or implied), of any kind on behalf of Owner or bind Owner in
any way.
37.3 The role of the Vendor under the Purchase Order Documents is that of an independent
contractor / supplier, and the contractual relationship between the Parties is on a principal to
principal basis.
38.0 Costs and Expenses:
38.1 Stamp duty on the Purchase Order shall be borne by the Owner. The bank guarantees
pursuant to the Purchase Order would be obtained by the Vendor at its own costs and
expenses.
38.2 Except as provided under Clause [38.1] above, each Party shall bear its own costs for
preparation and assessment of the Purchase Order Documents, the negotiation, preparation
of all legal documentation, the entering into the Purchase Order Documents, and fees and
costs of their professional advisors.
39.0 [Intentionally left blank]
40.0 Language
All documents pertaining to the Purchase Order including Drawings and Documents,
correspondence, operating and maintenance manuals or instructions, schedules, reports,
notices and other submittals by either Party to the other shall be in the English language.
Where any document, including documents issued or certified by any Person in any
jurisdiction, if not in English shall be translated into English and notarized, by the Party in
possession of such document and the English version of such documents shall be the
governing and prevailing document.
41.0 Severability
If for any reason whatsoever, any provision of the Purchase Order Documents is or becomes
invalid, illegal or unenforceable or is declared by any court of competent jurisdiction or any
other instrumentality to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable, the validity, legality or
enforceability of the remaining provisions shall not be affected in any manner, and the Parties
will negotiate in good faith with a view to agreeing to one or more provisions which may be
commercially substituted for such invalid, unenforceable or illegal provisions, as nearly as is
practicable.
42.0 Prevention of Corruption
42.1 Vendor certifies that neither it and none of its employees, representatives, or agents, has
made, offered to make or agreed to make any loan, gift, donation or other payment, directly
or indirectly, whether in cash or in kind, to or for the personal benefit of the employees of

Owner or any other person or third party (including a Governmental Authority) in

connection with execution or performance of the Purchase Order. Vendor further, confirms
that if it learns of or has reason to know of any such payment, offer or agreement to make a
payment to any of the above mentioned persons or entities for the purpose of obtaining the
Purchase Order or in connection with execution or performance of the Purchase Order , it will
immediately inform Owner in writing communicating to Owner all information in respect of
the above within the knowledge or possession of Vendor.
42.2 Without prejudice to Vendor's obligations, Vendor has not or shall not offer or give, or agree
to give, to any employee, agent, servant or representative of Owner or any other person or
third party (including a Governmental Authority) any consideration of any kind as an
inducement or reward for doing, refraining from doing, or for having done or refrained from
doing, any act in relation to the obtaining or execution of the Purchase Order or any other
purchase order with Owner, or for showing or refraining from showing favour or disfavour
to any person in relation to the Purchase Order or any other purchase order.
42.3 Vendor shall not enter into the Purchase Order if in connection with it commission has been
paid or is agreed to be paid to any employee or representative of Owner by Vendor or on
Vendor’s behalf, unless before the Purchase Order is made, particulars of any such
commission and of the terms and conditions of any agreement for the payment thereof have
been disclosed in writing to Owner.
42.4 Unlawful Payments and Anti-Corruption
42.4.1 General
The Vendor undertake not to act in violation of the Anti-Corruption Laws (as defined below)
applicable to it. The Vendor agrees and undertakes that it shall ensure compliance with all
Anti-Corruption Laws applicable to it from time to time.
42.4.2 Anti-corruption and financial crimes measures
i). The Vendor agree and undertake that it shall implement appropriate policies and
procedures, to procure or ensure that the Vendor, Sub-Vendors, and their employees or
any third party acting on their behalf or for their benefit, conduct their businesses in
conformity with Applicable Laws relating to bribery or corruption (“Anti-Corruption
Laws”), money laundering (“Money Laundering Laws”), and sanctions measures or
embargos (“Sanctions Laws and Regulations”) and none of the Vendor, Sub-Vendors,
and their employees or any third party acting on their behalf or for their benefit has taken
or will take any action, directly or indirectly (or cause anyone to take any action), that
would result in a violation of Anti-Corruption Laws, Money Laundering Laws and
Sanctions Laws and Regulations.
ii). In the event the Vendor appoints/delegates its or part of its functions/obligations under
the Purchase Documents to a third party to act on behalf of or for the benefit of the
Vendor, the Vendor shall ensure similar obligations as in sub-Clause (i) above to be
provided by such third parties to Vendor.
iii). The Vendor agrees that, in connection with the Purchase Order, any violation or failure
by the Vendor, Sub-Vendors or their employees to the extent that the Vendor, Sub-
Vendors or their employees is attributed with the violation or failure, to comply with the
Anti-Corruption Laws, Money Laundering Laws and Sanctions Laws and Regulations

shall constitute a material breach under the Purchase Order and the Vendor shall
forthwith notify the Owner and the Owner’s Representative of this event.
42.5 Where Vendor or Vendor’s employees, servants, Sub-Vendors agents or anyone acting on
Vendor’s behalf, engages in conduct prohibited by this Clause in relation to the Purchase
Order Documents or any other purchase order with Owner, Owner has the right, without
prejudice to any other rights or remedies available at law, to:
42.5.1 terminate the Purchase Order and recover from Vendor the amount of any Loss suffered by
Owner / Owner’s Representative or their representatives, agents and employees resulting from
such termination;
42.5.2 recover in full from Vendor any other Loss sustained by Owner / Owner’s Representative or
their representatives, agents and employees as a consequence of any breach of this Clause,
whether or not the Purchase Order has been terminated.
43.0 Safety and Security
43.1 Security Rules
The Vendor, its Sub-Vendor and their employees and representatives shall strictly follow the
existing security rules of the Owner / Owner’s Representative at the security gate to enter the
premises of the Site as well as while leaving the Site. They will be subject to physical check at
the gate if required.
43.2 Safety for Employees
43.2.1 The Vendor shall at its own expense provide footwear approved by the Owner’s Representative
for all persons performing services at the Site under the Purchase Order and on its failure to do
so the Owner shall be entitled to provide the same and recover the cost from the Vendor. Not
only footwear but all the safety PPEs like safety shoes with metal cap, reflective jackets, helmets
to all workers and other PPEs based on the trade of work shall be provided by the Vendor at
their own expense.
43.2.2 In respect of persons directly or indirectly employed on the Scope of Supplies, the Vendor shall
at its own expense comply with or cause to be complied with all the rules and regulations
framed by the Owner, local, State or Central Governments from to time for the protection of
health, safety and sanitary arrangements of workers / labour/ employees employed by it or its
Sub-Vendors.
43.2.3 The Vendor shall observe safety regulations (including the Safety Manual) as required by the
Owner / Owner’s Representative in order to execute the Scope of Supplies in a safe manner.
Such safety regulations are intended to ensure safety to the Scope of Supplies, to the staff and
workmen of the Vendor, Sub-Vendors and other Persons and other wrks and property on the
Site, and also for safety in general.

43.2.4 The Vendor shall obtain from the Owner’s Representative a permission certificate before starting
work in any place on the Site. The Vendor shall inform their employees and representatives and
its Sub-Vendor and of any special conditions on the certificate, which are applicable to them. The
certificate will be valid for a specified portion of the Scope of Supplies and for a specified period
and must be renewed as required. The Owner’s Representative may cancel the certificate before
its expiry if conditions demand at its sole discretion.
43.2.5 The Vendor shall and shall cause the Sub-Vendor and each of their personnel / workers /
visitors to observe safety, health and environmental regulations as required by the Owner /
Owner’s Representative including the Safety Manual and Perstorp’s “Responsible Care
Minimum Requirements” in order to execute the Scope of Supplies in safe manner. Such safety,
health and environmental regulations are, amongst other things, intended to ensure safety to the
Scope of Supplies, other works on the Site, to the staff and workmen of the Vendor / Sub-Vendor
and any third party, property and also for safety in general. Safety issues must be reported by
the Vendor to the Owner’s Representative within 4 hours after an incident has occurred followed
by a full report in writing within 24 hours.
43.2.6 Searching by Security Staff
Members of the Owner’s security staff at the gate and elsewhere will be authorized to search
any person entering or leaving the Site or during working hours, and also examine any
vehicle, locker, bag, basket, can, parcel, computer, laptop, gadgets, mobile, equipment or
other container in the possession of any person on the Site.
43.2.7 The Vendor shall and shall cause the Sub-Vendor and each of their personnel / workers to have
reviewed and been made aware of the contents of the Safety Manual and shall strictly adhere to
the Safety Manual, at all times. The Vendor shall additionally carry out such functions as are
required of it under the Safety Manual. Notwithstanding anything contained to the contrary
contained in the Purchase Order Documents, the Safety Manual is subject to changes that can be
made by the Owner / Owner’s Representative in their sole discretion and notified to the Vendor,
and all provisions relating to Safety Manual in the Purchase Order will apply to such amended
Safety Manual. It is further clarified that in the event of a conflict between the provisions of the
Safety Manual, and the other safety and health related provisions contained in the Purchase
Order Documents, the provisions which enforce stricter and safer measures shall be
implemented.
43.2.8 All the Vendor’s Equipment shall be such that it, prior to or during its use, is properly
maintained by the Vendor. Vendor shall be solely responsible for the safe working of such
equipment. The Vendor’s Equipment shall meet the Owner’s / Owner’s Representative’s safety
requirements.
43.2.9 Prior to starting any work at the Site or at such intervals as may be required by the Owner /
Owner’s Representatives, the Vendor will and shall ensure that the Vendor, and the Sub-Vendor
and each of their personnel / workers attend to the Owner / Owner’s Representatives safety
orientations, and such other safety courses, orientation and training as are detailed under the
Safety Manual. The Vendor will be required to comply with all rules, regulations and directions
of the Owner / Owner’s Representatives in relation to safety and security at and off Site. The
Vendor shall be solely responsible for executing its activities in a manner consistent with all
herein contained safety references and measures including under the Safety Manual, and shall
take whatever means necessary to ensure compliance on behalf of its Sub-Vendors.

43.2.10 The Vendor shall be explicitly responsible for adhering to and carrying out, and shall ensure that
Sub-Vendor and each of its and their personnel / workers also adhere to and carry out the
pollution control and environmental protection measures required by Owner / Owner’s
Representative under the Applicable Laws (including as required under the requisite permits
and consents issued by the Governmental Authority in this regard).
43.2.11 The Vendor shall provide to the Owner’s Representatives, prior to mobilization, a hazardous /
emergency communication plan and material safety data sheets for all hazardous classified
materials associated with its scope of supplies, equipment and materials under the Purchase
Order.
43.2.12 Whenever activities are being carried out above ground level and there is a reasonable risk of
injury to persons or property in the event of anything falling, adequate precautions shall be
taken to prevent such injury by railing of the danger area below and the display of “Keep Clear”
notices, and by the provision of safety sheets adequate to catch anything that might fall. If
anything is to be dropped/lifted deliberately from/to a height then in addition to the other
precautions set out in this sub-Clause, at least one personnel shall during the period of such
operation be posted outside the danger area whose sole duty shall be to ensure that no person /
vehicle / material / equipment enters such danger area.
43.2.13 The Vendor is required to report immediately to the Owner/Owner’s Representative any
accident or dangerous occurrence.
43.2.14 The Vendor shall enforce the use of and provide, at its own cost, to its staff /workmen and/ or to
its Sub-Vendor’s staff /workmen necessary safety appliances including helmets, safely belts, gas
masks etc. as required, depending upon the nature of the activities.
43.2.15 All the electrical equipment must have appropriately rated plug pins, and naked wire will not be
allowed.
43.2.16 The Vendor shall before bringing a source of ionizing radiation or a machine capable of
producing ionizing radiation on to the Site obtain the prior written approval in writing of the
Owner / Owner’s Representative on the procedures to be followed in the safe transportation,
receipt, registration, storage and use of such source of ionizing radiation. The Vendor shall
observe and shall ensure that all its staff /workmen and/ or its Sub-Vendor observe the
procedures so approved by Owner / Owner’s Representative.
43.2.17 The Owner/Owner’s Representative shall have right to inspect the observance of safety
regulations and use of safety appliances as set out in the Purchase Order Documents including
under the Safety Manual and when necessary take necessary measure to ensure that the Scope of
Supplies are executed in safe manner, and in compliance with such condition. It is clarified here
that no such inspection shall relieve the Vendor of its safety related obligations under the
Purchase Order.
43.2.18 The Vendor will also ensure such other shift timings and maximum hours of work per day /
week as provided under Applicable Laws are followed for their personnel / workers on the Site.
The Vendor shall ensure that, at its cost, proper and safe travel and lodging arrangements are
made for the Vendor and all its employees /workmen and/ or its Sub-Vendor visit to, and
return from the Site.
43.2.19 For the Scope of Supplies being executed at the Vendor’s, Sub-Vendor’s shop, factory, workshop
and any other place of business proper safety and health arrangements are made as required

under Applicable Laws and as per international industry standards applicable to the activity
being undertaken.
44.0 Assignment by Vendor
Any assignment or novation or disposal of the Purchase Order or of any rights, obligation or
other interest under the Purchase Order or creation of any Encumbrance in any manner in
whole or in part, by operation of law or otherwise, in each case by the Vendor, without the
prior written consent of Owner, shall not be permitted and shall be void.
45.0 Assignment by Owner
45.1 The Purchase Order Documents, and the rights and obligations or other interests of Owner
under the Purchase Order Documents shall be assignable or otherwise disposable in whole or
in part by Owner to any member of the Owner’s group of companies / affiliated company/s.
45.2 Vendor shall, at its own cost, do any acts and execute any documents necessary to effect such
assignment or disposal.
45.3 Vendor shall also include provisions of this Clause in each sub-order placed with Sub-
Vendors entitling itself to assign such sub-orders and the rights and obligations of Vendor
thereunder to any member of Owner’s group of companies/ affiliated company/s (if so
required by the Owner).
46.0 Audits
46.1 Owner, upon at least fifteen (15) days advance notice to Vendor, shall have the right to
inspect and audit, during normal business hours, all records and documents supporting
costs, expenditures, expenses, receipts and income, such as Vendor’s and the Sub-Vendor’s
accounts, books, records, invoices, cash vouchers, debit notes, price lists or similar
documentation with respect to its performance of the Purchase Order in each Financial Year
(i.e. period beginning from 1st April of a calendar year and ending on 31st March of the
following calendar year), within two (2) years (or such longer period as may be required in
exceptional circumstances) from the end of such Financial Year. Owner may access the
premises of Vendor and the Sub-Vendors in order to exercise its auditing rights.
47.0 Survival
47.1 Those provisions of the Purchase Order that by their very nature survive payments, final
Acceptance of Goods or termination of the Purchase Order shall remain in full force and
effect after such payment, acceptance or termination. In addition to and without limiting the
generality of the foregoing, Clauses [17.1](Defect Liability Renewal),[●] shall survive
termination or expiration of the Purchase Order or part thereof.
47.2 Any provision of the Purchase Order which, either expressly or by implication, survives the
termination or expiration of the Purchase Order shall be complied with by Owner and the
Vendor in the same manner as if the Purchase Order is valid and in force even after
termination or expiry.
48.0 Non-Waiver

48.1 Any failure or delay by Owner or the Owner’s Representative to insist upon strict
performance of any of the terms and conditions of the Purchase Order Documents, or exercise
any rights or remedies provided herein or in Applicable Law, or to properly notify Vendor of
Vendor’s breach of any provision of the Purchase Order Documents, or acceptance of Goods
or payment for any Goods, or review or approval of any design/ Drawings and Documents,
shall not release Vendor from any of its warranties, obligations under the Purchase Order
Documents and shall not be deemed to be a waiver of any of the rights or remedies available
to Owner including regardless when the Goods are shipped, received or accepted, or as to
any prior or subsequent default hereunder, nor shall any termination of the Purchase Order
operate as a waiver of any of the terms hereof.
48.2 A requirement that Vendor furnish Drawings and Documents for or subject to
“Authorization to Proceed”, “Approval”, “Acceptance”, “Review”, “Comment”, or any
combinations of such words or words of like import shall mean that Vendor shall, before
implementing the information in the Drawings and Documents, submit the drawing and
documents to and obtain resolution of any comments and authorization to proceed from
Owner / Owner’s Representative. Such review shall not mean that a complete check will be
performed by Owner/ / Owner’s Representative. No approval or failure to approve by
Owner/ Owner’s Representative shall (a) constitute acceptance or approval of design, tests,
or materials developed or selected by Vendor, nor (b) relieve Vendor from full compliance
with the requirements of the Purchase Order Documents, nor (c) reduce or alter Vendor’s
liability under the Purchase Order Documents.
49.0 Owner's Vendor Policy
The Vendor hereby acknowledges that it has received and read the latest updated Perstorp’s
Vendor Policy (as set out in schedule 2 hereto) and agrees to strictly comply with the same,
and as the same may be amended from time to time. The Vendor shall ensure that all
Vendor’s representatives (including the Sub-Vendors) comply with the Perstorp’s Vendor
Policy, and as the same may be amended from time to time (and as notified to the Vendor).
The Vendor shall submit a certificate of compliance in the form prescribed by the Owner
periodically, as may be required and in any case, within 15 days from the date of expiry of
each calendar year.
50.0 Notices
50.1 All notices under this Purchase Order shall be given in writing, in English language and shall
be deemed sufficiently given when delivered either in person or by email or by registered
mail/ registered air mail / courier addressed to the other Party at its address set forth below
(“Notified Address”):
Owner If to the Owner: (Specify) (Full address) & (email)

Attention of:
With a copy to: IPS Mehtalia Pvt Ltd (Specify)

(Specify) (Full address) & (email) Attention of
Vendor If to the Vendor: (Specify) (Full address) &

(email) Attention of:

With a copy to:
Permitted Method: Date on which Notice is deemed given:

Personal delivery / by When delivered at the Notified Address during the
hand business hours with proof of acknowledgment.
E-mail When the e-mail is sent and no delivery failure report
having been received.
Registered mail or 3 (three) Business Days after posting
registered air-mail or
courier
51.0 Communication and Reporting
51.1 The Owner’s Representative shall be the focal point of contact and reporting and escalation
procedure shall be conveyed to the Vendor.
51.2 The Vendor shall ensure submission of reports to the Owner’s Representative in relation to
Scope of Supplies in the manner and timeline prescribed by the Owner’s Representative
51.3 The Vendor shall make itself available for attending meetings / conference calls as organized
by the Owner’s Representative (which may also include other contractors, service providers,
vendors, authorities and the Owner) the agenda of which meetings may include discussions
and resolutions on timelines, work flow, co-ordination between different participants,
authorities, contractors and service providers and any changes / developments thereto,
progress of the Works / Project, crisis management, critical path discussions, resolution of
issues.
51.4 The Vendor shall have other reporting and co-ordination responsibilities as more particularly
provided under the Safety Manual.
51.5 The Vendor shall have limited access to the Project related document management system
(“Project DMS”) in the manner decided by the Owner’s Representative. All of the data and
documents in relation to the Project as may be developed or reviewed by the Vendor
including all Drawings and Documents, designs, calculations and background data shall be
promptly (and no later than seven Working Days) provided to the Owner’s Representative,
free of charge, for uploading into the Project DMS, unless permission is given by the Owner’s
Representative to the Vendor to upload such data and documents directly into the Project
DMS. At Acceptance of Goods as also at the end of the Defects Liability Period, all of such
final data and documents developed or reviewed by the Vendor shall be transferred to the
Owner’s Representative or uploaded to the Project DMS, as case may be, free of charge.
52.0 Press Releases
Vendor shall not (or permit any Sub-Vendors or any other Person to) put out any press or
other media release relating in any way to the Purchase Order without the prior written
consent of Owner.

53.0 Counter Parts
The Purchase Order may be executed in two counterparts, each of which, when executed and
delivered, shall constitute an original of the Purchase Order.For and on behalf of
Perstorp Industries India Private Limited
By____________________
Name:
Date:
Designation:
Agreed, Accepted and Confirmed

For and on behalf of [ƒull name of Vendor]
BY____________________
Name:
Date:
Designation:(Authorised Representative)

SCHEDULE [1]
BANK GUARANTEES
Part A:
Proforma of Performance Guarantee
To,
Dear Sirs,
M/s. ……………………………………. (“Vendor”) have executed Purchase Order Document

dated [●] for undertaking Works for Perstorp Industries India Private Limited (“Owner”).
[The Contract provide that the Vendor shall provide an Performance Guarantee for a sum of
Rs. ……………. (Rupees ……………………………..). in the form of performance bank
guarantee executed by a reputed scheduled commercial bank, undertaking full responsibility
to indemnify].
The Vendor have approached us and at their request and in consideration of the promises
we.……………………………………….. having our office at
………………………………….have agreed to give such guarantee as hereinafter mentioned.
1. We………………………………………………………..hereby undertake and agree with

you, the Owner, that if default shall be made by the Vendor in performing any of the
terms and conditions of the Purchase Order Document or in payment of money payable
to the Owner or failure by the Vendor to fulfill its Defects Liability Services, or any Losses
suffered / likely to be suffered by the Owner in this regard, we shall merely on demand
without demur or protest pay to you, the Owner, the said amount of Rupees
………………………………. Only (“said Sum”) or such portion thereof not exceeding the
said Sum as you may from time to time require.
2. We, ……………………………………………..further agree with you, the Owner, that you

will have the fullest liberty without our consent and without affecting in any manner our
obligations hereunder to vary any of the terms and conditions of the Purchase Order
Document executed with the Vendor or to extend time of performance by the Vendor
from time to time or to postpone for any time or from time to time any of the powers,
rights and entitlements exercisable by you against the Vendor and to forbear or enforce
any of the terms and conditions of the Purchase Order Document and we shall not be
relieved from our liability by reason of any such variation, postponement or extension
being granted to the Vendor or for any forbearance, act or omission on your part or any
indulgence by you to the Vendor or by any such matter or thing whatsoever which under
the law relating to sureties would but for this provision have effect of so releasing us.
3. Your, the Owner’s, right to recover the said sum of Rs. ……………….
(Rupees………………… ….) from us in the manner aforesaid will not be affected or
suspended by reason of the fact that any dispute or disputes have been raised by the
Vendor and/or that any dispute or disputes are pending before any officer, arbitrator/s,
tribunal or court.
4. The guarantee herein contained shall not be determined or affected by the liquidation or

winding up, dissolution, restructuring or change of constitution or insolvency of the

Vendor or any proceedings in this regard but shall in all respects and for all purposes be
binding and operative until payment of all money due to you in respect of such
guarantees is paid.
5. Our liability under this guarantee is restricted to Rupees ……………………. Our

guarantee shall remain in force until ………………… unless a claim or demand in writing
is made against us under this Guarantee before the expiry of three months from the
aforesaid date, i.e. before …………….day of ………20………….. post which all your rights
under the said guarantee shall be extinguished and we shall be relieved and discharged
from all liabilities thereunder.
6. We have power to issue this guarantee in your favour under Memorandum and Articles
of Association and the undersigned has full power to do so under the Power of Attorney
dated …………………………….granted to him by the Bank.
7. We …………………………….lastly undertake not to revoke this guarantee during its

currency except with your previous consent in writing. All claims that we may have
under this guarantee shall be enforced and acted upon against the Vendor, and we shall
have no claims for payment of money or otherwise against you, the Owner.
Yours faithfully,
…………………………..Bank
By its Constituted Attorney
Signature of a person duly authorized to sign on behalf of the Bank

Part B:
Proforma of Advance Bank Guarantee
This deed of Guarantee made this……………………………. day of

………………….…….………between ………………...…………………………………… and
wherever the context so requires include its successors and permitted assignees hereinafter
called “The Surety” and ………………………….……. a Company registered under the
Companies Act of [●] and having its Registered Office at
…………………………………………….. and wherever the context so requires includes its
successors and permitted assignees, hereinafter called “Owner”.
Whereas M/s. …………………………………………………………a Company registered under

the Companies Act of [●] having its registered office at ……………………………………………
(wherever applicable) and wherever the context so requires includes its successors and
permitted assignees, hereinafter called “Vendor”, has undertaken to carry out the Scope of
Supplies for the Owner under the Purchase Order Document dated [●] (“Contract”).
And whereas the OWNER has agreed to make an advance payment of Rs.
………………………. being an amount equivalent to 10% of the TOTAL ORDER VALUE on
[insert date] as provided in Contract to the Vendor carrying no interest.
Now this deed witnessed that in consideration of the said advance (or any balance thereof)
made by Owner to Vendor, the Surety hereby guarantees the payment of the advance by
Vendor, and undertakes to pay the Owner merely on demand without demur or protest the
upto said sum of Rs. ………………………….. in accordance with the following conditions:
A. Surety hereby gives an irrevocable guarantee and declares that its liability under this
bond/deed shall extend to the payment of upto the whole of the amount viz. Rs.
…………………… (“said Sum”) paid as advance as provided for in Contract as the said
advance.
B. This guarantee shall remain in force and effect so long as the said advance or any part
thereof remains outstanding and shall expire and become ineffectual only after
[Acceptance of Goods as certified by the Owner] and upon intimation thereof being given
by Owner to the Surety, in which event, the Surety shall be discharged by Owner.
C. We, the Surety, hereby undertake and agree with you, the Owner, that if default shall be
made by the Vendor in performing any of the terms and conditions of the Purchase Order
Document (including likely breach or breach of the timelines for [Acceptance of Goods as
certified by the Owner]) or in payment of money payable to the Owner, we shall merely
on demand without demur or protest pay to you, the Owner, the said amount of Rupees
………………………………. Only (“said Sum”) or such portion thereof not exceeding the
said Sum as you may from time to time require.
D. The Surety shall not be discharged or released from the Guarantee by any arrangement
made between Owner and Vendor with or without the consent of the Surety or by any
alteration in the right and obligations of the parties to the Contract or by indulgence,
forbearance, whether as to payment, time, performance or otherwise.
E. The Guarantee herein contained shall not be determined or affected by the liquidation or
winding up, dissolution, restructuring or change of constitution or insolvency of the

Vendor or any proceedings in this regard but shall in all respects and for all purposes be
binding and operative until payment of all money due to you in respect of such
guarantee is paid.
F. The Guarantee shall come into force from the date Vendor receives from Owner the said
advance.
All claims that the Surety may have under this deed shall be enforced and acted upon against
the Vendor, and the Surety shall have no claims for payment of money or otherwise against
the Owner.
Notwithstanding anything stated above, the liability of the Surety under the guarantee is
restricted to Rs. …………………..…………………………… (Rupees
……………………………….……………………) and this guarantee will remain in force up to
……………………………………….. in the first instance. However if the Contract for which
this guarantee is given is not completed or fully performed (including if [Acceptance of
Goods as certified by the Owner] remains outstanding), the Surety (bank) hereby undertakes
to the Owner, upon instructions from the Owner to further extend the Guarantee (by
providing a notice of atleast one week in advance of the date mentioned above) till such time
as is required to fulfil Contract (including till such time the [Acceptance of Goods as certified
by the Owner] remains outstanding).
By its Constituted Attorney
Signature of a person duly authorized to sign on behalf of the Bank

SCHEDULE 2: PERSTORP VENDOR POLICY
Perstorp’s unique success molecule consists of the Group’s three most important strengths, its
core values: focused innovation, reliability and responsibility. These core values in various
combinations pervade Perstorp’s working methods and solutions, and always create Winning
Formulas.
Perstorp regards the application of its core principles and its values of prime importance in
decisions to enter into or continue relationships with suppliers, contractors and customers
and to participate in joint ventures. Please read Annex 1 or visit our webpage
https://www.perstorp.com/en/Responsibility/Code_of_conduct/ for more information on
Perstorp`s core principles and values.
In light of the above, we appreciate receiving your confirmation by signing this document
that in doing business with Perstorp you comply with the following conditions:
 Your products and services meet high health, safety and environmental standards
(certifiable: ISO 9001:2008, 14001, OSHAS 18001);
 Your employees recruited, hired and promoted on the sole basis of suitability for their
job;
 Harassment of any kind and exploitation of child labor is prohibited (a child is 15 years or
younger); You will comply with the provisions of the Child and Adolescent Labour
(Prohibition and Regulation) Act, 1986 and other labour laws in relation to prohibition of
engagement of child labour and ‘adolescents’ (‘adolescents’ means a person who has
completed his fifteenth year of age but has not completed his eighteenth year).
 Bribery and any other form of unethical business practice is prohibited;
 All your business transactions with Perstorp are accurately, completely recorded, and
guarantee legal and fiscal compliance;
 You adhere to the laws and fundamental rights in your country, to (supra) national
export regulations and other laws and regulations that may apply; and in addition,
 The products that you sell to Perstorp are free of conflict minerals cassiterite, columbite-
tantalite, gold, wolframite and the derivatives tantalum, tin and tungsten originating
from the Democratic Republic of Congo or adjoining countries in accordance with the US
Securities Exchange Commission Rule of Conflict Minerals issued on August 22, 2012 and
any updates thereof.
You are kindly requested to sign the Vendor Policy at the bottom of this letter and to return
this letter to Perstorp.
Please inform us if, for any reason, you are not able to sign the declaration, in which case we
would like to discuss how we can ensure that the business between us does not breach these
specifications.

To be signed by supplier:
Herewith I confirm that in doing business with Perstorp the below Company complies with
the above mentioned conditions.
Company
Name
Function
Date
Signature
Annex 1
In the spirit of the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD)
Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises, the Perstorp Principles set out the core principles
and values that should underlie the conduct of all Perstorp companies in order to fulfill
Perstorp`s ambitions. In this respect the Perstorp Principles apply equally to our business
transactions throughout the world and to the individual behavior of employees in conducting
Perstorp's business:
1. Our business principles
Business ethics
Perstorp follows the laws and agreements in the countries where the company is active and
requires that suppliers and business partners also comply. Perstorp’s relations with business
partners shall be characterized by honesty and openness.
Open & honest communication

Perstorp encourages continuous communication with the company’s various interested
parties. All communication shall follow applicable legislation, regulations and norms.
Communication shall be transparent, honest and proactive. The CEO, CFO and heads of the
respective Business Group and Corporate Functions are the company’s spokespersons and
have the right to make statements on behalf of the Group. Other managers are spokespersons
for their respective areas of responsibility.
Accounting & reporting

All business transactions are recorded in accordance with the company’s accounting
principles and local legislation, and accounting shall in no way be misleading. Perstorp’s
financial accounting shall be open, truthful, relevant and understandable.
Customer relations
Perstorp shall always handle questions and any complaints from our customers in a fast,
efficient and correct way.
Suppliers
Current and potential suppliers shall be assessed based on the contents of Perstorp`s code of
conduct
Community commitment
Perstorp shall be a good, responsible and appreciated member of the community in the
societies where we run our operations. This can mean involvement in community activities or

support for the community in other appropriate ways.
Conflicts of interest
All employees are expected to avoid situations in which their personal, financial or other
interests can come into conflict, or can be considered to come into conflict, with the
company’s interests. Should such a conflict arise, it must be reported at once to the immediate
manager.
Competition & cartels

All functions and employees must be aware of, and observe, all laws that concern
competition and not participate in any illegal anti-competitive cooperation. For detailed
instructions, see the Perstorp Competition policy.
Confidential information
Employees are not allowed to use their knowledge of the company, its products or business
transactions in contexts other than for the good of the company. Every employee must follow
the regulations on confidentiality of information, which is owned by the company and our
business partners, and is regulated by our Security policy.
Gifts & bribes

Perstorp shall not offer customers, potential customers, authorities or other business partners
any form or remuneration or reward that contravenes laws or good business practice.
Perstorp does not allow bribes in any form. Perstorp personnel shall not accept payment, gifts
or any other type of remuneration from third parties that in any way can influence, or be
considered to influence, their objectivity in business decisions.
Political affiliations
Perstorp takes a neutral position in terms of party politics and political candidates. The
Perstorp brand is not to be used to support political parties or candidates. Consequently, we
neither contribute to political parties or organizations, or to individual politicians.
2. Products & Environment
Resource management:
Perstorp’s products and production processes are designed so that energy and raw materials
are used in a resource-efficient way and that waste and residual products are minimized.
New products & processes

Environmental, health and safety aspects must always be considered during the development
of new products and processes. Perstorp shall always provide updated information on
products’ possible effects on health and the environment.
Precautionary principle:
Perstorp applies the precautionary principle by striving to avoid materials and methods that
can constitute an environmental or health risk when good alternatives are available. It is
Perstorp’s responsibility to supply customers/business partners with relevant information on
how products may/should be used and how, and for what, they should not be used.
Perstorp’s products shall live up to the agreed and legal norms, and be labelled with health
warnings and product safety and information markings.
Environmental reporting:
Perstorp regularly examines, follows up and reports environmental impact, with special

emphasis on evaluating the potential risks of current and future products and operations.
Perstorp works constantly to reduce negative effects on the environment in accordance with
the company’s commitment to sustainable development.
3. Working Conditions
Working environment
It is Perstorp’s responsibility to offer safe and physically and psychologically healthy working
conditions for all employees, and to forbid and take action against all types of harassment.
Non-discrimination & diversity

Working hours & overtime

Training & further education

Preventive health care

Zero tolerance for accidents

Perstorp shall maintain and develop an optimal health and safety standard at all locations
where the company is active and thereby minimize possible risks. Within Perstorp, zero
Use of alcohol or drugs

alcohol or drugs. Any use of alcohol or drugs that can affect employees’ work is forbidden.
4. Human Rights
Child labour
Perstorp does not tolerate any form of child labor. The minimum age of employment within
Forced or slave labour

Perstorp does not tolerate any form of forced labor or slave labor, or work carried out by
Union activities


Compressor
Appendix 3.5: Bill of Material
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. Client Perstorp
Consulting Engineers • Construction Management • Commissioning & Qualification Project No. MBD18019
B101-109 First Floor, Kailash Vaibhab Industrial Complex, Park Site, Vikhroli (W), Mumbai 400 079 Chkd / App MY / NV
Document Title Bill Of Material for Thermo Vapour Re Compressor Rev 0
Document No. IPS-MBD18019-ME-394 Date 30-Sep-19
Bill Of Material For Thermo Vapour Re Compressor ( TVR )

All Figures are in INR
Sr. No. Item Description / Tag Nos. Tag Nos. Unit Qty. Unit Price Total Price Remark
(Rs.) (Rs.)
Supply of Thermo Vapour Re Compressor as per Project Technical
A. Specifications No. IPS-MBD18019-ME-394-40KTPA-DE-Specifications
for Thermo Vapour Re Compressor( E-3021 ) - Rev. 4
1 Thermo Vapour Re Compressor E-3021 No. 1
2 Storage of Materials for 6 months after agreed delivery date, if required. NA Month 6
3 Supply of Mandatory spares (Use SPIR Format Document) Lot Lot

Recommended O&M spares for 2 years normal operation with their unit
4 Lot Lot
rates and quantities (Use SPIR Format Document)
Start up and Commissioning Spare Parts, if any (Use SPIR Format
5 Lot Lot
Document)
Basic price for A 0.00
Add GST ( SGST/CGST/IGST) @ 18 %
Total price for A
B Packing,Fowarding and Transportation
1 Packing, Forwarding & Loading charges Lot
2 Local Tranportataion ( BY PERSTORP ) Lot
3 Transit Insurance ( BY PERSTORP ) Lot
4 Add GST ( SGST/CGST/IGST) @ 18 % Lot
Total Price For B 0.00
Total Price A+B 0.00
C For Import Materials
1 Local port handeling charges -Import Lot
2 FOB (Free On Board)-Import Lumpsum
3 Sea Freight +Insurance -Import Lot
4 Landing charges +Custom Duty +Special Duty +IGST - Import Lumpsum
5 Landed Cost- Import Lot
6 Inland tranportataion Lot
7 Transit Insurance Lot
Total Cost for C 0.00
D. Supervision & Commissioining services
Per Diem rate for Supervision of Installation/Erection, Testing &
Commissioning at site which includes travel,local conveyance,lodging
1 ,boarding& insurance charges of Engineer) (Requirement for total number
of days shall be mutually discussed and agreed at the time of Techno-
commercial negotiation)
2 Add GST ( SGST/CGST/IGST) @ 18 %
3 Any other applicable Taxes/Duites (please specify if any) - -
Total Cost for D 0.00
E Final Documentation
1 Final Documentation as per Project Technical Specifications Lot

Total Cost for E 0.00
F Grand Total Amount(A+B+C+D+E)
IPS - Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. Client PERSTORP
B101-109 First Floor, Kailash Vaibhav Industrial Complex, Park Site, Vikhroli (W), Mumbai 400 079
Document Title SPIR FORM DOCUMEMT
##
SPIR FORM DOCUMENT
SPARE PARTS AND INTERCHANGEABILITY RECORD SPARE PARTS ORDER Nr. 19 P.O. NO.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USERS EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 20
EQUIPMENT Nr.
(TAG ITEM Nr.)
A - RETURN THE ORIGINAL SPIR SHEETS TOGETHER WITH: EQUIPMENT MFRC. 21
- LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL STATING TERMS AND CONDITIONS, FCA OR F.O.B. POINT AND PRICE VALIDITY
- SECTIONAL DRAWINGS AND LIST OF PARTS SHOWING ALL PARTS NAMED IN COL. 8 FOR PROPER INDENTIFICATION
B - THIS FORM SERVES AS A PERMANENT PROJECT RECORD. USE THE XLS TEMPLATE FORM TO FILL THIS LIST.
C - TO FILL THE SPIR FORM IN THE RIGHT WAY PLEASE REFER TO DOCUMENT 3710-ZZ-PC-002A - FILLING OF SPIR FORM PROCEDURE
1
MANUFACT
18
MODEL Nr.
NAME :
URER'S
ADDRESS :
SUPPLIER NAME
TELEPHONE : 22 PREPARED BY 23 PHONE 24 QUOTATION Nr. 25 DATE
AND ADDRESS
E-MAIL :
2
START UP AND
COMMISSIONING /
MANUFACTURER'S PART
MATERIAL (CHECK 1) ERECTION AND CAPITAL SPARE PARTS TWO YEARS SPARE PARTS TOTAL PRICE
SHIPMENT WEEKS
SERIAL Nr.
TOTAL Nr. OF IDENTICAL
CONSTRUCTION SPARE
SECTIONAL
*NOTES (26)
PARTS
PARTS ON THIS SPIR
NUMBER
DRAWING AND PART
UNIT OF MEASURE
SUB-SUPPLIER NAME (IF
RECOMMENDED
RECOMMENDED
RECOMMENDED
RECOMMENDED
DESCRIPTION OF PART REFERENCE ASTM ANY)
UNIT PRICE
APPROVED
APPROVED
APPROVED
APPROVED
NUMBERS (ATTACH
TO SPIR)
JIS
DIN
3
Nr. OF 13 A 13 B 13 C 16 17
4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 6A 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15
UNITS
A
5 ITEM Nr. OTHER DESCRIPTION / COMMENTS 29 SUB-TOTAL THIS PAGE

EQUIPMENT P.O.
30 GRAND TOTAL
(MFRC. ORDER
*NOTES
31 CHECKED BY
AND
Nr.)
27-REV. 32 SHEET OF
34-SUPPLIER SIGNATURE 35-CLIENT/OWNER SIGNATURE
6
28-DATE 33 SPIR Nr.:
26
Compressor
Appendix 3.6: Delivery schedule with dispatch instruction
This shall be discussed & freezed during Bidding Process.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Appendix 3.7: Drawings and Documents
Please refer the Technical Specifications of Thermo Vapour Re Compressor - Doc No. IPS-
MBD18019-ME-394-40KTPA-DE-Specifications for Thermo Vapour Re Compressor ( TVR ) —
Rev. 4 attached with this RFQ document.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Appendix 3.8: Codes and Standards
Please refer the Technical Specifications of Thermo Vapour Re Compressor - Doc No. IPS-
MBD18019-ME-394-40KTPA-DE-Specifications for Thermo Vapour Re Compressor ( TVR ) —
Rev. 4 attached with this RFQ document.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Appendix-3.9: Safety Manual
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
DOCU ME N T NO . IP S - MBD 1 80 19 - GN - 009
SAFETY MANUAL
Project Elephant
R6 May 03, 19 For Engineering VS SLT NV

R5 Apr 16, 19 Revised & Reissued VS SLT NV
R4 Mar 15, 19 Revised & Reissued VS SLT NV
Work in progress document shared with
R3 Nov 12, 18 VS SLT NV
Perstorp in Feb 19, 2019
R2 Oct 10, 18 Issued for Tender VS SSK NV
R1 Oct 03, 18 Second Issue VS SSK NV
R0 Aug 14, 18 First Issue VS SSK NV
This document has been prepared for the above project or named part thereof and should not be relied upon or used for any other project without prior written consent from
IPS Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. IPS Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. accepts no responsibility or liability for the consequence of this document being used for a purpose other than the purposes for
which it was commissioned. Any person using or relying on the document for such other purpose agrees, and will by such use or reliance be taken to confirm his agreement
to indemnify IPS Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd for all loss or damage resulting there from IPS Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. accepts no responsibility or liability for this document to any party other
than the person by whom it was commissioned.
Document Title Safety Manual Made / App VS /NV
Document No. IPS-MBD18019-GN-009 Rev R6
Date May 03, 19 Page 2 of 93
Index
1.0 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 3
2.0 Project Details .................................................................................................................................... 3
3.0 Company HSE Policy ........................................................................................................................ 4
4.0 Safety Manual .................................................................................................................................... 4
5.0 Management Responsibility ............................................................................................................ 6
6.0 Procedure for Recognition and Consequences .............................................................................. 9
7.0 Safety Organization & Responsibilities ....................................................................................... 11
8.0 Site Safety Management ................................................................................................................. 18
9.0 Code of Conduct .............................................................................................................................. 20
10.0 General Site Information ................................................................................................................ 21
11.0 Life saving Rules (LSR)................................................................................................................... 22
12.0 PPE (Personal Protective Equipment) ........................................................................................... 42
13.0 Concrete Work .................................................................................................................................. 44
14.0 Structural Works .............................................................................................................................. 44
15.0 Radiography ..................................................................................................................................... 44
16.0 Electrical Safety ................................................................................................................................ 45
17.0 Fire Safety ......................................................................................................................................... 47
18.0 Explosives ......................................................................................................................................... 49
19.0 House Keeping ................................................................................................................................. 49
20.0 Traffic Rules ..................................................................................................................................... 50
21.0 Environmental Protection ............................................................................................................... 51
22.0 Ergonomics ....................................................................................................................................... 52
23.0 Occupational Health ........................................................................................................................ 52
24.0 Occupational Heat Stress ................................................................................................................ 54
25.0 Emergency Response ....................................................................................................................... 55
26.0 Reporting risks, accidents and near miss cases............................................................................ 56
27.0 Training Program ............................................................................................................................. 57
28.0 Monitoring and Follow-up ............................................................................................................. 62
29.0 Definitions ........................................................................................................................................ 65
30.0 Appendix – 1 Site Logistic Plan ..................................................................................................... 67
31.0 Site Emergency Plan ........................................................................................................................ 67
32.0 Safety Forms and Checklists .......................................................................................................... 67
Exhibits .......................................................................................................................................................... 68
1.0 Exhibit 1 — Contractor Safety Data Form..................................................................................... 68
2.0 Exhibit 2— Monthly Contractor HSE Statistics Report .............................................................. 71
3.0 Exhibit 3 — Notice of Safety Manual Non-Compliance ............................................................. 72
4.0 Exhibit 4 — Warning Letter for Safety Manual Non-Compliance ............................................ 73
5.0 Exhibit 5 — Written Notice of Temporary Job Suspension ....................................................... 74
6.0 Exhibit 6 — Safety Observation Report ........................................................................................ 75
7.0 Exhibit 7 — Accident/Incident Investigation Report .................................................................. 76
8.0 Exhibit 8 — First Aid Register ........................................................................................................ 82
9.0 Exhibit 9 —IPSM-Health Safety Risk Assessment Plan ............................................................. 83
10.0 Exhibit 10 — Life Saving Rules...................................................................................................... 93
IPS Doc 009 - Safety Manual - R6

1.0 Introduction
This Project Safety Manual is a description of M/s. IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. for Health & Safety
(HSE) Policy, the organizational structure and responsibilities, procedures implemented and
maintained to ensure that projects are executed safely and in total compliance with the
contract safety requirement.
The requirement of the Safety Manual is applicable to everyone who working at the
construction site with responsibility for implementing and maintaining the systems referred
in this manual.
The contents of this manual are authorized and approved by IPS-M management and must
be followed at all times by all employees on all construction sites.
2.0 Project Details
a wide variety of industries and applications.
The current project is for setting up a Green field facility at Sayakha in Bharuch district,
Gujarat. As a part of the business requirements in India, Perstorp intends to set up a new
production unit.
1. Client : Perstorp Industries India Pvt. Ltd

3. Perstorps representative : IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd.
4. Location :
Gujarat, India
5. Latitude : 24º46’57”(N)
6. Longitude : 72º48’25”(E)
11. Min. RH : 38%
12. Max. RH : 73%
13. Site elevation (Above sea level) : 16 Mtrs.
14. Basic wind speed : 44 Mtr/Sec

3.0 Company HSE Policy
IPS-M is committed to a policy of safe working conditions and practices, for all persons
employed on construction sites, in full compliance with contractual and global best safety
practices.
Keep the following recommendations in mind for how to communicate policies and
procedures to Staff and Contractors:
1. Inform employees and Contractors up-front

2. At the start of the project, let employees/contractors know that the company will work
on developing (or updating) company policies and procedures, any time during the
project lifecycle.
3. Explain why the information is important and relevant, and what impact it will have on
them.
4. Distribute the completed Safety Manual to staff/contractor, either in a hard copy or
advise them how to access the document electronically.
5. It is important for everyone to read the document to become familiar with the company’s
policies.
6. Request each employee/contractor to sign-off on having read the document.
7. A copy of the sign-off should be placed in the file.
IPS-M management is committed to take all necessary actions to promote good health &
prevent accidents, injuries and any adverse effects on its employees, contractor, and its
equipment and to protect environment in which its activities are carried out. It is the
responsibility of all Managers, Engineers, Supervisors and employees/contractors to
understand their role in fulfilling this policy to comply with all Safety requirements.
The company management is committed to continuous improvement in our Safety systems

through periodic audits, necessary training, encourage new ideas and employees
participation of regular management reviews of the Safety system.
4.0 Safety Manual
This safety manual has been specifically prepared for M/s Perstorp Industries India Pvt Ltd.
Project-Elephant. It aims to reflect the OH&S policies and practices expected to be performed
by the Construction Management team personnel and their contractors.
This document is authorized for release and usage by the Safety Manager of IPS-M, being the
undersigned and shall be considered as the controlled copy when the ‘Uncontrolled copy’
watermark is not seen.
4.1 Purpose
The Purpose of these procedures is to provide a safety approach during construction of

project for
1. Prohibit incidents and accidents for employees and contractors.

2. Integrating health, safety and environment protection measures with construction
activities including its surveillance.
3. Creating an awareness of occupational health & safety together with protection of
environment, at every level.

4. Be an industry leader in the construction management of occupational health and safety.

5. Promoting participation of all personnel working in construction sites in the
improvement of working conditions and of environment.
6. And thereby get tangible and intangible benefits to the organization and the employees.
4.2 Scope
The procedures incorporated in this document details out the requirements & codes to keep
all work areas safe from incidents & accidents. Strict implementation of these guidelines will
also ensure occupational health and safety of all persons working at site and help in
protecting the environment. So as to implement occupational health and safety procedures
by everyone who is going to work at site.
4.3 Detailed Actions
To monitor implementation of Health and Safety by employees and contractors, the

following actions shall be taken by Safety Manager at construction site:
1. Make sure that all people at site are working according to Perstorp Life Saving Rules and
minimum requirements for Responsibly Care
2. Physical inspection at site and recording of any violation of Safety practices, stopping of
any operation, if considered potentially dangerous.
3. Review/approval of Safety documents submitted by contractors.
4. Arrange First Aid Box and display a list of hospitals and important telephone numbers,
emergency services available, fire fighting appliances in office and warehouse etc.
5. Arrange audit of Safety Activities. The Project Manager shall nominate the team for such
an audit. The audits shall be conducted at intervals decided by the Project Manager
preferably monthly once and Fortnight Safety Compliance audits. Line management in
line with Safety Engineer will conduct these audits.
6. Daily site safety reviews and Formal weekly Safety site inspection would be carried out
by Safety Personnel.
7. Active participation of periodic Safety meeting constituted by clients representative and
monitor actions taken thereof and conduct awareness programmes for promotion of
health, safety and environment at site.
8. Arrange to install Safety posters and Slogans at strategic places.
9. Participate in inquiries to assess the reasons of accidents including corrective and
preventive actions thereof. Safety Engineer and Safety Manager will lead the
accident/incident investigation process.

5.0 Management Responsibility
5.1 Company’s HSE Objectives
The company management believes that pursuit of high standards of health and safety is an
integral part of efficient management in the construction industry.
Ensure that everyone under their supervision has knowledge of this document.
The ultimate aim of the company management is to have accident free projects. To achieve
the objective the following will be meticulously followed by everyone.
1. Monitoring and Review: Safety performance will be monitored throughout the project.
The statistics will be reviewed and efforts will be made towards continuous
improvement. The data shall be collected by Construction Manager which will be further
reviewed by Safety Manager.
2. Hazard Identification and Risk Assessment: Hazard identification and risk assessment
will be carried out on a regular basis and necessary control measures will be
implemented. It should be carried out at the beginning of a new job. It should be the
responsibility of Executor, Area owner and SWP Authorizer.
3. Safe Practices: All construction activities will be carried out according to Perstorp Life
Saving Rules and minimum requirements for Responsibly Care and using efficient & safe
work practices. Work should be carried out with clear construction plans and as per
safety guidelines.
4. Reporting: All accidents and incidents will be investigated and reported to Management
and Client.
5. Training and Awareness: Everyone who is going to work at site will be trained and
made aware of the company’s Safety Manual requirements and that of the project. The
Job Specific training for sub-contractors is the responsibility of contractor which IPS-M
will make sure, followed by conducting Test. Also Refer for Contractor and Third Party
Management
5.2 Leadership and Administration
Effective leadership and program administration are vital to the success of Safety and
Health– loss control program.
The Safety- department should organize weekly safety meeting and discuss the various
unsafe acts and subsequent corrective and preventive actions taken. The purpose is to ensure
that everyone under their supervision has knowledge of Safety manual & its objective.
Perstorp will be invited and it will be mandatory for contractor to join the meeting and
review the safety system of work day to day basis. The minutes of the meeting and attendees
should be recorded and necessary compliance will be made before next meeting. Weekly
safety meetings should be conducted after the formal site safety inspections. Contractor line
engineers and supervisors must attend the inspections & meetings. Primarily RCM will be
responsible and leader for this action. However, Safety manager on his behalf is also
authorized to take up the lead in this activity.
5.3 Local Regulation References
Construction manager is responsible for making sure that all legal requirements are met.
1. The Factories Act, 1948

2. Workmen Compensation Act, 1923

3. Indian Electricity Act,
4. Indian Boiler Act, 1923
5. Water (Prevention & Control Pollution) Act, 1974
6. The Environmental (Protection) Act, 1986
7. The Hazardous Wastes (Management & Handling) Rules-1989
8. The Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and
Condition of service) Act, 1996
5.4 The Factories Act
The factories act are very clearly and specifically lays down the various safe guards and
provides for specific safety systems to ensure safety on & around different machines & their
work surrounding. For example
1. Section 21: it provides that dangerous parts of different machines will be securely fenced
or guarded.
2. Section 22: it lays down that where it becomes necessary to make adjustment in machines
and plant while they are working or to oil or grease machines in motion, this work will
be down by a specially trained scale worker.
3. Section 23: it forbids employment’s of young person on dangerous machines.
4. Section 24: it requires that device for cutting OFF power during emergencies from
running machines should be readily accessible.
5. Section 27: this section forbids employment of Child labour and women on cotton –
openers; this provision is relevant for cotton Ginning M/cs.
6. Section 28: it deals with upkeep, maintenance & six monthly testing by a competent
persons of every Hoist or Lift
7. Section 29: this deals with upkeep, maintenance & yearly testing and tagging by a
competent person of every lifting machine, chair rope & other lifting tackles. A tagging
system shall be implemented for fitness of equipment.
8. Section 30: it relates to revolving machines such as Grinders, Fly-wheels, Hydro
extractors, pulleys and cages etc., Their Peripheral and surface speeds are not to be
exceeded beyond safe limits.
9. Section 32: it provides that –
a. All Steps, Stairs, gangways & floors shall be well maintained & kept free from
obstruction.
b. Safe means of access to every place of work will be provided.
c. Safe means of working at such places & higher levels of work will be provided.
10. Section 33: This section requires that all sumps, vats, pits, tanks, vessels or opening in the
ground that pose a risk by virtue of its depth or contents will be securely fenced, covered
& barricaded to avoid any accidental fall in them.
11. Section 34: This provision for bids lifting of heavy weight so as to injure the health of a
male or female worker. Limits for mass weight to be lifted by an adult male or female
worker will be 25kg. Contractor to make necessary arrangement of handling equipment.
12. Section 35: It requires that during job cutting, welding, machines, Twinning, Chipping
etc. Eyes of the operator and those working in the close proximity of such operations will
be fully protected by goggles and screens etc.
13. Section 36: It is an important provision and its implementation ensures safety of worker
in confined places. Refer 11.4 section of this manual for Confined Space Safe Procedure.
a. This section requires that no portable light or any other electrical equipment, to be
used in confined space.
b. Should work on more than 24 volts supply and if any flammable gas, fumes or dust
is likely to be present in the confined space, only flame proof hand lamps to be used.

c. Another important part of this provision is that some of the workers engaged in such
operations should know how to administer artificial respiration in the event of an
emergency.
5.5 Legal Requirements of Accidents
Building and other Construction Workers Act, 1996 and central rules framed lay down the
following requirement:
1. Accidents causing loss of life and disabling a worker for more than 48 hours to be
reported within 4 hours including in case of fatality and 72 hours in other cases to:
a. Regional Labour Commission (Central).

b. Board with which the worker is enrolled as beneficiary.
c. Director General.
d. Next of kin.
e. Police Station in case of Death or disablement for more than 10 days.
f. District Magistrate.
2. In case of accidents causing disablement subsequently results in death, it will be

communicated to authorities within 72 hours. Cases of dangerous occurrences to be
reported.
3. Collapse or failure of lifting appliances.

4. Collapse of soil, wall, floor structure or platform.
5. Explosion of received vessel.
6. Fire and explosion causing damage to any place.
7. Collapse, toppling or collision of transport.
5.6 Health Check-Up
Contractor need to submit fitness certificate for all personnel going to engage in construction
activities. Employees shall be medically fit and enjoy general good health and also to comply
with health & medical fitness requirements of government authorities and clients before
entering the construction site. Health records would be maintained appropriately. Contractor
to make tie up with the local hospital to provide medical facility in case of any injury. First
Aid facility will be made available at site, the First Aid treatment will be given by OHC First
Aider.
5.7 Records
Ensure records, formats and register of various activities to be maintained by construction

Contractors at site.
1. Contact person
2. Complete list of all personnel working at site including full name, profession, address
and birth date (preferably also information about next of kin in case of an emergency)
3. Induction programme given (Refer Section II - HSE Forms – 2.0 Safety Induction)
4. Health check-up,
5. Training,
6. Tool Box training
7. SOR (Safety Observations) Unsafe act/condition,
8. Electrical equipment’s inspection

9. J.S.A. (Job Safety Analysis)

10. Man hours calculation
11. Accident / Incident, Near Miss report
12. Monthly Safety checklist cum compliance report,
13. E.L.C.B. (Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker) register
14. Work Permits
6.0 Procedure for Recognition and Consequences
6.1 Safety Adherence Policy
Contractors are required to comply with the applicable Safety Manual. The procedures below
outline a three-step, progressively administered system to correct compliance problems.
Safety Manager and Safety Engineer will ensure the compliance management. However, if in
the opinion of the Perstorp, non-compliance issues are considered to be severe, Contractors’
contracts may be terminated at any time.
6.2 Action Level One
If a Contractor fails to comply with an applicable Safety Manual, IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. will
issue a written “Notice of Safety Manual Non-Compliance” (Exhibit 3) to the Contractor’s site
representative. Perstorp will also forward a “Warning Letter for Safety Manual Non-
Compliance” (Exhibit 4) and a copy of the “Notice of Safety Manual Non-Compliance” to the
Contractor’s President or Operations Manager. Copies of these shall be forwarded to the IPS-
Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. Site and Project Managers.
6.3 Action Level Two
If item(s) of Safety Manual non-compliance are not corrected by Action Level One, or if the
Contractor repeatedly fails to comply with the applicable Safety Manual, IPS-Mehtalia Pvt.
Ltd./ Perstorp will issue a “Written Notice of Temporary Job Suspension” (Exhibit 5) to the
Contractor. The Contractor’s work may not resume until, the proposed corrective actions by
the Contractor which is acceptable to the Perstorp are in place. Actions that may be
considered include, but are not limited to:
1. Removal of certain Contractor personnel from the project,

2. Alteration of the Contractor’s job procedures, or
3. Implementation of corrective action by Perstorp with back charges to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall not resume work until IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd / Perstorp accepts the
proposed corrective actions. IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd / Perstorp will document and keep on file
the meeting results in the form of meeting minutes.
6.4 Action Level Three
If Action Levels One and Two do not result in the Contractor’s Safety performance being
brought into compliance, Contract termination may result. IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd / Perstorp
may terminate the Contract after verifying with the Site/Project Manager that the Safety
adherence procedure has been followed and after giving the Contractor applicable notice.
Only written approval from the Perstorp can reinstate a Contractor’s eligibility.

6.5 Discipline Procedure
IPS-M ensures that a Personnel who breaches safety rules at site will be undergo with the
disciplinary action as his Identity card will be punched on noticing the severity.
6.5.1 Site Safety Rules:
IPS-M shall provide in detailed the site safety rules during induction program or during
Kick-off meetings. In general following rules will be mandatory, during actual establishment
the safety rules will be further added based on actual site condition.
a. Safety induction is mandatory for entering into site.

b. Wearing helmet & Safety shoes, Visibility Jacket, working trouser and working shirt is
mandatory.
c. Visitors should be accompanied with Safety Officer/Safety Engineer for site visit
d. Smoking is strictly prohibited.
e. Consumption of alcohol, chewing of tobacco is strictly prohibited.
f. Photography & Videography is prohibited however for generating reports and
documents photography is allowed with prior permission from CM..
g. Speed of vehicles is limited to 10 KMPH.
h. Persons having ID card authorized by IPS-M are allowed to enter project site.
i. Nobody shall enter any area of the project site that is fenced or barricaded
Low severity : One punch on employee ID card.

Medium severity : Two punches on employee ID card.
High severity : Three punches on employee ID card
IPSM Safety Engineer is authorized to punch the ID-card in alignment with the IPSM /
Perstorp Site Safety Manager. On finding High severity which may lead to fatal or permanent
disability (e.g. breaching one or more Life Saving Rules) in such cases, ID card of the
employee will be punched for 3 times and he will be dismissed from the site premises.
6.6 Safety Awareness and Recognition Programs
The Following programs conducting at project sites

1. Demo Safety Training by External Third Party
2. Monthly Safety Campaigns
3. Spot Gift Recognition for Good Safety Citizens
4. Safe Man Hours Mile Stone Celebrations
5. National Safety Day Celebrations
6. Rewards for Good Safe Practices and Promoting Safety at project site

7.0 Safety Organization & Responsibilities
7.1 Project Sponsor
The Project Sponsor is responsible for inculcating the Safety culture within the project team
to provide a safe and healthy work practice at workplace. He is located in HO of IPSM.
7.1.1 Responsibility
1. Establishing Safety Principles, and enforcing a firm commitment that all

accidents/injuries are preventable and
2. Demonstrating management’s commitment to enforce this mind set down the line.
3. Ensuring adequate safety resources for effective implementation of Safety Manual.
7.2 Project Manager
The Project Manager reports to the Project Sponsor. He is responsible for spreading the Safety
commitment from the senior management team to the working teams at site. He is located at
IPS-M head office in Mumbai, however will be visiting frequently to oversee implementation
safety culture.
1. Enforce Management’s/Project Sponsor’s culture of Safety.

2. Review safety manual components with respect to the project safety performance of the
contractor.
3. To verify and ensure the Project legal safety compliance at regular intervals.
7.3 Construction Manager
The Construction Manager being the senior most representative of the company at site, he is
fully responsible for,
1. Stop the work if behaviour of employee or work area conditions are unsafe.
2. Responsible to create an overall safety culture that aims to provide a safe and healthy
work practice at site.
3. Construction Manager is responsible for ensuring that the Safety Manual is effective and
fully understood by all employees on site.
4. He is also overall responsible for ensuring the Safety Manual is implemented and safety
statistics are recorded and reported to the Client.
5. Formulate a safety organization by making sure that all personnel follow safe habits at
site at the all levels.
6. To evolve a system of training for the work force, auditing, observing and
communicating to the teams.
7. Invent and Implement new ideas to promote safety awareness considering site location
and site conditions.
8. To chair the safety meetings

SITE SAFETY ORGANOGRAM
7.4 Safety Manager
Safety Manager shall report to the IPSM Global Safety Manager.
Responsible for day to day safety inspections, training and monitoring of the safety activities
on site by contractors and compiled at project site
2. Complying BOCW and local legislation like Indian Electrical Rules, Gas Cylinders Act,
Environmental policy, pollution control & waste management.
3. Maintaining and Reporting of Leading Lagging Indicators (KPI) along with the Monthly
Reports on time.
4. To develop or review Project Specific safety manual.
5. To monitor the effectiveness of safety policies, safety procedures and unsafe behaviours.
6. To generate information leaflets and newsletter article, etc
7. To minimize Construction Management potential liability by ensuring that protects itself
against breaches of law regarding health and safety.
8. To keep abreast of existing or proposed developments in the field of health and safety
9. Ensure new and existing employees undertake the safety inductions followed by test and
that the induction remains updated. Test pass outs only will be allowed to work. Three

(3) time chances will be given for writing the test. Failure personnel will not allow and
their details will be recorded in the register.
10. Develop and maintain a safety training matrix.
11. Conduct Safety patrol and Safety meetings Action, Mock Drills, Safety Audits.
12. Advise and assist the project management in the implementation and auditing of the
safety manual and for incident reporting and investigation
7.4.2 Authority
1. Action against safety non compliances and site safety rules.

2. Authorized for signing and issuance of Identification Card.
3. Conduct Mock Drills, Safety Audits.
4. Root cause Analysis of Accident and Incidents
5. Barring the worker to enter the site after 3rd punch for repetitive safety violations.
7.5 Safety Engineers
Safety Engineers should address safety issues in the first instance. They should achieve this
through the joint efforts of the employees or other safety representatives or thru their own
recognition of hazards.
2. Issue Safe Work Permits for all work conducted at site. No work on site is to be done
without a SWP.
3. He shall document all incidents / accidents.
4. It is the responsibility of the Safety Engineer to inform about any unsafe acts / conditions
to the Safety Manager and Project Manager at site.
5. To minimize the risk of injuries to all employees, contractors, visitors or any one of the
project site.
6. To ensure that the employees under their control are fully aware of relevant safety issues
on site
7. To emphasize that safe working procedures are developed to reduce risks to individuals
8. To educate other individuals that takes short cuts or bypassing of such procedures is not
an acceptable practice under any circumstances:
9. Responsible for monitoring and assessing hazardous and unsafe situations and
developing measures to assure personnel safety. Will correct unsafe acts or conditions
through the regular line of authority, although the Safety Manager may exercise
emergency authority to prevent or stop unsafe acts when immediate action is required.
10. The Safety Engineer ensures the Safety Manual is prepared and implemented.
11. The Execution Engineer ensures there are safety messages in each Incident Action Plan.
12. Execution Engineer should check Safety standards maintained, all compliance are in
place. Safety Engineer to proposed changes if needed and provide support.
13. Managing Labour welfare facilities.
14. Make sure the compliance of waste disposal as per BOCW act.
15. Evaluating captured safety observations for immediate mitigation.
16. Reviewing Job Specific Risk Assessments.
17. Conduct Safety Walk along with line management.
18. Managing Site security
19. Managing OHC.

7.5.2 Authority
1. Authorized to issue the SWP and terminate the work happening without approved SWP.
2. Inspection of equipment / machinery with identity and tagging periodically.
3. Authorized to Conduct Job Specific Safety Trainings and Tool box talks.
4. Authorized to punch the ID-card for violation of site safety rules.
7.6 Safety Supervisors
This position is held by contractors. And it’s a full time dedicated to safety. This position has
particular responsibilities dedicated to creating a safe work environment through individual
example
2. To handle SWP from a contractor point of view. Doing relevant parts of different Risk
Assessments performed which was described in section number 11.2
3. To work with management in dealing with safety issues and assist in the compliance
with the Safety Manual.
4. To address safety issues brought to their attention and provide feedback communications
to employees on issues raised.
5. Is responsible for direct interaction with site team members and monitoring SWP daily
site safety.
6. Make sure the display of caution safety signage and posters at workplaces.
7. Supervising the Housekeeping crew at workplace.
8. Witnessing welfare facilities complied.
9. Ensure the sub contractor safety
10. Promoting safety awareness program,
11. Conduct daily tool box talks
12. Capturing Safety observations in the safety observation log and make sure the action was
close out.
13. Taking care of daily waste segregation and disposal
14. Attending daily safety coordination meetings
7.6.2 Authority
1. Preparing SWP for the activity and getting authorization from IPSM
2. Inspecting equipment /machinery in the presence of IPSM Safety Engineer and
Competent inspection team.
3. Authorised to inspect condition of PPE at regular intervals
7.7 Employees
In accordance with statutory requirements, employees have certain responsibilities with

regard to their own health and safety and that of others. In particular they are required to
work with due care and consideration for others, which involves
2. Complying with all safe working practices and procedures set in place

3. Reporting any potential hazards, mishaps, incidents or injuries that may / have occurred
in the workplace
4. Using equipment issued to protect their health and safety or the health and safety of
others
5. Not wilfully, recklessly, or intentionally interfering with, misusing or damaging anything
that has been provided in the interest of their health, safety or welfare and will not
wilfully place at risk the health and safety of any other person in the workplace
6. Attend when directed any course of training or instruction related to health and safety
Activity based training to be imparted to all employees. Safety Engineer will verify the
level of training program.
7.8 Contractor and third party management
7.8.1 Objective/Purpose
This procedure contains best practices that have to be used for reducing the risk of injury to
Contractors with improved training, engagement and observation while performing work on
our sites.
The best practices should help to reach the minimum requirements.
7.8.2 Minimum Requirements
7.8.2.1 Contractor Acceptance and Qualification Activities
1. Contractor pre-qualification
 Contractor Credentials. Ensure that the contractor has up-to-date copies of all necessary
certificates, licenses or registration according to the planned work order. For each work a
risk assessment is needed. If certain activities need medical fit for use confirmation, (e.g.
use of breathing air apparatus) they must be provided by the contractor. Keep a copy of
these documents on file.
 Contractor's Experience. Review the contractor's history and experience. Ask for
references if the contractor’s history is unknown.
 Best practice: If references are not available conduct an independent audit of their current
work site to review site procedures and conditions.
 Contractor Safety Policy and Records. Review the contractors' work safety statement or
safety policy, safety and loss records and safety management system.
 Use of Subcontractors. Determine whether it is likely that subcontractors will be used
during the project and inform the contractor of the need to provide notification prior to
any subcontracting of the work. If subcontractors are likely to be used, establish their
selection criteria and specify the qualifications required by the subcontractor. In all cases
a formal (written) approval of the subcontractor selection, or change of, is required from
Perstorp (=Client). The same qualifications and medical requirements as for the
contractor employees apply for each subcontractor.
2. Training for Site Contact and Employees who Supervise Contractors.

Contractor to provide a formal training program for employees who supervise contractors.
Include information on the provisions of the contract, the induction process, and procedure
for communicating any concerns or issues not only with the contractor, but also to local
management.

7.8.2.2 Contractor Arrivals on site and Pre-work activities
Induction prior to site access. Induct the contractor in site policies and procedures before
permitting any access on site. A verification test is required.
Site Policies and Procedures. Comprehensive discussion of relevant site policies and
procedures during the kick-off meeting, this will be done through power point or other forms
of presentation to ensure the site safety requirements are understood. This review shall
include, but not be limited to, the following procedures:
• Contractor site access and identification

• Safe Work Permitting Including:
• Job Safety Analysis
• Risk Analysis
• Hot work /Ex Areas
• Excavation and trenching
• Working on Height
• Confined Space entry
• Line Breaking
• Lock out / Tag out /Try out
• Electrical isolation
• Hoisting/Lifting
• High Risk Equipment (X-Ray, Laser, High Pressure Cleaning, Sand blasting etc.)
• Overriding Safety provisions/Equipment
• Fire protection impairments
• Smoking
• Housekeeping
• Introduction of hazardous materials and processes on site
• Working with hazardous material and processes
• Supervision of contractors
• Reporting incidents and property damage
• Emergencies
• Environmental protection
• Security
• Tools/equipment use on site
• Disposal of waste and spills
• Quality issues, contaminations (silicone, HACCP etc)
• Asbestos management on site
• Legionella awareness
• Applicable parts of the code of conduct
Procedures Manual. Provide the contractor (and site employees working with the contractor)
with a manual of applicable policies and procedures explained to them at the induction.
Induction quality and comprehension test:
Contractor written test with signature and date to test knowledge and comprehension of the
site safety rules, EHS Critical Procedures and Perstorp Life Saving Rules Including:
(Emergency response and Alarm training, Security requirements, Evacuation information,
Chemical Hazards, MSDS location, PPE requirements, Smoking policy, etc.) is required, with
minimum level set for passing the test.
Face to face review of test answers (to serve as review session and to ensure any questions or
misunderstandings of the rules are addressed prior to start of work).

Documentation and Records of Induction. Maintain complete records of the induction

process including date of induction, test result, who supervised the induction, employee
assigned to supervise the contractor during the project, date of project completion and date
for re-induction if contract extends long term. Require the contractor to formally
acknowledge in writing that they have been inducted and that they have understood and
agree to follow site policies and procedures explained to them during the induction.
Written Contractor Work Plan/EHS Plans developed and reviewed with contractors prior to
start of work for better understanding of how the contractor intends to perform the work
safely. (Often completed jointly to ensure a clearer understanding of the safe practices, can be
done as part of project work or for stand-alone process such as non-technical workers who
are on site regularly). Any constraints on permitted working times must be communicated
and agreed.
Responsibilities:
Contractors / Sub-Contractors and their employees are subject to the same responsibilities
expressed on Construction management team Supervisors and employees as they are an
integral part of site activities and as such they have a responsibility to carry out their work in
a safe and effective manner, by
 Adhering to own safety plans, In addition to following the Safety Manual They have to
also follow the work SWP with reviewed and approved method statement/job safety
analysis or Risk Assessments.
 Attending and participating in “Tool Box” safety meetings
 Reporting incident immediately to any project management team member
 Report to the site management team and/or safety representative any potential hazard
 Help colleagues, especially new ones in meeting safety standards
 Training of their employees through the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER safety staff &
outside training company when required.
7.8.2.3 On Site Work Activities
Sign-On Procedures: To control entry to the site, require all contractors to log in at a central
point. Enforce a sign-on procedure which records the approximate whereabouts of all
contractors while they are on site. If the contractor is made responsible for keeping these
records, ensure the records are available to the client for review at all times.
Contractor Identification: To assist all employees in controlling and monitoring the activities
of contractors, ensure that the contractor is easily identifiable. Visible wearing of a Photo ID
is best practice.
Supervision:
• Safe Work Permit, including Job Scope and the Risk Assessments reviews according the
SWP risk assessment requirements procedure. Final review on the work spot with
contractors just before work begins, required reviews as part of the Perstorp Safe Work
Permit procedure and LSRs. Insert reference to new Risk Assessment rules.
• Safety Observer for non-routine or high risk work, Example: (Confined Space Entry,
Working at Height) assigned for work observation (Sometimes required as the hazards of
the job require observation to ensure a safer work environment, includes shut down
activities where multiple work/contractors are active in various locations).

• Daily toolbox/safety topic meetings for project work (when work hazards require extra
training/ review, when multiple contractor employees are on site working on separate
projects, when a near miss or incident has happened that required sharing/review with
all contractors on site).
• Close out review of Safe Work Permit and area walk through with contractors prior to
them leaving the site. Required reviews as part of the Perstorp Safe Work Permit
procedure and LSRs.
8.0 Site Safety Management
Various measures would be undertaken at site to ensure safe working conditions at site. This
would begin with the formation of a Safety Committee and assigning the functions to each of
the members.
8.1 Safety Committee
A Safety Committee will be formed to oversee the safe working environment at site. This
Safety committee shall comprise of the following members:
1. Construction Manager - Chairman

2. Safety Manager - Secretary
3. Mechanical/Electrical/Civil Engineers from IPS-Mehtalia - Members
4. Contractors Engineers and Supervisors - Members
5. Equal number of building Workers of various Contractors - Members
8.1.1 Functions of Safety Committee
1. Review accident and incident investigations and approve remedial measure.

2. Stimulate interest of employees and workers in safety through safety related activities.
3. Conduct audit of sites.
4. Identify Health and Safety hazards.
5. Initiate measure to improve welfare amenities.
6. Bring to notice hazards associated with use of handling and maintenance of equipment.
7. Safety Committee will meet once in a month and chaired by person having overall
control over affairs of construction sites Minutes of meeting are to be circulated in the
languages understood.
8.2 Safety Planning & Management
Following list of activities to be performed by Safety Manager and Construction Manager as

a part of safety planning and management at sites
Sl.
Activity Description Responsible Person / Autthorization
No.
Stop the work if behaviour of employee or
1 All persons at site
work area conditions are unsafe.
Project Manager, Construction Manager and
2 Pre-Qualification of Contractor
Safety Manager
3 Reviewing SWP (Risk Assessments, JSA) SWP Authorizer and Area Owner
Project Safety Plan Review and
4 Safety Manager
Implementation

Sl.
Activity Description Responsible Person / Autthorization
No.
Execution Engineer in line with Safety
5 Reviewing Method statement
Engineer
6 Monitoring Contractors Safety Compliance Safety Manager and Construction Manager
Contractor Execution Engineer and IPSM
7 Contractor Job Supervision
Execution Engineer
Communication to include safety meeting,
8 safety walk about, daily site briefing once a Safety Manager
week
New Workers Safety Induction Program
9 Safety Engineer
and Visitors Safety Induction Program
Zone Safety Engineer and Contractor Safety
10 Tool box talks (Daily)
Officer
11 Safety Audit of site (Once in a Month) Safety Manager
Job Specific Training of employees (every 15
12 Safety Engineer
days).
Reviewing Monthly Contractor safety
13 Safety Manager
performance
Reporting of accidents. Reported by any
14 Any Person who working at site
individual from the construction site
Investigation – major injuries and
15 Safety Engineer and Safety Manager
dangerous occurrences.
16 First Aid IPSM Trained First Aider
Emergency evacuation mock drill
17 Safety Manager and ERT Team
(Quarterly Once)
18 PPE Compliance Site Security and Safety Engineer
Safety Engineer and Contractor Safety
19 Welfare measures
Officer
20 Preparation and maintenance of documents Safety Engineer
21 Management review meeting Project Manager and Construction Manager
Inspection of Equipment and Lifting Safety Engineer and Authorized Engineer /
22
machinery Supervisor
Waste Disposal and Environment Safety Engineer and Identified authorized
23
Compliance waste disposal vendor
24 Weekly Safety Walkthrough Safety Manager and Safety Engineer
25 Monthly Safety Campaigns Safety Manager
Maintain and circulating Monthly Project
26 KPI / Leading Lagging Indicators to the Safety Manager
management
27 Safety Milestones Celebration Safety Manager
28 Safety Committee Meeting Construction Manager
29 Spot Gift Reward Programs Safety Manager
Demo Training by Third Party competent
30 Safety Manager
agency

9.0 Code of Conduct
9.1 Working Environment
It is Perstorp’s responsibility to offer safe and physically and psychologically healthy

working conditions for all employees, and to forbid and take action against all types of
harassment.
9.2 Non-Discrimination & Diversity
9.3 Working Hours & Overtime
9.4 Training & Further Education
9.5 Preventive Health Care
9.6 Zero Tolerance for Accidents
Safety first everywhere and in everything we do. Perstorp shall maintain and develop an
optimal health and safety standard at all locations where the company is active and thereby
minimize possible risks. Wherever at work, Perstorp employees must follow the safety rules
and procedures to minimize injuries and increase safety performance. Within Perstorp, zero
9.7 Use of Alcohol or Drugs
alcohol or drugs. Any use of alcohol or drugs during working hours is forbidden.
9.8 Human Rights
9.9 Child Labour

Perstorp does not tolerate any form of child labour. The minimum age of employment within
9.10 Forced Or Slave Labour
Perstorp does not tolerate any form of forced labour or slave labour, or work carried out by
9.11 Union Activities
10.0 General Site Information
1. Site layout including parking, storage of material (Lay down areas/fuel storage/storage
of hazardous material, contractors offices and stores, EHS facilities to workers)- Refer
Appendix-1 for Site Logistic Plan
2. Accessibility: Site will have two entries, one is for man & second one is for material.
3. Welfare/hygiene facilities shall be arranged by contractor at their own & shall be located
outside the construction area with the provision of Toilets, Cleaning Water and Drinking
water arrangement. These facilities shall be provided at appropriate locations as shown
in Site Logistic Plan.
4. Contractor facilities such as site offices, drinking water, PPES, Food, Tea & snacks shall
be arranged by contractor of their own. These facilities shall be provided at appropriate
locations as shown in Site Logistic Plan..
5. Workshops/hot work area shall be plan by IPSM as per area demarcated in Site Logistic
Plan.
6. Lay down areas/fuel storage/storage of hazardous material shall be plan by IPSM as per
area demarcated in Site Logistic Plan.
7. Separation of vehicles and pedestrians shall be clearly demarcated by IPSM as per site
logistic plan
10.1 Security Responsibility
IPS-M will control the site security services. IPSM Safety Engineer (who is nominated by the
Construction Manager and Safety Manager) is responsible for management of site security
services. Contractors also need to arrange their own securities for managing their stores &
construction equipment. The broad scope for security services will be as follows.
1. Opens gate to allow entrance or exit of employees, truckers, and authorized visitors.
Limited access for entry exit will be identified in the Site route plan along with assembly
points and emergency Centre location.
2. Checks credentials, driving license before admitting anyone.
3. Escorting Material vehicles & visitors to the construction site.
4. Control all vehicles, visitors and workers to the construction site.
5. Log the listing of all vehicles, deliveries and visitors on the construction site.
6. Issues passes at own discretion or on instructions from superiors.
7. Inspects outgoing traffic to prevent unauthorized removal of company property or
products
8. May also require permits from employees for tools or materials taken from premises.
9. May also supervise use of time clocks for recording arrival and departure of employees.

10. When stationed at entrance to restricted area.

11. Inspection of exterior fencing checking for security breaches.
12. Maintain watch over construction equipment.
13. Emergency response (fire or other emergencies).
14. Prepare daily activity and incident, hazards reports.
15. Monitor Camera
16. Access Control
17. Use flashlights, whistles, reflective security vest and cell phones.
10.2 Illumination
1. Where natural lighting is not adequate for safe working particularly at night adequate
and suitable artificial lighting shall be provided at all work places and their approaches
including passage ways as per area classification as well as Storage areas.
2. Artificial lighting shall be fixed at such location that will not cause any glare or
disturbing shadows and also at storage areas.
3. Emergency lighting provision for night work shall be made to minimize danger in-case
of power failure. In addition Torches should be provided at site.
4. Suitable guards shall protect lamps where necessary to prevent danger, if the lamp
breaks.
5. Construction area will be provided Task Lighting
10.3 First Aid
A fully equipped First Aid Box must be available at the site. It will be placed where it can be
used. This first aid box would be maintained in the health center built by the contractor. Civil
Contractor would ensure that the supplies are restocked at all times. The medicines would be
dispensed by the medical representative who would be manning the health center and also
presence of Emergency Ambulance at site.
11.0 Life saving Rules (LSR)
They are what they say. Rules that will keep you from situations that can be harmful. Where
your life could be at stake. The Life Saving Rules (LSR) are basic safety rules for high-risk
works, where failure to comply has the highest potential for serious injury or death. They
highlight simple actions you can take to protect yourself and others.
None of the Life Saving Rules are new, they have already been valid and lived after through
various legal and internal regulations. Most of us already comply every day. The purpose of
highlighting them as Life Saving Rules, is to drive a culture of compliance - not to blame. The
focus is on modifying worker and supervisor behaviors in the workplace by raising
awareness and knowledge.
Compliance is mandatory for everyone – Employee, contractor and sub-contractor alike – the
moment the procedure is implemented including training completion. Failure to comply
means that you will expose yourself and others to serious injury or death.
Responsibility is one of our core values. Following the Life Saving Rules is a way of being
responsible. But beyond that, it’s about caring. We are introducing the Life Saving Rules out
of care for you, me and our colleagues.


11.1 Safe Work Permit (SWP)
11.1.1 General
11.1.1.1 A SWP is required for all work other than work covered by Standard Operating Procedures
(SOPs).
11.1.1.2 A number of disciplines may be permitted on the same SWP document, as long as the
individual risk assessment(s) cover the hazard controls for the activities of each discipline.
OR:
Each discipline involved in the execution of a task must have their own SWP risk assessments
and permits for the particular hazards associated with their activities.
11.1.1.3 If tasks covered by permits are incomplete at the end of the work day or shift, the active
permit must be signed off and a fresh permit requested before leaving work.
11.1.1.4 During shift handover all open SWPs must be reviewed to enable the new accountable
person to have a complete overview of all on-going work and associated risks and their
control measures. The new accountable person must co-sign the documents and becomes
the authorizer of the permits. At a minimum, a formal approval must be documented on the
Safe Work Permit itself at the issuing station or duplicate held by the Executor. Additional
documentation may be done in the shift log, shift change book or methods defined by the
site.
11.1.1.5 Information that must be present on the permit include:

 Name of the authorized issuer
 Name and/or position number of equipment
 Work permit number
 Name of permit holder/executor
 Names of people executing the work
 Description of the work
 Date and time period for which the permit is valid
 Risk assessment identifier (e.g., reference number)
 Precautions to be taken
 Limitations to and conditions affecting the validity of the permit (weather conditions, area,
emergency, etc.)
11.1.1.6 Conditions under which the Safe Work Permit requires re-approval:
 Whenever conditions or scope of work change significantly.
 Whenever Safe Work Permit has been withdrawn for whatever reason.
 When an emergency situation occurs.
 When the permit holder leaves the work area (for a duration or to a location) where any of
the above conditions may not be noticed during the period of absence.
 When permit holder leaves the site.

11.1.2 Work Permit Matrix
* Roles/Activity should be defined by job title in local organization Authorization Table

A, B, C, and D can be the same person!
11.1.3 Permit Request (RA1)
11.1.3.1 Permit requests shall be made to the Permit Pre-Issuer (A) (e.g. Delegated pre-authorizer,
Safety Planner, Safety Engineer, or similar) or SWP authorizer/Issuer/Field Supervisor of
the area where the work will be done, before the work is due to commence.
11.1.3.2 The permit request shall include a generic risk assessment (RA1) (e.g., a Job Safety Analysis
(JSA)) conducted by the Executor Lead (E). The JSA shall cover all operations to be
conducted in chronological order. The RA1 is the risk assessment purely based on the task
that needs to be executed. This is independent from the area and conditions under which
these need to be executed. This RA1 step can be done any time before the actual
authorization has to take place, at any place, with a good cross functional team. This should
be done well in advance not to disturb the following risk assessments steps.

11.1.4 Merge RA1 with local requirements (RA2)
11.1.4.1 The Permit (Pre)-Issuer (A or B) reviews the RA1 results and combines with local
requirements.
11.1.4.2 The RA2 is conducted by the Permit (Pre)-issuer (A or B) together with the Executor Lead
(E) and the Equipment/Area owner (C or D).
11.1.4.3 Here it is judged if the work can be executed safely in the Area and under the conditions at
the work place and in combination with all other envisioned activities in that area (routine
as well as not routine).
11.1.4.4 The Permit Pre-Issuer transfers the results of the RA2 to the Work Permit Authorizer (if not
the same person already).
11.1.5 Field Preparation

11.1.5.1 Based on the RA2 the Equipment/Area Owner (C) prepares the work place and/or
equipment in accordance to the minimum safety conditions identified in the RA2. This
might cover, but not be limited to the following:
11.1.5.2 Proper cleaning of equipment and the area
11.1.5.3 LOTOTO of required equipment
11.1.5.4 Place barriers if required
11.1.5.5 Inform all people working in the area and in nearby areas if needed
11.1.5.6 Assign safety guards (e.g., fire watch, standby person, confined space attendant) and rescue
people if required
11.1.6 Check out the workplace (RA3)

11.1.6.1 At the actual work place (Field Inspection) the Work Permit Authorized Issuer (B) together
with the lead executer (E) and the area owner (C) or its representative (D) confirm and/or
update RA2 with circumstances at the local area.
11.1.6.2 External effects/influences on environment must be identified in the risk assessment (i.e.
weather, emissions, containment, etc.).
11.1.6.3 In RA3 the risk identified in RA2 must be confirmed and if additional risks have been
identified, additional risk mitigation steps must be defined. This Risk Assessment must be
done right in advance of the actual authorization, and must be done on the actual work
spot.
11.1.7 Coordinate with other activities (RA4)

11.1.7.1 The Work Permit Authorized Issuer together with the Field Supervisor (may be the same
person) and the Equipment/Area Owner coordinates with other activities and Work
Permits for the location, and check what might effect and update.
11.1.7.2 The Work Permit Authorized Issuer must before authorizing the SWP, check on interfering
activities in the areas both routine activities and other work permits authorized or to be
authorized. And make sure the interaction of these activities will not cause additional safety
risk. That must include the review of process activities that may have impact on the
activities to be carried out (like product transfers, filling of tanks, people performing
operating tasks etc.) and vice versa the effects of the work on the area.
11.1.7.3 If so additional safety precautions must be taken and documented on the SWP before
authorization.
11.1.7.4 This Risk Assessment follows directly the RA3 step again right in advance of the SWP
authorization, executed by the Authorized Issuer, preferably on the spot or centrally where
all activities including all SWP’s are coordinated.
11.1.7.5 Authorized Issuer is advised to stay (some 5-10 minutes) and monitor the start of the job to
make sure that everything looks safe and fine.

11.1.8 If all checks out, the SWP can now be authorized and handed to the lead executor.
11.1.9 Last Minute Risk Assessment (LMRA) (RA5)

11.1.9.1 Right before start of the job the Execution Lead (E) and the executor(s) (F) conduct a LMRA
by reviewing the SWP and the work to be done.
11.1.9.2 It must be done by the Lead Executer and all the persons that will be working under the
conditions of the approved SWP
11.1.9.3 It must be done on the spot right before the work will actually start.
11.1.9.4 If new circumstances that affect the risk assessment are found, the SWP is no longer valid.
11.1.9.5 The SWP holder (E) then needs to go back to the Authorized Issuer (B) and discuss how to
proceed and get new approval for the adjusted SWP.
11.1.9.6 The Authorized Issuer/Field supervisor should (spot) check the quality of the LMRA =
RA5.
11.1.9.7 At least the Safe Work Permit Authorized Issuer should periodically visit the work area to
check that conditions are the same as those originally authorized and work is executed
according the agreed plan. Higher risk work should be inspected at a higher frequency or
have continuous supervision, if necessary (e.g., more senior or specially trained personnel
depending upon the risk level or specialty of the work being done).
11.1.10 Check out after closure (RA6)

11.1.10.1 The SWP Authorized Issuer and the Lead Executer must on the actual work spot check the
area after closure of the job to ensure safe conditions of the work place. The ‘4-eye’ principle
should be observed.
11.1.10.2 Document results of any checking or testing (e.g., pressure test, leaks, electrical) as part of
debrief or review with signature on the work permit.
11.1.10.3 Only if the situation is left in the agreed safe condition, the SWP can be formally closed.
Otherwise the SWP executor must correct the identified deviations before closing and
leaving.
11.1.10.4 The closed permit is to be filed and maintained in an orderly fashion, allowing future
retrieval, according to site rules. Site must have these rules documented. The permits
should be retained for a minimum period of minimum 3 months or longer if local legislation
requires.
11.2 Hot Work
The Hot Work program follows the Safe Work Permit system.
• As a minimum requirement the Work Permit authorizer and executer of the work need
to review the work area for hazards and special conditions before completing the Work
Permit approval. For Hot Work specifically a review of area classification of the work
area or the affected areas needs to be identified. Explosion and fire hazards need to be
identified and mitigated with appropriate preventive measures.
• External effects/influences of Hot Work on affected areas must be identified. Specifically
if affected areas are classified, contain combustibles/flammables or are occupied/used
by people.
11.2.1 Classified Area Permits
If any non-explosion proof electrical equipment or sparking tools are to be used for any work
to be completed in classified areas, the Hot Work program is to be followed.
• An assessment of potential ignition of the flammable atmosphere should be completed

before the work is started. Work should only begin after the work area has been tested

with a calibrated Explosion limit (LEL) detector and has been found to have a reading of
<10% of the LEL. The reading of the LEL detector should be noted on the permit.
• In classified areas Hot Work can only be performed if continuous LEL measurement is in
place. Outside of classified areas the site must specify the LEL measurement frequency
based on risk.
• LEL measurements need to be representative for the total of the Hot work affected area.
New spot check LEL measurements should be taken prior to Hot Work commencement
for areas that do not meet the previous section
• No Hot Work/Work Permit is required if routine work is covered under an SOP.
11.2.2 Hot Work Permit
• Only applicable for equipment which generates open flames/sparks/chips etc. that has
effects on the surrounding area
• The Hot Work Permit does not exempt the person performing the work from following
basic fire prevention and safety precautions related to Hot Work. These precautions
include:
• Only equipment that is in good condition is to be used.
• (Welding) Torches: Valves, regulators, hoses, torches, etc. are to be thoroughly checked
by the person performing the work prior to each use.
• Gas cylinders are to be secured such that they cannot fall and are not affected by the (hot)
work hazards or damaged in any way.
• Electrical welding: The ground clamp is to be connected as close to the work as possible
when using electrical arc welding equipment so the ground can be easily observed. An
improper ground can be a source of ignition.
• Portable welding, cutting or other Hot Work equipment is not to be used in an area or
building where sprinklers are out of service unless proper alternatives for suppression
are available (Override Permit may also be needed).
• Hot Work is prohibited in or on vessels, reactors, tanks, etc., which contain flammable or
combustible materials, including product residues, until the vessel has been emptied,
cleaned and purged according to Confined Space Entry Procedures.
• The floors in the area surrounding the Hot Work are to be swept clean prior to the start of
the Hot Work.
• Combustibles and flammables are to be moved at least 10 meters (35 feet) from Hot Work
operations. If combustibles cannot be moved, they are to be protected by metal guards or
by flame-resistant curtains (not containing asbestos) or covers rather than ordinary non
flame/fire resistant covers/sheets.
• Hot Work is not to commence until all floor and wall openings within 10 meter (35 ft) of
the Hot Work site have been tightly covered or otherwise protected with metal guards or
flame-resistant tarpaulins.
• Before issuing a Hot Work Permit, the Authorizing Line Manager is to ensure that
combustibles and flammables and fire sensitive equipment (i.e. cable trays) are properly
protected, an adequate supply of proper fire extinguishing equipment is available at the
work site and a Firewatcher has been assigned. The work site is to be thoroughly checked
by the Authorizing Line Manager to ensure that no hot slag, molten metal, smoldering
material or other fire-producing agents are left during the job or after the job is
completed.

11.2.3 Classified Area Permits (additional requirements for hot work in classified areas)
If any non-explosion proof electrical equipment or sparking tools are to be used for any work
to be completed in classified areas, the Hot Work program is to be followed.
• An assessment of potential ignition of the flammable atmosphere should be completed

before the work is started. Work should only begin after the work area has been tested
with a calibrated Explosion limit (LEL) detector and has been found to have a reading of
<10% of the LEL. The reading of the LEL detector should be noted on the permit, this is
not necessary if there is a continuous LEL measurement in place.
• In classified areas, Hot Work can only be performed if continuous LEL measurement is in
place. Outside classified areas the permit authorizer must specify the LEL measurement
frequency based on risk.
• LEL measurements need to be representative for the total by Hot work affected area.
New spot check LEL measurements should be taken prior to Hot Work commencement
that does not meet the previous section
• No Hot Work/Work Permit is required if routine work is covered under an SOP.
11.2.4 When Firewatchers are to be used
When there is a chance of causing a fire, such as welding, grinding, burning or any other
external spark/flame generating activity.
• The Firewatcher should be continuously present during the Hot Work, during any break
in the work such as lunch or rest periods and for at least thirty (30) minutes after the Hot
Work has ended.
• If Hot Work ends near a shift change, arrangements should be made by authorizing Line
Manager to continue the fire watch into the next shift.
• When work is done in an area where smoldering can occur regular rounds each hour
during the first 8 hours after the Hot Work should be made.
11.2.5 Where Firewatchers are to be used
The Firewatcher is to patrol the Hot Work area, including the floors above and below the
work area. The Firewatcher is to observe the Hot Work being done and respond to any signs
of fire e.g., sparks, smoke, flames, as outlined in site emergency response procedure.
• The job is not considered to be complete until at least thirty (30) minutes after the
conclusion of Hot Work.
• Continuous LEL measurements must be undertaken during Hot Work that is capable of
producing a spark with use of open flame in a classified area or where chances on release
of flammables is present.
11.3 LoToTo
11.3.1 Prior to erecting, installing, constructing, repairing, adjusting, inspecting, operating, or

maintaining any equipment or process where unexpected energization, start up or release of
stored energy or hazardous materials could occur and cause injury, environmental or equipment
damage, all potentially hazard sources are isolated and locked/tagged out. (e.g, electrical,
pneumatic, hydraulic, gravity, electrical, storage devices, springs, and other).
Updated P&ID, field tagging of all equipment (motors, hand valves etc.) must be available.

11.3.2 Issuance of Lockout Devices:
Departmental lockout stations or personal locks are used. Each lockout station includes locks,
(transparent) lock boxes, hasps, lockout devices and tags. Sufficient devices must be readily
available.
1. For each lockout and in case the site uses a departmental lockout station, employees will
see the equipment from the lockout station and return them when complete.
2. Line management and/or EHS manager will periodically verify that sufficient lockout
equipment is available at each departmental station.
11.3.3 New and Existing Equipment Lockout Requirement:
Whenever replacement or major repair, renovation or modification of a machine or

equipment is performed, and whenever new machines or equipment are installed, the Line
Management should ensure energy-isolating devices for such machines or equipment are
designed to accept a lockout device. (Follow up within Management of change process).
Purchasing requirements have to take care about LOTOTO possibility of all new equipment.
11.3.4 Prior to conducting activities requiring LOTOTO, all personnel affected by the activity are
notified. The affected equipment/system is released from use by the individual responsible for
the equipment/system (=equipment/area owner).
11.3.5 Using appropriate equipment/system shutdown procedures, all operating controls are turned
off or returned to the neutral mode by equipment/area owner or Authorized delegate.
11.3.6 Authorized Individuals then apply appropriate LOTOTO devices to each energy-isolating
device. LOTOTO devices will be attached in such a manner as to hold the energy-isolating
device in a safe position. The placement of a personal lock and tag indicates that personnel are
actively working on the equipment, and it shall not be operated.
11.3.7 The equipment/system will be examined carefully by an Authorized Individual to detect and
relieve, disconnect, or restrain any residual energy. A ‘Zero Energy State’ must exist in the
machine, equipment, process or circuit before servicing and/or maintenance activities can begin.
A risk assessment must be made for safe dissipation of stored energy. Based on this a dissipation
method must be developed and applied.
11.3.8 The Authorized Individual(s) will attempt to operate the equipment/system by pushing the start
buttons and/or switches (try-out). This verification provides certainty that operation cannot
occur while work is being performed. Operating controls will be returned to the neutral or stop
position after the try-out. Try out process in detail must be part of LOTOTO procedure. All
personnel/contractors that have to work on the equipment/system are to witness the Try-out.
11.3.9 Restoring equipment to service:
1 After work is completed, but before systems are restored to the normal operation
conditions a visual verification and personnel count will be performed to verify that
personnel are clear of the equipment/system and that non-essential items, such as
maintenance tools, have been removed and that components, including guards, have
been replaced correctly. Related work permit(s) must be voided and personal locks must
be removed.

2 Each LOTOTO device will be removed from each hazard isolating device of the
equipment/system by the Authorized Individual(s) who applied the LOTOTO devices
(note handover in shifts must be formalized).
3 Notify affected employees that the servicing or maintenance is completed and the
machine or equipment is ready for use.
11.3.10 In situations where there is a need to test or position the equipment/system, the following
sequences of activities will take place:
1 Clear the equipment/system of people, tools and materials

2 Clear and notify affected personnel
3 Verify that the controls are in neutral
4 Withdraw the related work permits, remove the individual locks of the related
5 LOTO devices and re-energize the machine or equipment
6 Proceed with the test as per risk assessment deemed safe
7 De-energize all systems and release the stored energy
8 Relock and retag the controls
9 Place the individual locks
10 Re-verify de-energization by try-out
11 Revalidate the work permit and proceed with the work
11.3.11 Minor tool changes and/or adjustments, set-up, unjamming, part location and cleaning do
require LOTOTO unless these conditions exist
Plug-and-cord connected equipment: Where a machine, equipment, process or circuit has a

single energy source that will accomplish complete deactivation with no remaining energy
stored in the equipment (like heat, fly wheels, spring load etc.), written LOTOTO procedures
shall not be required as long as the disconnect for this energy source remains under the sole
control of the authorized individual. This means within sight and arm’s reach for the entire
duration of the job. This only applies to work on single energy source plug-and-cord
connected electrical equipment for which exposure to the hazards of unexpected energization
or startup of the equipment is controlled by unplugging the equipment from the energy
source and by the plug being under the exclusive control of the individual performing the
maintenance or servicing activity. If the plug cannot be maintained under the exclusive
control of the individual, a lockout device must be used on the plug and an equipment
specific procedure is required when defined by standard operating procedure SOP and
person is 100% of the time in control of the energy blockage. (i.e. printer jam, vending
machines, etc.; not possible for e.g. Copy machines where high temperature might be present
after shutting down the electricity.)
11.3.12 There is no maximum permitted duration for LOTOTO provided the controls are kept in place
and stay under control by all the affected (authorizer, equipment owner as well as executors).
The system has to be re-tried out after interruption of the controls (locks) and before restarting
the work and re-verification of the documents signed as is done for the work permits.
Continuity of the LOTOTO process must occur as shift or staff personnel changes and the
task is not finished. This applies to both individual and group LOTO. The LOTOTO process
must remain intact during these transition times by using direct LOTOTO hand-off or other
approved methods like transition locks and tags. Three situations of such continuation are
identified:

1. The work continues, but there is a shift change for the authorizer. In this case there must
be a proper handover protocol defined in which it is ensured that the authorizer which is
leaving is to keep the personal lock attached till the explaining of the work, the risk
related to the work as well as the protective measures, to the arriving authorizer has been
completed. The arriving authorizer must then place the personal lock and must verify in
the field that the conditions and precautions are present as defined and must formally
take over the authorizing position by co-signing the SWP and LOTOTO Form. A new Try
Out is not required in this case. A formal key hand-over is allowed in this case while
using the same lock.
2. The work continues, but there is a shift change for the Equipment owner. In this case
there must be a proper handover protocol defined in which it is ensured that the
equipment owner who is leaving is to keep the personal lock attached till the arriving
equipment owner has place the personal lock,a key handover is allowed in this case
while using the same lock.
3. The work continues, but there is a shift change for the executors. In this case the executor
leaving the job should not take his personal locks away till his successor executor locks
have been placed. When it is foreseen that the executor leaving the job will return, to start
working again on the same job, the leaving executor must leave his personal lock
attached, such that at re-start of the work the next time he/she has the assurance nothing
has changed. The successor executor must, next to placing the personal locks, verify, by
witnessing the try-out, that the LOTOTO is effective before the work can be started. A
key hand-over is not allowed in this case! All locks are personal, not functional!
11.3.13 In the event that a machine, equipment, process or circuit is being serviced/maintained by more
than one Executor, each Executing person must apply his/her own LOTO lock(s) and tag(s). One
person cannot perform LOTOTO on behalf of others or install the individual locks for other
executing employees. By multi users & multi field keys, a lock box device is advised to prevent
multiple people have to go into potential hard to reach places in the field.
11.3.14 The use of lock boxes and multi-lock-hasps (the latter is only permitted with a limited amount of,
and easy accessible field locks), is allowed as long as key control is maintained.
11.3.15 Lockout Device Removal:
1 Executors should remove only their locks when their portion or phase of the job is
completed and they are not scheduled to resume work at a later time on the same job.
Employees who leave a job to go to another job or to leave the plant should return their
work permit (void) and remove their locks only after the executor(s) continuing the job
place their locks on the equipment. Such rotation of work may occur at shift changes or
during the employee’s shift if that employee is reassigned. If the work is to continue and
the employee replacing the authorized employee who currently has locked out the
equipment is not available when this rotation or shift change occurs, the Line
Management of the involved executing should assume responsibility for the lockout of
the equipment and attach their own lock. This should ensure that the equipment is
continuously locked out until it is ready to return to service. When the executing
individuals who are to continue the job are available, they should place their personal
locks and tags on the lockout devices before the Team Leaders/supervisors remove their
locks. A proper documentation/log of these actions is required. Before the new executors
can start their job, a formal try-out must be performed.

2 Abandoned LOTO locks must not be removed unless specific procedures are followed.
These procedures ensure that the employee who applied the locks is not present at the
facility, that all reasonable attempts (including, but not limited to, questioning other
colleagues, trying to reach the employee by telephone, etc.) have been made to contact
the employee and that the employee receives notification of the removal before the
person returns to the worksite.
In removing the employees lock, site manager assumes responsibility for the lock out of
the equipment in question as well as ensuring the involved employee is thoroughly
informed before the person resumes work on location.
11.3.16 All employees and contractors are required to comply with this procedure. All employees, upon
observing a machine or piece of equipment locked out due to servicing or maintenance, shall not
attempt to start, energize or use that machine or piece of equipment. The site establishes
progressive discipline program, which should be used for enforcement of lockout procedure
violations.
11.4 Work in Confined Spaces
11.4.1 General
Any human access to spaces not designed for human occupancy need to be risk assessed to
create and control a safe work environment and atmosphere during entrance.
11.4.2 Preparation for confined space entry
 Proper cleaning of the confined space must be done prior to entry by equipment owner.
 A separate SWP for opening/ventilation as well as Testing/Verification of environment
and atmosphere of the confined space must be generated before opening/ventilation and
testing/verification respectively.
 Before visual inspection of the confined space from the outside can take place first the
safe status of equipment (LOTOTO) and atmosphere must be tested. During the confined
space entry risk assessment, the type of testing in relation to the identified risks must be
defined, as well as the acceptable entry levels of the identified risks.
 Any locked out equipment/connections must be checked and where applicable tried out.
 All instruments used in atmospheric testing shall be properly calibrated and included in
the preventive maintenance planning
 During insertion of the identified test equipment, entry of any body part must be
avoided.
 The atmosphere in the confined space shall always be tested before entry. Oxygen level
shall be at least 19,5 % and not more than 21,5%.
 Make sure no toxic, flammable or oxygen-displacing gases/vapors are present above the
acceptable levels. By measuring minimum the top, middle and bottom of the confined
space by a certified person to do these measurements, unless specified differently based
on the risk assessment.
 Make sure that the authorized entrant has been provided an opportunity to observe the
testing of the permit space.
 When safe condition of equipment and the confined space atmosphere have been
confirmed, visual inspection at the entry can commence.
 When visual inspection has confirmed the safe internal environment, the SWP for entry
can be completed.

11.4.3 Confined space entry
 Monitoring of the atmosphere in the confined space must be performed while work is
ongoing.
 Individual monitors on the entrant body are preferred as additional line of defence.
 Make sure the confined space is well ventilated before entry.
 Make sure the confined space is well ventilated during entry.
 Make sure that the air intake for the ventilation system is located in an area that is free of
combustible dusts and vapors and toxic substances.
 If the atmosphere was found unacceptable and then ventilated, make sure that it is
retested before entry.
 The LoToTo procedure shall be used for isolation of the confined space. All persons
entering the Confined space must have control of the LoToTo locks.
 Make sure that the entrant is trained in the proper use of PPE (personal protective
equipment) before entering the confined space.
 The local procedure shall state what special PPE is required (boots, chemical suit etc.).
 The local procedure shall state what special equipment is required (rescue equipment,
communication equipment, respiratory equipment etc.).
 The local procedure shall state if special tools are required (spark free tools, low voltage
lighting etc.).
 The local procedure shall state if respiratory protection is required (air-purifying,
supplied air, self-contained breathing apparatus etc.).
 Make sure that the entrant can enter/exit the confined space easily with a respirator on.
 In all cases a independent respiratory breathing apparatus must be readily available on
the job site (as back up) for quick access in case of emergency.
 The local procedure shall state means of communication between the stand by person
and the persons in the confined space as well as between the stand by person and
emergency response organization as well as the equipment owner or it’s delegate of the
location.
 A log of people entering and exiting the confined space must be kept by the stand-by
person.
 A log of equipment and materials entering and exiting the confined space must be kept
by the stand-by person.
11.4.4 Confined space closure
 All people and equipment/materials must be accounted for before closure of the
confined space.
 Removal of rescue equipment can only be done when all people have been accounted for.
 A visual check must be completed before closure of the confined space.
 Closure of SWP and hand-over to Equipment owner. After closure of the SWP no entry
into the confined space of any body part is allowed.
 The Equipment owner must take over the confined space and start SWP for closure that
includes the ready for operation status check before final closure. After closure of the
SWP no entry into the confined space of any body part is allowed.
11.4.5 Summary of safe confined space work entry
1. Before starting the preparation for the work - consider if the entry is necessary.
2. Make a thorough risk assessment and risk mitigation plan and issue a safe work permit
for the work.
3. Apply the LoToTo procedure for isolating the confined space.

4. The measuring instruments used in atmospheric testing need to be properly calibrated

and measuring positions must consider the type of hazard (e.g.gasses heavier or lighter
than air, death spaces despite ventilation etc.).
5. Only trained people can access a confined space or can be the rescuer.
6. Issue a confined space entry permit that are linked to the safe work permit.
11.5 Work At Heights Including Roof Work
11.5.1 General Minimum requirements:
• Prior to conducting work at heights or above dangerous/hazardous surfaces, the area

should be inspected for fall hazards and other hazards that may be present in the area.
The implementation of this program will be accomplished via the Safe Work Permit
process.
• Requirements for the different subjects like cranes, hoist, tank cars, ladders, platforms,
scaffolding are described in the below chapters.
• If the analysis reveals that a fall hazard is present, the following steps should be taken.
Fall hazards will be addressed in the following order:
1. Eliminate the fall hazard if feasible
2. If elimination is not feasible, utilize fall protection controls
• When fall protection controls are selected, they will be selected:
• by a qualified person
• According with manufacturer’s recommendations and use limitations
• When using Personal Fall Protection (PFP) always 100% tie-off is required (i.e. one of the
two hooks must be attached at all times). When PFP are used, 100% supervision is
required. i.e. the person wearing stationary PFP can never work alone. The supervision
must have good means of communication to initiate the site emergency plan in case
rescue of a person hanging in the PFP is required.
• A rescue plan must be made when using Personal Fall Protection.
• Prior to fall protection use, all fall protection equipment must be inspected to ensure the
equipment is properly functioning. This shall be accomplished through a visual
inspection by the user, the work permit authorizer checks for certificates where
applicable of all fall protection gear. During visual inspection, the lifting device should be
examined for signs of wear, tears, rips, or other obvious defects. Also, the inspection tag
must be looked at to verify that the formal inspection has been completed. When fall
protection has been activated by a fall it needs to be replaced or if possible refurbished
before it can be put in use again.
• On a periodic basis (but at least annually), all fall protection must be formally inspected
for wear. This inspection must be completed by a qualified person. The inspection status
must be visible on the equipment. Good practice is to use color coded labels to quickly
identify the validity period.
• Any fall protection equipment found to be defective must be removed from service
immediately until replaced or repaired and it shall be marked in such a manner to clearly
indicate that this is not to be used.
• All fall protection equipment will be cleaned and maintained in a good working order
following each use.
• All fall protection equipment will be stored in a clean and dry location following each
use.

11.5.2 Minimum requirements - Scaffolds
1. Scaffolds shall be furnished and erected in accordance with local regulations for
scaffolding and manufacturer's instructions. In the absence of regulatory specific
guidance and where the local regulations are less protective than that provided by this
document, the requirements in this guidance must be followed.
2. A formal inspection must be conducted by a certified person before the scaffolding is to
be put in use. A tag system must be used indicating if yes or no the scaffold construction
and the use has been approved. The tag must be readily visible on the scaffold. The tag
must contain date of approval, approvers name and duration of the approval/validity of
approval as well as the maximum working load. A tag for approved used must be placed
at all access places (at all ladders/stairs)
3. During erection of the scaffold, the respective building team must be tied off according
with the fall protection program (two hooks on each harness).
4. The footing or anchorage for scaffolds shall be sound, rigid, and capable of carrying the
maximum intended load without settling or displacement.
5. Scaffolds shall not be altered or moved horizontally while they are in use or occupied.
6. Any scaffold damaged or weakened from any cause shall not be used (tag pulled) until
repairs have been completed and the structure has been re-inspected and recertified.
7. To prevent use by un-authorized persons of incomplete scaffolds, relevant warning signs
identifying the areas where access is not permitted should be displayed at the access
points to these areas ie. Application of the Scaff tags. In addition, access to the incomplete
areas should be prevented by suitable physical means.
8. Scaffolds shall not be loaded in excess of the working load for which they are intended.
The working load should be clearly identified on the inspection certificate/scaffolding
tag.
9. All planking or platforms shall be secured from movement. Kick board must be placed
on each working platform (e.g. stair cases are exempt if no work will take place in those
areas, unless local legislation direct otherwise).
10. A fixed access ladder or equivalent safe access shall be provided.
11. Employees shall not work on scaffolds during storms, thunder storms or high winds at or
above 6 on Beaufort scale (at or above 25 mph).
12. Employees shall not work on scaffolds which are covered with ice or snow, unless all ice
or snow is removed and planking sanded to prevent slipping.
13. Tools, materials, and debris shall not be allowed to accumulate.
14. Only treated or protected fiber rope shall be used for or near any work involving the use
of corrosive substances or chemicals.
15. Scaffolds shall be secured to permanent structures, through use of anchor bolts, reveal
bolts, or other equivalent means.
16. Scaffolds should not block access to emergency equipment and escape routes or disable
safety devices. (e.g. think about scaffolding platforms below sprinklers blocking proper
distribution of water/foam. Scaffolds blocking exits etc.).
11.5.3 Minimum requirements - Roof Work
1. In roof works, the first line of defense is to provide adequate edge protection. Whilst
making edge protection available, all the necessary precautions for working at height
must be followed until the edge protection is in place.
2. To access a roof to apply adequate edge protection, scaffolds should be used. Never use a
ladder to access a roof as it does not provide any edge protection.
3. Full edge protection (comprising top rail, mid rail and toe board) is required whenever
the work requires access within 2 meters of the roof perimeter (this 2 meter zone should
be clearly marked).

4. Providing adequate edge protection may not always be possible or reasonably

practicable. If so, harnesses will be required. If harnesses are used they must be securely
attached to a sufficiently strong anchorage point.
5. Roof work should not be conducted by personnel alone or, if so, employees must be
provided with communication equipment (man down communication equipment).
6. When harnesses are used as fall protection a rescue plan must be made and people that
are to execute the rescue plan must be trained. Be aware a person hanging in a harness
can only survive this situation for very limited time. Blood flow to legs can be blocked.
11.5.4 Minimum requirements - Work Platforms
11.5.4.1 Fixed elevated work platforms
1. Fixed elevated work platforms present a fall hazard if the platform contains unguarded
edges, floor or wall openings, or openings for ladders. Standard guardrails are the most
effective control to eliminate the fall hazard. When guardrails cannot be installed or
during the process of being installed on a work platform, fall protection or other
protective means must be utilized to control the fall hazard.
2. The platform must include a guardrail system around the entire periphery. The guardrail
system must include a top rail, mid rail and toe boards on all sides according with local
regulations.
11.5.4.2 Tank Cars
Platforms on the top of tank cars must be equipped with guardrail systems around its
periphery or an approved personal fall protection system must be used when working on the
top of a tank car.
11.5.4.3 Self-propelled aerial lift platforms
Self-propelled elevated working platforms pose similar hazards to fixed platforms with the
additional characteristic of being mobile. These platforms use guardrail systems as the
primary engineering control for the protection of workers from falls. The requirements for
these guardrails are the same as those presented for fixed elevated working platforms. Where
such guardrail systems exist, the use of Personal Fall Protection Systems is not a requirement.
If worksite rules require an occupant(s) of the platform to wear restraint or body positioning
devices, occupants shall comply with instructions provided by the aerial platform
manufacturer regarding anchorage(s).The guardrail system is not designed for or regulated
to meet the anchorage point requirements, and is not structurally adequate to be used as a
PFP anchorage point.
Personnel shall maintain a firm footing on the platform floor while working thereon.
Climbing by occupants on the mid rail or top rail of the aerial platform is prohibited. The use
of planks, ladders, or any other devices on the platform is also prohibited.
These mobile platforms should only be used on proper paved and smooth surfaces.
Driving with elevated platform is not allowed.
11.5.4.4 Boom-supported elevating work platforms
 Boom-supported elevating work platforms are self-propelled units having a platform

that can be positioned completely beyond the base.
 Guardrail systems, inclusive of top rail, mid rail, and toe boards are the primary
engineering control for the protection of workers. Personal fall protection (harness) must

also be used, because of the leverage the boom has, to potentially “catapult” the user out
of the basket when becoming unstable/hitting a pothole in the road while driving.
 The occupants of the platform must secure their PFPs (Harness) to an anchorage point
provided by the manufacturer. Employees may not utilize the top rail or the mid rail of
the guardrail system as the anchorage point for the PFP.
 Personnel shall maintain a firm footing on the platform floor. Climbing on the mid rail or
top rail of the aerial platform is prohibited. The use of planks, ladders, or any other
devices on the aerial platform for achieving height or reach is prohibited.
 Driving with elevated basket is not allowed.
11.5.4.5 Minimum requirements - Ladders
1. Ladders are only suitable for light work. Make certain there are no other better means of
access before using a ladder.
2. If ladders are to be used, it must be ensured that the work only requires one hand to be
used, that the work can be reached without stretching and the ladder can be fixed to
prevent slipping.
3. Light tools must carried in a shoulder bag or holster attached to a belt so that both hands
are free for climbing. Heavy or bulky loads should not be carried up or down ladders.
4. Ladders should be secured by rope or other suitable stabilization devices. If the ladder
cannot be fixed, a second person foots the ladder while it is being used (this also applies
in the process while the ladder is being fixed).
5. Step-ladders provide a free-standing means of access, but they require careful use as they
are not designed for any degree of side loading and are relatively easily overturned. The
top step of a step-ladder should not be worked from unless it has been designed for this
purpose.
6. When work is conducted around electrical hazards, always use ladders of non-
conductive materials.
7. Always perform a visual inspection of the ladders condition, before use.
8. Good practices is to mark the 1.8 meter/6 feet level on the ladder to create risk
awareness.
9. When carrying ladders over 3 meters – always ask for assistance from a colleague.
11.6 Hoisting and Lifting
11.6.1 Preventive maintenance
Preventive maintenance must be conducted and documented on cranes and hoists in

accordance with manufacturer’s guidance or local regulatory requirements and the
inspection status must be clearly marked on the equipment.
11.6.2 Planning
 A competent and trained person shall be assigned for each lift operation. You should
ensure that the person carrying out an examination has such appropriate practical and
theoretical knowledge and experience of the lifting equipment to be thoroughly
examined as well enable them to detect defects or weaknesses and to assess their
importance in relation to the safety and continued use of the lifting equipment. The
competent person must be sufficiently independent and impartial to allow objective
decisions to be made.
 Safe lifting procedures must be developed and documented for each type of crane or
hoist to be used.

 Characterize the load in terms of dimensions, weight and center of gravity.

 Characterize the task in terms of lifting, rotation, speeds and travel directions.
 Evaluate hazards to determine consequences resulting from collision, upset or dropping
the load.
 Determine how to rig the load using good rigging practices. Consult local rigging
handbooks as necessary to ensure proper rigging techniques are used for the lift.
 Ensure that the attachment points and load can withstand the forces created by the
rigging gear attachment. Crane outriggers/support plan must be made (no placing of
crane outriggers/supports on cellars, large underground piping or pits) to prevent cranes
falling over.
 Select equipment and rigging based on: the type, category of lift and minimum capacity
of lifting equipment (hoist, crane, slings, lifting fixture etc.) and on the identified load,
task and hazards.
 Ensure that sling angles are considered when determining forces on rigging equipment
and the load.
 A documented lift plan must be developed and included in the local Safe Work Permit.
11.6.3 Preparing and testing
 Assign a designated leader for the lift.

 Assign a load master for the lift.
 Verify that all equipment, fixtures and accessories are operative, up-to-date on required
periodic inspections and in good condition before the operation begins.
 Perform all equipment pre-use inspections.
 Equipment that fails routine or pre-use inspection can´t be operated until the equipment
is repaired.
 Visual inspections must be conducted by qualified crane and hoists operators prior to
each use, as well as permit authorizer.
 Determine the wind conditions: If wind speeds are in excess of 30 mph – the lift should
not be made; if wind speeds are more than 20 mph – consider postponing the lift.
 Prepare the area where the load is being moved to. Block/rope off the areas concerned.
 Survey the lift site for hazardous or unsafe conditions; clear lift path of obstructions.
 Ensure all personnel involved in the lift understand the lift plan and the safe work
permit.
11.6.4 Performing the lift
 Keep a copy of the lifting plan at the work site and follow the plan.
 Vacate all non-essential personnel from the building/concerned area and adjacent areas.
 Load master to secure the load to the lifting device.
 Lift leader to instruct the crane driver/lift to start the lift.
 The lift leader must have a clear visual on the load designation. When this designation
does not allow the lift leader to be in visual contact with the crane driver/lifter, than the
lift leader instructions must be given by radio to the crane driver/lifter.
 First slowly raise the crane to take the slack out of the rigging without actually lifting the
item. Allow the rigging gear to settle into place, checking for twists and binding. Make
sure that padding has remained in place and all slings are protected from sharp edges.
Begin to raise the item to verify balance and check the braking system by watching that
the load does not sink. If load is not balanced, lower the load and adjust. Repeat as
necessary until the load is evenly balanced.
 When balanced the lift leader can give the order to start the lift.

 At the load designation, the load-master receives the lift and manually guides the lift
with the lift guidance lines the final moments to get the lift in a stable position at its final
designation.
 Stop the job when any potentially unsafe condition is recognized.
11.6.5 After the lift
Check lift equipment for damages occurred during the lift before putting them back into
storage.
Inform all concerned that the lift is completed.
11.7 Safe Line Breaking
11.7.1 Regularly opened pipe lines/process equipment
Opening of this category should be described in a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP).

During the development of SOP, the Safe Work Permit procedure of normally closed
equipment shall serve as a guidance to assess risks and define control measures.
11.7.2 Non routine opening of pipe lines/process equipment
These conditions are to be met before starting the work:
Non routine opening can only be done via the Safe Work Permit system. The permit
authorizer is to allow opening of lines only if all of the following criteria are met:
No other procedure can be used to complete the necessary work (i.e. line breaking cannot be
avoided)
1. A plan and a documented risk assessment (JSA) has been developed on how to execute
the preparation for line breaking: Like isolation, emptying the equipment,
decontamination and flushing of the lines/equipment.
2. A plan and a documented risk assessment (JSA) has been developed on how to execute
the line breaking (can be in one plan with the preparation) to avoid exposure to
remaining risks.
3. Safe status of equipment has been verified.
4. First line and second line of defenses, Emergency response measures and PPE to be used
have been defined. (PPE cannot serve as first line of defense)
“What if” scenarios for potential deviations have been risk assessed and mitigations have be
prepared. Some typical deviations are: Blocked/plugged line/filter, flection/sink in line such
that line does not drain completely etc.
Execution of line breaking/opening process equipment:
1. Decontamination/cleaning/flushing should be done according to site procedures.

2. Work method should be described to make sure people will always stay out of the line of
fire.
3. PPE should be used for maximum exposure as defined in the MSDS/internal
instructions.
4. Isolation should be done by using the LoToTo system and site procedures for blinding
and blanking so that the line/equipment is clear. Prior to start of work on the
line/equipment, especially in cases where work is started, stopped, restarted, each time

the line/equipment should be checked to assure that it is 100% clear and in a zero energy
state. Secondary containment should be defined where appropriate.
5. he preferred hierarchy for isolation is the following:
• Remove/disconnect pipework, if not possible
• Blind, if not possible
• Blank, if not possible
• Double Block and bleed
6. Lines should be tied off (=supported) when there is a risk of movement after loosening
flanges or fittings.
7. In case of unexpected situations (e.g. line plugging) the risk assessment should be
updated before continuation of the work.
Equipment put back into operation
The permit authorizer will confirm that all related preventive actions/modifications made to
allow the line breaking/opening of process equipment have been properly reverted into the
original operating conditions. If not, MOC has to be completed by the requestor of the
change.
11.8 Overriding safety devices
Before overriding a safety device a risk assessment has to be performed by a trained person.
• The risk level of the respective override situation needs to be assessed and authorization
for override must be accordance to the level of risk caused by the particular override.
• Risk Level reduction can be made up out of combined safe guards to reach the required
protection level. See example in graphics below. If only partial override of a combined
safeguard, then the authorization level is for the Risk level caused by the partial override
situation.
• In order to compensate for the loss of protection level, an alternative safeguard should be
created to get as close as possible to the original safeguard level.
• The risk assessment and the respective risk mitigations have to be documented and
approved by an authorized person according to the responsibilities and authorization
levels set by the Site manager.
• A log book of all open and historical overrides must be kept in the Control room for
future review and reference.
11.9 Safe driving and travelling
It is important to remember these basic safety tips so you can avoid any unnecessary
accidents:
 Pay attention to and follow all directions on posted signage

 Stay calm and focus on the driving
 Turn on your headlights to increase your visibility
 Drive the recommended speed limit or slower and do not resume normal speed until
posted sign instructs you too
 Keep a safe stopping distance between you and the driver in front of you
 Never pass on the shoulder or the median
 Stay patient through delays
 Be aware of where maintenance workers are working
 Predict where machinery and equipment are going to go

 Expect the unexpected
It is also good to know how construction zones are laid out, so that when you are
approaching one you know what to expect:
 Advanced Warning Area: This is the area before coming up to a construction zone.
Usually there will be posted signage telling you when the construction begins, the length
of delays, and where the construction ends.
 Transition Area: This is the area right before a construction zone where you will reduce
your speed or merge lanes.
 Buffer Area: This is the buffer space between the transition area and where the workers
are to give drivers time to correct their actions.
 Work Area: This is the area where the actual construction is happening.
 Termination Area: This is the area between the end of the construction zone and where
drivers can resume normal activity.
If you follow these basic safety techniques, you will avoid accidents in construction zones.
11.10 No use of alcohol and drugs
 A local policy for alcohol and drugs shall be in place for all sites/locations.
 This policy shall clearly state that no one shall enter the site/location being under
influence of alcohol and/or drugs.
 The policy shall also state the procedure for how an employee shall report a case of
assumed use of alcohol and/or drugs as well as the procedure for supporting an
employee with alcohol and/or drug dependence.
12.0 PPE (Personal Protective Equipment)
Site team will require all members representing various organizations at site, including sub-
contractors to protect their employees from hazards in the work place. The type of equipment
required for the task will be determined by the risk assessment as part of the safe work
permit, but the sub-contractor must obtain this equipment and assure that it is used.
The mandatory PPE for site entry is Hard Hat, Safety Shoe and Visibility Vest along with
working trouser and shirt. All workers, employees and visitors or who wanted to enter the
PPE zones should comply the mandatory PPE. PPE will be checked regularly at the site
locations by IPSM team and at Entry gate on every fortnight and ensure that all personnel
comply with IPS-M PPE Requirements.
• IPS-M ensures Personnel are restricted to enter into site premises without PPE. Damaged
PPE will be replaced by contractor if noted immediately.
• IPS-M Security checks PPE of all the personnel entering into site. Individual contractor is
responsible to provide PPE to the visitors and truck drivers who enter into site.
• Provision and use of PPE conforming to National or equivalent standards to all
employees whether posted at site or visiting the site shall be ensured as specified below:

12.1.1 Head Protection
Safety helmets are required in all areas where a person can be injured by falling or flying
objects. Safety Helmets conforming to IS-2925 with chin strap shall be worn by all in the site
premises.
The most commonly used are made of HDPE. The hard hat is a mandatory PPE.
12.1.2 Eye and Face Protection
Eye and face protection devices shall be used by any person who might be exposed to
hazards of flying particles, dust, light or heat radiation, chemical or hot metal splashes etc. to
protect his eyes and face during course of his work.
It has to be chosen according to the task, for example a face shield protecting from a grinding
will not necessary protect from chemical hazards. For welding operation, the correct selection
of shade grades & strength according to the task being performed must be used. Double eye
protection for all grinding tasks must be used.
12.1.3 Foot Protection
Good quality safety shoes, with penetration resistant soles and toe caps, are mandatory to be
worn in construction areas comply with IS 15298 Part 2. Tennis shoes and sandals are not
permitted on job sites.
12.1.4 Respiratory Protection
Respirators can be regarded as emergency equipment or equipment for occasional use.

Workers who need this equipment have to be medically fit, fit tested, instructed, and trained
in its proper use, maintenance and its limitation. When an employee has to wear any
respirator, the subcontractor will submit the evidence of the compliance with the
requirements under this standard.
12.1.5 Hearing Conservation and Protection
Any person exposed to excessive noise in his work area shall use ear protection device.
Employees must be protected from noise levels that could affect their hearing. When
employees are expected to be exposed to harmful levels, administrative and engineering
control has to be provided as well as personal protective equipment, considering always the
noise reduction rate necessary (NRR).
Total time of exposure (continuous or a number of short-term exposures) per day (in hours)
Sound pressure level (in dBA) 8hrs 90dBA 6hrs 92dBA 4hrs 95dBA 3hrs 97dBA 2hrs
100dBA. If the sound level is more than 80dBA a hearing protection like ear-plug / ear muff
is must.
12.1.6 Hand and Body Protection
Hand and body protection devices of appropriate type as applicable shall be used by a
person who might be exposed to the possibility of injury to his hand or body while executing
a particular task.

13.0 Concrete Work
Pouring of concrete should always be done with great care. Following precautions should be
taken during the concreting works.
1. Risks could arise due to blockages in the pipes carrying the pumped concrete.
2. Risks could arise due to violent discharges at the outlets.
3. Electrical mixers, vibrators etc shall be suitably earthed.
4. Vibrator hoses shall be in proper working conditions and mechanically located safety
cages shall be provided around moving motors etc.
14.0 Structural Works
The following preventive measures are to be taken to avoid any injury:
1. Do not take rest inside rooms built for welding machines or electrical distribution
system.
2. Walking on beams at height is not allowed, see section 11.8 Work at height
3. Wear helmet with chinstrap and safety harness when working at height.
4. Use hand gloves and goggles during grinding operations
5. Cover or mark the sharp and projected edges
6. Do not stand within the operating radius of cranes
7. Do not stand under the lifted load
8. Stack properly all the materials. Avoid slippage during handling.
9. Control longer pieces lifted up by cranes from both ends.
10. Remove loose materials from height
11. Ensure tightening of all nuts & bolts.
15.0 Radiography
The following preventive measures is to be taken before starting radiography
1. No radiography job is to be started before taking valid permit and clearance from
concerned authority
2. Only competent persons shall be employed for the use of radio-active source for the
inspection and testing. Dosimeter shall be used by such persons and radiation
dose/exposure shall be counted
3. Ensure safety regulations as per BARC before commencement of job.
4. Barricade the area and install radiation warning symbols.
5. Restrict the entry of unauthorized persons.
6. Wear appropriate PPE and film badges.
7. Never touch or handle radiography source with hands.
8. Store radiography source inside a pit in an exclusive isolate storage room with lock and
key arrangement.
9. Radiography source should never be carried either in passenger bus or in a passenger
compartment of the train.
10. For direct exposure to radiography source, the operators should be sent for blood
examination immediately. Subsequently after a period of 48 hours, the relevant blood
reports should be sent to BARC for evaluation and taking necessary action.

16.0 Electrical Safety
1. It is to be checked and verified that all parts of electrical installations shall be standard
construction conforming to relevant National or equivalent international standards. At
main power distribution board “EARTH-TRIP” device shall be installed and all electrical
connections shall be 3-core type to the maximum extent practicable. No work close to un-
insulated energized equipment is allowed.
2. All electric work needs to have a special permit for electrical work.
3. All electrical work needs to be inspected before energized.
4. Proper earthing and insulation of all electrical lines and equipment shall be ensured.
earthing shall confirm Indian Electricity Rules-1956.
5. All electrical connections, wiring etc shall be carried out only by certified electricians.
6. Unauthorized tapping of construction power and tampering of power distribution lines
shall not be allowed.
7. Junction boxes or plug-and-socket couplings only shall be used for joining cables..
8. For electrical connections “EARTH” must not be used as “NEUTRAL”.
9. Metal clad industrial type 3 pin plug and socket shall only be used as far as is practicable.
10. Frayed cables, inadequately insulated wires, loose connections, improper fuse or lack of
it, etc. in the electrical system shall be identified through frequent checks and corrective
action taken.
11. Practice of insertion wires directly into socket holes without proper plug top for drawing
power shall not be allowed.
12. Extension boxes shall not be extended with extension box.
13. Power cables must not run on the ground & it should be raised. All power cables running
on surface shall be suitable covered/protected to prevent damage due to movement of
materials and vehicles.
14. While men are at work on electrical line or equipment for maintenance, repair, etc.,
control switches shall be switched off, locked, fuse removed and warning signs displayed
on the switches.
15. So far as is practicable, proper power distribution boards shall be provided at convenient
locations, to avoid crossing of electrical wires that obstruct safe movement of men and
material.
16. Storage of materials and travel of equipment under temporary power lines will be
avoided at all times.
17. Use electrically tested safety gloves, stand on rubber mat and shut off electrical circuits.
18. Never carry any electric tool in switch on mode while you are climbing on MS ladder.
19. Ensure to keep CO2 Fire Extinguisher nearby electrical panel board.
20. Machinery shall not be permitted to approach within the following distance of overhead
power lines:
Sr.
Current in KV Distance in m
No.
1. 11 1.40
2. 33 3.60
3. 132 4.70
4. 275 5.70
5. 400 6.50

Sr.
Effects of Electrical Current on the Body
No.
Current Reaction
1. 1 milliamp Just a faint tingle
2. 5 milliamps Slight shock felt. Disturbing but not painful. Most

people can “lets go”. However, strong involuntary
movements can cause injuries.
3. 6 – 25 milliamps (women) Painful Shock. Muscular control is lost. This is the
9 –30 milliamps (men) range where “freezing currents” start. It may not be
possible to “let go”.
4. 50 – 150 milliamps Extremely painful shock, respiratory arrest (breathing
stops), severe muscle contractions. Flexor muscles may
cause holding on; extensor muscles may cause intense
pushing away. Death is possible.
5. 1,000 – 4,300 milliamps Ventricular fibrillation (heart pumping action not
(1-4.3 amps) rhythmic) occurs. Muscles contract; nerve damage
occurs. Death is likely.
6. 10,000 milliamps Cardiac arrest and severe burns occur. Death is
(10 amps) probable.
7. 15,000 milliamps Lowest over current at which a typical fuse or circuit
(15 amps) breaker opens a circuit.
16.1 General Requirements for Temporary Electrical Installations
16.1.1 Earthing of Electrical Installations
All appliances and equipment on a temporary installation shall be, connected to a system of
duplicate earthing one of the Power Supply Authority and one local. Wherever armored
cables are used, the armoring shall be connected to earthing arrangement of Power Supply
Authority. For local earthing, an independent earth continuity wire shall be used.
16.1.2 Protection & Safety
1. The installation as a whole shall be protected against overload, short circuit and earth
leakage by suitable protective devices.
2. No flammable materials shall be stored near the service intake point or the operational
area of electrical equipment or appliances.
3. Fire extinguishers (Only CO2) shall be kept at the supply intake point and near the main
switch of the installation.
4. In construction sites, protection of persons against indirect contact shall be assured by
automatic disconnection of supply, appropriate to the system earthing. Socket outlet
shall either be protected by Residual Current devices having operating current not
exceeding 30 mA or be supplied by safety extra low voltage or electrical separation of
circuit each socket outlet being supplied by a separate transformer.
16.1.3 Inspection of Portable Power Tools
1. Tools are inspected daily before use and are kept clean in good condition.
2. Power tools should be inspected fortnightly by supervisor and certified.
3. Blades, bits and other cutting parts are inspected prior to each use, are kept sharp, and
are replaced if worn or cracked.

4. Damaged, defective or worn tools are tagged and removed from service until repaired.
5. No bare wires are visible
6. Cable covering is free from cuts and abrasions
7. Plug is in good condition, not cracked, pins bent
8. No non-standard joints in cable
9. Outer casing is intact, no visible colored insulation of internal cables
10. No overheating or burn marks
11. If any signs of damage, equipment should be taken out of service immediately
16.1.4 Electrical Tools
1. All electrical tools are grounded or double insulated.

2. Earth returns are not used for grounding.
3. Electrical cords are protected from damage by vehicles etc.
4. Electrical cords are regularly checked for fraying.
5. Electrical tools are not used in wet areas or in areas where flammable vapors may be
present, unless specifically designed for that purpose.
6. Electrical tools are not hoisted or lowered by their cords.
7. All electrical tools should have proper plugs for connection
16.1.5 Grinders and Abrasive Wheels
1. Excessively worn grinding disks are discarded and replaced.

2. Abrasive wheels have hoods or guards to protect workers from flying fragments of a
bursting wheel.
3. There are guards on spindle end and on nut and flange projects. They are mounted to
maintain proper alignment with the wheel. The strength of the fastening exceeds the
strength of the guard.
4. Wheels are inspected before mounting and the spindle speed is checked to make sure
that it does not exceed the rating marked on the wheel.
16.1.6 Circular Saws
1. The upper half of the saw blade is permanently guarded.

2. The lower half of the saw blade is guarded with a telescopic or hinged guard.
3. Guards are not blocked, open to prevent functioning.
16.1.7 Accidental Actuation of Tools
1. Tools with proper working switch.

2. Trained Operator.
3. Prevent accidental disconnection of pneumatic tools.
17.0 Fire Safety
Policy and planning for fire safety at the project site takes into account the special fire
hazards for specific operating areas, the protection of high value property, and the safety of
employees. To manage this activity Trained Fire Fighters will be identified at site by IPSM.
These ends are met by:
1. Non-combustible or fire rated materials and construction practices suitable to the

assigned uses of buildings and facilities.

2. Availability of suitable hand held extinguishers and local hose lines for use before fire
fighters arrive.
3. Proper work procedures for all hot works (see chapter 11.2).
The fire department makes the initial response to all requests for emergency aid received on
the emergency telephone number.
In case of fire,
R.A.C.E. to Fire Safety
It is important that you and your staff are prepared to respond to fires and other
emergencies. Review this basic, but critical, fire response information with your team on a
regular basis. Follow the “R.A.C.E.” acronym if there is a fire or suspected fire:
Rescue – Alarm – Contain – Extinguish
Rescue
Immediately stop what you are doing and remove anyone in immediate danger from the fire
to a safe area.
Ambulatory persons should be instructed to leave under their own power and report to the
Emergency Assembly Point.
Persons that require assistance with ambulation should be assisted to the Emergency
Assembly Point (identified in the Evacuations section of this manual).
Get out as safely and quickly as possible. The less time you and others are exposed to
poisonous gases, heat, or flames, the safer everyone will be.
Assist/ensure evacuation per instructions from the Disaster Leader and according to the
Evacuations section of this manual.
Alarm
Activate the nearest fire alarm pull stations (if applicable).

Call local emergency and/or the front desk (if applicable) to report the location and current
extent of the fire. The front desk is notified so that the entire disaster response team can be
quickly notified.
Contain
Close all doors and windows that you can safety reach to contain the fire.
During evacuation close the doors behind you.
Extinguish
Only attempt to extinguish the fire if it is safe for you to do so.

Retrieve the nearest fire extinguisher and follow the “P.A.S.S.” procedure:
P = Pull the pin breaking the plastic seal;
A = Aim at the base of the fire;
S = Squeeze the handles together; and
S = Sweep from side to side.

17.1 Classification of Fire
The type of materials are classified as follows
Class Type
Class A SOLIDS such as paper, wood, plastic etc
Class B FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS such as paraffin, petrol, oil etc
Class C FLAMMABLE GASES such as propane, butane, methane etc
Class D METALS such as aluminum, magnesium, titanium etc
Class E Fires involving ELECTRICAL APPARATUS
Class F Cooking OIL & FAT etc
17.1.1 Fire Extinguishers Specifications
The common type of the extinguishers:
1. Water Fire Extinguishers - The cheapest and most widely used fire extinguishers. These
are used for Class A fires. These are not suitable for Class B (Liquid) fires and Class C
fires, and dangerous if used for energized equipment or cooking oils or fats.
2. Foam Extinguishers- More expensive than water, but more versatile. These are suitable
for Classes A & B fires. Foam spray extinguishers are not recommended for fires
involving electricity, but are safer than water if inadvertently sprayed onto live electrical
apparatus.
3. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) - Carbon Dioxide is ideal for fires involving electrical apparatus,
and will also extinguish class B liquid fires, but has NO POST FIRE SECURITY and the
fire could re-ignite.
4. Dry chemicals powder (DCP) - Often termed the ‘multi-purpose’ extinguisher, as it can
be used on classes A, B & C fires. Best for running liquid fires (Class B). Will efficiently
extinguish Class C gas fires. But when extinguishing a gas fire, the gas supply needs to
be isolated first. Special powders are available for class D metal fires.
Following are the BIS standards for portable and mobile Fire Extinguishers:
1. IS 2171 : 1985 Portable Fire Extinguishers Dry Powder Type (Cartridge)

IS 2878: 1986 Fire Extinguishers Carbon Dioxide Type (Portable and trolley
mounted)
2. IS 6234: 1986 Portable Fire Extinguishers Water Type (Stored pressure).
3. IS 10204 : 1982 Portable Fire Extinguishers Mechanical Foam Type
4. IS 13849 : 1993 Portable Fire Extinguishers Dry Powder Type (Constant pressure)
18.0 Explosives
No Explosives should be used. No explosives at site.
19.0 House Keeping
Large Number of Accident at Construction site is caused by improper housekeeping. All

contractors will be having dedicated housekeeping team managed by IPSM.
Following preventive measure to be taken at regular basis avoid any accident at site.
1. Removal of surplus Earth and Debris, from the working areas to identified locations.

2. Unused/ surplus Cables Drums, Steel items and Steel scrap scattered in the working
areas should be removed to identify locations.
3. Wooden Scrap/ Empty Wooden Cables Drums and other combustible packing materials
are to be removed from work place to an identified location.
4. Roads are to be clear and no materials like, pipe, steel, sand, Boulders, Concrete, Chips &
Bricks etc. should be kept on the road, which may obstruct the movement of men &
machinery.
5. Demarked walkways for movement shall be cleaned and maintained all time. Fabricated
Steel Structure, Pipes and Piping materials should not lie scattered but stacked properly.
6. Water spillage/logging on walkways is not allowed, construction water supply lines
should be plugged properly after days’ work is over.
7. Trucks / Tractors- Trolleys, Cranes & Trailers etc not to be parked on Roads to obstruct
movement.
8. Over all cleanliness and proper upkeep of the work place is maintained.
19.1.1 Housekeeping for fire
Elimination of combustible waste is a fundamental and major part of any fire prevention
program. It requires special efforts on construction projects because of the large amounts of
materials that occur as packaging from incoming material.
A continuous and effective housekeeping program must be strictly adhered to throughout

the duration of the project. The program should provide for the following:
1. A sufficient number of appropriate containers to receive trash and waste materials.
2. Prompt removal of all combustible trash to prevent any appreciable accumulation.
3. Removal should be on a daily basis or more frequently where substantial amounts of
trash are being generated.
19.1.2 Trips / Slips
1. Good housekeeping.
2. Removal of unwanted materials from time to time.
3. All temporary electrical connections should be routed above ground (2 mt.) or
underground.
4. Clean up spills immediately. If a spill can’t be cleaned up right away, place “wet floor”
warning signs for workers.
5. Keeps walkways and hallways free of debris, clutter and obstacles.
6. Keep filing cabinets and desk drawers shut when not in use.
7. Cover cables or cords in walkways.
8. Replace burnt-out light bulbs promptly.
9. Consider installing abrasive floor mats or replacing worn flooring.
10. Encourage workers to wear comfortable, properly fitted safety shoes.
20.0 Traffic Rules
20.1 Hit by Speeding Vehicle
1. Observe speed limit of 10 km/hr

2. Use of speed breakers
3. Authorized entry of vehicle.
4. Vehicles to stop for pedestrians.
5. Pedestrians should follow the pedestrian path way.

20.1.1 Hit by Earth Moving Equipment
1. Vehicle with proper condition of parking brake, service brake, warning light and horn
while reversing.
2. Trained and licensed driver.
3. Barricading / flagging the area where such operation is going on.
4. Observing speed limit 10 km. / hr.
5. Vehicle guide
21.0 Environmental Protection
21.1 Disposal of Waste and Hazardous Material
All waste shall be disposed of at locations approved by the IPSM and the relevant authorities
and in accordance with established procedure prevalent on site.
Hazardous materials shall be disposed of at approved waste disposal facilities in accordance

with the following:
1. Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) / acceptable practice.

2. Municipality regulations or directives.
21.2 Waste Handling
All waste streams generated by the facility shall be identified and documented. When wastes
are isolated or put into temporary or permanent containment, they shall be properly labeled
and disposed of within the time prescribed by local and regional law. Wastes shall be stored
in such a fashion as to minimize the risk of fire or explosion, and to eliminate the possibility
of contamination of rivers, streams, soil and groundwater.
All wastes shall be disposed of using methods and procedures as prescribed by local and
regional law, and through the use of licensed and approved third parties and disposal sites.
Training
Personnel tasked with monitoring and measuring waste disposal shall receive appropriate
training, from a qualified external party, as a prerequisite to performing any duties under
this.
21.3 Hazardous Materials
Hazardous Materials are any substances or compounds that may produce adverse effects on
the health and safety of people if not properly managed. Management of hazardous materials
includes storage, handling, use and disposal.
Workers involved with hazardous waste operations, as defined by local regulations, shall
have met, prior to any field work activity or exposure, the training requirements of the
standard. Certification of individual worker training shall be provided to Contractor prior to
commencing work.
Contractors shall include planning for environmental compliance in the preparation of their
HSP or Safety Action Plan. Issues to be considered include but are not limited to release

reporting, air permits, water permits, asbestos/lead permits or notifications, hazardous waste
generation and related disposal procedures, spill mitigation and clean-up methods, etc.
Contractor shall have a written Hazard Communication Program and comply with the
requirements of that program. A copy of the program along with chemical inventory for the
particular job/project shall be forwarded to Contractor Site/Project Management prior to
mobilization and a copy shall be in the possession of the contractor on the site.
Any potentially hazardous material or chemical brought onto the site shall be accompanied
by a Safety Data Sheet (SDS). Copies of SDSs shall be forwarded to the Site/Project
Management before the product is brought onto the site. Some sites, such as FDA regulated
facilities, do not permit the use of chemicals that are not on a pre-approved list.
Small quantities (less than 10 gallons) of hazardous liquids, such as gasoline, diesel fuels, and
solvents, brought onto the site shall be stored in a properly labeled safety container with a
flame arrestor and self-closing lid.
Site/Project Management shall be notified before any chemical or material is used that could
create foul smelling, noxious, or toxic vapours or gasses. Safety Data Sheets for the
substances shall be readily available.
All accidents involving exposure to potentially hazardous materials and hazardous material
releases must be immediately reported to the Contractor Site/Project Management. It is
important to report all releases or exposures even though the incident may be considered
minor or no adverse health effects or symptoms are apparent at the time.
Develop and implement a program for monitoring exposure to hazardous materials and a
health surveillance program where required, either by legislation or as part of a Health
Hazard Assessment.
Contractor shall follow labeling requirements and is also responsible to ensure personnel are
trained.
Storing hazardous substances safely is an important part of protecting you and your workers.
This includes storing only what you need, ensuring that incompatible substances are not
stored together, and that decanted substances are stored in the right type of container and
correctly labeled.
22.0 Ergonomics
Wrong Posture of Work
1. Right method of material handling and Ergonomics. Specific training must be completed.
2. Limits for mass weight to be lifted by an adult male or female worker will be 25kg.
23.0 Occupational Health
There are various areas of work where the occupational health needs to be checked. The
safety manager at site should ensure the same for all contractors & sub-contractors.

23.1 Dust
Dust is the greatest enemy confronting industry. The respirable dust (in size range – 0.5
microns to 3 micron) is a health hazard producing after a variable period of exposure a lung
known as PNEUMOCONIOSIS, in case of Engineering Industry. The protection mask must
be worn.
23.2 Silicosis
Due to inhalation of Silica dusts, a serious type which may gradually the worker by reducing
his working capacity due to lung fibrosis to other complication
23.3 Silica
Containing dust is involved in the following processes in construction industry wherein

workers run the risk of exposure to the dust hazards.
Metal finishing workers cleaning of casting, chipping, airblast cleaning, dry grinding,
polishing, buffing and sand blasting / shot blasting.
23.4 Iron Dust
Iron dust is encountered in Electric Arc Welders, workers doing dry grinding of iron, buffing,
polishing and shot blasting.
23.5 Legionella
The largest and most common source of Legionnaires' disease outbreaks are cooling towers
(heat rejection equipment used in air conditioning and industrial cooling water systems)
primarily because of the risk for widespread circulation.
23.6 Preventive Measure
The Safety supervisor would ascertain the need for the dust mask when the Job Safety
analysis and the Safe Work Permits are signed. He would also be responsible for education of
this aspect of safety for any specific works.
Personnel Protection: Where dust cannot be fully controlled, eliminated, a dust mask /
respiratory mask is a must to be used by all workers on dusty jobs, such respirator should be
effective for the particular dust encountered, also be comfortable and easy to wear and
acceptable to workers, along with this effective education and supervision is a must.
Dust and Fumes
1. Ventilation.
2. Use of dust mask.
3. Vacuum
Handling of Solvents, Paints and Thinners etc.
1. Proper storage.
2. Use of gloves / barrier cream / mask.
3. No smoking.

4. Observe hygiene.
5. Ventilation
24.0 Occupational Heat Stress
Occupational heat stress is the net load to which a worker is exposed from the combined
contributions of metabolic heat, environmental factors, and clothing worn which results in an
increase in heat storage in the body. Heat stress can result in heat-related illnesses, such
as heat stroke, hyperthermia, heat exhaustion, heat cramps or heat rashes. Although heat
exhaustion is less severe, hyperthermia is a medical emergency and requires emergency
treatment, which if not provided can even lead to death.
Heat stress causes illness but also may account for an increase in workplace accidents, and a
decrease in worker productivity. Worker injuries attributable to heat include those caused by:
sweaty palms, fogged-up safety glasses, and dizziness. Burns may also occur as a result of
accidental contact with hot surfaces or steam. There are few studies and regulations
regarding heat exposure of workers.
24.1 Risk factors
Heat-related illnesses from occupational heat stress have several risk factors. Some of these
factors include high temperatures, humidity, radiant heat sources, limited air movement,
metabolic heat from physical exertion of energy, not drinking enough fluids, personal
protective equipment and clothing, physical condition and health problems, medications,
pregnancy, lack of acclimatization, advanced age, having a previous heat-related illness and
others.
24.2 Examples of high risk occupations
Workers in many occupations are at high risk for exposure to heat stress. Some of the higher
risk occupations include construction worker, firefighter, bakery worker, miner, military
personnel, factory worker, boiler room worker, landscaper, some athletes and agricultural
worker.
24.3 Symptoms of heat stress
The main symptoms of heat stress are perspiration, increased heart rate,
and dehydration. Other general symptoms include painful muscle cramps, extreme
weakness, nausea, dizziness, headache, breathing fast and clammy, pale, cool, and/or moist
skin or red, dry skin.
24.4 Prevention
Establish prevention programs, which focus on having protocols to gradually increases

workloads and concede on allowing on more breaks for new hired workers. Employers can
control heat stress through engineering controls, work practices, providing training,
implementing an acclimatization schedule, providing water and encouraging workers to
drink often, and ensuring workers take appropriate rest breaks to cool down.

25.0 Emergency Response
The Emergency procedures are designed to ensure the health and safety of workers in the
event of emergency at site. The following safety procedures will be adopted for dealing with
site emergencies.

1. A site plan that indicates access gates, streets, meeting points, first aid facilities and
telephone will be developed and prominently displayed and communicated.
2. Person sounding the emergency alarm will report its location, nature, known injuries.
This person will remain at that location until emergency help arrives. Sirens should be
placed at various locations at site as indicated in the emergency plan.
3. Excitement and panic will be avoided.
4. Proper first aid will be provided to those injured.
5. Corrective actions will be implemented to prevent further injury or damage.
6. Emergency telephone numbers will be provided and prominently posted.
7. Ambulance and Fire Brigade service provider should be familiar with work area.
8. Mock drill should conduct by Safety Manager and Project manager once in a Quarter.
25.1 ERT (Emergency Response Team)
An emergency response team (ERT) is a group of people who prepare for and respond to any
emergency incident, such as a natural disaster or an interruption of business operations.
Emergency response teams are common in organizations. This team is generally composed of
specific members designated before an incident occurs, although under certain circumstances
the team may be an ad hoc group of willing volunteers. Please refer Appendix 1 - site
emergency plan for more detail.
26.0 Reporting risks, accidents and near miss cases
As per Exhibit – 7
26.1 Hazards Identification & Reporting
Introduction
Golden Rule:
Have the courage to stop your colleague, supervisor, manager or contractor when you see
unsafe behavior or when you yourself are required to do something that feels unsafe.
Always do this out of an ”I care for you” perspective.
The Golden Rule say that we expect all colleagues and contractors to stop work if conditions
or behaviors are unsafe. We want a safe working environment for everyone!
26.2 Hazard Evaluation
1. Hazards identified shall be assessed by the field supervisor and safety supervisor, who
shall either confirm the hazard and mitigate it.
2. When the hazard has been confirmed, consensus shall be reached as to how and when
the hazards shall or can be controlled. The Safety Manager would lead this hazard
identification process.

26.3 Common Hazards
Common hazards at Construction Sites:

1. Trips slip.
2. Fall from height.
3. Fall of materials from height.
4. Electric shock.
5. Hit by speeding vehicle.
6. Hit by earth equipments.
7. Accidental actuation of tools.
8. Dust / Fumes.
9. Handling solvent, paints, thinners etc.
10. Explosives.
11. Heat / radiation.
12. Fire due to welding sparks
13. Wrong posture of work etc.
14. Toxins
15. Flying Particles
16. Radiation
26.4 Accident/Incident Investigation
A formal accident investigation must be conducted when a serious accident or near accident
occurs.
In the event of a workplace accident, injury, or illness, the most important immediate actions
are to provide medical assistance to those who may need it and to ensure the safety of others
that may be affected or acting as emergency responders.
Securing the accident scene is essential to ensure an effective accident investigation. No

materials or equipment shall be moved made until a review of the accident is completed,
except when securing equipment or materials that could result in further injury.
Obtain witnesses’ names, permanent addresses, and signed statements of their complete
factual observations. (See Exhibit 6.)
All accident investigations must be documented using the Accident Investigation Report
(Exhibit 7). All required reports should be completed and copies provided within 24 hours to
the IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. / Perstorp.
27.0 Training Program
27.1 Overview
The safety plan acknowledges the importance and benefits of training towards the success of
this program. The benefits to our employees include
1. Expanding their safety knowledge,

2. Reinforcements of the organization operational goals,
3. The reduction of accidents and incidents
4. The compliance with government laws and rules.

Different forms of trainings are made available to all employees as enlisted below
1. Introduction of work place Critical and Hazard Job Risk Assessment and Methods
Statement.
2. Permit to work system.
3. Hot Work (Welding, Grinding and Gas Cutting) and Fire Prevention.
4. Excavation.
5. Confine space.
6. Electricity / Electrocution (Lock out and Tag out.)
7. Working at Height.
8. Material Handling and Lifting Equipments.
9. First Aid Training (By Outside Agency).
10. Overriding Safety Devices
11. Line Breaking
Members of contractors and sub contractors teams, when required to perform particular tasks
or legislated activities. All training is coordinated with the employee who shall acknowledge
such training needs. Trained employees should receive acknowledgment that they have
completed such training. Site team will maintain records of all such training.
At a minimum all safety supervisors will receive CPR and basic first aid training.
27.2 Training and Orientation
Each new site employee and contractor will receive an Induction prior to starting his or her
first assignment. The contractor & sub contractor shall submit evidence of their own training
program and the training received by their employees followed by the test.
The new employee orientation topics include but are not limited to:
1. Life Saving Rules

 Safe Work Permit
 Hot Work
 LoToTo
 Working in Confined Space
 Safe Line Breaking
 Overriding Safety Devices
 Working at heights
 Hoisting & Lifting
 Safe Driving & Travelling
 No Use of alcohol & drugs
2. Company goals
3. Safety and Health Policy
4. Acceptable dress code
5. Personal Responsibility for Safety
6. Fire Prevention
7. Hand Tool Safety
8. Electrical Safety Awareness
9. Medical Facility
10. Blood borne Pathogen
11. House keeping
12. Hazard Communication

13. Emergency Response Procedures

14. Unsafe Acts
15. Injury / Near-miss Reporting Procedures
16. Lock out/ Tag out
17. Heights / Fall Protection
18. Code of Conduct
27.3 New Training Programs
The Safety Manager will use information from the site safety audits, inspections, and
recommendations to identify areas that may need additional training. The frequency of these
training sessions are based on the observations of the Audits.

27.4 Safety Training Matrix
Lock out Tag

Work Safety
Demolition
Working at
/Trenching
Excavation
Hot Work
Confined
&Tackles
Electrical
Category
/Shoring
(Snakes)
Harmful
Animal
Course
Lifting
Height
Safety
Safety
Safety
Name
Tools
Out
Taught Safety Safety Safety Electrical Safety Safety Safety Safety
External
by Engineer Engineer Engineer Engineer Engineer Engineer Engineer Engineer
Project
Manager
Construc
tion
Manager
Engineer
Safety
Manager
Supervis
or
Worker

Frequency of
Safety Training Topic Who Should Have Training
Training
Excavation / Trenching / Initial Employees in and around trenches etc.
Shoring
Working at Height Safety Initial All Employees
Electrical Safety Initial Electricians and other Electrical Workers
Confined Spaces Initial & Update Entrant / Attendant / Entry Supervisor /
Rescuer
Acetylene / Fuel Gas Safety Initial Acetylene / Fuel Gas User
Arc Welding Prior / Initial Employees Operating Equipment
Lock Out / Tag Out Initial Electricians, Maintenance, Millwrights
Authorized (j)(1) / Affected (j)(2) / All
Other Employees… (j)(3)
Demolition work Safety Initial All Employees
Harmful Animals (Snake) Initial All Employees
Medical Records, Access to Initial/Annual All Employees with medical / exposure
records
Crane / Hydra Safety Initial Mobile Crane Operator
Emergency Action Plan Initial/Update All Employees
Employee Alarm Systems Initial All Employees
Fall Protection & Working at Initial Employees 1.8 mtr meter or more above
heights floor with no guardrail
Fire Extinguisher (Portable) Initial/Annual All Employees
or other Fire Fighting
Equipment
Fire Prevention Plan Initial & Update All Employees
First Aid / CPR Initial and Employees required to provide First Aid
Biannual
Medical Records Initial/Annual All Employees with medical / exposure
records
Elevating Work Platforms Initial Users
and Aerial Devices (Scissor
Lifts, Boom Lifts)
Personal Protective Initial All Employees
Equipment
Hearing Conservation Initial/Annual Employees exposed to 85 db or above
Hearing Protection Initial Hearing Protection Users
Injury and Illness Prevention Initial All Employees
Program (IIPP)
Safety Instructions for Initial Construction Employees Exposed to
Employees Hazards
Material handling Safety Initial All Employees

28.0 Monitoring and Follow-up
28.1 Safety Performance Criteria
For monitoring the overall safety performance of the individual contractors and the site, an
Index system of marking is used at site. This is called the Spider Chart.
A spider chart is typically created to graphically show the size of the gaps among the six
organizational performance areas. The chart displays the important categories of
performance and makes visible concentrations of strengths and weaknesses.
A spider chart shows how a team has evaluated several organizational performance areas.
The investigation that feeds data to the chart should include varied perspectives to provide
an overall realistic and useful picture of performance.
The areas of the performance used to evaluate the safety index are
1. House keeping
2. Safety Documentation and Training Records
3. Material Storage
4. Unsafe Conditions
5. Unsafe Acts
6. Supervision
For the marking system, a ready reckoned matrix of the various ratings is presented as under.

28.2 Safety Radar – Reckoner
Rating
Criteria
0 1 2 3 4 5
House Material is Material is scattered, Awareness is Awareness good, Clear Awareness good, clear Clearly identified location
Keeping scattered, No clear no clear area, available, not clearly identification identification, for material storage,
area, haphazard, haphazard, indentified location, barricaded, few barricaded, no signages Description of material to
personnel are not personnel are not passage not clear materials not stacked, no be stored is displayed,
aware, repeated aware personnel wrongly personnel are ensuring
finding approaching the 100% of materials are
material for movement stacked is as per
Standards, All the
employees are aware of
where what, Walking
passage is clearly marked,
no hindrance
Safety Training which Few workers Training Records and Only for few activities Training Records and Training Records and
Documen was given not been undergone for the Safety records having Training Records Safety Reports in place Safety Reports in place
tation and understood by the training. without trainer and and Reports in place. without witness by witnessed by IPSM
Training worker. worker signature IPSM.
Records
Material Material storage is Material storage not Material Storage Material storage covers Material Storage Material storage covers all
Storage poor and the area covering all Hazards covers all Hazards all Hazards are Covers all Hazards are Hazards are adequately
was exposed to are identified adequately identified, adequately identified, identified,
hazardous inadequate recommendations recommendations recommendations
condition. precautions taken inadequate, Awareness adequate, awareness adequate, good awareness
poor need improvement
Unsafe More than 10 More than 8 finding More than 6 finding More than 4 findings More than 2 findings No unsafe condition
condition findings during the during the walk during the walk during the walk during the walk
s walk

Rating
Criteria
0 1 2 3 4 5
Unsafe More than 10 More than 8 finding More than 6 finding More than 4 finding More than 2 finding No unsafe condition
Acts finding during the during the walk during the walk during the walk during the walk
walk
Supervisi No supervisor Supervisor Supervisor present at Supervisor present at Supervisor present at Supervisor present at
on identified and indentified – but not work, not observing, work, observing, not work, observing, work, observing, conduct
present present details due to many conducting tool box conduct tool box. tool box, signature and
activities talks. Lack of Awareness Aware of process, no aware of process, Coaches
documents & mentors the team

29.0 Definitions
29.1 Accident
An unforeseen, unintended, unplanned event which causes personal injury or illness,

damage to property, damage to equipments as a result of unsafe conditions/ practices.
29.2 Control
The process of implementing measures to reduce the risk associated with a hazard. Control
measures shall be nominated in line with legislated control hierarchy, namely, Elimination,
Substitution, Engineering and Administrative/PPE.
29.3 Dangerous Occurrence
An unforeseen, unintended, unplanned event which causes damage to property, equipment

or interruption of work but not resulting in personal injury/illness, as a result of unsafe
conditions/practices.
29.4 Environment
The combined internal and external forces, both individual and collective which assist or
restrict the attainment of project objectives.
29.5 Fatal Accident
An accident leading to death of the injured person(s).
29.6 Hazard
A set of conditions which has potential of causing damage to property, injury to person, or to
environment.
29.7 Health
Soundness of Body Covering

1. Physical
2. Emotional
3. Psychological and
4. Intellectual
Conditions of a being which assist and/or restricts the attainment of project objectives.
29.8 Identification
The process of identifying any situation or event that could give rise to a potential injury,
illness or damage to plant or property.
29.9 Incident
Something occurring by chance, without intention, which interrupts the normal line of events
in process or construction activities.

29.10 Loss Time Accident
An accident resulting in an injury causing disablement extending beyond the day or shift on
which the accident occurred.
29.11 Near Miss/Near accident
An unforeseen, unintended, unplanned event, not causing any loss, injury, or illness, but
which under slightly altered conditions, can lead to accident.
CAPA Corrective action and preventive action will be taken after measuring the severity and
ensure that same ill not recur again in future.
29.12 Occupational Health
Occupational Health is that branch of medicine concerned with health problems caused by or
manifest at work. Some health problems, although not caused by the job may be aggravated
because of the occupation.
29.13 Risk
The cumulative effect of the chances of predictable/ unpredictable occurrences which will
adversely affect project objectives.
29.14 Safety
The freedom from set of conditions with the potential for leading to injury to persons,
damage to property or WORK INTERRUPTION, which affect the attainment of project
objectives.
29.15 Work Interruption
Unforeseen events leading to stoppage of work or affecting sequence of work.

30.0 Appendix – 1 Site Logistic Plan
Site Logistic Plan
This plan will be updated time to time whenever any changes made at site.
31.0 Site Emergency Plan
Site Emergency Plan is to establish procedures required as per BOCW act and OSHA
regulation. More specifically, this plan is to document how to notify occupants of a site
establish evacuation procedures and routes, provide support for persons with disabilities.
Also indicate emergency contact details, assembly points and escape routes in case of
emergency. It is also designed to identify critical equipment that may need to be shut down
and provide information to emergency services about the nature of the emergency so that a
safe and effective response may be initiated.
Please refer Annexure-I for detailed information about Site Emergency Evacuation Plan
32.0 Safety Forms and Checklists
To imbibe safety culture with all contractors and their work forces, various forms has been
developed by IPS-M. Whatever construction activities, installations, training programs,
inspections, etc. that need to be taken up at site in safe manner and to avoid any oversight, all
actions need to be recorded at right time and in right manner. To cover all such action a set
of documents that need to be used by contractors were enlisted and not limited as mentioned
in Annexture-II. Contractors will use these documents and keep record of all such actions.

Exhibits
1.0 Exhibit 1 — Contractor Safety Data Form
A. Provide Safety Performance History For Last Three Full Years
20 20 20
Number of employee hours worked
Number of fatalities
Number of cases involving days away from work
(Lost Time Cases)
Number of “other recordable cases
Total of all cases above (fatalities, days away from
work, transfers or restricted duty, and other
recordable cases, i.e., the total of Columns G, H, I,
and J)
Incidence Rate (total recordable cases x 200,000/total
work hours)
Number of citations by government and other Safety
regulatory agencies (provide details for each on a
separate sheet)
B. Safety Program
Yes No
Do you have a written hazard communication program?
Do you have a written Safety program?
When did you last update this Health and Safety Policy statement?
Do you have a written drug and alcohol abuse prevention program, which
includes pre employment, reasonable suspicion, and post incident testing?
Do you have a written respiratory protection program?
Do you have a new employee orientation program? If yes, does it contain
instructions on:
Company Health Safety Environment Policy
• Company Safety Record
• Company Safety Rules
Driving Safety
• Electrical Safety
• Fall Protection
Fire Protection
• First Aid
• Hazard Recognition
• Hazard Reporting
Hearing Conservation
• Housekeeping
Safety Meeting Attendance
• Injury Reporting

Yes No
• Ladders and Stairway Safety
Lock-out/Tag-out
Minimum Personnel Protective Equipment
Special Personnel Protective Equipment
Toxic Substances
Trenching and Excavation
Do you have a training program for newly hired or promoted first line
supervisors? If yes, does it contain instructions on:
Accident Investigation
• Emergency Procedures
• First Aid Procedures
• Hazard Recognition
• SAFETY Supervision
• Incident Reporting
New Employee Orientation
• Safe Work Practices
• Toolbox Safety Meetings
SAFETY meetings are conducted:
• Weekly
• Bi-weekly
• Monthly
Less often, as needed
• Do you have a method for reporting of unsafe acts and condition?
Do you conduct field SAFETY inspections of work in progress?
If yes, who conducts the inspections?
_____________________________________
How often?
Are accident reports circulated to your management?
Is Safety a (documented) weighted factor in evaluating in the performance of:
Foreman
• Supervisor
• Management
Does your firm hold “Toolbox” Safety Meetings? If yes, how often:
• Weekly
• Bi-weekly
Monthly
• Less often, as needed
• Do you operate a Safety Incentive Scheme?

C. Safety Staff
Number
How many full time Safety professionals do you have on staff?
How many full time industrial hygienists do you have on staff?
How many full time physicians do you have on staff?
Who is the most senior staff Safety professional at your company?

Name: Title: Phone:
Who should we contact to discuss the details of the information contained in this
document?
Name: Title: Phone:

2.0 Exhibit 2— Monthly Contractor HSE Statistics Report
FOR: __________________ (MONTH) PROJECT NAME:_________________
CONTRACTOR NAME:
Work hours for the month: __________________ Work hours Year-to-date: ______________
Number of injuries & illnesses that received treatment by a physician: _______________

Total number of Recordable injuries & illnesses: ________________________________
Number of Restricted duty cases: ________Number of Lost time (days away) cases: ______
Please list all injuries and illnesses, which have occurred to employees of your company on
the above project this month. Include accident cause, injury/illness suffered and current
disposition of injured/ill employee (i.e., returned to work, still off work, awaiting surgery,
etc.)
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
Person completing report: (print) ____________ Title: ________________
Date: _______________________ Signature: ________________
Please submit this report to IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. / PERSTORP on the above project by the
fifth (5th) of each month, for the preceding month’s work activities.

3.0 Exhibit 3 — Notice of Safety Manual Non-Compliance
To:
Site Representative for:
Your company has been found to be in non-compliance with one or more government, State,
or PERSTORP’s requirement(s), as specified below. This Safety Manual non-compliance
must be corrected immediately for your company to meet the requirements of your contract.
Applicable Safety Manual

Item No. Description of Non-compliance
Requirement
Issued By (Project Manager or Site Manager Issuing Notice):
Name Printed: Title:
Signature: Date:
Received By (Contractor Representative Receiving Notice):
Signature: Date:
CC: (1) PERSTORP

(2) Safety Representative

4.0 Exhibit 4 — Warning Letter for Safety Manual Non-Compliance
Project Name:
Project Number:
Your firm _______________________________________________________________________

has been found to be in violation of your contract by non-compliance with applicable
government, State, or PERSTORP Safety requirements.
On___________________________(date),
in accordance with the Contractor PERSTORP Safety Adherence Policy, your representative,
__________________________________________________________________,
was given a Notice of Safety Manual Non-Compliance (copy attached). This notice specifies
areas where your company does not comply with government, State, or PERSTORP Safety
Manual requirements, and requests that these items be corrected immediately.
If they are not corrected, more stringent measures will be taken in accordance with
PERSTORP Safety Adherence Policy.
Your prompt attention to this matter will be appreciated.
Issued By (Project Manager or Site Manager Issuing Warning Letter):
Signature: Date:
Received By (Contractor Representative Receiving Warning Letter):
Signature: Date:
CC: (1) PERSTORP

(2) Safety Representative

5.0 Exhibit 5 — Written Notice of Temporary Job Suspension
Your company, _______________________ while working on the _________________________

project has been notified of Safety performance deficiencies in accordance with PERSTORPs’
Contractor Safety Adherence Policy.
Despite these written notifications requesting that immediate corrective action be taken to
improve your Safety performance, improvement has not occurred.
Therefore, in accordance with Action Level Two of the Contractor Safety Adherence Policy,
we are hereby notifying you that after securing your equipment, all job activities on the
project named above are to cease.
Activities on this project may be resumed only after your company meets requirements set
forth in the Contractor Safety Adherence Policy.
Issued By:
Signature: Date:
CC: (1) PERSTORP

(2) Safety Manager

6.0 Exhibit 6 — Safety Observation Report
Date: Time: Supervisor of Observer:
Observation:
Was immediate corrective action taken? Yes No.
Describe Immediate Corrective Action:
Describe Action to Prevent Recurrence:
Describe Indirect Cause:
Lack of Training _______Lack of Belief ________ Lack of Resources___________
Describe Suggested/Recommended Corrective Action For Indirect Cause:
Observers Name Printed Signature:

Name Printed: Signature:
Name Printed: Signature:
Description and Verification of Corrective Action Taken To Address Indirect Cause:
Supervisor/Manager
Name Printed: Signature: Date Completed:

7.0 Exhibit 7 — Accident/Incident Investigation Report
1. Details
Name of person making this report: Name of injured party:
Employment status of injured party:
Company employee Agency/contract worker

Member of public Visitor to our premises
Name of the Person: Designation / Division:
Number of days absent from work due to the accident (excluding the day of the accident):
2. About the accident

Location of Accident:
Date of Incident/Accident: Time of Incident/Accident:
Description of accident (including any witness statements):
At
In normal working hours/overtime PPE worn (state type):

On employer’s premises
Following instructions
Instructions given
Outside working hours
On other private/public property
Give brief details of weather and conditions inside or outside (e.g. dry, windy, light, slippery):
Type of accident What treatment was administered?

Damage to property only First aid only
Injury accident None needed
Near miss (no damage or injury) Hospital or doctor

Accident category What do you think was the main cause of the
Burn or scald accident?
Contact with hazardous substance Don’t know
Contact with object Carelessness
Cut or puncture Faulty equipment
Electric shock Faulty procedures
Fall from heigh t Inadequate or inappropriate procedures
Slip, trip or fall on the level Lack of training, knowledge or experience
Other
Nature of personal injury (specify exact details, e.g. deep cut to forefinger, left hand):
3. Assess the risk of a similar accident happening again (after any actions have been taken)
Risk of similar accident happening again (delete as applicable):
4. Causes of the accident

What was the immediate cause of the What was the root cause of the accident?
accident?
5. Action taken to prevent a re-occurrence of the accident/incident:
Name: Safety Dept., IPS-M Signed: Date:

Incident / Accident Cause checklist
Cause Checklist
Immediate Cause
Substandard or unsafe act Substandard of unsafe condition
Improper use of protective equipment Absence of guard rails
Failure to use personal protective equipment Absence of safety guard
Using improper or defective tools, equipment, vehicles or Inadequate guarding
materials Ineffective safety guard
Using tools, equipment, vehicles or materials unsafely Safety guard not properly adjusted
Making safety devices inoperative or unsafe Faulty electrical installation
Tampering with equipment Unsafe electrical appliance
By-passing safety devices Faulty machinery
Wrong method of working or faulty operation Unsafe design or construction
Unsafe loading, placing or mixing Poor housekeeping
Improper or unsafe lifting or carrying Hazardous arrangement
Unsafe climbing Absence of safety appliance
Unsafe driving Defective safety appliance
Riding on loads, forklifts or other lifting equipment Ineffective protective equipment
Taking an unsafe position Improper clothing
Tampering with machinery in motion Defective tools
Operating without authority Unsound structure
Operating at unsafe speed Improper illumination
Working under suspended load Improper ventilation
Horseplay Unsafe place of work
Carelessness or recklessness Other unsafe condition:
Other unsafe act:
Other contributing factors
Personal factors Job factors
Lack of knowledge or skill Lack of co-ordination
Disregard of instructions No proper supervision
Act of person other than injured Inadequate engineering
Low morale Tools and equipment not appropriate
Foul play Equipment lack of maintenance
Fatigue / stress Inadequate work instruction
Physical defects Other contributing factors:

Nature of injury Part of body injured

Abrasions Head and Neck Upper Extremities Lower Extremities
Amputation Scalp Shoulder Hips
Asphyxia Skull Upper arms Thighs
Burns (Heat) Eyes Elbow Legs
Burns (Chemical) Ears Forearm Knee
Bruises and contusions Nose Wrist Ankle
Concussions and internal injuries Mouth Hand Feet
Cuts Teeth Palm Toes
Dislocation Face Fingers Others
Effects of electric current Neck Others
Effects of radiation Others
Fracture Multiple injuries
Freezing Body Multiple Injuries
Laceration Back
Multiple injuries Chest
Poisoning Abdomen
Puncture wound Pelvis
Sprains and strains Groin
Others Others
Type of Accident Agency of Accident
Machines
Lifting equipment
Struck against objects Transport equipment or vehicles
Struck by sliding, falling, flying or other moving objects Hand tools
Caught in or between objects Pressure vessels
Fall or slip on same level Furnaces, ovens, kilns
Fall to different level Electrical equipment
Overexertion Floors or level surfaces
Contact with temperature extremes Ladders
Exposure to or contact with electric current Scaffolds and staging
Exposure to or contact with harmful substances or radiation Stairs or steps
Inhalation, absorption, ingestion, poisoning Explosive or inflammable substances
Drowning Poisonous substances
Others Others

Cause Analysis
What unsafe act or conditions cause the incident?
What other factors cause the incident?
What are the deficiencies in the EHS management system?
Risk-Impact Assessment Review: Yes / No* Rev No and Date:

Action Plan
Recommended remedial / corrective / preventive action
S/No. Description of action
Review by Management
Comments below are based on the adequacy of the investigation analysis and remedial action taken to
prevent recurrence of incident.
I hereby delegate the following persons for the required action.

Name: Designation: Signature:

Follow Up Action
Person responsible for remedial action Person responsible to follow up
Name: Name:
Company: Company:
Designation: Designation:
Completion
Report on:
date:
Note:
1. The person responsible for remedial action should report to the person responsible once action is
completed.
2. The person responsible to follow up should check on the compliance by the completion date and report
to the management.
Further or additional comments and recommendations by person follow up
Report Closure
Action completed on:
Action completed by:
Followed up by:

8.0 Exhibit 8 — First Aid Register
Company: Project Name/Number:
Jobsite Location: Month / Year:
Site or Office Manager: Page of
Type of Injury, Body Part,

Date Time Name Designation Class*
andBrief Description of Injury
* Class – Classification: FAV – First Aid Visit E-1 – Doctor’s Visit R – Recordable Other:

9.0 Exhibit 9 —IPSM-Health Safety Risk Assessment Plan
Project Title Perstorp No:HSRA 101.V.0

If High risk,
Sr. No.
Consequence Persons at risk Initial risk can the Residual risk

Hazard / Aspect (1) Control measures (6)
/ Impact (2) (3) level (4) hazard be level (7)
avoided? (5)
Likelihood
Likelihood
Risk Level
Risk Level
Severity
Severity
Y/N
1) Ensure personal protective

Persons
equipment will be provided to
Penetration of sharp objects, working at site
individuals travelling to site.
1 slips, and falls while Body Injury or visiting site, 1 2 L 1 2 L
2) Also ensure that mandatory site
Walking over site Contractors and
safety awareness training is completed
clients staff
by all persons visiting to site.
Piling Work
Operation of Rig
-Improper operation of the Ensure all personnel operating the
piling Rig could cause piling Rig are qualified and deemed
serious damage to competent
Persons
equipment and serious -Banks man to be clearly visible to Rig
working at site
injury or death to personnel Major Body operative at all times
or visiting site, 3 1 M Y
-Failure of the Piling Rig Injury -piling Rig to be Operated in
Contractors and
causing Damage to property conjunction with the operator manual
clients staff
or serious injury/Death - -Banksman to be the only person to
Crushing or making contact signal the movement of the
with people working around Rig


If High risk,
Sr. No.

avoided? (5)
Rig
Persons
Ensure all excavated area is cordoned
Possible falling inside the working at site
Major Body off with signage. Also ensure not to go
2 excavated area while or visiting site, 3 1 M Y 1 1 L
Injury close to excavated areas to the extent
Walking near excavations Contractors and
possible.
clients staff
Persons Ensure that sufficient safe distance is
Falling objects or getting hit working at site kept from moving machines/
Major Body
3 by heavy material handling or visiting site, 3 1 M Y equipments. Also ensure that site safety 1 1 L
Injury
equipment. Contractors and awareness training is provided to all
clients staff persons.
1) Always maintain safe distance from
the power lines (6 meters from the line)
Vehicle 2) Restrict the movement of personnel
Major Body
operators, by cording the area
Overhead power lines and Injury,
Persons 3) Ensure to take safety guidance when
working with other electrical Electric shock
4 working at the 3 1 M Y walking under the over head power 1 1 L
accessories & their from live
area or visiting line.
connections. circuit, short
site, Contractors 4) Ensure to know the walkways of the
circuit
and clients staff site.
5) Ensure to wear suitable personal
protective equipment at site.
Hot Works at Site (Ignition Safety Welders, gas 1) Ensure hot work permits are
5 1 2 L 1 2 L
Source, Fire and Explosion, Hazards, cutters, Persons approved prior to start of work. 2)


If High risk,
Sr. No.

avoided? (5)
Heat Radiations) Minor Body working at the Operator must be certified as a
Injury area or visiting competent person for the specified job.
site, Contractors 3) Good ventilation must be provided
and clients staff in the storage area and at workplace.
4) Keep fire extinguisher near
workplace & storage area.
5) Ensure that sparks don’t fall onto the
cylinders and employees.
6) Remove combustible materials and
gas cylinders from the vicinity of
welding.
7) Drink cool drinking water
adequately.
1) Keep safe distance from the moving
Persons
vehicles2) Place maximum speed limit
working at site
Heavy vehicle movement at Major body sign boards3) Always wear high
7 or visiting site, 3 1 M Y 1 1 L
site injury visibility clothing (Reflective Jacket)4)
Contractors and
Provide safety induction training & tool
clients staff
box talks to drivers
1)Supervisor to ensure that the storage
Persons
Hand and Spray Painting and handling is as per MSDS.
involved and
a) Inhalation of toxic fumes/ Health 2) Employees to be informed about the
working at the
8 spray. hazards/ 3 1 M Y hazards associated with the storage and 1 1 L
area or visiting
b) Fire due to presence of Burns use of material and its control measures
site, Contractors
flammable material. in case of exposure or contact with the
and clients staff
material.


If High risk,
Sr. No.

avoided? (5)
1) Use PPE to avoid any slips and trips
from platforms.
Injury to all
Working on Platforms Persons 2) Platforms to be inspected and
9 parts of the 3 1 M Y 1 1 L
(a) Trips and falls working at site certified after erection.
body
3) Use safety belts for working above 3
meters height from ground.
1) Ensure anchor point is secure and
can hold the weight. Ensure the work
Persons permit.
working at 2) Ensure all safety belt shoul anchor to
Falls, Major
10 Work at height height, Persons 3 1 M Y anchor points. If there is no place to 1 1 L
body injury
Working on hook s safety belt- a lifeline must be
scaffold used.
4) Barricade and cover all openings to
avoid unnecessary incidents
Getting hit by moving parts Persons
Check that the proper fencing is
11 of machineries (such as Body Injury working at the 2 1 L 1 1 L
provided.
Grinding machines, motors) area, visitors
Preparation and pouring of 1) Wear close fitting clothings to avoid
Persons
concrete and erection of Health body contact
12 involved, 3 1 M Y 2 1 L
concrete structures (Dust hazards 2) Use PPE's such as gloves, safety
working at site
inhalation) shoes, and nose mask.
1) Calibration certificate of the tool and
Persons
Major body tackle to be obtained. 2) Supervisor to
13 Erections of equipments involved, 3 1 M Y 1 1 L
injury check the installation arrangements
working at site
before its use. 3) All workers to be


If High risk,
Sr. No.

avoided? (5)
inducted in the safe working
procedures.
1) Lift, keeping the back straight, arms
close to body, leg muscles taking the
Persons strain.
14 Manual Handling Body Injury involved at 1 2 L 2) Wear safety boots or shoes to protect 1 1 L
work toes from falling loads.
3) Do not attempt to lift alone any load
that is too heavy, too large or awkward.
1) Guy ropes will be used to control the
excess swing of material while lifting &
placing it over the trailer.
2) Only certified lifting tools and tackles
will be used for the work.
3) SWL capacity marked on the slings /
Erection of roof sheeting ( tackles must always be greater than the
Persons
Shifting of Precoated plate to load being lifted.
Major body involved and
15 the location from store. 3 1 M Y 4) The entire J hook will be carried in 1 1 L
injury working at the
Placing of sheets and fixing bag to avoid falling of same from
area
of same by J Hook) height.
5) Workmen working for sheet fixing
will tie their lanyards to the hook of fall
arrestor.
6) All the workmen will be briefed
regarding the Hazards associated with
the job and preventive / Precautionary


If High risk,
Sr. No.

avoided? (5)
measures.
1) Use all Mandatory PPE. Before
starting the job house keeping must be
done and make safer approach for
work. Area should be barricaded.
Persons
CONCRETING USING 2) Use Rubber gloves and boots. Avoid
involved and
17 PUMP (Reinforcement Body Injury 1 2 L skin contact. Equipment to be 1 1 L
working at the
fixing. Concreting.) connected with ELCB of 30 ma. One
area, visitors
helper shall escort the mixer machine
inside the plant site. Dont put limbs
between any moving part of concrete
pump.
1) Plan the work involving personnel

responsible for preparation (Inside shell
Confined Space ( Pre Entry:
welding, grinding and gas cutting) of
Lack of Communication.
confined space.
Flammable & / or Toxic
Persons 2) Ensure the confined space is flushed,
Atmosphere. Lack of Major body
18 involved at 3 1 M Y purged and thoroughly ventilated as 1 1 L
Oxygen. Entry: Dark / injury
work required.
Insufficient Illumination.
3) Ensure the confined space is free
Fire & Explosion. Heat &
from any flammable / toxic atmosphere
Humid.)
and has sufficient oxygen for normal
breathing.


If High risk,
Sr. No.

avoided? (5)
4) Obtain the work permit
5)Ensure safe illumination suitable to
hazardous area classification.
6) Ensure the work to be carried out
inside the Confined Space fulfill the
Permit to Work requirement for the
type of work.
7) Ensure sufficient ventilation and air
circulation inside confined space.
Provide periodic break / rest to the
entrant.
1) Use Proper PPE’s including hand
gloves or carefully handling of rebar.
Experience man handling the rebar.
Before worker marching become rebar’s
proper gripping to be ensure. Before
Reinforcement positioning starting the job ensure proper
Persons
and shuttering (Handling of Housekeeping.
involved and
19 Rebar’s (Manually). Fixing / Body Injury 1 2 L 2) Bench type cutting or slope cutting 1 1 L
working at the
Tying of rebar’s in trench. should be done and excavated soil
area
Shuttering.) should be kept 1.0 m away from the
edge. Unwanted material to be
removed and proper ppe’s would be
used. Keep away from the excavated
area. Area should be properly
Barricaded.


If High risk,
Sr. No.

avoided? (5)
3) Shuttering material properly to be
stacked and rod, wire & nail will be
properly bend or covered. Proper
stacking of shuttering material. Used D-
Shuttering material or oil to be kept
properly. House keeping must be
ensure, Trained bar bender / fitter to be
only done the job. Proper lighting to be
provided.
1) Unoading need to be done by hydra
only. Also required to stack in unique
manner.
2) Method statement to be submitted
and followed the same procedure.
Persons
3) Hydra operator should be competent
Pre-cast Column and Panel involved in the
person.
20 errection for compound Body Injury activity. And 1 3 M 1 1 L
4) Ensure all the lifting tools and tackles
wall. hydra operator,
should have third party certificate.
supervisor
5) Only one column to be lifted and
placed inside the pit and concreting to
be done immediately. 6) Panels to be
lifted one by one and placed
accordingly with proper bounding.
Guidelines on how to complete the HSRA


If High risk,
Sr. No.

avoided? (5)
1. Record the hazard or aspect, e.g. exposure to noise, entering
a confined space, etc
2. Identify the worst-case effect of the hazard
3. Identify who could be affected by the risk, e.g. Project Team, Sub-consultants/contractors,
Members of the public, etc
4. Evaluate the level of risk for each hazard, by identifying its severity of harm and likelihood, using the risk matrix shown below
5. Ascertain if high risk, can hazard be
avoided?
6. Identify control measures, noting that each hazard may require more than one control measure in order to reduce the level of risk to an
acceptable level
7. Evaluate the level of risk for each hazard, taking into account the
effect of the control measure(s)
8. Identify who is responsible for implementing or ensuring that the control
measures have been implemented
9. Record the date the actions completed or
due

Severity of Harm Likelihood Risk Level

Probability
Severity Probability Index
Index Index Severity
Index 1 2 3
Death or major injury 3 Harm is certain or near certain to occur 3 1 L L M
Lost time injury or illness 2 Harm is likely to occur 2 2 L M H
All other injuries or
illnesses 1 Harm is unlikely 1 3 M H H

10.0 Exhibit 10 — Life Saving Rules
•End of Document•

Compressor
Appendix 4: Form of pre bid queries
Pre bid queries
Sr. Bidders
Tender Document Reference Subject
No Query
1. Part No. Page No. Clause No.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Appendix 5: Overview of the bid contents
Vendor to submit the bids in reference with Clause 5.00 of this Instructions to Bidders and
confirm as per below:
Part Description Bidder To Confirm
A Commercial Documents
Corporate presentation mapping technical and financial
a
capability
b Balance sheet ,P & L statement
c Average last three years turn over
d Equity/ Net worth
e Solvency Certificate
f Power Of Attorney
g Vendors Declaration
Presentation for management systems including QA, risk
h
control and document/data management systems
Technical Bid along with methodology, value engineering
B
unpriced bill of material
C Priced Bill of Material and unit rates
Submission Forms ( Administrative & Organizational Forms)
D
Exhibits A & D
Note: - Incomplete Bid shall not be evaluated
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Appendix 6: Form of binding bid letter
To,
M/s. IPS-Mehtalia Pvt Ltd
Subject::Supply of Thermo Vapour Re Compressor ( TVR ) for the proposed project for M/s.
Perstorp Industries Pvt Ltd at Saykha Village, Dahej, Gujrat.
Dear Sir,
1. Having examined the RFQ Documents and other documents forming part of the RFQ
Documents by virtue of their specific or implied mention in these documents for the
column internals, we offer to supply the column internals in conformity with the said
RFQ Documents.
2. We hereby represent that we have gone through and understood the RFQ Documents
and our Binding Bid has been prepared accordingly in compliance with the requirements
stipulated in the RFQ Documents and consist of Parts A through D enclosed hereto as
requested in the Instructions to Bidders.
3. We undertake to complete and deliver the whole of the Scope Of Supply comprised in the
RFQ Documents within the time stated in the Appendix hereto.
4. If the RFQ Documents are executed, we will, when required, obtain the guarantees from a
Bank (to be approved by you) to be jointly and severally bound with us in the said name
in the Appendix hereto for the due performance of the Contract Documents. Further, we
will obtain and keep in force during the currency of this Purchase Order, Vendor’s all
insurance policies as set out under the RFQ Documents from an Insurance company
approved by you (unless you decide to arrange a joint Project insurance programme
naming us additional insured for loss or damage to the Works or liability to third parties
in the course of implementing the Works in which case our insurance obligations will be
correspondingly reduced).
5. We and our employees, directors, officers, sub vendors, representative and agents, have
at all times been in compliance with all applicable anti – corruption and anti – monetary
laundering laws and will not undertake any actions pursuant to the Bid or in the
performance of the RFQ Documents (if so executed by such Bidder) which will violate
such laws.
6. We also understand that no contract / agreement is formed between us and the Owner /
Owner’s Representative until and unless RFQ Documents are executed between the
Owner and us and no legal obligations and rights are created between us and the Owner
/ Owner’s Representative by virtue of the Instruction to Bidders and submission of this
form / or any other oral or written exchanges between us and the Owner / Owner’s
Representative.
7. We agree to execute this work following all safety & HSE norms laid down by
IPSM/PERSTORP.
8. We understand that you are not bound to entertain / evaluate / consider the lowest or
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
any other Bid you may receive and that our quoted price/rates remain unchanged in case
the contract is split.
9. We agree to submit the complete bid documents listed in Bid Cover Letter within the bid
submission date.
Dated this ________________ day of ____________________ 2019
Signature with rubber stamp in the capacity of…
Duly authorized to sign Bids for and on behalf of
(IN BLOCK CAPITALS)
Witness:
Signature __________________________ Address of ________________________
Name ______________________ Bidder _______________________
Occupation __________________________
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Appendix 7: Deviations and exceptions
This has reference to the RFQ for subject item. We hereby confirm our acceptance to all the
Terms and Conditions as specified in the RFQ documents including all the enclosures except
for the following:
Sl. Supplier’s
Document Name Page No. Clause No. Subject
No Deviation
Note:-
1. If unavoidable, bidder may stipulate deviations to requirement of bid documents strictly

in this format and enclosed with Technical Unpriced Bid.
2. Any deviations not brought out in this format and mentioned elsewhere in the bid shall
not be recognized and the same shall be treated as null and void.
3. Technical deviations to be submitted in Appendix – I of RFQ documents & Commercial

Deviations should be submitted in this format.
4. Suppliers own terms and conditions, if any, mentioned elsewhere in the bid shall not be
recognized and the same shall be treated as null and void.
5. Please note that deviations, if any, taken by you to the RFQ Commercial Terms &
Conditions shall result in either loading of prices or rejection of the offer.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit A: Presentation of the Bidder
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit A1: Similar scope of supply experience
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit A2: Audited financial statements
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit A3: Turn over
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit A4: Equity/ net worth
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit A5: Solvency certificate
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit A6: Power of Attorney
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit A7: Bidder’s declaration
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit A8: Management System (QMS,RISK,DMS)
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit B: Technical offer
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit B1: Description of manufacturing methods
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit B2: Value engineering proposals
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit C: Financial Offer
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit C1: Priced Bill Of Material
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
IPS-Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. Client Perstorp
B101-109 First Floor, Kailash Vaibhab Industrial Complex, Park Site, Vikhroli (W), Mumbai 400 079 Chkd / App MY / NV
Document Title Bill Of Material for Thermo Vapour Re Compressor Rev 0
Document No. IPS-MBD18019-ME-394 Date 30-Sep-19
Bill Of Material For Thermo Vapour Re Compressor ( TVR )

All Figures are in INR
Sr. No. Item Description / Tag Nos. Tag Nos. Unit Qty. Unit Price Total Price Remark
(Rs.) (Rs.)
Supply of Thermo Vapour Re Compressor as per Project Technical
A. Specifications No. IPS-MBD18019-ME-394-40KTPA-DE-Specifications
for Thermo Vapour Re Compressor( E-3021 ) - Rev. 4
1 Thermo Vapour Re Compressor E-3021 No. 1
2 Storage of Materials for 6 months after agreed delivery date, if required. NA Month 6
3 Supply of Mandatory spares (Use SPIR Format Document) Lot Lot

Recommended O&M spares for 2 years normal operation with their unit
4 Lot Lot
rates and quantities (Use SPIR Format Document)
Start up and Commissioning Spare Parts, if any (Use SPIR Format
5 Lot Lot
Document)
Basic price for A 0.00
Add GST ( SGST/CGST/IGST) @ 18 %
Total price for A
B Packing,Fowarding and Transportation
1 Packing, Forwarding & Loading charges Lot
2 Local Tranportataion ( BY PERSTORP ) Lot
3 Transit Insurance ( BY PERSTORP ) Lot
4 Add GST ( SGST/CGST/IGST) @ 18 % Lot
Total Price For B 0.00
Total Price A+B 0.00
C For Import Materials
1 Local port handeling charges -Import Lot
2 FOB (Free On Board)-Import Lumpsum
3 Sea Freight +Insurance -Import Lot
4 Landing charges +Custom Duty +Special Duty +IGST - Import Lumpsum
5 Landed Cost- Import Lot
6 Inland tranportataion Lot
7 Transit Insurance Lot
Total Cost for C 0.00
D. Supervision & Commissioining services
Per Diem rate for Supervision of Installation/Erection, Testing &
Commissioning at site which includes travel,local conveyance,lodging
1 ,boarding& insurance charges of Engineer) (Requirement for total number
of days shall be mutually discussed and agreed at the time of Techno-
commercial negotiation)
3 Any other applicable Taxes/Duites (please specify if any) - -
Total Cost for D 0.00
E Final Documentation
1 Final Documentation as per Project Technical Specifications Lot

Total Cost for E 0.00
F Grand Total Amount(A+B+C+D+E)
IPS - Mehtalia Pvt. Ltd. Client PERSTORP
B101-109 First Floor, Kailash Vaibhav Industrial Complex, Park Site, Vikhroli (W), Mumbai 400 079
Document Title SPIR FORM DOCUMEMT
##
SPIR FORM DOCUMENT
SPARE PARTS AND INTERCHANGEABILITY RECORD SPARE PARTS ORDER Nr. 19 P.O. NO.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USERS EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 20
EQUIPMENT Nr.
(TAG ITEM Nr.)
A - RETURN THE ORIGINAL SPIR SHEETS TOGETHER WITH: EQUIPMENT MFRC. 21
- LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL STATING TERMS AND CONDITIONS, FCA OR F.O.B. POINT AND PRICE VALIDITY
- SECTIONAL DRAWINGS AND LIST OF PARTS SHOWING ALL PARTS NAMED IN COL. 8 FOR PROPER INDENTIFICATION
B - THIS FORM SERVES AS A PERMANENT PROJECT RECORD. USE THE XLS TEMPLATE FORM TO FILL THIS LIST.
C - TO FILL THE SPIR FORM IN THE RIGHT WAY PLEASE REFER TO DOCUMENT 3710-ZZ-PC-002A - FILLING OF SPIR FORM PROCEDURE
1
MANUFACT
18
MODEL Nr.
NAME :
URER'S
ADDRESS :
SUPPLIER NAME
TELEPHONE : 22 PREPARED BY 23 PHONE 24 QUOTATION Nr. 25 DATE
AND ADDRESS
E-MAIL :
2
START UP AND
COMMISSIONING /
MANUFACTURER'S PART
MATERIAL (CHECK 1) ERECTION AND CAPITAL SPARE PARTS TWO YEARS SPARE PARTS TOTAL PRICE
SHIPMENT WEEKS
SERIAL Nr.
TOTAL Nr. OF IDENTICAL
CONSTRUCTION SPARE
SECTIONAL
*NOTES (26)
PARTS
PARTS ON THIS SPIR
NUMBER
DRAWING AND PART
UNIT OF MEASURE
SUB-SUPPLIER NAME (IF
RECOMMENDED
RECOMMENDED
RECOMMENDED
RECOMMENDED
DESCRIPTION OF PART REFERENCE ASTM ANY)
UNIT PRICE
APPROVED
APPROVED
APPROVED
APPROVED
NUMBERS (ATTACH
TO SPIR)
JIS
DIN
3
Nr. OF 13 A 13 B 13 C 16 17
4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 6A 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15
UNITS
A
5 ITEM Nr. OTHER DESCRIPTION / COMMENTS 29 SUB-TOTAL THIS PAGE

EQUIPMENT P.O.
30 GRAND TOTAL
(MFRC. ORDER
*NOTES
31 CHECKED BY
AND
Nr.)
27-REV. 32 SHEET OF
34-SUPPLIER SIGNATURE 35-CLIENT/OWNER SIGNATURE
6
28-DATE 33 SPIR Nr.:
26
Compressor
Exhibit C2: List of Unit rates
Not Applicable
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit D: Adm. and org. info
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit D1: Details of present commitments
Name and Date of Expected

Sr. Type of Value of Schedule %
Address Commencement Date of
No. Work Contract Completion Completion
of Client of Work Completion
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit D2: Details of past performance
Date of
Sr. Name of Type of Value of
Commencement Date of Completion Remarks
No. Client Work Contract
of work
Contractual Actual
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit D3: Proposed safety requirements with HSE Statistics
The Bidder shall follow all safety rules and shall strictly adhere to all kinds of safety
precautions to safeguard against the mishap and damage to the men; material and machinery
while carrying out work in the plant site.
The Bidder shall follow and practice without any prejudice, all the guidelines given in the
“Safety Manual”, “Perstorp Responsible Care Minimum Requirements”, as amended from
time to time (subject to variation order in case any amendment thereof causes changes to
approved drawings or other engineering documents), together with Indian laws, codes, and
Good Engineering Practice and EHS Guidelines provided to us. The Bidder shall not be
allowed to use / bring “Asbestos” in any form even for temporary structures or any use of it
within the project premises.
The Bidder shall take responsibility to keep project site “Free of Asbestos” all through the
project duration.
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0
Compressor
Exhibit D4: Proposed Production program
IPS-TC-FMT-03-V1.0

394 - RFQ Document - Thermo Vapour Re Compressor - R0 PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

394 - RFQ Document - Thermo Vapour Re Compressor - R0 PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

IPS-MEHTALIA PVT. LTD.

Consulting Engineers • Construction Management • Commissioning & Qualification

DO CU ME NT N O. IPS -M B D 18 019 - M E- 394

THERMO VAPOUR RE COMPRESSOR

0 Sept 30,19 Issued For Enquiry PC SS MY

The Owner has appointed IPS-Mehtalia Private Limited (“IPS-Mehtalia”) as “Owner’s

1.1 The Project Details and Location are Provided Below

1. Client / Owner : Perstorp Industries India Private Ltd

10. Max. wet bulb temperature : 28.33 ºC

1.2 Broad Scope

1.3 Permit Status of the Project

(i) Plot possession from GIDC.

(i) Construction power

1.4 Structure of the Purchase Order Documents

2.0 Narrative Description of the Purchase Order Documents

2.2 Brief Description of the Purchase Order Documents

(a) Purchase Order

(b) Scope of Supply with technical requirements :

(c) Special Conditions:

(d) General Conditions of Purchase :-

termination provisions, dispute resolution etc.

(e) Bill Of Material:

(f) Delivery Schedule with dispatch instructions

Delivery Schedule shall include delivery milestones including drawings/documents

(g) Drawings and Documents –

(h) Codes and Standards:

practices and which contain mandatory requirements for Equipment.

(i) Safety Manual

2.3 Clarification / Amendments

1. The amendment / clarifications above shall be deemed to be part of these Instructions to

3.0 The Request for Quotation Process

(a) Pre-bid meetings -Not Applicable

(b) Binding Bids submission by Date - __16-10-2019________ Time - __5.00 PM__________;

4.0 Site Location

4.7 If the existence of such an undisclosed arrangement is reasonably apprehended by the

5.0 Contents of the Binding Bid

5.1 Part A – Corporate and financial status

(d) Exhibit A4 :-Equity/Net worth for year 2018-19;

5.2 Part B -Technical offer

5.3 Part C –Financial Offer

5.4 Part D –Administrative and organisational information

(a) Exhibit D1: Details of present commitments

6.0 Submission of the Binding Bid

shall all be submitted by email to the Owner’s Representative’s designated representative as

Kind Attn : Mr. Naveen Virmani

6.2 Deadlines for submission of Bids

6.3 Late Bids:

7.0 Status of Binding Bids

7.2 Arithmetical errors will be rectified on the following basis:

total price per item will be corrected.

8.0 Evaluation and Comparison of Bids

8.2 The evaluation will be based on fairness, non-discrimination and impartiality.

8.7 Requirement of submission of analysis of the inconsistencies / discrepancies as envisaged

9.0 Rules for Participation and Disclaimer

10.0 Preservation of Owner’s Rights

12.0 Intellectual Property Rights

Appendix 1 – Perstorp Vendor Policy

Exhibit C1 – Bill Of Material

Appendix 1: Perstorp Vendor Policy

1. Our business principles

Open & honest communication

Perstorp encourages continuous communication with the company’s various interested

Accounting & reporting

(b) Binding Bids submission by Date - 16-10-2019 Time - 5.00 PM______;

Date (“Effective Date”) PO No._________